성경 읽기

American Standard Version 1901 · 요한복음 7장

본문 이동

American Standard Version 1901 · 요한복음 7장

구약

검색

본문 검색

원어 검색 Strong · lemma · 뜻

버전 범위

본문 범위

설정

보기 옵션

화면 테마

글자 크기

글꼴

원어 보기

원어 검색 열기

주석 보기

이미지

색상 의미

본문의 색상 표시는 주석 제작자가 정의한 해석 흐름입니다.

색상 의미

기본 주석의 색상 정의입니다.

색상 의미 전체 그림

하나님/선

하나님, 성령의 가르침, 진리, 생명, 빛, 율법(계명), 좁은 길, 하나님 나라, 영생 등

하나님으로부터 오는 진리와 생명의 방향성을 의미합니다. 성경에서 하나님, 말씀, 진리, 생명, 빛, 지혜, 하나님 나라 등은 서로 연결된 본질과 방향성을 나타내는 표현들로 설명됩니다. 성경은 이러한 요소들을 단순히 분리된 개념으로만 설명하지 않고, 서로 연결된 하나의 흐름과 방향성으로 표현합니다. 예를 들어: 진리는 생명과 연결되며 빛은 하나님께 속한 길로 표현되고 말씀에 순종하는 것은 하나님 나라에 속한 삶으로 설명됩니다. 따라서 이 색상은 하나님께 속한 진리와 생명의 방향성과 질서를 나타내는 표현들을 포함합니다.

사탄/악

사탄, 더러운 영들의 가르침, 거짓, 사망, 어둠, 불법, 넓은 길, 어둠의 권세, 멸망

하나님을 대적하는 거짓과 사망의 방향성을 의미합니다. 성경은 사탄, 거짓, 미혹, 어둠, 사망, 불법, 세상 권세 등을 단순히 분리된 개념으로만 설명하지 않고, 서로 연결된 하나의 방향성과 본질로 묘사합니다. 인간은 이를 존재, 거짓된 가르침, 속성, 결과, 지배 체계 등으로 구분하여 인식하지만, 성경은 이러한 요소들을 서로 연결된 의미로 표현합니다. 예를 들어: 거짓은 사탄에게 속한 것으로 표현되며 어둠은 사망과 연결되고 불법은 하나님을 대적하는 길로 설명되며 세상 권세는 미혹과 멸망의 체계로 묘사됩니다. 따라서 이 색상은 하나님을 거스르는 방향성과 질서를 따르는 표현들을 포함합니다.

선을 따르는 사람

그리스도인, 순종하는 자들, 하나님의 백성, 알곡, 제자, 의인, 빛의 자녀, 진리를 따르는 자들, 생명의 길을 걷는 자들, 선한 양심 등

본문의 인물이나 공동체를 선을 따르는 사람의 관점에서 해석할 때 사용합니다. 이 색상은 인물 전체에 대한 최종 판정이 아니라, 해당 구절에서 드러나는 방향성이 하나님께 속한 진리, 생명, 빛, 순종의 흐름으로 읽히는 경우를 표시합니다. 같은 인물이라도 다른 문맥에서는 연약함이나 세상성을 드러낼 수 있으므로, 파란색은 영구 신분표가 아니라 본문 단위의 해석 관점입니다. 특히 어떤 구절은 파란색 관점과 녹색 관점이 모두 가능할 수 있으며, 그런 경우에는 청녹색의 양면 관점으로 표시할 수 있습니다.

양면 관점

파란색 관점도 가능, 녹색 관점도 가능, 해석 관점 병존, 선한 방향의 연약함, 세상성이나 육신성의 모습, 문맥상 양면 해석

같은 구절이나 표현을 파란색 관점과 녹색 관점 모두로 해석할 수 있을 때 사용합니다. 이는 의미 자체가 불명확하다는 뜻이 아니라, 본문을 바라보는 관점에 따라 선을 따르는 사람의 연약함으로도, 세상성이나 육신을 따르는 모습으로도 읽힐 수 있음을 나타냅니다. 따라서 청녹색은 별도의 사람 분류나 최종 판정이 아닙니다. 해석자가 실제로 파란색으로 표시할지 녹색으로 표시할지 고민하게 되는 지점, 두 관점이 병존하는 지점을 표시합니다. 예를 들어 믿음의 방향은 선을 향하지만 본문에서는 육신적 연약함이 두드러지는 경우, 또는 한 표현이 선한 양심의 흔들림으로도 세상성의 작용으로도 읽히는 경우에 사용할 수 있습니다.

세상을 따르는 사람

악인, 불순종하는 자들, 세상의 백성, 가라지, 미혹된 자들, 어둠에 속한 자들, 육신을 따르는 자들, 거짓을 따르는 자들, 넓은 길을 걷는 자들, 악한 양심 등

본문의 인물이나 공동체를 세상, 육신, 불순종의 방향을 따르는 관점에서 해석할 때 사용합니다. 이 색상은 인물 전체를 단정하기 위한 표시가 아니라, 해당 구절에서 드러나는 방향성이 거짓, 어둠, 욕망, 불법, 세상 권세의 흐름으로 읽히는 경우를 표시합니다. 같은 인물이나 같은 표현이라도 문맥에 따라 선을 따르는 사람의 연약함으로 읽힐 수도 있고, 세상성을 따르는 모습으로 읽힐 수도 있습니다. 그런 경우에는 녹색으로 확정하기보다 청녹색의 양면 관점으로 표시할 수 있습니다. 따라서 녹색은 파란색의 반대편 관점을 나타내지만, 모든 연약함을 곧바로 악으로 단정하는 색상은 아닙니다.

중립

지명, 시간, 역사적 사건, 일반 명사, 배경 정보, 상황 설명, 기록적 표현, 문맥 연결 요소, 선악 의미를 직접 부여하지 않는 인물/민족 표현 등

선과 악의 축과 직접 관련 없는 중립적 의미를 나타냅니다. 성경에는 선과 악의 방향성을 직접 나타내기보다, 단순한 배경 정보나 역사적 사실, 일반적인 표현 등으로 사용되는 요소들도 존재합니다. 인간은 이를 지명, 시간, 역사적 사건, 일반 명사, 단순 상황 설명 등으로 구분하여 인식하며, 이러한 표현들은 문맥 설명을 위한 역할로 사용됩니다. 또한 문맥상 선과 악의 의미를 직접 부여하지 않는 경우에는, 특정 인물이나 민족을 설명하는 표현도 중립적으로 사용될 수 있습니다. 예를 들어: 특정 지역이나 시대를 설명하는 표현이 사용되기도 하며 선과 악의 의미를 직접 포함하지 않는 일반적인 사물이나 상황이 묘사되기도 하고 단순한 배경 정보나 역사적 흐름을 설명하는 표현으로 사용되기도 합니다. 또한 문맥에 따라 "이방인", "유대인", "로마인" 등의 표현 역시 선악의 의미를 직접 나타내지 않는 경우에는 중립적으로 사용될 수 있습니다. 따라서 이 색상은 선과 악의 방향성을 직접 나타내지 않는 중립적 표현들을 포함합니다.

And after these things Jesus walked in Galilee: for he would not walk in Judaea, because the Jews sought to kill him.

원어

Καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

Kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετὰ

한글 발음: 메타

meta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῦτα

한글 발음: 타우타

tauta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-APN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περιεπάτει

한글 발음: 페리에파테이

periepatei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4043 원어 검색에서 보기 G4043
Lemma
περιπατέω
Strong
G4043
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
걷다/행하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '걷다, 다니다, 행하다(살다)'.

원문 정의 보기

περι-πατέω, -ῶ [in LXX chiefly for הָלַךְ pi., hith. ;] to walk: absol., Mat.9:5, Mrk.5:42, Luk.5:23, Jhn.1:36; with pred., γυμνός, Rev.16:15; ἐπάνω Luk.11:44; διά, with genitive, Rev.21:24; ἐν, Mrk.11:27 12:38, Jhn.7:1 11:54, Rev.2:1, al.; ἐν τ. σκοτίᾳ, figuratively, Jhn.8:12 12:35, 1Jn.1:6-7 Jn 2:11; ἐπί, with genitive, Mat.14:26; id. with dative, Mat.14:25, 29; μετά, Jhn.6:66, Rev.3:4; παρά, with accusative, Mat.4:18. Metaphorical, of living, passing one's life, conducting oneself (like ἀναστρέφομαι in Xen., Plut., LXX, π.; M, Pro.11:1-31; Deiss., BS, 194) : ἀκριβῶς, Eph.5:15; ἀτάκτως, 2Th.3:6 3:11; εὐσχημόνως, Rev.13:13, 1Th.4:12; ἀξίως, with genitive, Eph.4:1, Col.1:10, 1Th.2:12; καθώς (ὥς), Eph.4:17 5:8, 15, Php.3:17, 1Th.4:1; οὕτως ὥς, 1Co.7:17; before nom. qual., Php.3:18; with dative, Act.21:21, Rom.13:13, 2Co.12:18, Gal.5:16; before ἐν, Rom.6:4, 2Co.4:2 5:7 10:3, Eph.2:2, 10 4:17 5:2, Col.3:7 4:5, Heb.13:9, 2Jn.4 Jn 6, al.; ἐν Χριστῷ, Col.2:6; κατά, with accusative, Mrk.7:5, Rom.8:4 14:15, 1Co.3:3, 2Co.10:2, 2Jn.6 (cf. ἐν-περιπατέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Γαλιλαίᾳ·

한글 발음: 갈릴라이아

Galilaia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1056 원어 검색에서 보기 G1056
Lemma
Γαλιλαία
Strong
G1056
형태소
N-DSF-L
품사
명사
갈릴리
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '갈릴리'.

원문 정의 보기

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district), Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mat.4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mat.15:29 (cf. Jhn.6:1). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γὰρ

한글 발음: 가르

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἤθελεν

한글 발음: 에텔렌

ēthelen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2309 원어 검색에서 보기 G2309
Lemma
θέλω
Strong
G2309
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
원하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '원하다, 바라다, ~하려 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαίᾳ

한글 발음: 이우다이아

Ioudaia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2449 원어 검색에서 보기 G2449
Lemma
Ἰουδαία
Strong
G2449
형태소
N-DSF-L
품사
명사
유대(지방)
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '유대 (지방)'.

원문 정의 보기

§ Judea, Judean, "land of the Judahites" Judea, the southern party of the country, below Samaria, Mt. 2:1, 5, 22; 3:1; metonymy the inhabitants of Judea

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περιπατεῖν,

한글 발음: 페리파테인

peripatein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4043 원어 검색에서 보기 G4043
Lemma
περιπατέω
Strong
G4043
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
걷다/행하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '걷다, 다니다, 행하다(살다)'.

원문 정의 보기

περι-πατέω, -ῶ [in LXX chiefly for הָלַךְ pi., hith. ;] to walk: absol., Mat.9:5, Mrk.5:42, Luk.5:23, Jhn.1:36; with pred., γυμνός, Rev.16:15; ἐπάνω Luk.11:44; διά, with genitive, Rev.21:24; ἐν, Mrk.11:27 12:38, Jhn.7:1 11:54, Rev.2:1, al.; ἐν τ. σκοτίᾳ, figuratively, Jhn.8:12 12:35, 1Jn.1:6-7 Jn 2:11; ἐπί, with genitive, Mat.14:26; id. with dative, Mat.14:25, 29; μετά, Jhn.6:66, Rev.3:4; παρά, with accusative, Mat.4:18. Metaphorical, of living, passing one's life, conducting oneself (like ἀναστρέφομαι in Xen., Plut., LXX, π.; M, Pro.11:1-31; Deiss., BS, 194) : ἀκριβῶς, Eph.5:15; ἀτάκτως, 2Th.3:6 3:11; εὐσχημόνως, Rev.13:13, 1Th.4:12; ἀξίως, with genitive, Eph.4:1, Col.1:10, 1Th.2:12; καθώς (ὥς), Eph.4:17 5:8, 15, Php.3:17, 1Th.4:1; οὕτως ὥς, 1Co.7:17; before nom. qual., Php.3:18; with dative, Act.21:21, Rom.13:13, 2Co.12:18, Gal.5:16; before ἐν, Rom.6:4, 2Co.4:2 5:7 10:3, Eph.2:2, 10 4:17 5:2, Col.3:7 4:5, Heb.13:9, 2Jn.4 Jn 6, al.; ἐν Χριστῷ, Col.2:6; κατά, with accusative, Mrk.7:5, Rom.8:4 14:15, 1Co.3:3, 2Co.10:2, 2Jn.6 (cf. ἐν-περιπατέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐζήτουν

한글 발음: 에제툰

ezētoun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαῖοι

한글 발음: 이우다이오이

Ioudaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-NPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποκτεῖναι.

한글 발음: 아폭테이나이

apokteinai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Now the feast of the Jews, the feast of tabernacles, was at hand.

원어

ἦν

한글 발음: 엔

ēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγγὺς

한글 발음: 엥귀스

engus

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1451 원어 검색에서 보기 G1451
Lemma
ἐγγύς
Strong
G1451
형태소
PREP
품사
-
가까이
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '가까이, 가까운'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγγύς, adv., [in LXX chiefly for קָרוֹב ;] near; __1. of place: Jhn.19:20, 42; as prep. with genitive (M, Pr., 99), Luk.19:11, Jhn.3:23 6:19, 23 11:18, 54, Act.1:12; with dative, Act.9:38 27:8; superl., ἔγγιστα, Mrk.6:36, WH, mg.; metaphorically, ֹοἱ ἐ., opposite to οἱ μακράν, Eph.2:17; ἐ. γίνεσθαι, Eph.2:13; ἐ. σου τὸ ῥῆμα, Rom.10:8 (LXX). __2. Of time: Mat.24:32 26:18, Mrk.13:28, 29 Luk.21:30, 31 Jhn.2:13 6:4 7:2 11:55, Rev.1:3 22:10; ὁ κύριος ἐ., Php.4:5; before ἐπὶ θύραις, Mat.24:33; compar., ἐγγύτερον (neut. of adj. -ος, used adverbially), Rom.13:11 (cf. R, txt.); as prep. with genitive, ἐ. κατάρας, Heb.6:8; ἀφανισμοῦ, Heb.8:13 (cf. Cremer, 223). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 헤

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑορτὴ

한글 발음: 헤오르테

he'ortē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1859 원어 검색에서 보기 G1859
Lemma
ἑορτή
Strong
G1859
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
명절/절기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '명절, 절기, 축제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX for חַג (chiefly), מוֹעֵד ;] a feast, festival: Luk.2:42, Jhn.5:1, Jhn.6:4 Jhn.7:37, Col.2:10; ἡ ἑ. τοῦ πάσχα, Luk.2:41, Jhn.13:1; τ. ἀζύμων, Luk.22:1; ἡ σκηνοπηγία, Jhn.7:2 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ἐν τ. ἑ., Mat.26:5, Mrk.14:2, Jhn.4:45 7:11 12:20 (εἶναι ἐν ἑ.), Jhn.2:23; εἰς τ. ἑ. (for the feast), Jhn.13:29; ἀναβαίνειν, ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τ. ἑ., Jhn.4:45 7:8-10 11:56 12:12; τῆς ἐ μεσούσης, Jhn.7:14; κατὰ ἑ. (at each feast), Mat.27:15, Mrk.15:6, Luk.23:17, R, mg.; τ. ἑ. ποιεῖν, Act.18:21; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑ., Luk.2:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαίων

한글 발음: 이우다이온

Ioudaiōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-GPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 헤

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σκηνοπηγία.

한글 발음: 스케노페기아

skēnopēgia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4634 원어 검색에서 보기 G4634
Lemma
σκηνοπηγία
Strong
G4634
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
초막절
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '초막절, 장막절' (유대 절기).

원문 정의 보기

σκηνοπηγία, -ας, ἡ (σκηνή, πήγνυηι), [in LXX for סֻכָּה, Deu.16:16 31:10, Zec.14:16, 18-19; I Est.5:51, 1Ma.10:21, 2Ma.1:9 2Mac 1:18 * ;] prop., the setting up of tents or dwellings (Arist.); in LXX and NT, ἡ σ., ἡ ἑορτή τῆς σ. (called also ἑορτὴ σκηνῶν, Lev.23:34, al.; see Deiss., LAE, 116 f.), the feast of Tabernacles: Jhn.7:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
His brethren therefore said unto him, Depart hence, and go into Judaea, that thy disciples also may behold thy works which thou doest.

원어

εἶπον

한글 발음: 에이폰

eipon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδελφοὶ

한글 발음: 아델포이

adelphoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G80 원어 검색에서 보기 G80
Lemma
ἀδελφός
Strong
G80
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
형제
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '형제'. 신자 상호 호칭으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδελφός, -οῦ, ὁ (ἀ- copul., δελφύς, womb), in cl., a brother, born of the same parent or parents. [In LXX (Hort, Ja., 102f.), for אָח ;] __1. lit. of a brother (Gen.4:2, al.). __2. Of a neighbour (Lev.19:17). __3. Of a member of the same nation (Exo.2:14, Deu.15:3). In NT in each of these senses (1. Mat.1:2, al.; 2. Mat.7:3; 3. Rom.9:3) and also, __4. of a fellow-Christian: 1Co.1:1, Act.9:30. This usage finds illustration in π., where ἀ. is used of members of a pagan religious community (M, Th., I, 1:4; MM, VGT, see word). The ἀδελφοὶ τ. Κυρίου (Mat.12:46-49 13:55 28:10, Mrk.3:31-34, Luk.8:19-21, Jhn.2:12 7:3, 5 10 20:17, Act.1:14, 1Co.9:5) may have been sons of Joseph and Mary (Mayor, Ja., Intr. viff.; DB, i, 320ff.) or of Joseph by a former marriage (Lft., Gal., 252ff.; DCG, i, 232ff.), but the view of Jerome, which makes ἀ. equivalent to ἀνεψιός, is inconsistent with Greek usage. (Cremer, 66.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ·

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μετάβηθι

한글 발음: 메타베티

metabēthi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3327 원어 검색에서 보기 G3327
Lemma
μεταβαίνω
Strong
G3327
형태소
V-2AAM-2S
품사
동사
옮기다/떠나다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '옮겨가다, 떠나다'.

원문 정의 보기

μετα-βαίνω [in LXX: Wis.7:27 19:19, 2Ma.6:1 2Mac 6:9 2Mac 6:24 * ;] to pass over from one place to another : Mat.17:20, Luk.10:7; with reference to the point of departure only, to withdraw, depart: Mat.8:34 11:1 12:9 15:29, Jhn.7:3, Act.18:7; of removal from this life, ἐκ τ. κότμου πρὸς τ. Πατέρα, Jhn.13:1; metaphorically, ἐκ τ. θανάτου εἰς τ. ζωήν, Jhn.5:24, 1Jn.3:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐντεῦθεν

한글 발음: 엔튜텐

enteuthen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1782 원어 검색에서 보기 G1782
Lemma
ἐντεῦθεν, ἔνθεν
Strong
G1782
형태소
ADV
품사
-
여기서/이로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '여기서부터, 이로 인하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐντεῦθεν adv. (ἔνθεν), [in LXX chiefly for זֶה ;] __1. of place, hence: Luk.4:9 13:31, Jhn.2:16 7:3 14:31 18:36; ἐ. καὶ ἐ. (for cl. ἔνθεν κ. ἔνθεν), on this side and on that, on each side, Jhn.19:18; similarly, ἐ. καὶ ἐκεῖθεν, Rev.22:2. __2. Of time, thereupon. __3. Causal; hence, therefore: Jas.4:1.† ἔνθεν, adv., [in LXX for זֶה, פֹּה, etc. ;] hence: Mat.17:20, Luk.16:26.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὕπαγε

한글 발음: 휘파게

hupage

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5217 원어 검색에서 보기 G5217
Lemma
ὑπάγω
Strong
G5217
형태소
V-PAM-2S
품사
동사
가다/물러가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가다, 물러가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑπ-άγω [in LXX: Exo.14:21 (הָלַךְ hi.), elsewhere only as seel., Tob.8:21, al. ;] a word of the vulgar language, in Pres. and imperfect only (Bl., § 53, 1). __I. Trans. __1. to lead or bring under, subdue (Hom., Hdt., al.; Ex, l.with). __2. to lead on slowly (Hdt., Xen., al.). __II. Intrans., to go slowly away, withdraw oneself, depart (so less frequently in cl.; Thuc., Eur., al.): absol., Mat.8:32 13:44, Mrk.6:33, Luk.8:42 17:14, Jhn.6:67 8:2 11:44 14:5, 28 18:8; οἱ ἐρχόμενοι κ. οἱ ὑπάγοντες, Mrk.6:31; ὑπῆγον κ. ἐπίστευον, Jhn.12:11; ἵνα ὑπαγῆτε κ. καρπὸν ψέρητε, Jhn.15:16; opposite to ἔρχεσθαι, Jhn.3:8 8:14; imperat., ὕπαγε, Mat.4:10 8:13 20:14, Mrk.2:9 T, Mrk.7:29 10:52; εἰς εἰρήνην (ἐν εἰ.), Mrk.5:34, Jas.2:16; id. prefixed to another imperat. (Bl., § 79, 4), Mat.5:34 8:4 18:15 19:21 21:28 27:65 28:10, Mrk.1:44 10:21 16:7, Jhn.4:16 9:7, Rev.10:8; with καί inserted, Rev.16:1; euphemistically, of death, Mat.26:24, Mrk.14:21; with adv.: ποῦ (which see), Jhn.12:35 14:5 16:5, 1Jn.2:11; ὅπου (which see), Jhn.8:21-22 13:33, 36 14:4 Rev.14:4; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.11:8; with prep.: πρός, Jhn.7:33 13:3 16:5, 10 16:17; εἰς, Mat.9:6 20:4, 7, Mrk.2:11 11:2 14:13, Luk.19:30, Jhn.6:21 7:3 9:11 11:31, Rev.13:10 17:8, 11; εἰς . . . πρός, Mat.26:18, Mrk.5:19; ἐπί, Luk.12:58; μετά, Mat.5:41; ὀπίσω, Mat.16:23, Mrk.8:33; with inf., Jhn.21:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαίαν

한글 발음: 이우다이안

Ioudaian

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2449 원어 검색에서 보기 G2449
Lemma
Ἰουδαία
Strong
G2449
형태소
N-ASF-L
품사
명사
유대(지방)
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '유대 (지방)'.

원문 정의 보기

§ Judea, Judean, "land of the Judahites" Judea, the southern party of the country, below Samaria, Mt. 2:1, 5, 22; 3:1; metonymy the inhabitants of Judea

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

한글 발음: 히나

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μαθηταί

한글 발음: 마테타이

mathētai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3101 원어 검색에서 보기 G3101
Lemma
μαθητής
Strong
G3101
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
제자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '제자, 배우는 자'.

원문 정의 보기

μαθητής, -οῦ, ὁ (μανθάνω), [in LXX only as seel. (A) in Jer.13:21 20:11 26(46):9 * ;] a disciple: opposite to διδάσκαλος, Mat.10:24, Luk.6:40; Ἰωάννου, Mat.9:14, Luk.7:18, Jhn.3:25; τ. Φαρισσίων, Mat.22:16, Mrk.2:18, Luk.5:33; Μωυσέως, Jhn.9:28; Ἰησοῦ, Luk.6:17 7:11 19:37, Jhn.6:66 7:3 19:38; esp. the twelve, Mat.10:1 11:1, Mrk.7:17, Luk.8:9, Jo 2:2, al.; later, of Christians generally, Act.6:1, 2 7 9:19, al.; τ. κυρίου, Act.9:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σου

한글 발음: 수

sou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεωρήσουσιν

한글 발음: 테오레수신

theōrēsousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2334 원어 검색에서 보기 G2334
Lemma
θεωρέω
Strong
G2334
형태소
V-FAI-3P
품사
동사
보다/주목하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보다, 주목하다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

θεωρέω, -ῶ (θεωρός, a spectator, θεάομαι) [in LXX chiefly for רָאָה, חָזָה ;] (present and imperfect only, exc. Jhn.7:3 (fut.), Mat.28:1, Luk.23:48, Jhn.8:51, Rev.11:12 (aor.); El., § 24); __1. (cl.), to look at, gaze, behold: absol., Mat.27:55, Mrk.15:40, Luk.23:35; before πῶς, Mrk.12:41; ποῦ, Mrk.15:47; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.6:40, 62 12:45 16:10-19, Act.3:16 20:38 25:24, Rev.11:11-12; id. with ptcp., Mrk.5:15, Luk.10:18, Jhn.6:19 10:12 20:12, 14, 1Jn.3:17; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.28:1, Luk.14:29 21:6 23:48, Jhn.2:23 6:2 7:3, Act.4:13 8:13; id. with ptcp., Jhn.20:6, Act.7:56 10:11; before ὅτι, Act.19:26. __2. In popular lang. (Kennedy, Sources, 155; EL, § 24, see word ὁρᾶν), in present and imperfect = ὁράω, to see, perceive, discern: before ὅτι, Mrk.16:4, Jhn.4:19 12:19, Act.19:26 27:10; πόσαι, Act.21:20; πηλίκος, Heb.7:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.5:38; id. with ptcp., Act.17:16 28:6; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.3:11, Jhn.14:19, Act.9:7 17:22; πνεῦμα, Luk.24:37; τὸ π., Jhn.14:17; before ὅτι, Jhn.9:8; with ptcp., Luk.24:39. __3. Hebraistically, to experience, partake of: τ. θάνατον, Jhn.8:51 (cf. Psa.89:49); τ. δόξαν, Jhn.17:24 (cf. ἀνα-, παρα-θερρέω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σοῦ

한글 발음: 수

sou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

한글 발음: 타

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔργα

한글 발음: 에르가

erga

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2041 원어 검색에서 보기 G2041
Lemma
ἔργον
Strong
G2041
형태소
N-APN
품사
명사
일/행위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '일, 행위, 업적'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔργον, -ου, τό (originally Ϝέργον, work), [very frequently in LXX, chiefly for מַשֶׂה, מְלָאכָה, also for עֲבֹדָה, פֹּעַל, etc. ;] __1. work, task, employment: Mrk.13:34, Jhn.4:34 17:4, Act.13:2, Php.1:22 2:30, 1Th.5:13, al.; of an enterprise or undertaking (Deu.15:10, Wis.2:12), Act.5:38. __2. a deed, action: Tit.1:16, Jas.1:25 . listing, from λόγος, Luk.24:19, Rom.15:18, 2Th.2:17, 1Jn.3:18; ἐν λόγοις κ. ἔ., Act.7:22; of acts of God, Jhn.9:3, Act.13:41" (LXX), Heb.4:10, Rev.15:3; of Christ, Mat.11:2; esp. in Jo, e.g. 5:20, 36 7:3 10:38 14:11, 12 15:24; in ethical sense, of human actions (AR, Eph., 190), bad or good, Mat.23:3, Luk.11:48, Jhn.3:20, 21 Jas.2:14ff. 3:13, Rev.2:5 3:8; τὸ ἔ., collectively, Gal.6:4, Jas.1:4, 1Pe.1:17, Rev.22:12; τὸ ἔ. τ. νόμου, Rom.2:15; ἔ. ἀγαθόν, Rom.2:7, Col.1:10, 2Th.2:17, Tit.1:16, al.; καλόν, Mat.26:10, Mrk.14:6; pl. (as frequently in cl.), Mat.5:16, 1Ti.5:10, 25 Heb.10:24; ἔ. πίστεως, 1Th.1:3, 2Th.1:11; ἔ. πονηρά, Col.1:21, 2Jo.11; νέκρα, Heb.6:1 9:14; ἄκαρπα, Eph.5:11; ἔ. ἀσεβείας, Ju 15; τ. σκότους, Rom.13:12, Eph.5:11; ἔ. νόμου, Rom.3:20, 28 Gal.2:16 3:2, 5 10. __3. that which is wrought or made, a work: 1Co.3:13-15; τ. χειρῶν, Act.7:41; of the works of God, Heb.1:10; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔ., 2Pe.3:10; τὸ ἔ. τ. θεοῦ, Rom.14:20. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 하

ha

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-APN
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιεῖς·

한글 발음: 포이에이스

poieis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-PAI-2S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
For no man doeth anything in secret, and himself seeketh to be known openly. If thou doest these things, manifest thyself to the world.

원어

οὐδεὶς

한글 발음: 우데이스

oudeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3762 원어 검색에서 보기 G3762
Lemma
οὐδείς
Strong
G3762
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al.; absol., Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al.; neut., οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al.; id. with genitive partit., Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al.; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al.; with neg., strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al.; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γάρ

한글 발음: 가르

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τι

한글 발음: 티

ti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-ASN
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρυπτῷ

한글 발음: 크륍토

kruptō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2927 원어 검색에서 보기 G2927
Lemma
κρυπτός
Strong
G2927
형태소
A-DSN
품사
형용사
숨겨진
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '숨겨진, 은밀한'; 명사 '은밀한 것'.

원문 정의 보기

κρυπτός, -ή, -όν (κρύπτω) [in LXX for אָטַם, מִסְתָּר, etc. ;] hidden, secret: Mat.10:26, Mrk.4:22, Luk.8:17 12:2; ὁ κ. τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος, 1Pe.3:4; neut., ἐν τῷ κ., Mat.6:4, 6; ἐν κ., Jhn.7:4, 10 18:20; ὁ ἐν κ. Ἰουδαῖος, Rom.2:29; pl., τὰ κ. τ. σκότους, 1Co.4:5; τ. ἀνθρώπων, Rom.2:16; τ. καρδίας, 1Co.14:25; τ. αἰσχύνης, 2Co.4:2.† κρυφαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (κρύφα = κρυφῆ) [in LXX for מִסְתָּר, Jer.23:24, al. ;] hidden, secret: ἐν τῷ κ., Mat.6:18.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιεῖ

한글 발음: 포이에이

poiei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητεῖ

한글 발음: 제테이

zētei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸς

한글 발음: 아우토스

autos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-NSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρρησίᾳ

한글 발음: 파레시아

parrēsia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3954 원어 검색에서 보기 G3954
Lemma
παρρησία
Strong
G3954
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
담대함
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '담대함, 거리낌 없음, 확신'.

원문 정의 보기

παρρησία, -ας, ἡ (πᾶς + ῥῆσις, speech) [in LXX; Lev.26:13 (μετὰ π., קוֺמְמִיּוּת קוֹמְמִיּוּת), Pro.1:20 10:10, Wis.5:1, al. ;] __1. freedom of speech, plainness, openness, freedom in speaking (Eur., Plat., al.) : Act.4:13, 2Co.3:12; παρρησίᾳ, adverbially, freely, openly, plainly, Mrk.8:32, Jhn.7:13, 26 10:24 11:14 16:29 18:20; opposite to ἐν παροιμίαις, Jhn.16:25; ἐν π., Eph.6:19; μετὰ π., Act.2:29 4:29, 31 28:31 __2. In LXX (1Ma.4:18, Wis.5:1, al.), FlJ, and NT, also (from the absence of fear which accompanies freedom of speech), confidence, boldness: 2Co.7:4, Php.1:20, 1Ti.3:13; ἔχειν π., Eph.3:12, Phm 8, Heb.3:6 10:19, 35, 1Jn.2:28 Jn 3:21 Jn 4:17 Jn 5:14; μετὰ π., He 416; ἐν π., Col.2:15; id. (as בפרהסיא in Rabbinic lit.; see Westc., Jo., i, 262), in public, Jhn.7:4 and (without ἐν) Jhn.11:54.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶναι·

한글 발음: 에이나이

einai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1511 원어 검색에서 보기 G1511
Lemma
εἶναι
Strong
G1511
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
~임/있음
번역 정렬
-

정의

εἰμί의 부정사 '~이다/있다 (것)'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰ

한글 발음: 에이

ei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1487 원어 검색에서 보기 G1487
Lemma
εἰ
Strong
G1487
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일/~인지
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사 '만일 ~라면'. 간접의문 '~인지'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰ, conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions. __I. Conditional, if; __1. with indic, expressing a general assumption; __(a) pres.: before indic, pres., Mat.11:14, Rom.8:25, al.; before imperat., Mrk.4:23 9:22, Jhn.15:18, 1Co.7:9, al.; before fut. indic., Luk.16:31, Rom.8:11, al.; before pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mat.12:26, Rom.4:14, al.; similarly, before impf., Luk.17:6, Jhn.8:39; before quæst., Mat.6:23, Jhn.5:47 7:23 8:46, 1Pe.2:20; __(b) fut.: Mat.26:33, 1Pe.2:20; __(with) pf.: Jhn.11:12, Rom.6:5, al.; __(d) aor.: Luk.16:11 19:8, Jhn.13:32, 18:23, Rev.20:15, al. __2. Where the assumption is certain = ἐπεί: Mat.12:28, Jhn.7:4, Rom.5:17, al. __3. Of an unfulfilled condition, with indic, impf., aor. or plpf., before ἄν, with imp. or aor. (see: ἄν, I, i). __4. C. indic., after verbs denoting wonder, etc., sometimes, but not always, coupled with an element of doubt: Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13, al. __5. C. indic., as in LXX (Num.14:3o, 1Ki.14:45, al. = Heb. אִם), in oaths, with the formula of imprecation understood in a suppressed apodosis (WM, 627; Burton, §272): Mrk.8:12, Heb.3:11" (LXX) 4:3 (LXX). __6. Rarely (cl.) with optative, to express a merely possible condition: Act.24:19 27:39, 1Co.14:10 15:37, I Pe3:14, 17. __II. Interrogative, if, whether. __1. As in cl., in indir. questions after verbs of seeing, asking, knowing, saying, etc.: with indic. pres., Mat.26:63, Mrk.15:36, Act.19:2, 2Co.13:5, al.; fut., Mrk.3:2, Act.8:22, al.; aor., Mrk.15:44, 1Co.1:16, al.; with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 194), Php.3:12. __2. As in LXX (= Heb. אִם and interrog. הֲ, Gen.17:17, al.; see WM, 639f.; Viteau, i, 22), in direct questions: Mrk.8:23 (Tr., WH, txt.), Luk.13:23, 22:49, Act.19:2, al. __III. With other particles. __1. εἰ ἄρα, εἴγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see: ἄρα, γε. __2. εἰ δὲ καί, but if also: Luk.11:18; but even if, 1Co.4:7, 2Co.4:3 11:16. __3. εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, but if otherwise: Mrk.2:21, 22 Jhn.14:2, Rev.2:5, al. __4. εἰ καί, if even, if also, although: Mrk.14:29, Luk.11:8, 1Co.7:21, 2Co.4:16, Php.2:17, al. __5. καὶ εἰ, even if, see: καί __6. εἰ μή, if not, unless, except, but only: Mat.24:22, Mrk.2:26 6:5, Jhn.9:33, 1Co.7:17 (only), Gal.1:19 (cf. ἐὰν μή, 2:16; see Hort., Ja., xvi); ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, pleonastic (Bl., §65, 6), 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. __7. εἰ μήν = cl. ἦ μήν (M, Pr., 46), in oaths, surely (Eze.33:27, al.): Heb.6:14. __8. εἴ πως, if haply: Act.27:12, Rom.1:10. __9. εἴτε . . . εἴτε, whether . . . or; Rom.12:6-8, 1Co.3:22 13:8, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῦτα

한글 발음: 타우타

tauta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-APN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιεῖς,

한글 발음: 포이에이스

poieis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-PAI-2S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φανέρωσον

한글 발음: 파네로손

phanerōson

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5319 원어 검색에서 보기 G5319
Lemma
φανερόω
Strong
G5319
형태소
V-AAM-2S
품사
동사
나타내다/드러내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '나타내다, 드러내다, 밝히다'.

원문 정의 보기

φανερόω, -ώ [in LXX: Jer.40:6 (33:6) (גָּלָה pi.) * ;] to make visible, clear, manifest or known: with accusative of thing(s), Jhn.2:11 17:6, Rom.1:19, 1Co.4:5, 2Co.2:14 11:6, Col.4:4, Tit.1:3; pass., Mrk.4:22, Jhn.3:21 9:3, Rom.3:21 16:26, 2Co.4:10-11, Eph.5:13, Col.1:26, 2Ti.1:10, Heb.9:8, 1Jn.3:2 Jn 4:9, Rev.3:18 15:4; with accusative of person(s), of Christ, Jhn.7:4 21:1; pass., 2Co.3:3 5:10-11, 1Jn.2:19; of Christ, Mrk.16:12, 14, Jhn.1:31 21:14, Col.3:4, 1Ti.3:16, Heb.9:26, 1Pe.1:20 5:4, 1Jn.1:2 (ἡ ζωή; see Westc., in l) 1Jn.2:28 Jn 3:2 Jn 3:5 Jn 3:8.† SYN.: see: ἀποκαλύπτω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σεαυτὸν

한글 발음: 세아우톤

seauton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
F-2ASM
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κόσμῳ.

한글 발음: 코스모

kosmō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2889 원어 검색에서 보기 G2889
Lemma
κόσμος
Strong
G2889
형태소
N-DSM
품사
명사
세상/세계
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '세상, 우주, 질서'.

원문 정의 보기

κόσμος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX: Gen.2:1, Deu.4:19 17:3, Isa.24:21 40:26 (צבא), Exo.33:5, 6 Jer.2:32 4:30, Eze.7:20 16:11 23:40 (עֲדִי), Isa.61:10 (כְּלִי), al., Wis.2:24 and freq., Sir.6:30, al ;] __1. order (Hom., Plat., al.). __2. ornament, adornment, esp. of women (Hom., al.): 1Pe.3:3. __3. Later, the world or universe, as an ordered system (Plat., al.): Act.17:24, Rom.4:13, 1Co.3:22, Php.2:15, Heb.4:3, al. __4. In late writers only, the world, i.e. the earth (= ἡ οἰκουμένη, cf. Mat.4:8 with Luk.4:5): Mat.4:8, Mrk.16:[15], Col.2:20, 1Ti.6:7, al.; hence by meton., __(a) of the human inhabitants of the world: Mat.5:14 15:38, Mrk.14:9, Jhn.1:10 4:42 12:47, Rom.3:6, 1Co.4:13, 2Co.5:19, 2Pe.2:5, al.; __(b) of worldly affairs or possessions: Mat.16:26, Mrk.8:36, Luk.9:25, 1Co.7:31, 1Jn.2:16, al.; __(with) in ethical sense, of the ungodly: Jhn.7:7 14:17, 27 1Co.1:21, Jas.1:27, 1Jn.4:4, al.; __(d) metaphorically: ὁ κ. τῆς ἀδικίας, Jas.3:6. SYN.: αἰών, which see (cf . also Dalman, Words, 162ff.; Tr., Syn., §lix; Westc., additional note on Jhn.1:10; DB, iv, 938ff.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
For even his brethren did not believe on him.

원어

οὐδὲ

한글 발음: 우데

oude

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3761 원어 검색에서 보기 G3761
Lemma
οὐδέ
Strong
G3761
형태소
CONJ-N
품사
-
~도 아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~도 아니다, 또한 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέ, negative particle, related to μηδέ as οὐ to μή. __I. As conjc., and not, also not, neither, nor: Mat.6:15, Luk.16:31, Rom.4:15, al.; οὐ . . . οὐδέ, Mat.5:15 10:24, Mrk.4:22, Luk.6:43, 44, Jhn.6:24, Act.2:27, Rom.2:28, al. (see Bl., §77, 10). __II. As adv., not even: Mat.6:29, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:9, 1Co.5:1; οὐδὲ εἷς, Act.4:32, Rom.3:10" (LXX) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γὰρ

한글 발음: 가르

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδελφοὶ

한글 발음: 아델포이

adelphoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G80 원어 검색에서 보기 G80
Lemma
ἀδελφός
Strong
G80
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
형제
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '형제'. 신자 상호 호칭으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδελφός, -οῦ, ὁ (ἀ- copul., δελφύς, womb), in cl., a brother, born of the same parent or parents. [In LXX (Hort, Ja., 102f.), for אָח ;] __1. lit. of a brother (Gen.4:2, al.). __2. Of a neighbour (Lev.19:17). __3. Of a member of the same nation (Exo.2:14, Deu.15:3). In NT in each of these senses (1. Mat.1:2, al.; 2. Mat.7:3; 3. Rom.9:3) and also, __4. of a fellow-Christian: 1Co.1:1, Act.9:30. This usage finds illustration in π., where ἀ. is used of members of a pagan religious community (M, Th., I, 1:4; MM, VGT, see word). The ἀδελφοὶ τ. Κυρίου (Mat.12:46-49 13:55 28:10, Mrk.3:31-34, Luk.8:19-21, Jhn.2:12 7:3, 5 10 20:17, Act.1:14, 1Co.9:5) may have been sons of Joseph and Mary (Mayor, Ja., Intr. viff.; DB, i, 320ff.) or of Joseph by a former marriage (Lft., Gal., 252ff.; DCG, i, 232ff.), but the view of Jerome, which makes ἀ. equivalent to ἀνεψιός, is inconsistent with Greek usage. (Cremer, 66.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπίστευον

한글 발음: 에피스튜온

episteuon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4100 원어 검색에서 보기 G4100
Lemma
πιστεύω
Strong
G4100
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
믿다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '믿다, 신뢰하다, 의탁하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιστεύω, [in LXX chiefly for אמן hi. ;] __1. intrans., to have faith (in), to believe; in cl., with accusative, dative, in NT also with prep, (on the significance of the various constructions, see M, Pr., 67f.; Vau. on Rom.4:5; Ellic. on 1Ti.1:16; Abbott, JV, 19-80): absol., Mat.24:23, 26 Mrk.13:21, 1Co.11:18; with accusative of thing(s), Act.13:41, 1Co.13:7; with dative of person(s) (to believe what one says), Mrk.16:[13, 14], 1Jn.4:1; τ. ψεύδει, 2Th.2:11; περί . . . ὅτι, Jhn.9:18; esp. and most frequently with reference to religious belief: absol., Mat.8:13, Mrk.5:36, Luk.8:50, Jhn.11:40, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:28, al.; with dative (see supr., and cf. DB, i, 829a), Jhn.3:12 5:24 6:30 8:31, Act.16:34, Gal.3:6" (LXX), 2Ti.1:12, 1Jn.5:10, al.; with prep., (expressing personal trust and reliance as distinct from mere credence or belief; see M, Pr., l.with; DB, i, 829b), to believe in or on: ἐν (Psa.77 (78):22, al.), Mrk.1:15 (see Swete, in l.); εἰς, Mat.18:6, Jhn.2:11 (see Westc., in l.), and freq., Act.10:43 19:4, Rom.10:14, Gal.2:16, Php.1:29, I Jhn.5:10, 1Pe.1:8; εἰς τ. ὄνομα, Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18, 1Jn.5:13; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.27:42, Act.9:42 11:17 16:31 22:19, Rom.4:5; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.9:33 (LXX) 10:11 (ib.), 1Ti.1:16, 1Pe.2:6" (LXX) ; ptcp. pres., οἱ π., as subst., Act.2:44, Rom.3:22, 1Co.1:21, al.; aor., Mrk.16:[16], Act.4:32; pf., Act.19:18 21:20 (on Johannine use of the tenses of π., see Westc, Epp. Jo., 120). __2. Trans., to entrust: with accusative and dative, Luk.16:11, Jhn.2:24; pass., to be entrusted with: with accusative, Rom.3:2, 1Co.9:17, Gal.2:7, 1Th.2:4 (see Lft., Notes, 21f.), 1Ti.1:11, Tit.1:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν.¶

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Jesus therefore saith unto them,My time is not yet come; but your time is always ready.

원어

Λέγει

한글 발음: 레게이

Legei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς

한글 발음: 아우토이스

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς·

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καιρὸς

한글 발음: 카이로스

kairos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2540 원어 검색에서 보기 G2540
Lemma
καιρός
Strong
G2540
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
때/시기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '때, 적절한 시기, 기회'.

원문 정의 보기

καιρός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for עֵת, also for מוֹעֵד, etc. ;] __1. due measure, fitness, proportion (Eur., Xen., al.). __2. Of Time (cl. also) in the sense of a fixed and definite period, time, season (Kennedy, Sources, 153): Mat.11:25, Mrk.1:15, Luk.21:8, Rom.13:11, Eph.6:18, Heb.11:15, 1Pe.1:5 1:11 Rev.1:3, al.; with genitive, πειρασμοῦ Luk.8:13; τ. καρπῶν, Mat.21:34; σύκων, Mrk.11:13; pl., Mat.21:41; χρόνοι ἢ (καὶ) κ., Act.1:7, 1Th.5:1; ἐθνῶν, Luk.21:24; of opportune or seasonable time, Act.24:25, Gal.6:10, Eph.5:16, Col.4:5; with inf., Heb.11:15; ὁ κ. οὗτος, Mrk.10:30, Luk.18:30; ὁ νῦν κ. (Dalman, Words, 148), Rom.8:18; ὁ κ. ὁ ἐμός, Jhn.7:6; κ. δεκτῲ, 2Co.6:2 (LXX); δουλεύειν τῷ κ., Rom.12:11, R, mg.; τ. σημεῖα τῶν κ., Mat.16:3; adverbial usages: ἐν κ., Mat.24:45, 1Pe.5:6 (cf. καιρῷ, Luk.20:10; τῷ κ., Mrk.12:2); ἄχρι καιροῦ, Luk.4:13; πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; κατὰ καιρόν, Rom.5:6; πρὸ καιροῦ, Mat.8:29 SYN.: (χρόνος) time in the sense of duration (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμὸς

한글 발음: 에모스

emos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
S-1SNSM
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔπω

한글 발음: 우포

oupō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3768 원어 검색에서 보기 G3768
Lemma
οὔπω
Strong
G3768
형태소
ADV-N
품사
-
아직 ~아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '아직 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὔπω neg. adv. of time, not yet: Mat.24:6, Mrk.13:7, Jhn.2:4 3:24 6:17, al.; with neg., Mrk.11:2, Luk.23:53; interrog., Mat.16:9, Mrk.4:40 8:17, 21 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πάρεστιν,

한글 발음: 파레스틴

parestin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3918 원어 검색에서 보기 G3918
Lemma
πάρειμι
Strong
G3918
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
있다/임하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '곁에 있다, 임하다, 와 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

πάρ-ειμι [in LXX for בּוֹא, etc. ;] __1. to be by, at hand or present; __(a) of persons: Rev.17:8; παρών (opposite to ἀπών), 1Co.5:3, 2Co.10:2 10:11 13:2 13:10; before ἐπί with genitive, Act.24:19; ἐνώπιον, Act.10:33; ἐνθάδε, Act.17:6; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Act.12:20, 2Co.11:8, Gal.4:18, 20; __(b) of things : of time, ὁ καιρός, Jhn.7:6; τ. παρόν, Heb.12:11; ἡ ἀλήθεια, 2Pe.1:12; ταῦτα, 2Pe.1:9; τ. παρόντα, Heb.13:5. __2. to have come or arrived (Hdt., Thuc., al.; see Field, Notes, 65) : Luk.13:1, Jhn.11:28, Act.10:21; before εἰς, Col.1:6; before ἐπί, with accusative of thing(s), Mat.26:50 (cf. συν-πάρειμι).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καιρὸς

한글 발음: 카이로스

kairos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2540 원어 검색에서 보기 G2540
Lemma
καιρός
Strong
G2540
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
때/시기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '때, 적절한 시기, 기회'.

원문 정의 보기

καιρός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for עֵת, also for מוֹעֵד, etc. ;] __1. due measure, fitness, proportion (Eur., Xen., al.). __2. Of Time (cl. also) in the sense of a fixed and definite period, time, season (Kennedy, Sources, 153): Mat.11:25, Mrk.1:15, Luk.21:8, Rom.13:11, Eph.6:18, Heb.11:15, 1Pe.1:5 1:11 Rev.1:3, al.; with genitive, πειρασμοῦ Luk.8:13; τ. καρπῶν, Mat.21:34; σύκων, Mrk.11:13; pl., Mat.21:41; χρόνοι ἢ (καὶ) κ., Act.1:7, 1Th.5:1; ἐθνῶν, Luk.21:24; of opportune or seasonable time, Act.24:25, Gal.6:10, Eph.5:16, Col.4:5; with inf., Heb.11:15; ὁ κ. οὗτος, Mrk.10:30, Luk.18:30; ὁ νῦν κ. (Dalman, Words, 148), Rom.8:18; ὁ κ. ὁ ἐμός, Jhn.7:6; κ. δεκτῲ, 2Co.6:2 (LXX); δουλεύειν τῷ κ., Rom.12:11, R, mg.; τ. σημεῖα τῶν κ., Mat.16:3; adverbial usages: ἐν κ., Mat.24:45, 1Pe.5:6 (cf. καιρῷ, Luk.20:10; τῷ κ., Mrk.12:2); ἄχρι καιροῦ, Luk.4:13; πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; κατὰ καιρόν, Rom.5:6; πρὸ καιροῦ, Mat.8:29 SYN.: (χρόνος) time in the sense of duration (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμέτερος

한글 발음: 휘메테로스

humeteros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πάντοτέ

한글 발음: 판토테

pantote

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3842 원어 검색에서 보기 G3842
Lemma
πάντοτε
Strong
G3842
형태소
ADV
품사
-
항상
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '항상, 늘'.

원문 정의 보기

πάντοτε adv. of time (πᾶς), [in LXX: Wis.11:21 19:18 * ;] in late writers (once in Arist.) for διαπαντός, ἑκάστοτε, at all times, always: Mat.26:11, Mrk.14:7, Luk.15:31, Jhn.6:34, Rom.1:10, and frequently in Paul. Epp (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἕτοιμος.

한글 발음: 헤토이모스

hetoimos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2092 원어 검색에서 보기 G2092
Lemma
ἕτοιμος
Strong
G2092
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
준비된
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '준비된, 예비된'.

원문 정의 보기

ἕτοιμος, -ον also (in cl. after Thuc.) -η (2Co.9:5, 1Pe.1:5), -ον, [in LXX chiefly for כּוּן, מָכוֹן (cf. Hatch, Essays, 51 ff.) ;] prepared, ready; __(a) of things: Mat.22:4, 8, Mrk.14:15, 2Co.9:5 10:16, 1Pe.1:5; ἔρχεσθε ὅτι ἤδη ἕτοιμά ἐστιν (Field, Notes, 67), Luk.14:17; ὁ καιρός, Jhn.7:6; __(b) of persons: Mat.24:44 25:10, Luk.12:40, Act.23:21; before πρός, Tit.3:1, 1Pe.3:15; with inf., Luk.22:23; τοῦ, with inf. (WM, § 44, 4a; Robertson, Gr., 1068), Act.23:15; ἐν ἑ. ἔχω (MM, Exp., xiv), with inf., 2Co.10:6.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The world cannot hate you; but me it hateth, because I testify of it, that its works are evil.

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δύναται

한글 발음: 뒤나타이

dunatai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1410 원어 검색에서 보기 G1410
Lemma
δύναμαι
Strong
G1410
형태소
V-PNI-3S
품사
동사
할 수 있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할 수 있다, 능력이 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

δύναμαι, depon., [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres., Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al.; with inf. aor., Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al.; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κόσμος

한글 발음: 코스모스

kosmos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2889 원어 검색에서 보기 G2889
Lemma
κόσμος
Strong
G2889
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
세상/세계
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '세상, 우주, 질서'.

원문 정의 보기

κόσμος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX: Gen.2:1, Deu.4:19 17:3, Isa.24:21 40:26 (צבא), Exo.33:5, 6 Jer.2:32 4:30, Eze.7:20 16:11 23:40 (עֲדִי), Isa.61:10 (כְּלִי), al., Wis.2:24 and freq., Sir.6:30, al ;] __1. order (Hom., Plat., al.). __2. ornament, adornment, esp. of women (Hom., al.): 1Pe.3:3. __3. Later, the world or universe, as an ordered system (Plat., al.): Act.17:24, Rom.4:13, 1Co.3:22, Php.2:15, Heb.4:3, al. __4. In late writers only, the world, i.e. the earth (= ἡ οἰκουμένη, cf. Mat.4:8 with Luk.4:5): Mat.4:8, Mrk.16:[15], Col.2:20, 1Ti.6:7, al.; hence by meton., __(a) of the human inhabitants of the world: Mat.5:14 15:38, Mrk.14:9, Jhn.1:10 4:42 12:47, Rom.3:6, 1Co.4:13, 2Co.5:19, 2Pe.2:5, al.; __(b) of worldly affairs or possessions: Mat.16:26, Mrk.8:36, Luk.9:25, 1Co.7:31, 1Jn.2:16, al.; __(with) in ethical sense, of the ungodly: Jhn.7:7 14:17, 27 1Co.1:21, Jas.1:27, 1Jn.4:4, al.; __(d) metaphorically: ὁ κ. τῆς ἀδικίας, Jas.3:6. SYN.: αἰών, which see (cf . also Dalman, Words, 162ff.; Tr., Syn., §lix; Westc., additional note on Jhn.1:10; DB, iv, 938ff.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μισεῖν

한글 발음: 미세인

misein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3404 원어 검색에서 보기 G3404
Lemma
μισέω
Strong
G3404
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
미워하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '미워하다'.

원문 정의 보기

μισέω, -ῶ [in LXX chiefly for שָׂנֵא ;] to hate: with accusative of person(s) Mat.5:43 24:10, Luk.1:71 6:22, 27 19:14, Jhn.7:7 15:18-19, 23-26 17:14, Tit.3:3, 1Jn.2:9 Jn 2:11 Jn 3:13 Jn 3:15 Jn 4:20 Rev.17:16; pass., Mat.10:22 24:9, Mrk.13:13, Luk.21:17; with accusative of thing(s), Jhn.3:20, Rom.7:15, Eph.5:29, Heb.1:9, Ju 23, Rev.2:6; pass., Rev.18:2. As the Heb. שָׂנֵא is sometimes found with the modified sense of indifference to or relative disregard for one thing in comparison with another (cf. Gen.29:30-31, Deu.21:15-16, Mal.1:3) so prob. μ. in the foll.: Mat.6:24, Luk.14:26 16:13, Jhn.12:25, Rom.9:13" (LXX) .† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμᾶς,

한글 발음: 휘마스

humas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμὲ

한글 발음: 에메

eme

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μισεῖ,

한글 발음: 미세이

misei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3404 원어 검색에서 보기 G3404
Lemma
μισέω
Strong
G3404
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
미워하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '미워하다'.

원문 정의 보기

μισέω, -ῶ [in LXX chiefly for שָׂנֵא ;] to hate: with accusative of person(s) Mat.5:43 24:10, Luk.1:71 6:22, 27 19:14, Jhn.7:7 15:18-19, 23-26 17:14, Tit.3:3, 1Jn.2:9 Jn 2:11 Jn 3:13 Jn 3:15 Jn 4:20 Rev.17:16; pass., Mat.10:22 24:9, Mrk.13:13, Luk.21:17; with accusative of thing(s), Jhn.3:20, Rom.7:15, Eph.5:29, Heb.1:9, Ju 23, Rev.2:6; pass., Rev.18:2. As the Heb. שָׂנֵא is sometimes found with the modified sense of indifference to or relative disregard for one thing in comparison with another (cf. Gen.29:30-31, Deu.21:15-16, Mal.1:3) so prob. μ. in the foll.: Mat.6:24, Luk.14:26 16:13, Jhn.12:25, Rom.9:13" (LXX) .† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγὼ

한글 발음: 에고

egō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1NS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μαρτυρῶ

한글 발음: 마르튀로

marturō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3140 원어 검색에서 보기 G3140
Lemma
μαρτυρέω
Strong
G3140
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
증언하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '증언하다, 증거하다'.

원문 정의 보기

μαρτυρέω, -ῶ (μάρτυς), [in LXX chiefly for עֵד (עֵד (Gen.31:47-48, al.), also for עוּד hi. (Gen.43:3, La 2:13), עָנָה (Num.35:30) ;] __(a) prop., to be a witness, bear witness, testify: absol. (find., al.), Jhn.15:27, Act.26:5; parenthetical (Bl., § 79, 7; MM, xvi), 2Co.8:3; with dative of person(s) (comm. and incomm.; El., § 37, 2), Act.22:5, Heb.10:15; id. before ὅτι, Mat.23:31, Rom.10:2, al.; accusative and inf., Act.10:43; with accusative of thing(s) (cl.), Jhn.3:11, Rev.22:16, 20; with accusative cogn., before περί, Jhn.5:32, 1Jn.5:10; with dative of thing(s), Jhn.5:33, Act.14:3, al.; before περί, with genitive (of person(s) and of thing(s)), Jhn.1:7-8, 15 2:25 18:23 21:24, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:36 7:7; ὅτι, Jhn.1:34 4:44 al.; ὅτι recit., Jhn.4:39; κατά before ὅτι, 1Co.15:15; pass., Heb.7:8; ptcp., Rom.3:21; impers., Heb.7:17; __(b) in late Gk., to witness favourably, give a good report, approve (Bl., § 54, 3; MM, xvi; Deiss., BS, 265): with dative of person(s), Luk.4:22; before ἐπί with dative of thing(s), Heb.11:4; pass., Act.6:3; before ἐν, 1Ti.5:10, Heb.11:2; διά, with genitive of thing(s), Heb.11:39; with genitive of person(s), Act.10:22, al.; impers., III Jn 12 (cf. ἐπι, συν-επι-, κατα-, συν-μαρτυρέω) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰ

한글 발음: 타

ta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔργα

한글 발음: 에르가

erga

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2041 원어 검색에서 보기 G2041
Lemma
ἔργον
Strong
G2041
형태소
N-NPN
품사
명사
일/행위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '일, 행위, 업적'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔργον, -ου, τό (originally Ϝέργον, work), [very frequently in LXX, chiefly for מַשֶׂה, מְלָאכָה, also for עֲבֹדָה, פֹּעַל, etc. ;] __1. work, task, employment: Mrk.13:34, Jhn.4:34 17:4, Act.13:2, Php.1:22 2:30, 1Th.5:13, al.; of an enterprise or undertaking (Deu.15:10, Wis.2:12), Act.5:38. __2. a deed, action: Tit.1:16, Jas.1:25 . listing, from λόγος, Luk.24:19, Rom.15:18, 2Th.2:17, 1Jn.3:18; ἐν λόγοις κ. ἔ., Act.7:22; of acts of God, Jhn.9:3, Act.13:41" (LXX), Heb.4:10, Rev.15:3; of Christ, Mat.11:2; esp. in Jo, e.g. 5:20, 36 7:3 10:38 14:11, 12 15:24; in ethical sense, of human actions (AR, Eph., 190), bad or good, Mat.23:3, Luk.11:48, Jhn.3:20, 21 Jas.2:14ff. 3:13, Rev.2:5 3:8; τὸ ἔ., collectively, Gal.6:4, Jas.1:4, 1Pe.1:17, Rev.22:12; τὸ ἔ. τ. νόμου, Rom.2:15; ἔ. ἀγαθόν, Rom.2:7, Col.1:10, 2Th.2:17, Tit.1:16, al.; καλόν, Mat.26:10, Mrk.14:6; pl. (as frequently in cl.), Mat.5:16, 1Ti.5:10, 25 Heb.10:24; ἔ. πίστεως, 1Th.1:3, 2Th.1:11; ἔ. πονηρά, Col.1:21, 2Jo.11; νέκρα, Heb.6:1 9:14; ἄκαρπα, Eph.5:11; ἔ. ἀσεβείας, Ju 15; τ. σκότους, Rom.13:12, Eph.5:11; ἔ. νόμου, Rom.3:20, 28 Gal.2:16 3:2, 5 10. __3. that which is wrought or made, a work: 1Co.3:13-15; τ. χειρῶν, Act.7:41; of the works of God, Heb.1:10; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔ., 2Pe.3:10; τὸ ἔ. τ. θεοῦ, Rom.14:20. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πονηρά

한글 발음: 포네라

ponēra

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4190 원어 검색에서 보기 G4190
Lemma
πονηρός
Strong
G4190
형태소
A-NPN
품사
형용사
악한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '악한, 나쁜'; 명사 '악한 자'.

원문 정의 보기

πονηρός, -ά, -όν (πονέω, to toil), [in LXX chiefly for רַע ;] __1. __(a) of persons, oppressed by toils (Hes.); __(b) of things, toilsome, painful (καιρός, Sir.51:12): Eph.5:16 6:13 Rev.16:2. __2. bad, worthless; __(a) in physical sense: καρπός, Mat.7:17-18; __(b) in ethical sense, bad, evil, wicked; __(α) of persons: Mat.7:11 12:34-35 18:32 25:26, Luk.6:45 11:13 19:22, Act.17:5, 2Th.3:2, 2Ti.3:13; γενεά, Mat.12:39, 45 16:4, Luk.11:29; πνεῦμια, Mat.12:45, Luk.7:21 8:2 11:26, Act.19:12-13, 15-16; as subst., οἱ π., opposite to δίκαιοι, Mat.13:49; to ἀγαθοί, Mat.5:45 22:10; οἱ ἀχάριστοι καὶ π., Luk.6:35; sing., ὁ π., Mat.5:39, 1Co.5:13; id. esp. of Satan, the evil one, Mat.5:37 6:13 (see Lft., Notes, 125 ff.; but cf. McN, in l) Mat.13:19, 38, Luk.11:4 (WH, R, om.), Jhn.17:15, Eph.6:16, 2Th.3:3 (Lft., Notes, l.with), 1Jn.2:13-14 Jn 3:12 Jn 5:18-19; __(β) of things: Mat.5:11 12:35 15:19, Luk.6:22, 45, Jhn.3:19 7:7, Act.18:14 25:18, Gal.1:4, Col.1:21, 1Ti.6:4, 2Ti.4:18, Heb.3:12 10:22, Jas.2:4 4:16, 1Jn.3:12, II Jn 11, 3Jn.10; ὀφθαλμός (which see), Mat.6:23 20:15, Mrk.7:22, Luk.11:34; as subst., neut., τὸ π., Act.28:21, 1Th.5:22; opposite to ἀγαθόν, Luk.6:45, Rom.12:9; pl., Mat.9:4, Mrk.7:23, Luk.3:19. † SYN.: see: ἄθεσμος (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν.

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Go ye up unto the feast: I go not up unto this feast; because my time is not yet fulfilled.

원어

ὑμεῖς

한글 발음: 휘메이스

humeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2NP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνάβητε

한글 발음: 아나베테

anabēte

원어 사전 정의 보기 G305 원어 검색에서 보기 G305
Lemma
ἀναβαίνω
Strong
G305
형태소
V-2AAM-2P
품사
동사
올라가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '올라가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀναβαίνω [in LXX chiefly for עָלָה ;] to go up, ascend, __(a) of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Luk.19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mat.20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, with inf. (M, Pr., 205), Luk.18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mat.3:16 (ἀπό), Act.8:39 (ἐκ); __(b) of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mat.17:27; smoke, Rev.8:4; plants growing, Mat.13:7; metaphorically, of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. לֵב אֵל עָלָה; 4Ki.12:4, al.), Luk.24:38, 1Co.2:9; of prayers, Act.10:4; messages, Act.21:31 (for late exx., see MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑορτήν

한글 발음: 헤오르텐

he'ortēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1859 원어 검색에서 보기 G1859
Lemma
ἑορτή
Strong
G1859
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
명절/절기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '명절, 절기, 축제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX for חַג (chiefly), מוֹעֵד ;] a feast, festival: Luk.2:42, Jhn.5:1, Jhn.6:4 Jhn.7:37, Col.2:10; ἡ ἑ. τοῦ πάσχα, Luk.2:41, Jhn.13:1; τ. ἀζύμων, Luk.22:1; ἡ σκηνοπηγία, Jhn.7:2 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ἐν τ. ἑ., Mat.26:5, Mrk.14:2, Jhn.4:45 7:11 12:20 (εἶναι ἐν ἑ.), Jhn.2:23; εἰς τ. ἑ. (for the feast), Jhn.13:29; ἀναβαίνειν, ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τ. ἑ., Jhn.4:45 7:8-10 11:56 12:12; τῆς ἐ μεσούσης, Jhn.7:14; κατὰ ἑ. (at each feast), Mat.27:15, Mrk.15:6, Luk.23:17, R, mg.; τ. ἑ. ποιεῖν, Act.18:21; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑ., Luk.2:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταύτην·

한글 발음: 타우텐

tautēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-ASF
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγὼ

한글 발음: 에고

egō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1NS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

한글 발음: 우크

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀναβαίνω

한글 발음: 아나바이노

anabainō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G305 원어 검색에서 보기 G305
Lemma
ἀναβαίνω
Strong
G305
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
올라가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '올라가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀναβαίνω [in LXX chiefly for עָלָה ;] to go up, ascend, __(a) of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Luk.19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mat.20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, with inf. (M, Pr., 205), Luk.18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mat.3:16 (ἀπό), Act.8:39 (ἐκ); __(b) of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mat.17:27; smoke, Rev.8:4; plants growing, Mat.13:7; metaphorically, of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. לֵב אֵל עָלָה; 4Ki.12:4, al.), Luk.24:38, 1Co.2:9; of prayers, Act.10:4; messages, Act.21:31 (for late exx., see MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑορτὴν

한글 발음: 헤오르텐

he'ortēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1859 원어 검색에서 보기 G1859
Lemma
ἑορτή
Strong
G1859
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
명절/절기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '명절, 절기, 축제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX for חַג (chiefly), מוֹעֵד ;] a feast, festival: Luk.2:42, Jhn.5:1, Jhn.6:4 Jhn.7:37, Col.2:10; ἡ ἑ. τοῦ πάσχα, Luk.2:41, Jhn.13:1; τ. ἀζύμων, Luk.22:1; ἡ σκηνοπηγία, Jhn.7:2 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ἐν τ. ἑ., Mat.26:5, Mrk.14:2, Jhn.4:45 7:11 12:20 (εἶναι ἐν ἑ.), Jhn.2:23; εἰς τ. ἑ. (for the feast), Jhn.13:29; ἀναβαίνειν, ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τ. ἑ., Jhn.4:45 7:8-10 11:56 12:12; τῆς ἐ μεσούσης, Jhn.7:14; κατὰ ἑ. (at each feast), Mat.27:15, Mrk.15:6, Luk.23:17, R, mg.; τ. ἑ. ποιεῖν, Act.18:21; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑ., Luk.2:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταύτην,

한글 발음: 타우텐

tautēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-ASF
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμὸς

한글 발음: 에모스

emos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
S-1SNSM
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καιρὸς

한글 발음: 카이로스

kairos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2540 원어 검색에서 보기 G2540
Lemma
καιρός
Strong
G2540
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
때/시기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '때, 적절한 시기, 기회'.

원문 정의 보기

καιρός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for עֵת, also for מוֹעֵד, etc. ;] __1. due measure, fitness, proportion (Eur., Xen., al.). __2. Of Time (cl. also) in the sense of a fixed and definite period, time, season (Kennedy, Sources, 153): Mat.11:25, Mrk.1:15, Luk.21:8, Rom.13:11, Eph.6:18, Heb.11:15, 1Pe.1:5 1:11 Rev.1:3, al.; with genitive, πειρασμοῦ Luk.8:13; τ. καρπῶν, Mat.21:34; σύκων, Mrk.11:13; pl., Mat.21:41; χρόνοι ἢ (καὶ) κ., Act.1:7, 1Th.5:1; ἐθνῶν, Luk.21:24; of opportune or seasonable time, Act.24:25, Gal.6:10, Eph.5:16, Col.4:5; with inf., Heb.11:15; ὁ κ. οὗτος, Mrk.10:30, Luk.18:30; ὁ νῦν κ. (Dalman, Words, 148), Rom.8:18; ὁ κ. ὁ ἐμός, Jhn.7:6; κ. δεκτῲ, 2Co.6:2 (LXX); δουλεύειν τῷ κ., Rom.12:11, R, mg.; τ. σημεῖα τῶν κ., Mat.16:3; adverbial usages: ἐν κ., Mat.24:45, 1Pe.5:6 (cf. καιρῷ, Luk.20:10; τῷ κ., Mrk.12:2); ἄχρι καιροῦ, Luk.4:13; πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; κατὰ καιρόν, Rom.5:6; πρὸ καιροῦ, Mat.8:29 SYN.: (χρόνος) time in the sense of duration (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔπω

한글 발음: 우포

oupō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3768 원어 검색에서 보기 G3768
Lemma
οὔπω
Strong
G3768
형태소
ADV-N
품사
-
아직 ~아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '아직 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὔπω neg. adv. of time, not yet: Mat.24:6, Mrk.13:7, Jhn.2:4 3:24 6:17, al.; with neg., Mrk.11:2, Luk.23:53; interrog., Mat.16:9, Mrk.4:40 8:17, 21 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πεπλήρωται.

한글 발음: 페플레로타이

peplērōtai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4137 원어 검색에서 보기 G4137
Lemma
πληρόω
Strong
G4137
형태소
V-RPI-3S
품사
동사
채우다/이루다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '채우다, 가득하게 하다, 이루다(성취)'.

원문 정의 보기

πληρόω, -ῶ [in LXX chiefly for מָלֵא ;] __1. to fill, make full, fill to the full, with accusative; __(a) of things : pass. (σαψήνη, φάραγξ), Mat.13:48, Luk.3:5" (LXX) ; figuratively, Mat.23:32; but chiefly of immaterial things: πᾶσαν χρείαν, Php.4:19; ἦχος ἐλήρωσε τ. οἶκον, Act.2:2; with genitive of thing(s) (cl.), Act.5:28; pass., before ἐκ, Jhn.12:3 (cf. B1., § 36, 4); π. τ. καρδίαν, Jhn.16:6, Act.5:3; metaphorically, of the all-pervading activity of Christ, Eph.4:10; mid., Eph.1:23; __(b) of persons: to fill with, cause to abound in : with genitive of thing(s) (cl.), Act.2:28 (LXX), Rom.15:13; pass., to be filled with, abound in: Eph.3:19, Php.4:18; with genitive of thing(s) (cl.), Act.13:52, Rom.15:14, 2Ti.1:4; with dative (Æsch., al.), Luk.2:40 (with genitive, T), Rom.1:29, 2Co.7:4; with accusative (so in π., see MM, xx), Php.1:11, Col.1:9; before ἐν, Eph.5:18, Col.2:10. __2. to complete; __(a) to complete, fulfil: of number, Rev.6:11, WH, tat.; of time (MM, xx), Mrk.1:15, Luk.21:24, Jhn.7:8, Act.7:23, 30 9:23 24:27; ἐυδοκίαν, 2Th.1:11; τ. χαράν, Php.2:2; pass., Jhn.3:29 15:11 16:24 17:13, 1Jn.1:4, 2Jn.12; τ. ἔργα, Rev.3:2; ἡ ὑπακυή, 2Co.10:6; τ. πάσχα, Luk.22:16; __(b) to execute, accomplish, carry out to the full: Mat.3:15, Luk.7:1 9:31, Act.12:25 13:25 14:26 19:21, Rom.8:4 13:8 15:19, Gal.5:14, Col.1:25 4:17, Rev.6:11, T, WH, R, mg.; __(with) of sayings, prophecies, etc., to bring to pass, fulfil: Mat.1:22 2:15, 17 2:23 4:14 5:17 8:17 12:17 13:35 21:4 26:54, 56 27:9, Mrk.14:49 15:28 (WH, R, txt. om.), Luk.1:20 4:21 24:44, Jhn.12:38 13:18 15:25 17:12 18:9, 32 19:24, 36, Act.1:16 3:18 13:27, Jas.2:23 (cf. Lft., Col., 255 ff.).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And having said these things unto them, he abode [still] in Galilee.

원어

ταῦτα

한글 발음: 타우타

tauta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-APN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰπὼν

한글 발음: 에이폰

eipōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAP-NSM
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸς

한글 발음: 아우토스

autos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-NSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔμεινεν

한글 발음: 에메이넨

emeinen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3306 원어 검색에서 보기 G3306
Lemma
μένω
Strong
G3306
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
머물다/거하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '머물다, 거하다, 남다'.

원문 정의 보기

μένω, [in LXX for קוּם ,עמד, etc. ;] to stay, abide, remain. __1. Intrans.; __(i) of place: before ἐν, Luk.8:27, al.; παρά, with dative of person(s), Jhn.1:40, al; σύν, Luk.1:56; καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16; with adv., ἐκεῖ, Mat.10:11; ὧδε, Mat.26:38; metaphorically, 1Jn.2:18; of the Holy Spirit, Jhn.1:32, 33 14:17; of Christ, Jhn.6:56 15:4, al.; ὁ θεός, 1Jn.4:15, conversely, of Christians, Jhn.6:56 15:4, 1Jn.4:15, al.; ὁ λόγος τ. θεοῦ, 1Jn.2:14; ἡ ἀλήθεια, II Jo 2, al. __(ii) Of time; __(a) of persons: Php.1:25; before εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Jhn.12:34, Heb.7:24, 1Jn.2:17; ὀλίγον, Rev.17:10; ἕως ἔρχομαι, Jhn.21:22, 23; __(b) of things, lasting or enduring: cities, Mat.11:23, Heb.13:14; λόγος θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; ἁμαρτία, Jhn.9:41. __(iii) Of condition: with pred., μόνος, Jhn.12:24; ἄγαμος, 1Co.7:11; πιστός, 2Ti.2:13; ἱερεύς, Heb.7:3; with adv., οὕτως, 1Co.7:40; ὡς κἀγώ, ib. 8; before ἐν, ib. 20, 24. __2. Trans. (Bl., §34, 1; Field, Notes, 132): with accusative of person(s), Act.20:5, 23 (cf. ἀνα-, δια-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-, παρα-, συν-παρα-, περι-, προσ-, ὑπο-μένω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Γαλιλαίᾳ.¶

한글 발음: 갈릴라이아

Galilaia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1056 원어 검색에서 보기 G1056
Lemma
Γαλιλαία
Strong
G1056
형태소
N-DSF-L
품사
명사
갈릴리
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '갈릴리'.

원문 정의 보기

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district), Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mat.4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mat.15:29 (cf. Jhn.6:1). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But when his brethren were gone up unto the feast, then went he also up, not publicly, but as it were in secret.

원어

Ὡς

한글 발음: 호스

Hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνέβησαν

한글 발음: 아네베산

anebēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G305 원어 검색에서 보기 G305
Lemma
ἀναβαίνω
Strong
G305
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
올라가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '올라가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀναβαίνω [in LXX chiefly for עָלָה ;] to go up, ascend, __(a) of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Luk.19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mat.20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, with inf. (M, Pr., 205), Luk.18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mat.3:16 (ἀπό), Act.8:39 (ἐκ); __(b) of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mat.17:27; smoke, Rev.8:4; plants growing, Mat.13:7; metaphorically, of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. לֵב אֵל עָלָה; 4Ki.12:4, al.), Luk.24:38, 1Co.2:9; of prayers, Act.10:4; messages, Act.21:31 (for late exx., see MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδελφοὶ

한글 발음: 아델포이

adelphoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G80 원어 검색에서 보기 G80
Lemma
ἀδελφός
Strong
G80
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
형제
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '형제'. 신자 상호 호칭으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδελφός, -οῦ, ὁ (ἀ- copul., δελφύς, womb), in cl., a brother, born of the same parent or parents. [In LXX (Hort, Ja., 102f.), for אָח ;] __1. lit. of a brother (Gen.4:2, al.). __2. Of a neighbour (Lev.19:17). __3. Of a member of the same nation (Exo.2:14, Deu.15:3). In NT in each of these senses (1. Mat.1:2, al.; 2. Mat.7:3; 3. Rom.9:3) and also, __4. of a fellow-Christian: 1Co.1:1, Act.9:30. This usage finds illustration in π., where ἀ. is used of members of a pagan religious community (M, Th., I, 1:4; MM, VGT, see word). The ἀδελφοὶ τ. Κυρίου (Mat.12:46-49 13:55 28:10, Mrk.3:31-34, Luk.8:19-21, Jhn.2:12 7:3, 5 10 20:17, Act.1:14, 1Co.9:5) may have been sons of Joseph and Mary (Mayor, Ja., Intr. viff.; DB, i, 320ff.) or of Joseph by a former marriage (Lft., Gal., 252ff.; DCG, i, 232ff.), but the view of Jerome, which makes ἀ. equivalent to ἀνεψιός, is inconsistent with Greek usage. (Cremer, 66.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑορτήν,

한글 발음: 헤오르텐

he'ortēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1859 원어 검색에서 보기 G1859
Lemma
ἑορτή
Strong
G1859
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
명절/절기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '명절, 절기, 축제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX for חַג (chiefly), מוֹעֵד ;] a feast, festival: Luk.2:42, Jhn.5:1, Jhn.6:4 Jhn.7:37, Col.2:10; ἡ ἑ. τοῦ πάσχα, Luk.2:41, Jhn.13:1; τ. ἀζύμων, Luk.22:1; ἡ σκηνοπηγία, Jhn.7:2 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ἐν τ. ἑ., Mat.26:5, Mrk.14:2, Jhn.4:45 7:11 12:20 (εἶναι ἐν ἑ.), Jhn.2:23; εἰς τ. ἑ. (for the feast), Jhn.13:29; ἀναβαίνειν, ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τ. ἑ., Jhn.4:45 7:8-10 11:56 12:12; τῆς ἐ μεσούσης, Jhn.7:14; κατὰ ἑ. (at each feast), Mat.27:15, Mrk.15:6, Luk.23:17, R, mg.; τ. ἑ. ποιεῖν, Act.18:21; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑ., Luk.2:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τότε

한글 발음: 토테

tote

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5119 원어 검색에서 보기 G5119
Lemma
τότε
Strong
G5119
형태소
ADV
품사
-
그때/그러면
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '그때에, 그러면'.

원문 정의 보기

τότε, demonstr. adv. of time, correlat. of ὅτε, then, at that time; __(a) of concurrent events: Mat.2:17 3:5 and freq., Rom.6:21; before ptcp., Mat.2:16, Gal.4:8; opposite to νῦν, Gal.4:29, Heb.12:26; ὁ τ. κόσμος, 2Pe.3:6; __(b) of consequent events, then, thereupon: Mat.2:7 3:5 4:1 and freq., Luk.11:26; τ. οὖν, Jhn.11:14 19:1, 16 20:8; εὐθέως τ., Act.17:14; ὅτε . . . τ., Mat.13:26 21:1, Jhn.12:16; ἀπὸ τ., Mat.4:17 16:21 26:16, Luk.16:16; __(with) of things future: Mat.24:28, 40 25:1, 31ff.; opposite to ἄρτι, 1Co.13:12; καὶ τ., Mat.7:23, Mrk.13:21, Luk.21:27, 1Co.4:5, al.; ὅταν . . . τ., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35, 1Th.5:3, al. (more frequently in Mt than in the rest of the NT). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸς

한글 발음: 아우토스

autos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-NSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνέβη

한글 발음: 아네베

anebē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G305 원어 검색에서 보기 G305
Lemma
ἀναβαίνω
Strong
G305
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
올라가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '올라가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀναβαίνω [in LXX chiefly for עָלָה ;] to go up, ascend, __(a) of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Luk.19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mat.20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, with inf. (M, Pr., 205), Luk.18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mat.3:16 (ἀπό), Act.8:39 (ἐκ); __(b) of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mat.17:27; smoke, Rev.8:4; plants growing, Mat.13:7; metaphorically, of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. לֵב אֵל עָלָה; 4Ki.12:4, al.), Luk.24:38, 1Co.2:9; of prayers, Act.10:4; messages, Act.21:31 (for late exx., see MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φανερῶς

한글 발음: 파네로스

phanerōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5320 원어 검색에서 보기 G5320
Lemma
φανερῶς
Strong
G5320
형태소
ADV
품사
-
드러나게/밝히
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '드러나게, 공공연히, 분명히'.

원문 정의 보기

φανερῶς adv. (φανερός), [in LXX: 2Ma.3:28 * ;] __(a) manifestly, openly: Mrk.1:45; opposite to ἐν κρυπτῷ„ Jhn.7:10; __(b) clearly: Act.10:3 (2Ma.3:28).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλ᾽

한글 발음: 알

all᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

한글 발음: 호스

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρυπτῷ.

한글 발음: 크륍토

kruptō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2927 원어 검색에서 보기 G2927
Lemma
κρυπτός
Strong
G2927
형태소
A-DSN
품사
형용사
숨겨진
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '숨겨진, 은밀한'; 명사 '은밀한 것'.

원문 정의 보기

κρυπτός, -ή, -όν (κρύπτω) [in LXX for אָטַם, מִסְתָּר, etc. ;] hidden, secret: Mat.10:26, Mrk.4:22, Luk.8:17 12:2; ὁ κ. τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος, 1Pe.3:4; neut., ἐν τῷ κ., Mat.6:4, 6; ἐν κ., Jhn.7:4, 10 18:20; ὁ ἐν κ. Ἰουδαῖος, Rom.2:29; pl., τὰ κ. τ. σκότους, 1Co.4:5; τ. ἀνθρώπων, Rom.2:16; τ. καρδίας, 1Co.14:25; τ. αἰσχύνης, 2Co.4:2.† κρυφαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (κρύφα = κρυφῆ) [in LXX for מִסְתָּר, Jer.23:24, al. ;] hidden, secret: ἐν τῷ κ., Mat.6:18.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The Jews therefore sought him at the feast, and said, Where is he?

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαῖοι

한글 발음: 이우다이오이

Ioudaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-NPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐζήτουν

한글 발음: 에제툰

ezētoun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑορτῇ

한글 발음: 헤오르테

he'ortēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1859 원어 검색에서 보기 G1859
Lemma
ἑορτή
Strong
G1859
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
명절/절기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '명절, 절기, 축제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX for חַג (chiefly), מוֹעֵד ;] a feast, festival: Luk.2:42, Jhn.5:1, Jhn.6:4 Jhn.7:37, Col.2:10; ἡ ἑ. τοῦ πάσχα, Luk.2:41, Jhn.13:1; τ. ἀζύμων, Luk.22:1; ἡ σκηνοπηγία, Jhn.7:2 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ἐν τ. ἑ., Mat.26:5, Mrk.14:2, Jhn.4:45 7:11 12:20 (εἶναι ἐν ἑ.), Jhn.2:23; εἰς τ. ἑ. (for the feast), Jhn.13:29; ἀναβαίνειν, ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τ. ἑ., Jhn.4:45 7:8-10 11:56 12:12; τῆς ἐ μεσούσης, Jhn.7:14; κατὰ ἑ. (at each feast), Mat.27:15, Mrk.15:6, Luk.23:17, R, mg.; τ. ἑ. ποιεῖν, Act.18:21; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑ., Luk.2:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλεγον·

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποῦ

한글 발음: 푸

pou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4226 원어 검색에서 보기 G4226
Lemma
ποῦ
Strong
G4226
형태소
ADV-I
품사
-
어디
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문부사 '어디에, 어디로'.

원문 정의 보기

ποῦ interrog. adv., [in LXX for אַי, אַיֵּה, אָן ;] __1. prop., where?: Mat.2:2 26:17, Mrk.14:12, 14, Luk.17:17, 37 22:9, 11, Jhn.1:39 7:11 8:10, 19 9:12 11:34; ποῦ (ἐστιν), indicating that the subject in question is not to be found, Luk.8:25, Rom.3:27, 1Co.1:20 12:17 12:19 15:55, Gal.4:15, 2Pe.3:4; ποῦ φανεῖται, 1Pe.4:18. __2. = ὅπου (WM, 640; B1., § 50, 5): with indic., Mat.2:4, Mrk.15:47, Jhn.1:40 11:57 20:2, 13 20:15 Rev.2:13; with subjc., Mat.8:20, Luk.9:58 12:17. __3. In colloq. (as in Eng.) = ποῖ, whither: in direct questions, Jhn.7:35 9:12 13:36 16:5; in indir. quest., Jhn.3:8 8:14 12:35 14:5, Heb.11:8, 1Jn.2:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκεῖνος;

한글 발음: 에케이노스

ekeinos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1565 원어 검색에서 보기 G1565
Lemma
ἐκεῖνος
Strong
G1565
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
저/그것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '저, 그 사람, 그것'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκεῖνος, -η, -ο (ἐκεῖ), [in LXX chiefly for הַהוּא ,הוּא, and cogn. forms ;] demonstr. pron., that person or thing (ille), implying remoteness as compared with οὗτος (hic); __1. absol., emphatic he, she, it: opposite to οὗτος, Luk.18:14, Jas.4:15; ἡμεῖς, Heb.12:25; ὑμεῖς, Mrk.4:11; ἄλλοι, Jhn.9:9; ἐγώ, Jhn.3:30; to persons named, Mk 16:[10, 13, 20], Jhn.2:21; of one (absent) who is not named, contemptuously (Abbott, JG, §§2385, 2732), Jhn.7:11 9:28; with respect, of Christ, 1Jo.2:6 3:3, al.; referring to a preceding noun, Mrk.16:[10], Jhn.7:45; resumption of a participial subject, Jhn.1:33 9:37 10:1, Rom.14:14, al. (on its reference in Jhn.19:35, see Westc, in l.; Moffatt, Intr., 568; Sanday, Fourth Gospel, 77ff.). __2. As adj., joined, like οὗτος, to a noun with the article: Mat.7:25, Mrk.3:24, Jhn.18:15, al.; esp. of time, past or future: ἐν τ. ἡμέραις ἐ., Mat.3:1, Mrk.1:9, Act.2:18" (LXX), al.; ἐν ἐ. τ. ἡμέρᾳ, esp of the Parousia, Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, 2Th.1:10, 2Ti.1:12; adverbially, ἐκεινής (sc. ὁδοῦ) = cl. ἐκεινῇ (Bl., §36, 13), that way, Luk.19:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And there was much murmuring among the multitudes concerning him: some said, He is a good man; others said, Not so, but he leadeth the multitude astray.

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γογγυσμὸς

한글 발음: 공귀스모스

gongusmos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1112 원어 검색에서 보기 G1112
Lemma
γογγυσμός
Strong
G1112
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
원망/수군거림
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '원망, 불평, 수군거림'.

원문 정의 보기

γογγυσμός, -οῦ, ὁ, [in LXX: Isa.58:9 (אָוֶן), Exo.16:7-9, Num.17:5, 10 (תְּלוּנָה), Wis.1:10, 11 Sir.46:7 * ;] a murmuring, muttering: Jhn.7:12, Act.6:1; ἄνευ γ., 1Pe.4:9; pl., χωρὶς γ., Php.2:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἦν

한글 발음: 엔

ēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πολὺς

한글 발음: 폴뤼스

polus

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῖς

한글 발음: 토이스

tois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλοις.

한글 발음: 오클로이스

ochlois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-DPM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὲν

한글 발음: 멘

men

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3303 원어 검색에서 보기 G3303
Lemma
μέν
Strong
G3303
형태소
PRT
품사
-
한편으로는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 소사. δέ와 짝 '한편으로는 ~ 다른 한편으로는'.

원문 정의 보기

μέν, conjunctive particle (originally a form of μήν), usually related to a following δέ or other adversative conjunction, and distinguishing the word or clause with which it stands from that which follows. It is generally untranslatable and is not nearly so frequent in NT as in cl. Like δέ, it never stands first in a clause. __1. Answered by δέ or some other particle: μὲν . . . δέ, indeed . . . but, Mat.3:11, Luk.3:16, al.; with pronouns, ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, one . . . another, Mat.21:35, al.; pl., Php.1:16, 17; ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δὲ . . . ὃ δέ, some . . . some . . . some, Mat.13:8; τοῦτο μὲν . . . τοῦτο δέ, partly . . . partly, Heb.10:33; μὲν . . . ἔπειτα, Jhn.11:6; μὲν . . . καί, Luk.8:5. __2. μέν solitarium, answered by no other particle: πρῶτον μέν (Bl., l.with), Rom.1:8 3:2, 1Co.11:18; μὲν οὖν in narrative, summing up what precedes or introducing something further (Bl., §78, 5), so then, rather, nay rather: Luk.11:28 (WH, μενοῦν), Act.1:6 9:31, al.; μὲν οὖν γε (Php.3:8, WH): see: μενοῦνγε. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλεγον

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀγαθός

한글 발음: 아가토스

agathos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G18 원어 검색에서 보기 G18
Lemma
ἀγαθός
Strong
G18
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
선한/좋은
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '선한, 좋은'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀγαθός, -ή, -όν, [in LXX chiefly for טוֹב ;] in general, good, in physical and in moral sense, used of persons, things, acts, conditions, etc., applied to that which is regarded as "perfect in its kind, so as to produce pleasure and satisfaction, . . . that which, in itself good, is also at once for the good and the advantage of him who comes in contact with it" (Cremer, 3): γῆ, Luk.8:8; δένδρον, Mat.7:18; καρδία, Luk.8:15; δόσις, Jas.1:17; μέρις, Luk.10:42; ἔργον (frequently in Pl.), Php.1:6; ἐλπίς, 2Th.2:16; θησαυρός, Mat.12:35; μνεία, 1Th.3:6 (cf. 2Ma.7:20); as subst., τὸ ἀ, that which is morally good, beneficial, acceptable to God, Rom.12:2; ἐργάζεσθαι τὸ ἀ, Rom.2:10, Eph.4:28; πράσσειν, Rom.9:11, 2Co.5:10; διώκειν, 1Th.5:15; μιμεῖσθαι, III Jo 11; κολλᾶσθαι τῷ ἀ, Rom.12:9; ερωτᾶν περὶ τοῦ ἀ., Mat.19:17; διάκονος εἰς τὸ ἀ., Rom.13:4; τὸ ἀ. σου, thy favour, benefit, Phm 14; pl., τὰ ἀ., of goods, possessions, Luk.12:18; of spiritual benefits, Rom.10:15, Heb.9:11, 10:1. ἀ is opposite to πονηρός, Mat.5:45, 20:5; κακός, Rom.7:19; φαῦλος, Rom.9:11, 2Co.5:10 (cf. MM, VGT, see word). SYN.: καλός, δίκαιος. κ. properly refers to goodliness as manifested in form: ἀ. to inner excellence (cf. the cl. καλὸς κἀγαθός and ἐν καρδία κ. καὶ ἀ., Luk.8:15). In Rom.5:7, where it is contrasted with δ., ἀ. implies a kindliness and attractiveness not necessarily possessed by the δίκαιος, who merely measures up to a high standard of rectitude (cf. ἀγαθωσύνη). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν,

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄλλοι

한글 발음: 알로이

alloi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G243 원어 검색에서 보기 G243
Lemma
ἄλλος
Strong
G243
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
다른
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '다른 (또 하나의)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄλλος, -η, -ο, (cf. Lat. alius, Eng. else), [in LXX for אַחֵר ,אֶחָד, etc. ;] other, another: absol., Mat.20:3, al.; ἄ. δέ, 1Co.3:10 12:8; pl., Mrk.6:15; attached to a noun, Mat.2:12 4:21, al.; with art., ὁ ἄ., the other, Mat.5:39, Jhn.19:32 (Bl., §47, 8); οἱ ἄ., the others, the rest, Jhn.20:25, 1Co.14:29; ἄ. πρὸς ἄλλον = πρὸς ἀλλήλους (BL, §48, 10), Act.2:12; ἄλλ᾽ (i.e. ἄλλο) ἤ (Bl., §77, 13), Luk.12:51; before πλήν, Mrk.12:32; εἰ μή, Jhn.6:22; παρά with accusative, 1Co.3:11. SYN.: ἕτερος, which see ἄ. denotes numerical, ἕ. qualitative difference (Cremer, 89). ἄ. generally "denotes simply distinction of individuals, ἕ. involves the secondary idea of difference in kind" (see Lft., Meyer, Ramsay, on Gal.1:6, 7; Tr., Syn., §xcv; BL, §51, 6; M, Pr., 79f., 246; MM, VGT, s.vv.). As to whether the distinction can be maintained in 1Co.12:8, 10 see ICC, in l., and on Heb.11:35f., see Westc, in l. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλεγον·

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔ,

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλὰ

한글 발음: 알라

alla

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πλανᾷ

한글 발음: 플라나

plana

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4105 원어 검색에서 보기 G4105
Lemma
πλανάω
Strong
G4105
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
미혹하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '미혹하다, 속이다, 길을 잃게 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πλανάω, -ῶ (πλάνη), [in LXX chiefly for תָּעָה ;] to cause to wander, lead astray. Pass., to go astray, wander: Mat.18:12-13 Heb.11:38, 1Pe.2:25 (cf. Isa.53:6). Metaphorical, to lead astray, deceive: with accusative of person(s), Mat.24:4-5, 11 24:24, Mrk.13:5-6, Jhn.7:12, 2Ti.3:13; 1Jn.1:8 Jn 2:26 Jn 3:7, Rev.2:20 12:9 13:14 19:20 20:3, 8 20:10; pass., to be led astray, to err: Mat.22:29, Mrk.12:24, 27, Luk.21:8, Jhn.7:47, 2Ti.3:13, Tit.3:3, Heb.5:2, 2Pe.2:15, Rev.18:23; τ. καρδίᾳ, Heb.3:10; ἀπὸ τ. ἀληθείας, Jas.5:19;μὴ πλανᾶσθε, 1Co.6:9 15:33, Gal.6:7. Jas.1:16 (cf. ἀπο-πλανάω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλον.

한글 발음: 오클론

ochlon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Yet no man spake openly of him for fear of the Jews.

원어

οὐδεὶς

한글 발음: 우데이스

oudeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3762 원어 검색에서 보기 G3762
Lemma
οὐδείς
Strong
G3762
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al.; absol., Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al.; neut., οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al.; id. with genitive partit., Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al.; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al.; with neg., strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al.; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μέντοι

한글 발음: 멘토이

mentoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3305 원어 검색에서 보기 G3305
Lemma
μέντοι
Strong
G3305
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그렇지만
번역 정렬
-

정의

소사 '그러나, 그렇지만, 참으로'.

원문 정의 보기

μέν-τοι = μέν τοι, yet, however: Jhn.4:27, al.; εἰ μ., Jas.2:8 (if indeed). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρρησίᾳ

한글 발음: 파레시아

parrēsia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3954 원어 검색에서 보기 G3954
Lemma
παρρησία
Strong
G3954
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
담대함
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '담대함, 거리낌 없음, 확신'.

원문 정의 보기

παρρησία, -ας, ἡ (πᾶς + ῥῆσις, speech) [in LXX; Lev.26:13 (μετὰ π., קוֺמְמִיּוּת קוֹמְמִיּוּת), Pro.1:20 10:10, Wis.5:1, al. ;] __1. freedom of speech, plainness, openness, freedom in speaking (Eur., Plat., al.) : Act.4:13, 2Co.3:12; παρρησίᾳ, adverbially, freely, openly, plainly, Mrk.8:32, Jhn.7:13, 26 10:24 11:14 16:29 18:20; opposite to ἐν παροιμίαις, Jhn.16:25; ἐν π., Eph.6:19; μετὰ π., Act.2:29 4:29, 31 28:31 __2. In LXX (1Ma.4:18, Wis.5:1, al.), FlJ, and NT, also (from the absence of fear which accompanies freedom of speech), confidence, boldness: 2Co.7:4, Php.1:20, 1Ti.3:13; ἔχειν π., Eph.3:12, Phm 8, Heb.3:6 10:19, 35, 1Jn.2:28 Jn 3:21 Jn 4:17 Jn 5:14; μετὰ π., He 416; ἐν π., Col.2:15; id. (as בפרהסיא in Rabbinic lit.; see Westc., Jo., i, 262), in public, Jhn.7:4 and (without ἐν) Jhn.11:54.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλάλει

한글 발음: 엘랄레이

elalei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2980 원어 검색에서 보기 G2980
Lemma
λαλέω
Strong
G2980
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이야기하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαλέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for דּבר pi., also for אמר, etc. ;] __1. to utter: of inanimate things, Rev.4:1 10:4; metaphorically, Heb.11:4 12:24. __2. to talk, speak, say: absol., Mat.9:33 12:46, Mrk.5:35, Luk.8:49; before ὡς, 1Co.13:11, Rev.13:11; εἰς, 1Co.14:9; ἐκ, Mat.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.10:19, Mrk.11:32, Jhn.8:30, al.; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:46, Luk.24:6, Rom.7:1, al.; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.9:18, Jhn.10:6, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, Mrk.6:50, Luk.1:19 2:33, al.; ἐν, ἐξ, ἀπό, Mat.13:3, Jhn.12:49 14:10, al.; λ. τ. λόγον, Mrk.8:32, al.; before orat. dir. (not cl.), Mrk.14:31, Heb.5:5 11:18; Hebraistically (Dalman, Words, 25f.), ἐλάλησε λέγων, Mat.14:27, Jhn.8:12, Act.8:26, al. SYN.: see: λέγω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διὰ

한글 발음: 디아

dia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

φόβον

한글 발음: 포본

phobon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5401 원어 검색에서 보기 G5401
Lemma
φόβος
Strong
G5401
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
두려움/공포
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '두려움, 공포, 경외'.

원문 정의 보기

φόβος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for יִרְאָה, also for פַּחַד, אֵימָה, etc. ;] __1. in Hom., flight. __2. That which causes flight, fear, dread, terror: Luk.1:12, Act.5:5, 1Ti.5:20. 1Jn.4:18, al.; cogn. accusative, φοβεῖσθαι φ., Mrk.4:41, Luk.2:9; with genitive obj., Jhn.7:13 19:33 20:19, Heb.2:5, 1Pe.3:14 (but cf. ICC, in l);ἀπὸ (τοῦ) φ., Mat.14:26, Luk.21:26; εἰς φ., Rom.8:15; μετὰ φόβου, Mat.28:8; φ. καὶ τρόμος (Lft., Notes, 172), 1Co.2:3, 2Co.7:15, Eph.6:5, Php.2:12; by meton., of that which causes fear, Rom.13:3; of reverential fear, Rom.13:7, 1Pe.1:17 2:18 3:2 3:15; τ. κυρίου, Act.9:31, 2Co.5:11 (see Field, Notes, 183); Χριστοῦ, Eph.5:21; θεοῦ, Rom.3:18, 2Co.7:1 SYN.: see: δειλία (and of. DCG, i, 381) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαίων.¶

한글 발음: 이우다이온

Ioudaiōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-GPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But when it was now the midst of the feast Jesus went up into the temple, and taught.

원어

Ἤδη

한글 발음: 에데

Ēdē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2235 원어 검색에서 보기 G2235
Lemma
ἤδη
Strong
G2235
형태소
ADV
품사
-
이미/벌써
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '이미, 벌써'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤδη adv., in NT, always of time; now, already: Mat.3:10, Mrk.4:37, Luk.7:6, Jhn.4:36, al.; νῦν . . . ἤ., now already, 1Jn.4:3; ἤ. ποτέ, now at length, with fut., Rom.1:10 (cf. ἄρτι) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑορτῆς

한글 발음: 헤오르테스

he'ortēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1859 원어 검색에서 보기 G1859
Lemma
ἑορτή
Strong
G1859
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
명절/절기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '명절, 절기, 축제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX for חַג (chiefly), מוֹעֵד ;] a feast, festival: Luk.2:42, Jhn.5:1, Jhn.6:4 Jhn.7:37, Col.2:10; ἡ ἑ. τοῦ πάσχα, Luk.2:41, Jhn.13:1; τ. ἀζύμων, Luk.22:1; ἡ σκηνοπηγία, Jhn.7:2 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ἐν τ. ἑ., Mat.26:5, Mrk.14:2, Jhn.4:45 7:11 12:20 (εἶναι ἐν ἑ.), Jhn.2:23; εἰς τ. ἑ. (for the feast), Jhn.13:29; ἀναβαίνειν, ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τ. ἑ., Jhn.4:45 7:8-10 11:56 12:12; τῆς ἐ μεσούσης, Jhn.7:14; κατὰ ἑ. (at each feast), Mat.27:15, Mrk.15:6, Luk.23:17, R, mg.; τ. ἑ. ποιεῖν, Act.18:21; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑ., Luk.2:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεσούσης

한글 발음: 메수세스

mesousēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3322 원어 검색에서 보기 G3322
Lemma
μεσόω
Strong
G3322
형태소
V-PAP-GSF
품사
동사
중간이 되다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '한가운데에 이르다, 절반이 지나다'(요 7장).

원문 정의 보기

μεσόω, -ῶ (μέσός), [in LXX: μεσούσης τ. νυκός, Exo.12:29 (חֵצִי), etc. ;] to be in the middle, esp. of time: τ. ἑορτῆς μεσούσης, in the middle of the feast, Jhn.7:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀνέβη

한글 발음: 아네베

anebē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G305 원어 검색에서 보기 G305
Lemma
ἀναβαίνω
Strong
G305
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
올라가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '올라가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀναβαίνω [in LXX chiefly for עָלָה ;] to go up, ascend, __(a) of persons: ἐπί συκομωρέαν, Luk.19:4; εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.6:51; εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, Mat.20:17; εἰς τ. ἱερόν, with inf. (M, Pr., 205), Luk.18:10; with mention of place of departure, Mat.3:16 (ἀπό), Act.8:39 (ἐκ); __(b) of things, to rise, spring up, come up: a fish, Mat.17:27; smoke, Rev.8:4; plants growing, Mat.13:7; metaphorically, of things coming up in one's mind (as Heb. לֵב אֵל עָלָה; 4Ki.12:4, al.), Luk.24:38, 1Co.2:9; of prayers, Act.10:4; messages, Act.21:31 (for late exx., see MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

한글 발음: 토

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἱερὸν

한글 발음: 히에론

hi'eron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2411 원어 검색에서 보기 G2411
Lemma
ἱερόν
Strong
G2411
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
성전
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '성전' (성전 구역 전체).

원문 정의 보기

ἱερός, -ά, όν [in LXX: Eze.28:18 (מִקְדָּשׁ); τό ἱ, 1Ch.29:4 (בַּיִת), Eze.45:19 (עֲזָרָה); very frequently in I Est.1:1-58 -4 Mac ;] __1. in Hom., marvellous, mighty, divine. __2. (Also in Hom, and later cl.) consecrated to the deity, sacred: pl., ἱ. γράμματα, 2Ti.3:15. __3. As subst., __(a) (so in Hom.), τὰ ἱ., sacrifices, sacred rites, sacred things: 1Co.9:13; __(b) later, τὸ ἱ.,., a consecrated or sacred place, a temple: τ. Ἀρτέμιδος, Act.19:27; of the temple at Jerusalem, i.e. the entire precincts or some part thereof (as distinct from ὁ ναός, which see, the Sanctuary proper): 1Co.9:13, and frequently in Gosp. and esp. in Ac, Mat.12:6, Mrk.13:3, Act.4:1, al. (on the use of ἱ. in Imperial Iuser., see Deiss., LAE, 380 f.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐδίδασκεν.

한글 발음: 에디다스켄

edidasken

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1321 원어 검색에서 보기 G1321
Lemma
διδάσκω
Strong
G1321
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
가르치다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가르치다'.

원문 정의 보기

διδάσκω [in LXX chiefly for למד pl., also for ידע hi., ירה hi., etc. ;] to teach (i.e. instruct) a person, teach a thing; __1. trans.: with accusative of person(s), Mat.5:2, Mrk.1:22, al.; before ὅτι, Mrk.8:31; περί, 1Jn.2:27; with inf., Luk.11:1; with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.6:30 12:14; with cogn. accusative, Mat.15:9 (LXX); with dupl. accusative, Mrk.4:2, Jhn.14:26; pass., Gal.1:12, 2Th.2:15; with dative of person(s) (like Heb., cf. Job.21:23, but prob. a vernac. usage, see Swete, in l.), Rev.2:14. __2. Absol., to teach, give instruction: Mat.4:23, Mrk.1:21, and often in Gosp., Rom.12:7, 1Co.4:17, 1Ti.2:12, al. SYN.: παιδεύω (cf. Westc., Heb., 402; Cremer, 180). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The Jews therefore marvelled, saying, How knoweth this man letters, having never learned?

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐθαύμαζον

한글 발음: 에타우마존

ethaumazon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2296 원어 검색에서 보기 G2296
Lemma
θαυμάζω
Strong
G2296
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
놀라다/이상히 여기다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '놀라다, 경탄하다, 이상히 여기다'.

원문 정의 보기

θαυμάζω [in LXX for נָשָׂא, etc. ;] to marvel, wonder, wonder at: absol., Mat.8:10, 27 9:33 15:31 21:20 22:22 27:14, Mrk.5:20 15:5, Luk.1:21 (R, txt.; ICC, in l, but see infr.), Luk.1:63 8:25 11:14 24:41, Jhn.5:20 7:15, Act.2:7 4:13 13:41, Rev.17:7-8; with accusative of person(s), Luk.7:9; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.24:12 (WH, R, mg. om.), Jhn.5:28, Act.7:31; θαῦμα μέγα, Rev.17:6; πρόσωπον (LXX for פָּנִים נָשָׂא, Deu.10:17, al.), Ju 16; before διά, with accusative, Mrk.6:6, Jhn.7:21; before ἐν, with dative obj., Luk.1:21 (? R, mg., but see supr); before ἐπί, with dative of thing(s), Luk.2:33 4:22 9:43 20:26, Act.3:12; περί, Luk.2:18; ὀπίσω, Rev.13:3; ὅτι, Luk.11:38, Jhn.3:7 4:27, Gal.1:6; εἰ, Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13. Pass. (Sir.38:3, Wis.8:11): before ἐν, with dative of person(s), 2Th.1:10 (cf. ἐκ-θαυμάζω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαῖοι

한글 발음: 이우다이오이

Ioudaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-NPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λέγοντες·

한글 발음: 레곤테스

legontes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAP-NPM
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πῶς

한글 발음: 포스

pōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4459 원어 검색에서 보기 G4459
Lemma
πῶς
Strong
G4459
형태소
PRT-I
품사
-
어떻게
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '어떻게, 어찌'.

원문 정의 보기

πῶς, interrog. adv., correl. of ὅπως, __1. prop., in direct questions, how?: with indic., Mat.12:29, Mrk.3:23, Luk.11:18, Jhn.3:4, al.; καὶ π., Mrk.4:13, Luk.20:44; π. οὖν, Mat.12:26; π. οὐ, Mat.16:11, Luk.12:56; in deliberative questions (cf. Bl., §64, 6), with subjc., Mat.23:33 26:54; π. οὖν, Rom.10:14; π. δέ, Rom.10:14, 15; before ἄν, with optative, Act.8:31. __2. As sometimes in cl. but more frequently and increasingly so in late writers (see WM, §57, 2; Bl., §70, 2; Thumb, MGr., 192; Jannaris, Gr., App., vi, 13f.), = ὅπως, ὥς; __(a) in indirect discourse: with indic., Mat.6:28, Mrk.12:41, Luk.8:36, Jhn.9:15, Act.9:27, al.; with subjc., Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:11; __(b) in exclamations: Mat.21:20, Mrk.10:23, 24 Luk.12:50 18:24, Jhn.11:36. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτος

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γράμματα

한글 발음: 그람마타

grammata

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1121 원어 검색에서 보기 G1121
Lemma
γράμμα
Strong
G1121
형태소
N-APN
품사
명사
글자/문서
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '글자, 문서, 편지, 학문'.

원문 정의 보기

γράμμα, -τος, τό (γράφω), [in LXX for סֵפֶר, etc. ;] __1. that which is traced or drawn, a picture. __2. that which is written; __(1) a character, letter: Gal.6:11; __(2) a writing, a written document; __(a) a bill or account: Luk.16:6, 7; __(b) a letter: Act.28:21; __(with) τὰ ἱερὰ γ., the sacred writings, i.e. the OT: 2Ti.3:15 (so in Philo, Vit. Mos., iii, 39) ; __(d) τὸ γ., the letter, the written word as an external authority in contrast with the direct influence of the Spirit as manifested in the new Covenant: Rom.2:27, 29 7:6, 2Co.3:6, 7; __(3) τὰ γ., letters, i.e. learning: Jhn.7:15, Act.26:24. (In π. an illiterate person is very frequently referred to as γράμματα μ᾽̀ εἰδότης, and this "never means anything else than inability to write": MM, Exp., x; but see also Cremer, 166; DCG, i, 202; ii, 584.) † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἶδεν

한글 발음: 오이덴

oiden

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6063 원어 검색에서 보기 G6063
Lemma
οἶδα
Strong
G6063
형태소
V-RAI-3S
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사(완료형) '알다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to know , εὖ οἶδα I know well; εὖ ἴσθι be assured : often with accusative rei, νοήματα οἶδε, μήδεα οἶδε he is versed in counsels, (Homer); with neut. Adjs., πεπνυμένα, φίλα, ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς (Homer); also with genitive, τόξων εὖ εἰδώς cunning in the use of the bow; οἰωνῶν σάφα εἰδώς (Odyssey by Homer): —; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a debt to another, thank him , (Iliad by Homer), etc.:—;the Imperat. in protestations, ἴστω Ζεὺς αὐτός be Zeus my witness , (Iliad by Homer); doric ἴττω Ζεύς, ἴττω (Aristophanes Comicus): —; εἰδώς absolute one who knows , εἰδυίηι πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω (Iliad by Homer); ἰδυίηισι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, (Iliad by Homer) 2. with infinitive to know how to do, (Iliad by Homer), attic 3. with the participle to know that so and so is the case, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, (Aeschulus Tragicus); τὸν Μῆδον ἴσμεν ἐλθόντα (Thucydides) 4. οὐκ οἶδα εἰ, I know not whether, expresses disbelief, like Lat. nescio an non, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι (Euripides) 5. οἶδα or ἴσθι are often parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ (Euripides); οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι (Sophocles Tragicus); so, εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (Demosthenes Orator): —;in [variant datesTragica Adespota also, οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσο; equivalent to δρᾶσον —; οἶσθ᾽ ; do —; know'st thou what? i. e. make haste and do; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς ποίησον, etc. (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεμαθηκώς;¶

한글 발음: 메마테코스

memathēkōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3129 원어 검색에서 보기 G3129
Lemma
μανθάνω
Strong
G3129
형태소
V-RAP-NSM
품사
동사
배우다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '배우다'.

원문 정의 보기

μανθάνω [in LXX chiefly for לָמַד ;] __1. to learn, esp. by inquiry: absol., 1Co.14:31, 1Ti.2:11, 2Ti.3:7; with accusative of thing(s), Jhn.7:15 (sc. αὐτά), Rom.16:17, 1Co.14:35, Php.4:9, 2Ti.3:14, Rev.14:3; before quaes. indir., Mat.9:13; Χριστόν, Eph.4:20 (ICC, in l); before ἀπό, with genitive of thing(s), Mat.24:32, Mrk.13:28; ἀπό, with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:29, Col.1:7; παρά, with genitive of person(s), 2Ti.3:14; ἐν, with dative of person(s), 1Co.4:6; "point" aorist (M, Pr., 117), to ascertain, before ὅτι, Act.23:27; with accusative before ἀπό, Gal.3:2. __2. to learn by use and practice, acquire the habit of, be accustomed to: with inf. (Bl., § 69, 4), 1Ti.5:4, Tit.3:14; id. with nom, in pred. (El., § 72, 1), Php.4:11; with accusative of thing(s) before ἀπό, Heb.5:8; ἀργαὶ μανθάνουσιν (EV, they learn to be idle; Bl., § 73, 5; Field, Notes, 210), 1Ti.5:13.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Jesus therefore answered them and said,My teaching is not mine, but his that sent me.

원어

Ἀπεκρίθη

한글 발음: 아페크리테

Apekrithē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3S
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς

한글 발음: 아우토이스

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπεν·

한글 발음: 에이펜

eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 헤

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμὴ

한글 발음: 에메

emē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
S-1SNSF
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διδαχὴ

한글 발음: 디다케

didachē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1322 원어 검색에서 보기 G1322
Lemma
διδαχή
Strong
G1322
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
가르침/교훈
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '가르침, 교훈'.

원문 정의 보기

διδαχή, -ῆς, ἡ (διδάσκω), [in LXX: Psa.60:1-12 title. (לָמַד pi.); Sm.: Deu.33:8 * ;] __1. objectively, teaching, doctrine, that which is taught: Mrk.1:27, Jhn.7:16, Act.17:19, Rom.6:7 16:17, 2Jn.10, Rev.2:24; with genitive poss., Mat.7:28 16:12 22:33, Mrk.1:22 11:18, Luk.4:32, Jhn.18:19, Act.5:28, Rev.2:14-15; ἡ δ., of Christ, Jhn.7:17, Act.13:12, 2Jn.9; of. τὴν δ., Tit.1:9; with genitive obj., βαπτισμῶν δ., Heb.6:2; pl., Heb.13:9. __2. Actively, teaching: Act.2:42, 2Ti.4:2; ἐν τ. δ., in the course of his teaching: Mrk.4:2 12:38; λαλεῖν ἐν δ., 1Co.14:6; ἔχειν δ., 1Co.14:26 (DCG, i, 485; Cremer, 181).† SYN.: διδασκαλία (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

한글 발음: 우크

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμὴ

한글 발음: 에메

emē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
S-1SNSF
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλὰ

한글 발음: 알라

alla

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέμψαντός

한글 발음: 펨프산토스

pempsantos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3992 원어 검색에서 보기 G3992
Lemma
πέμπω
Strong
G3992
형태소
V-AAP-GSM
품사
동사
보내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보내다, 파견하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πέμπω [in LXX chiefly for שָׁלַח ;] to send; __(a) of persons: with accusative, absol., Mat.22:7, Luk.7:19, Jhn.1:22, 2Co.9:3, al.; ptcp. before verb., Mat.14:10, Act.19:31, al.; ptcp. before διά (= Heb. יָד;, 1Ki.16:20, al.), Mat.11:2 (cf. Rev.1:1); of teachers sent by God, Jhn.1:33 4:34, Rom.8:3, al.; with accusative and dative, 1Co.4:17, Php.2:19; before πρός, with accusative, Luk.4:26, Jhn.16:7, al.; before λέγων (cf. Heb. אָמַר שָׁלַח Gen.38:25, al.), Luk.7:6, 19; before εἰς, with accusative loc., Mat.2:8, Luk.15:15, al.; before εἰς (of purpose), Eph.6:22, Col.4:8, 1Pe.2:14; with inf., Jhn.1:33, 1Co.16:3, Rev.22:16; __(b) of things : Rev.11:10; before εἰς, Rev.1:11; id., of purpose, Act.11:29, Php.4:16; with dative of person(s), 2Th.2:11; π. τ. δρέπανον σου (cf. εξαποστείλατε δρέπανα = מַגָּל שָׁלַח, Jol.3:13), Rev.14:15, 18 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, μετα-, προ-, συν-πέμπω) SYN.: ἀποστέλλω, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με·

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
If any man willeth to do his will, he shall know of the teaching, whether it is of God, or [whether] I speak from myself.

원어

ἐάν

한글 발음: 에안

ean

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1437 원어 검색에서 보기 G1437
Lemma
ἐάν
Strong
G1437
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일 ~라면
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사(가정) '만일 ~라면'. 가정법과 함께.

원문 정의 보기

ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τις

한글 발음: 티스

tis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-NSM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θέλῃ

한글 발음: 텔레

thelē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2309 원어 검색에서 보기 G2309
Lemma
θέλω
Strong
G2309
형태소
V-PAS-3S
품사
동사
원하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '원하다, 바라다, ~하려 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

한글 발음: 토

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θέλημα

한글 발음: 텔레마

thelēma

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2307 원어 검색에서 보기 G2307
Lemma
θέλημα
Strong
G2307
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '뜻, 의지, 소원'.

원문 정의 보기

θέλημα, -τος, τό (θέλω), [in LXX chiefly for חָפֵץ, also for רָצוֹן, etc. ;] will, __(a) objectively = that which is willed: Mat.18:14, Luk.12:47, Jhn.5:30, 1Co.7:37, 1Th.5:18, 2Ti.2:26, Heb.10:10, Rev.4:11; θ. τ. θεοῦ, Act.22:14, Rom.2:18 12:2, Eph.1:9, Col.1:9 4:12, 1Pe.4:2; τ. κυρίου, Eph.5:17; pl., of precepts, Mrk.3:35, WH, mg., Act.13:22 (LXX); ἐστιν τὸ θ., with genitive of person(s), before ἵνα, Jhn.6:39-40, 1Co.16:12; with inf., 1Pe.2:15; with accusative and inf., 1Th.4:3 __(b) subjectively = τὸ θέλειν (cf. θέλησις): Luk.23:25, Jhn.1:13, 1Pe.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ποιεῖν, Mat.7:21 12:50 21:31, Mrk.3:35 (pl., WH, mg., see supr.), Jhn.4:34 6:38 7:17 9:31, Eph.6:6, Heb.10:7, 9 10:36 13:21, 1Jn.2:17; γίνεσθαι, Mat.6:10 26:42, Luk.22:42, Act.21:14; ἡ εὐδοκία ( βουλὴ) τοῦ θ., Eph.1:5, 11; ἐν τῷ θ. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rom.1:10; διὰ θ. θεοῦ, Rom.15:32, 1Co.1:1, 2Co.1:1 8:5, Eph.1:1, Col.1:1, 2Ti.1:1; κατὰ τὸ θ. τ. θεοῦ, Gal.1:4, 1Pe.4:19, 1Jn.5:14; pl., Eph.2:3 (Cremer, 728).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιεῖν,

한글 발음: 포이에인

poiein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γνώσεται

한글 발음: 그노세타이

gnōsetai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1097 원어 검색에서 보기 G1097
Lemma
γινώσκω
Strong
G1097
형태소
V-FDI-3S
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '알다, 깨닫다, 인식하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γινώσκω (= γιγν-: see previous word. So also vulgar Attic, in Inscr., see Thumb, MGV, 207), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] to be taking in knowledge, come to know, recognize, perceive, understand; in past tenses to know, realize; pass., to become known: with accusative, Mat.22:18, Mrk.5:43, Col.4:8, 1Th.3:5, al. Pass., Mat.10:26, Php.4:5, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.21:45, Jhn.4:1, al.; τί, Mat.6:3; ἀπό, Mrk.15:45; ὅ, Rom.7:15; τ. λεγόμενα, Luk.18:34; τ. θέλημα, Luk.12:47; τ. καρδίας, Luk.16:15; with accusative of person(s), of recognition by God, 1Co.8:3, Gal.4:9; by Christ, neg., Mat.7:23; frequently of the knowledge of divine things, of God and Christ; τ. θεόν, Rom.1:21 Gal.4:9; τ. πατέρα, Jhn.8:55; τ. κύριον, Heb.8:1 (LXX); νοῦν κυρίου, Rom.11:34; Χριστόν, Jhn.17:3, 1Jn.3:6; τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος, 1Co.2:14; τ. πνεύμα, 1Jn.4:6; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.8:32; of Christ's knowledge of the Father (ἐπιγ.), Mat.11:27 (Dalman, Words, 282ff.). In Hellenistic writers [LXX for Heb. ידע, Gal.4:1, al.], of sexual intercourse, to know carnally: Mat.1:25, Luk.1:34 (Cremer, 153). SYN.: γ., to know by observation and experience is thus prop. disting. from οἶδα, to know by reflection (a mental process, based on intuition or information); cf. also ἐφίστημι, συνίημι. (Cf. ἀνα-, δια-, ἐπι-, κατα-, προ-γινώσκω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διδαχῆς

한글 발음: 디다케스

didachēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1322 원어 검색에서 보기 G1322
Lemma
διδαχή
Strong
G1322
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
가르침/교훈
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '가르침, 교훈'.

원문 정의 보기

διδαχή, -ῆς, ἡ (διδάσκω), [in LXX: Psa.60:1-12 title. (לָמַד pi.); Sm.: Deu.33:8 * ;] __1. objectively, teaching, doctrine, that which is taught: Mrk.1:27, Jhn.7:16, Act.17:19, Rom.6:7 16:17, 2Jn.10, Rev.2:24; with genitive poss., Mat.7:28 16:12 22:33, Mrk.1:22 11:18, Luk.4:32, Jhn.18:19, Act.5:28, Rev.2:14-15; ἡ δ., of Christ, Jhn.7:17, Act.13:12, 2Jn.9; of. τὴν δ., Tit.1:9; with genitive obj., βαπτισμῶν δ., Heb.6:2; pl., Heb.13:9. __2. Actively, teaching: Act.2:42, 2Ti.4:2; ἐν τ. δ., in the course of his teaching: Mrk.4:2 12:38; λαλεῖν ἐν δ., 1Co.14:6; ἔχειν δ., 1Co.14:26 (DCG, i, 485; Cremer, 181).† SYN.: διδασκαλία (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πότερον

한글 발음: 포테론

poteron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4220 원어 검색에서 보기 G4220
Lemma
πότερος
Strong
G4220
형태소
ADV
품사
-
어느
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '어느 것, ~인지 (둘 중) 어느 쪽'.

원문 정의 보기

πότερος, -α, -ον which of two. Neut., adverbially, πότερον, whether: Jhn.7:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 엑

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θεοῦ

한글 발음: 테우

theou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2316 원어 검색에서 보기 G2316
Lemma
θεός
Strong
G2316
형태소
N-GSM-T
품사
명사
하나님/신
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '하나님, 신(神)'.

원문 정의 보기

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Act.19:37 only; see M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mat.27:46; cf. Deu.3:24, al.), [in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc. ;] a god or deity, God. __1. In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Act.28:6, 1Co.8:4, 2Th.2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Gal.4:8, al. __2. Of the one true God; __(a) anarthrous: Mat.6:24, Luk.20:38, al.; esp. with prep. (Kühner 3, iii, 605), ἀπὸ θ., Jhn.3:2; ἐκ, Act.5:39, 2Co.5:1, Php.3:9; ὑπό, Rom.13:1; παρὰ θεοῦ, Jhn.1:6; παρὰ θεῷ, 2Th.1:6, 1Pe.2:4; κατὰ θεόν, Rom.8:27, 2Co.7:9, 10; also when in genitive dependent on an anarth. noun (Bl., §46, 6), Mat.27:43, Luk.3:2, Rom.1:17, 1Th.2:13; as pred., Lk 20:38, Jhn.1:1, and when the nature and character rather than the person of God is meant, Act.5:29, Gal.2:6, al. (M, Th., 14); __(b) more freq., with art.: Mat.1:23, Mrk.2:7, al. mult.; with prep., ἀπὸ τ. θ., Luk.1:26; ἐκ, Jhn.8:42, al.; παρὰ τοῦ θ., Jhn.8:40; π. τῷ θ., Rom.9:14; ἐν, Col.3:3; ἐπὶ τῷ θ., Luk.1:47; ἐπὶ τὸν θ., Act.15:19; εἰς τ. θ., Act.24:15; πρὸς τ. θ., Jhn.1:2; with genitive of person(s), Mat.22:32, Mrk.12:26, 27, Luk.20:37, Jhn.20:17, al.; ὁ θ. μου, Rom.1:8, Php 1:3, al.; ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ κ. τ. λ., Rom.15:6, Eph.1:3, Phi 4:20, al.; with genitive of thing(s), Rom.15:5, 13, 33, 2Co.1:3, 1Th.5:23; τὰ τ. θεοῦ, Mat.16:23, Mrk.12:17, 1Co.2:11; τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ., Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; τ. θεῷ, as a superl. (LXX, Jos.3:3), Act.7:20, 2Co.10:4; Hebraistically, of judges (Psa.81(82):6), Jhn.10:34" (LXX), 35. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 에

ē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2228 원어 검색에서 보기 G2228
Lemma
Strong
G2228
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
또는/~보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '또는'. 비교에서 '~보다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); __1. disjunctive, or; __(a) between single words: Mat.5:17 Mrk.6:56, Luk.2:24, Jhn.6:19, Rom.1:21, al.; __(b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, frequently in interrog. form: Mat.7:4, 9 Mrk.12:14, Luk.13:4, Rom.3:29 6:3 9:21, 1Co.6:9, 16 9:6, 2Co.11:7; ἤ . . . ἤ, either . . . or, Mat.6:24, Luk.16:13, 1Co.14:6; __(with) in a disjunctive question (as Lat. an after utrum): Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:9, Luk.7:19, al.; after πότερον, Jhn.7:17; μή, 1Co.9:8; μήτι, 2Co.1:17; ἤ . . . ἤ . . . ἤ, Mrk.13:35. __2. Comparative, than: after comparatives, Mat.10:15, Luk.9:13, Jhn.3:19, Rom.13:11, al.; after ἕτερον, Act.17:21; θέλω (Khüner 3, iv, 303), 1Co.14:19; πρὶν ἤ, before, before accusative and inf., Mat.1:18 Mrk.14:30; after a positive adj. (Gen.49:12; cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mat.18:8, 9 Mrk.9:43, 45 47. __3. with other particles: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see: ἀλλά; ἤ γάρ, see: γάρ; ἢ καί, or even, or also, Mat.7:10, Luk.11:11, 12 Rom.2:15 4:9, al; ἤτοι . . . ἤ, Rom.6:16 (cf. Wis.11:19). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγὼ

한글 발음: 에고

egō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1NS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπ᾽

한글 발음: 아프

ap᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G575 원어 검색에서 보기 G575
Lemma
ἀπό
Strong
G575
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 분리·기원 '~로부터, ~에서 떨어져'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ ,בְּ ,מִן ;] from (i.e. from the exterior). __1. Of separation and cessation; __(1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al.; __(2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl., §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.; __(3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ., Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; __(4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al.; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); __(5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc., Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al.; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc., Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al.; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al.; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; __(6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. __2. Of origin; __(1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, __(a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al.; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; __(b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al.; __(with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; __(d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc., Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); __(2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al.; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). __3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl., §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. __4. In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμαυτοῦ

한글 발음: 에마우투

emautou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
F-1GSM
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λαλῶ.

한글 발음: 랄로

lalō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2980 원어 검색에서 보기 G2980
Lemma
λαλέω
Strong
G2980
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이야기하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαλέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for דּבר pi., also for אמר, etc. ;] __1. to utter: of inanimate things, Rev.4:1 10:4; metaphorically, Heb.11:4 12:24. __2. to talk, speak, say: absol., Mat.9:33 12:46, Mrk.5:35, Luk.8:49; before ὡς, 1Co.13:11, Rev.13:11; εἰς, 1Co.14:9; ἐκ, Mat.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.10:19, Mrk.11:32, Jhn.8:30, al.; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:46, Luk.24:6, Rom.7:1, al.; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.9:18, Jhn.10:6, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, Mrk.6:50, Luk.1:19 2:33, al.; ἐν, ἐξ, ἀπό, Mat.13:3, Jhn.12:49 14:10, al.; λ. τ. λόγον, Mrk.8:32, al.; before orat. dir. (not cl.), Mrk.14:31, Heb.5:5 11:18; Hebraistically (Dalman, Words, 25f.), ἐλάλησε λέγων, Mat.14:27, Jhn.8:12, Act.8:26, al. SYN.: see: λέγω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
He that speaketh from himself seeketh his own glory: but he that seeketh the glory of him that sent him, the same is true, and no unrighteousness is in him.

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀφ᾽

한글 발음: 아프

aph᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G575 원어 검색에서 보기 G575
Lemma
ἀπό
Strong
G575
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 분리·기원 '~로부터, ~에서 떨어져'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ ,בְּ ,מִן ;] from (i.e. from the exterior). __1. Of separation and cessation; __(1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al.; __(2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl., §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.; __(3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ., Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; __(4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al.; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); __(5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc., Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al.; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc., Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al.; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al.; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; __(6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. __2. Of origin; __(1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, __(a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al.; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; __(b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al.; __(with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; __(d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc., Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); __(2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al.; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). __3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl., §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. __4. In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑαυτοῦ

한글 발음: 헤아우투

he'autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1438 원어 검색에서 보기 G1438
Lemma
ἑαυτοῦ
Strong
G1438
형태소
F-3GSM
품사
-
자기 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

재귀대명사 '자기 자신의/을'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ, dative -ῷ, etc., accusative -όν, etc., pi. -ῶν, etc. (Att. contr. αὑτοῦ, etc); reflex pron.; __1. prop, of 3rd person (Lat. sui, sibi, se), of himself, herself, itself, etc.: Mat.27:42, Mrk.15:31, Luk.23:35, al.; added to a middle verb, διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς, Jhn.19:24; to an active verb, Act.14:14 (M, Pr., 157); ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Luk.12:57 21:30, Jhn.5:19, al. (see: ἀπό); δι᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Rom.14:14; ἐν ἑ., Mat.3:9, Mrk.5:30, al.; εἰς ἑ., Luk.15:17; καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Jas.2:17; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, at his own house, 1Co.16:2; πρὸς ἑ., with, to himself, Luk.18:11; as poss. pron. (with emphasis weakened; see M, Pr., 87f.), τ. ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς, Luk.9:60. __2. As reflexive 1st and 2nd of person(s) (so also frequently in cl., chiefly poetry), Mat.23:31, Mrk.9:50, Rom.8:23, 1Th.2:8, al. __3. In pl., for reciprocal pron., ἀλλήλων, -οις, -ους, of one another, etc.: Mat.21:38, Mrk.16:3, Eph.5:19, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λαλῶν

한글 발음: 랄론

lalōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2980 원어 검색에서 보기 G2980
Lemma
λαλέω
Strong
G2980
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이야기하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαλέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for דּבר pi., also for אמר, etc. ;] __1. to utter: of inanimate things, Rev.4:1 10:4; metaphorically, Heb.11:4 12:24. __2. to talk, speak, say: absol., Mat.9:33 12:46, Mrk.5:35, Luk.8:49; before ὡς, 1Co.13:11, Rev.13:11; εἰς, 1Co.14:9; ἐκ, Mat.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.10:19, Mrk.11:32, Jhn.8:30, al.; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:46, Luk.24:6, Rom.7:1, al.; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.9:18, Jhn.10:6, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, Mrk.6:50, Luk.1:19 2:33, al.; ἐν, ἐξ, ἀπό, Mat.13:3, Jhn.12:49 14:10, al.; λ. τ. λόγον, Mrk.8:32, al.; before orat. dir. (not cl.), Mrk.14:31, Heb.5:5 11:18; Hebraistically (Dalman, Words, 25f.), ἐλάλησε λέγων, Mat.14:27, Jhn.8:12, Act.8:26, al. SYN.: see: λέγω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δόξαν

한글 발음: 독산

doxan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1391 원어 검색에서 보기 G1391
Lemma
δόξα
Strong
G1391
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
영광
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '영광, 존귀, 광채'.

원문 정의 보기

δόξα, -ης, ἡ (δοκέω), [in LXX very frequently for כָּבוֹד, also for הוֹד ,פִּפְאֶרֶת, etc., 25 words in all ;] in cl., __1. expectation, judgment, opinion (4Ma.5:18). __2. opinion, estimation in which one is held, repute; in NT, always good opinion, hence reputation, praise, honour, glory: Luk.14:10, Jhn.12:43, Heb.3:3; opposite to αἰσχύνη, Php.3:19; to ἀτιμία, 2Co.6:8; δ. κ. τιμή, Rom.2:7, 10 1Pe.1:7, 2Pe.1:17; ζητεῖν, Jhn.5:44 7:18 8:50, 1Th.2:6; λαμβάνειν, Jhn.5:41, 2Pe.1:17, Rev.5:12; διδόναι δ. τ. θεῷ (cf. נָתַן כָּבוֹד לַיהוָֹה, Jer.13:16, al.), Luk.17:18, Jhn.9:24, Act.12:23, Rom.4:20, Rev.4:9; εἰς (τ.) δ. θεοῦ, Rom.3:7 15:7, Php.1:11, al.; in doxologies, τ. θεῷ (ᾧ) ἡ δ., Luk.2:14, Rom.11:36 16:27, Gal.1:5, Eph.3:21, al. __3. Later also (not cl.) as in LXX (= הוֹד, Job.39:20, 1Ch.29:25; כָּבוֹד, Job.19:9, Est.5:11, al.), visible brightness, splendour, glory: of light, Act.22:11; of heavenly bodies, 1Co.15:40ff.; esp. that wh. radiates from God's presence, as manifested in the pillar of cloud and in the Holy of Holies (= כָּבוֹד, Exo.16:10 25:22 40:34, al.; and new Heb. שְׁכִינָה, 2Ma.2:8; see DB, iv, 489b), Rom.9:4, Jas.2:1 (see Hort, Mayor, in l.); hence of the manifested glory of God, Rom.1:23, Col.1:11 Eph.1:6, 12 17 3:16; of the same as communicated to man through Christ, 2Co.3:18 4:6; and of the glorious condition into which Christians shall enter hereafter, Rom.8:18, 21 9:23, 2Ti.2:10, al. SYN.: ἔπαινος τιμή (see Hort on 1Pe.1:7). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἰδίαν

한글 발음: 이디안

idian

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2398 원어 검색에서 보기 G2398
Lemma
ἴδιος
Strong
G2398
형태소
A-ASF
품사
형용사
자기의/고유한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '자기 자신의, 고유한'.

원문 정의 보기

ἴδιος, -α, -ον (in Attic usually -ος, -ον), [in LXX chiefly for of person(s) suff., also for לָהֶם, etc.; (τὰ ἴ.) בֵּיתוֹ ;] __1. one's own; __(a) of that which is private and personal (in cl. opposite to κοινός, δημόσιος; cf. infr. 3); __(b) of property, friends, home, country, etc. (in cl. opposite to ἀλλότριος; in late writers often, like ἑαυτοῦ, with weakened sense, see M, Pr., 87ff.; Deiss., BS, 123f.): Luk.6:41, Jhn.1:42 5:43, Act.2:6 20:28, 1Co.11:21, Gal.6:5, 2Ti.1:9, Heb.7:27, Ju 6, al.; πράσσειν τὰ ἴ., 1Th.4:11; κατὰ τὰς ἰ. ἐπιθυμίας, 2Ti.4:3; οἱ ἴδιοι, Jhn.1:11 (M, Pr., 90f.; Field, Notes, 84) 13:1, Act.4:23, 1Ti.5:8; τὰ ἴδια, one's home (Field, Notes, l.with), Luk.18:28, Jhn.1:11 16:32 19:27. __2. peculiar, distinct, appropriate, proper: τὸ ἴ. σῶμα, 1Co.15:38; ἐν τ. ἰ. τάγματι, 1Co.15:23; εἰς τ. τόπον τ. ἴ., Act.1:25; = αὐτοῦ (see Deiss., ut. supr.), Mat.22:5, Jhn.1:42 (cf. Wis.10:1). __3. Adverbially (see supr., 1 (a); and cf. WM, 739:2); __(a) ἰδίᾳ, severally, separately: 1Co.12:11; __(b) κατ᾽ ἰδίαν, apart, privately, in private: Mat.14:13, 23 20:17, Mrk.4:34 7:33, Luk.10:23, Act.23:19, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητεῖ·

한글 발음: 제테이

zētei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητῶν

한글 발음: 제톤

zētōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δόξαν

한글 발음: 독산

doxan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1391 원어 검색에서 보기 G1391
Lemma
δόξα
Strong
G1391
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
영광
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '영광, 존귀, 광채'.

원문 정의 보기

δόξα, -ης, ἡ (δοκέω), [in LXX very frequently for כָּבוֹד, also for הוֹד ,פִּפְאֶרֶת, etc., 25 words in all ;] in cl., __1. expectation, judgment, opinion (4Ma.5:18). __2. opinion, estimation in which one is held, repute; in NT, always good opinion, hence reputation, praise, honour, glory: Luk.14:10, Jhn.12:43, Heb.3:3; opposite to αἰσχύνη, Php.3:19; to ἀτιμία, 2Co.6:8; δ. κ. τιμή, Rom.2:7, 10 1Pe.1:7, 2Pe.1:17; ζητεῖν, Jhn.5:44 7:18 8:50, 1Th.2:6; λαμβάνειν, Jhn.5:41, 2Pe.1:17, Rev.5:12; διδόναι δ. τ. θεῷ (cf. נָתַן כָּבוֹד לַיהוָֹה, Jer.13:16, al.), Luk.17:18, Jhn.9:24, Act.12:23, Rom.4:20, Rev.4:9; εἰς (τ.) δ. θεοῦ, Rom.3:7 15:7, Php.1:11, al.; in doxologies, τ. θεῷ (ᾧ) ἡ δ., Luk.2:14, Rom.11:36 16:27, Gal.1:5, Eph.3:21, al. __3. Later also (not cl.) as in LXX (= הוֹד, Job.39:20, 1Ch.29:25; כָּבוֹד, Job.19:9, Est.5:11, al.), visible brightness, splendour, glory: of light, Act.22:11; of heavenly bodies, 1Co.15:40ff.; esp. that wh. radiates from God's presence, as manifested in the pillar of cloud and in the Holy of Holies (= כָּבוֹד, Exo.16:10 25:22 40:34, al.; and new Heb. שְׁכִינָה, 2Ma.2:8; see DB, iv, 489b), Rom.9:4, Jas.2:1 (see Hort, Mayor, in l.); hence of the manifested glory of God, Rom.1:23, Col.1:11 Eph.1:6, 12 17 3:16; of the same as communicated to man through Christ, 2Co.3:18 4:6; and of the glorious condition into which Christians shall enter hereafter, Rom.8:18, 21 9:23, 2Ti.2:10, al. SYN.: ἔπαινος τιμή (see Hort on 1Pe.1:7). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέμψαντος

한글 발음: 펨프산토스

pempsantos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3992 원어 검색에서 보기 G3992
Lemma
πέμπω
Strong
G3992
형태소
V-AAP-GSM
품사
동사
보내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보내다, 파견하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πέμπω [in LXX chiefly for שָׁלַח ;] to send; __(a) of persons: with accusative, absol., Mat.22:7, Luk.7:19, Jhn.1:22, 2Co.9:3, al.; ptcp. before verb., Mat.14:10, Act.19:31, al.; ptcp. before διά (= Heb. יָד;, 1Ki.16:20, al.), Mat.11:2 (cf. Rev.1:1); of teachers sent by God, Jhn.1:33 4:34, Rom.8:3, al.; with accusative and dative, 1Co.4:17, Php.2:19; before πρός, with accusative, Luk.4:26, Jhn.16:7, al.; before λέγων (cf. Heb. אָמַר שָׁלַח Gen.38:25, al.), Luk.7:6, 19; before εἰς, with accusative loc., Mat.2:8, Luk.15:15, al.; before εἰς (of purpose), Eph.6:22, Col.4:8, 1Pe.2:14; with inf., Jhn.1:33, 1Co.16:3, Rev.22:16; __(b) of things : Rev.11:10; before εἰς, Rev.1:11; id., of purpose, Act.11:29, Php.4:16; with dative of person(s), 2Th.2:11; π. τ. δρέπανον σου (cf. εξαποστείλατε δρέπανα = מַגָּל שָׁלַח, Jol.3:13), Rev.14:15, 18 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, μετα-, προ-, συν-πέμπω) SYN.: ἀποστέλλω, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν,

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτος

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀληθής

한글 발음: 알레테스

alēthēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G227 원어 검색에서 보기 G227
Lemma
ἀληθής
Strong
G227
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
참된/진실한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '참된, 진실한'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀληθής, -ές (λήθω = λανθάνω, hence primarily, unconcealed, manifest; hence, actual, real), [in LXX for אֶמֶת, etc. ;] __(a) of things, true, conforming to reality: Jhn.4:18 5:31-32 6:55 (= ἀληθινός, which see) Jhn.8:13-14, 17 10:41 19:35 21:24, Act.12:9, Php.4:8, Tit.1:13, 1Pe.5:12, 2Pe.2:22, 1Jn.2:6, 3Jn.12; __(b) of persons, truthful: Mat.22:16, Mrk.12:14, Jhn.3:33 7:18 8:26, Rom.3:4, 2Co.6:8.† SYN.: ἀληθινός, real, genuine, ideal, as opposite to spurious or imperfect ἀληθής, true to fact, as opposite to false, lying, denotes the actuality of a thing: ἀληθινός, its relation to the corresponding con­ception. (Cf. Tr., Syn., § viii; Cremer, 84 f., 631 Abbott, JV, 234 f.; DB, iv, 818 f.; MM, VGT, s.vv.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν,

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀδικία

한글 발음: 아디키아

adikia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G93 원어 검색에서 보기 G93
Lemma
ἀδικία
Strong
G93
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
불의
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '불의, 부정, 악'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀδικία, -ας, ἡ (ἄδικος), [in LXX for עָוֹן, פֶּשַׁע, עָוֶל, etc. ;] __1. injustice: Luk.18:6, Rom.9:14. __2. unrighteousness, iniquity: Jhn.7:18, Act.8:23, Rom.1:18, 29 2:8 6:13, 2Ti.2:19, 1Jn.1:9 5:17; opposite to ἀλήθεια, 1Co.13:6, 2Th.2:12; to δικαιοσύνη ], Rom.3:5; ἀπάτη τῆς ἀ., 2Th.2:10; μισθὸς ἀδικίας, Act.1:18, 2Pe.2:13,15; ἐγράται τῆς ἀ., Luk.13:27; μαμωνᾶς τῆς ἀ., Luk.16:9; κόσμος τῆς ἀ., Jas.3:6; οἰκονόμος τῆς ἀ., Luk.16:8. __3. = ἀδίκημα, an unrighteous act: ironically, a favour, 2Co.12:13; pl., Heb.8:12 (Cremer, 261; MM, VGT, see word). † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ

한글 발음: 아우토

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

한글 발음: 우크

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔστιν.

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Did not Moses give you the law, and [yet] none of you doeth the law? Why seek ye to kill me?

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Μωϋσῆς

한글 발음: 모우세스

Mōusēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3475 원어 검색에서 보기 G3475
Lemma
Μωϋσῆς, Μωσῆς
Strong
G3475
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
모세
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '모세'.

원문 정의 보기

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dative - (as LXX: Exo.5:20, al.), and -εῖ, accusative -ῆν (ac LXX) and -έα (Luk.16:29 only) (Heb. מֹשֶׁה), Moses: Mat.8:4 17:3-4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22 24:44, Jhn.7:23, Act.13:39 15:5 28:23, 1Co.9:9, Heb.10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Luk.16:29 24:27, Act.15:21, 2Co.3:15 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δέδωκεν

한글 발음: 데도켄

dedōken

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1325 원어 검색에서 보기 G1325
Lemma
δίδωμι
Strong
G1325
형태소
V-RAI-3S
품사
동사
주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '주다, 베풀다, 내어주다'.

원문 정의 보기

δίδωμι, [in LXX chiefly for נָתַן (53 words in all) ;] to give—in various senses, accusative to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.4:9 5:31, Jhn.1:12, al. mult.; with dative of person(s), before ἐκ, Mat.25:8; id. with genitive part.. Rev.2:17; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.3:16, Rev.20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Gal.2:9; φίλημα, Luk.7:45; γνῶσιν, Luk.1:77; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Mrk.4:7, 8; ἐργασίαν (Deiss., LAE, 117f.), Luk.12:58; with inf. fin., Mat.27:34, Mrk.5:43, Luk.8:55, Jhn.6:52, al.; with dative of person(s) and inf., Luk.1:74, al.; with accusative and inf., Act.2:27, Rev.3:9; with dupl. accusative, Mat.20:28, Mrk.10:45, Eph.1:22 4:11, 2Th.3:9, 1Ti.2:6, al.; ἑαυτὸν δ. εἰς (Polyb., al.), Act.19:31; with dative of person(s), before κατά (MM, Exp., xi), Rev.2:28 (LXX); δ. ἵνα, Rev.3:9; δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην, Rev.3:8. SYN.: δωρέομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμῖν

한글 발음: 휘민

humin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2DP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νόμον;

한글 발음: 노몬

nomon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3551 원어 검색에서 보기 G3551
Lemma
νόμος
Strong
G3551
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
율법/법
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '율법, 법, 규범'. 모세 율법.

원문 정의 보기

νόμος, -ου, ὁ (νέμω, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc. ;] that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.); __1. of law in general: Rom.3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, Heb.8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Jas.1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 267:3), Jas.2:8. __2. Of a force or influence impelling to action: Rom.7:21, 23a, 25 8:2. __3. Of the Mosaic law: Mat.5:18, Luk.2:27, Jhn.1:17, Act.6:13, Rom.2:15, 1Co.9:8, 1Ti.1:8, Heb.7:19; al.; Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22, Jhn.7:23, Act.15:5, al.; κυρίου, Luk.2:39; κατὰ τὸν ν., Act.22:12, Heb.7:5 9:22. __4. As printed, Abbott-Smith mistakenly numbers this as 3.Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Rom.2:12, 13), νόμος, __(a) of law in general: Rom.2:12, 14b 3:20, 21 4:15, al.; __(b) of the Mosaic law in its quality as law: Rom.2:14a 5:20 10:4, Gal.2:19, al.; οἱ ἐκ ν., Rom.4:14; ὑπὸ νόμον, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5; ν. πράσσειν (πληροῦν), Rom.2:25 13:8. __5. Of Christian teaching: ν. πίστεως, Rom.3:27; τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2. __6. By meton., of the books which contain the law; __(a) of the Pentateuch: Mat.12:5, Jhn.1:45, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ οἱ προφῆται, Mat.5:17, Luk.16:16, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ προφῆται κ. ψαλμοί, Luk.24:44. __(b) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. תּוֹרָה): Jhn.10:34 12:34 15:25, 1Co.14:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδεὶς

한글 발음: 우데이스

oudeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3762 원어 검색에서 보기 G3762
Lemma
οὐδείς
Strong
G3762
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al.; absol., Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al.; neut., οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al.; id. with genitive partit., Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al.; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al.; with neg., strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al.; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξ

한글 발음: 엑스

ex

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμῶν

한글 발음: 휘몬

humōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιεῖ

한글 발음: 포이에이

poiei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νόμον·

한글 발음: 노몬

nomon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3551 원어 검색에서 보기 G3551
Lemma
νόμος
Strong
G3551
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
율법/법
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '율법, 법, 규범'. 모세 율법.

원문 정의 보기

νόμος, -ου, ὁ (νέμω, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc. ;] that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.); __1. of law in general: Rom.3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, Heb.8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Jas.1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 267:3), Jas.2:8. __2. Of a force or influence impelling to action: Rom.7:21, 23a, 25 8:2. __3. Of the Mosaic law: Mat.5:18, Luk.2:27, Jhn.1:17, Act.6:13, Rom.2:15, 1Co.9:8, 1Ti.1:8, Heb.7:19; al.; Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22, Jhn.7:23, Act.15:5, al.; κυρίου, Luk.2:39; κατὰ τὸν ν., Act.22:12, Heb.7:5 9:22. __4. As printed, Abbott-Smith mistakenly numbers this as 3.Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Rom.2:12, 13), νόμος, __(a) of law in general: Rom.2:12, 14b 3:20, 21 4:15, al.; __(b) of the Mosaic law in its quality as law: Rom.2:14a 5:20 10:4, Gal.2:19, al.; οἱ ἐκ ν., Rom.4:14; ὑπὸ νόμον, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5; ν. πράσσειν (πληροῦν), Rom.2:25 13:8. __5. Of Christian teaching: ν. πίστεως, Rom.3:27; τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2. __6. By meton., of the books which contain the law; __(a) of the Pentateuch: Mat.12:5, Jhn.1:45, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ οἱ προφῆται, Mat.5:17, Luk.16:16, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ προφῆται κ. ψαλμοί, Luk.24:44. __(b) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. תּוֹרָה): Jhn.10:34 12:34 15:25, 1Co.14:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τί

한글 발음: 티

ti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5101 원어 검색에서 보기 G5101
Lemma
τίς
Strong
G5101
형태소
I-ASN
품사
-
누구/무엇 (의문)
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문대명사 '누구, 무엇, 어느'.

원문 정의 보기

τίς, neut., τί, genitive, τίνος, interrog. pron., [in LXX for מָה ,מִי ;] in masc. and fem., who, which, what?; in neut., which, what?, used both in direct and in indirect questions. __I. I. As subst., __1. 1. masc., fem.: τίς; who, what?, Mat.3:7 26:68; Mrk.11:28, Luk.9:9, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Act.7:52, Heb.1:5, al; before ἐκ (= genitive partit.), Mat.6:27, Luk.14:28, Jhn.8:46; = ποῖος, Mrk.4:41 6:2, Luk.19:3, Act.17:19, al.; = πότερος (M, Pr., 77), Mat.21:31 27:17, Luk.22:27, al.; = ὅς or ὅστις (rare in cl.; cf. Bl., §50, 5; M, Pr., 93), Act.13:25. __2. Neut.: τί; what?, Mat.5:47 11:7, Mrk.10:3, al.; χάριν τίνος, 1Jn.3:12; διὰ τί, Mat.9:11, al.; εἰς τί, Mat.14:31, al.; elliptically, ἵνα τί (sc. γένηται), why, Mat.9:5, al.; τί οὖν, Rom.3:9 6:1, 15 1Co.14:15, al.; τί γάρ, Rom.3:3, Phi 1:18; τί ἐμοὶ (ὑμῖν) καὶ σοί, see: ἔγω. __II. As adj.: who? what? which?, Mat.5:46, Luk.14:31, Jhn.2:18, al. __III. As adv.: = διὰ τι (τί ὅτι), why, Mat.6:28, Mrk.4:40, Luk.6:46, Jhn.18:23, al.; in rhet. questions, = a negation, Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, 23 1Co.5:12 7:16, al. in exclamations (like Heb. מָה), how (2Ki.6:20, Psa.3:2, al.), Luk.12:49. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητεῖτε

한글 발음: 제테이테

zēteite

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-PAI-2P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποκτεῖναι;

한글 발음: 아포크테이나이

apokteinai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The multitude answered, Thou hast a demon: who seeketh to kill thee?

원어

ἀπεκρίθη

한글 발음: 아페크리테

apekrithē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3S
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλος

한글 발음: 오클로스

ochlos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπεν·

한글 발음: 에이펜

eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δαιμόνιον

한글 발음: 다이모니온

daimonion

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1140 원어 검색에서 보기 G1140
Lemma
δαιμόνιον
Strong
G1140
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
귀신/악령
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '귀신, 악령'.

원문 정의 보기

δαιμόνιον, -ου, τό (neut. of δαιμόνιος, -α, -ον, divine), [in LXX (so also in π; see MM, Exp., x) for שֵׁד, אֱלִיל, (frequently in To) ;] __1. as in cl.; __(a) the Divine power, Deity (Hdt., Plat., al.); __(b) an inferior divinity, deity or demon (as in magical π, Deiss., BS, 281; MM, Exp., x): ξένα δ., Act.17:18. __2. (a) in OT, heathen deities, false gods (e.g. Deu.32:17, Psa.95 (96):5); __(b) in NT, evil spirits, demons: θύουσιν δαιμονίοις, 1Co.10:20; διδασκαλίαι δαιμονίων, 1Ti.4:1; προσκυνεῖν τὰ δ., Rev.9:20; ἄρχων τῶν δ., Mat.9:34; especially (syn. with πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον) as operating upon and "possessing" (of. δαιμονίζομαι) men: Mat.11:18, and al.; εἰσέρχεσθαι δ. εἰς. . ., Luk.8:30; δ. ἔχειν, Luk.4:33; δ. ἐκβάλλειν, Mat.7:22 In the phrase πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου, Luk.4:33, the wider cl. usage (1. b) is recognised, ἀκ. being elsewhere in NT, the epithet of πν., and δ. = πν. ἀκ. (see ICC, in l; Cremer, 168) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔχεις·

한글 발음: 에케이스

echeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2192 원어 검색에서 보기 G2192
Lemma
ἔχω
Strong
G2192
형태소
V-PAI-2S
품사
동사
가지다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가지다, 소유하다, (어떤 상태에) 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔχω, [in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), יֵשׁ,בַּעַל, etc., 59 words in all ;] (on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, see M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183), to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions. __I. Trans.; __1. 1. to have, hold, hold fast, etc.; __(a) to hold, as, in the hand: Rev.5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Rev.1:16 10:2, al.; __(b) of arms and clothing, = φέρω, φορέω, to bear, wear: Mat.3:4 22:12, al.; so frequently present ptcp. (LS, see word, A, I, 6; Bl., 74, 2), Mrk.11:13, Jhn.18:10, Rev.9:17, al.; __(with) of a woman, ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ, to be with child: Mrk.13:17, Rom.9:10; __(d) to hold fast, keep: Luk.19:20; metaphorically, of the mind and conduct, Mrk.16:8 (cf. Job.21:6, Isa.13:8; Deiss., BS, 293; Field, Notes, 44f.), Jhn.14:21, Rom.1:28, 1Ti.3:9, 2Ti.1:13, Rev.6:9, al.; __(e) to involve: Heb.10:35 (LXX), Jas.1:4, 1Jn.4:18; (f) = Lat. habere (Bl., §34, 5; 73, 5), to hold, consider: with accusative and predic. ptcp., Luk.14:18; with accusative, before ὡς, Mat.14:5; εἰς (Hebraism), Mat.21:46; on (Bl., §70, 2), Mrk.11:32. __2. to have, possess; __(a) in general, with accusative of thing(s): Mat.19:22, Mrk.10:22, Luk.12:19, Jhn.10:16, 1Co.11:22, al.; of wealth or poverty, absol., ἔχειν (neg. οὐκ, μή), Mat.13:12 25:29, 2Co.8:12; ἐκ τ. ἔχειν, according to your means, 2Co.8:11; __(b) of relationship, association, and: πατέρα, Jhn.8:41; γυναῖκα (MM, xiv), 1Co.7:2; φίλον, Luk.11:5; βασιλέα, Jhn.19:15; ποιμένα, Mat.9:36; with dupl. accusative, Mat.3:9, al.; __(with) of parts or members: ὦτα, Mat.19:15; μέλη, Rom.12:4; θεμελίους, __(d) with accusative, as periphrasis of verb: μνεῖαν ἔ. (= μεμνῆσθαι), 1Th.3:6; ἀγάπην, Jhn.13:35; γνῶσιν, 1Co.8:1; πεποίθησιν, 2Co.3:4; θλίψιν, Jhn.16:33, etc. (Thayer, see word, I, 2, f., g.); __(e) of duty, necessity, etc.: ἀνάγκην, 1Co.7:37; νόμον, Jhn.19:7; ἐπιταγήν, 1Co.7:25; ἀγῶνα, Php.1:30; κρίμα, 1Ti.5:12; __(f) of complaints and disputes; κατά, with genitive of person(s), Mat.5:23, Mrk.11:25; id. before ὅτι, Rev.2:4, 20; with accusative before πρός, Act.24:19, al.; __(g) with inf., __(α) (cl.) to be able (Field, Notes, 14): Mat.18:25, Mrk.14:8 (sc. ποιῆσαι), Luk.12:4, Act.4:14, al; __(β) of necessity (BL, §69, 4): Luk.12:50, Act.23:17-19 28:19. __II. Intrans. (BL, §53, 1), to be in a certain condition: ἑτοίμως ἔ., with inf., Act.21:13, 2Co.12:14; ἐσχάτως (which see), Mrk.5:23; κακῶς, to be ill, Mat.4:24, al.; καλῶς, Mk 16:[18]; κομψότερον, Jhn.4:52; πῶς, Act.15:36; impers., ἄλλως εἴχει, it is otherwise, 1Ti.5:25; οὕτως, Act.7:1, al.; τὸ νῦν ἔχον, as things now are (Tob.7:11), Act.24:25. __III. Mid., -ομαι, to hold oneself fast, hold on or cling to, be next to: with genitive, τ. ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας, Heb.6:9 (Rendall, in l.); ptcp., ὁ ἐχόμενος, near, next: of place, Mrk.1:38; of time, τ. ἐχομένη (ἡμέρα, expressed or understood), Luk.13:33, Act.20:15 21:26; (σαββάτῳ), Act.13:44. (Cf. ἀν-, προσ-αν-, ἀντ-, ἀπ-, ἐν-, ἐπ-, κατ-, μετ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, ὑπερ-, ὑπ-έχω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τίς

한글 발음: 티스

tis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5101 원어 검색에서 보기 G5101
Lemma
τίς
Strong
G5101
형태소
I-NSM
품사
-
누구/무엇 (의문)
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문대명사 '누구, 무엇, 어느'.

원문 정의 보기

τίς, neut., τί, genitive, τίνος, interrog. pron., [in LXX for מָה ,מִי ;] in masc. and fem., who, which, what?; in neut., which, what?, used both in direct and in indirect questions. __I. I. As subst., __1. 1. masc., fem.: τίς; who, what?, Mat.3:7 26:68; Mrk.11:28, Luk.9:9, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Act.7:52, Heb.1:5, al; before ἐκ (= genitive partit.), Mat.6:27, Luk.14:28, Jhn.8:46; = ποῖος, Mrk.4:41 6:2, Luk.19:3, Act.17:19, al.; = πότερος (M, Pr., 77), Mat.21:31 27:17, Luk.22:27, al.; = ὅς or ὅστις (rare in cl.; cf. Bl., §50, 5; M, Pr., 93), Act.13:25. __2. Neut.: τί; what?, Mat.5:47 11:7, Mrk.10:3, al.; χάριν τίνος, 1Jn.3:12; διὰ τί, Mat.9:11, al.; εἰς τί, Mat.14:31, al.; elliptically, ἵνα τί (sc. γένηται), why, Mat.9:5, al.; τί οὖν, Rom.3:9 6:1, 15 1Co.14:15, al.; τί γάρ, Rom.3:3, Phi 1:18; τί ἐμοὶ (ὑμῖν) καὶ σοί, see: ἔγω. __II. As adj.: who? what? which?, Mat.5:46, Luk.14:31, Jhn.2:18, al. __III. As adv.: = διὰ τι (τί ὅτι), why, Mat.6:28, Mrk.4:40, Luk.6:46, Jhn.18:23, al.; in rhet. questions, = a negation, Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, 23 1Co.5:12 7:16, al. in exclamations (like Heb. מָה), how (2Ki.6:20, Psa.3:2, al.), Luk.12:49. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σε

한글 발음: 세

se

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2AS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητεῖ

한글 발음: 제테이

zētei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποκτεῖναι;¶

한글 발음: 아포크테이나이

apokteinai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Jesus answered and said unto them,I did one work, and ye all marvel because thereof.

원어

Ἀπεκρίθη

한글 발음: 아페크리테

Apekrithē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3S
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπεν

한글 발음: 에이펜

eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς·

한글 발음: 아우토이스

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἓν

한글 발음: 헨

hen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1520 원어 검색에서 보기 G1520
Lemma
εἷς
Strong
G1520
형태소
A-ASN
품사
형용사
하나/한
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '하나, 한 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

εἷς ιά, ἕν, genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, cardinal numeral, one; __1. one, as opposite to many: Mat.25:15, Rom.5:12, 1Co.10:8, al.; as subst., Rom.5:15, Eph.2:14; id. with genitive partit., Mat.5:19, al.; before ἐκ (ἐξ), Mrk.14:18, Jhn.6:8, al.; metaphorically, of union and concord, Jhn.10:30 17:11, Rom.12:4-5, Php.1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Luk.14:18; with neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one, none (cl.), Mat.5:18 10:29, Luk.11:46 12:6. __2. Emphatically, to the exclusion of others; __(a) a single (one): Mat.21:24, Mrk.8:14; absol., 1Co.9:24, al.; οὐδὲ εἷς, Mat.27:14, Jhn.1:3, Rom.3:10, al.; __(b) one, alone: Mrk.2:7 10:18, Luk.18:19; __(with) one and the same: Rom.3:30, 1Co.3:8 11:5 12:11, 1Jn.5:8. __3. In late Gk., with weakened force, = τις or indef. art. (of. Heb. אֶחָד, Gen.22:13, al.; see B1., § 45, 2; M, Pr., 96 f.): Mat.8:19 19:6, Rev.8:13, al.; εἷς τις (Bl., l.with), Luk.22:50, Jhn.11:49 __4. Distributively: εἷς καστος (cl.), Luk.4:40, Act.2:6, al.; εἷς . . . καὶ εἷς (cl., εἷς μὲν . . . εἷς δέ), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.20:12, al. (cf. LXX and use of Heb. אֶחָד, Exo.17:12, al); ὁ εἷς . . . ὁ ἕτερος (ἄλλος) = cl. ὁ μὲν (ἕτερος) . . . ὁ δέ (ἕτερος), Mat.6:24, Luk.7:41, Rev.17:10; καθ᾽ εἷς, εἷς κ. είς (in which καθ᾽ is adverbial, or the expression formed from the analogy of ἕν καθ᾽ ἔν; M, Pr., 105), one by one, severally: Mrk.14:19, Rom.12:5, al.; εἷς τὸν ἕνα = ἀλλήλους (B1., 45, 2; M, Pr., 246), 1Th.5:11. __5. As ordinal = πρῶτος (like Heb. אֶחָד; Bl., § 45, 1; M, Pr., 95 f.), first: Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔργον

한글 발음: 에르곤

ergon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2041 원어 검색에서 보기 G2041
Lemma
ἔργον
Strong
G2041
형태소
N-ASN
품사
명사
일/행위
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '일, 행위, 업적'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔργον, -ου, τό (originally Ϝέργον, work), [very frequently in LXX, chiefly for מַשֶׂה, מְלָאכָה, also for עֲבֹדָה, פֹּעַל, etc. ;] __1. work, task, employment: Mrk.13:34, Jhn.4:34 17:4, Act.13:2, Php.1:22 2:30, 1Th.5:13, al.; of an enterprise or undertaking (Deu.15:10, Wis.2:12), Act.5:38. __2. a deed, action: Tit.1:16, Jas.1:25 . listing, from λόγος, Luk.24:19, Rom.15:18, 2Th.2:17, 1Jn.3:18; ἐν λόγοις κ. ἔ., Act.7:22; of acts of God, Jhn.9:3, Act.13:41" (LXX), Heb.4:10, Rev.15:3; of Christ, Mat.11:2; esp. in Jo, e.g. 5:20, 36 7:3 10:38 14:11, 12 15:24; in ethical sense, of human actions (AR, Eph., 190), bad or good, Mat.23:3, Luk.11:48, Jhn.3:20, 21 Jas.2:14ff. 3:13, Rev.2:5 3:8; τὸ ἔ., collectively, Gal.6:4, Jas.1:4, 1Pe.1:17, Rev.22:12; τὸ ἔ. τ. νόμου, Rom.2:15; ἔ. ἀγαθόν, Rom.2:7, Col.1:10, 2Th.2:17, Tit.1:16, al.; καλόν, Mat.26:10, Mrk.14:6; pl. (as frequently in cl.), Mat.5:16, 1Ti.5:10, 25 Heb.10:24; ἔ. πίστεως, 1Th.1:3, 2Th.1:11; ἔ. πονηρά, Col.1:21, 2Jo.11; νέκρα, Heb.6:1 9:14; ἄκαρπα, Eph.5:11; ἔ. ἀσεβείας, Ju 15; τ. σκότους, Rom.13:12, Eph.5:11; ἔ. νόμου, Rom.3:20, 28 Gal.2:16 3:2, 5 10. __3. that which is wrought or made, a work: 1Co.3:13-15; τ. χειρῶν, Act.7:41; of the works of God, Heb.1:10; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔ., 2Pe.3:10; τὸ ἔ. τ. θεοῦ, Rom.14:20. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐποίησα,

한글 발음: 에포이에사

epoiēsa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-AAI-1S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πάντες

한글 발음: 판테스

pantes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3956 원어 검색에서 보기 G3956
Lemma
πᾶς
Strong
G3956
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
모든/온
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '모든, 온, 각각의, 전부'.

원문 정의 보기

πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, genitive, παντός, πάσης, παντός, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] all, every. __I. As adj., __1. with subst. anarth., all, every, of every kind: Mat.3:10 4:23, Mrk.9:49, Luk.4:37, Jhn.2:1o, Act.27:20, Rom.7:8, Rev.18:17, al. mult.; pl., all, Act.22:15, Rom.5:12, Heb.1:6, al.; of the highest degree, π. ἐξουσία (προθυμία, χαρά), Mat.28:18, Act.17:11, Phi 2:29, al.; also the whole (though in this sense more frequently with art.), Mat.2:3, Act.2:36, Rom.11:26. __2. C. art. (before the art., after the noun, or, denoting totality, between the art. and noun), all, whole: Mat.8:32 13:2, Mrk.5:33, Luk.1:10, Act.7:14, Rom.3:19, Gal.5:14, Eph.4:16, al.; pl., Mat.2:4, Mrk.4:13, Rom.1:5, al. __II. As pron., __1. masc. and fem., every one: Mrk.9:49, Luk.16:16, Heb.2:9; before rel. pron., Mat.7:24, Act.2:21, Gal.3:10, al.; with ptcp. (anarth.), Mat.13:19, Luk.11:4; with ptcp. (with art.), Mat.5:22, Mrk.7:8, Luk.6:47, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:16, al.; pl., πάντες, absol., all, all men, Mat.10:22, Mrk.13:13, Luk.20:38, Jhn.1:7 3:26, 1Co.8:1, al.; οἱ π. (collectively, as a definite whole), Rom.11:32, 1Co.1:17, Eph.4:13, al.; π. οἱ (ὅσοι), Mat.4:24, Mrk.1:32, Luk.4:40, al. __2. Neut., __(a) sing., πᾶν, everything, all: πᾶν τό, with ptcp., 1Co.10:25, 27, Eph.5:13, 1Jn.2:16 5:4 (sc. ὄν); πᾶν ὅ, Jhn.17:2, Rom.14:23; collectively, of persons (Westc., in l.), Jhn.6:37, 39; with prep., in adverbial phrases, διὰ παντός, always, Mat.18:10, al.; ἐν παντί, in everything, in every way, 2Co.4:8, Phi 4:6, al.; __(b) pl., πάτνα, all things: absol., Jhn.1:3, 1Co.2:10, Heb.2:8, al.; of certain specified things, Mrk.4:34, Luk.1:3, Rom.8:28, 1Th.5:21, al.; accusative, πάντα, adverbially, wholly, in all things, in all respects, Act.20:35, 1Co.9:25, al.; with art., τὰ π., all things (a totality, as distinct from anarth. πάντα, all things severally; cf. Westc, Eph., 186f.), absol.: Rom.11:36, 1Co.8:6, Eph.3:9, Heb.1:3, al.; relatively, Mrk.4:11, Act.17:25, Rom.8:32, al.; πάντα, with ptcp., Mat.18:31, al.; πάντα ταῦτα (ταῦτα π.), Mat.6:32, 33, al.; πάντα, with prep, in adverbial phrases, πρὸ πάντων, above all things, Jas.5:12, 1Pe.4:8; ἐν π́, in all things, in all ways, 1Ti.3:11, 1Pe.4:11, al.; κατὰ πάντα, in all respects, Act.17:22, al. __3. C. neg., πᾶς οὐ (μή) = οὐδείς, see: οὐ and μή, and cf. M, Pr., 245f. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

θαυμάζετε.

한글 발음: 타우마제테

thaumazete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2296 원어 검색에서 보기 G2296
Lemma
θαυμάζω
Strong
G2296
형태소
V-PAI-2P
품사
동사
놀라다/이상히 여기다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '놀라다, 경탄하다, 이상히 여기다'.

원문 정의 보기

θαυμάζω [in LXX for נָשָׂא, etc. ;] to marvel, wonder, wonder at: absol., Mat.8:10, 27 9:33 15:31 21:20 22:22 27:14, Mrk.5:20 15:5, Luk.1:21 (R, txt.; ICC, in l, but see infr.), Luk.1:63 8:25 11:14 24:41, Jhn.5:20 7:15, Act.2:7 4:13 13:41, Rev.17:7-8; with accusative of person(s), Luk.7:9; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.24:12 (WH, R, mg. om.), Jhn.5:28, Act.7:31; θαῦμα μέγα, Rev.17:6; πρόσωπον (LXX for פָּנִים נָשָׂא, Deu.10:17, al.), Ju 16; before διά, with accusative, Mrk.6:6, Jhn.7:21; before ἐν, with dative obj., Luk.1:21 (? R, mg., but see supr); before ἐπί, with dative of thing(s), Luk.2:33 4:22 9:43 20:26, Act.3:12; περί, Luk.2:18; ὀπίσω, Rev.13:3; ὅτι, Luk.11:38, Jhn.3:7 4:27, Gal.1:6; εἰ, Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13. Pass. (Sir.38:3, Wis.8:11): before ἐν, with dative of person(s), 2Th.1:10 (cf. ἐκ-θαυμάζω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Moses hath given you circumcision (not that it is of Moses, but of the fathers); and on the sabbath ye circumcise a man.

원어

διὰ

한글 발음: 디아

dia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦτο

한글 발음: 투토

touto

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-ASN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Μωϋσῆς

한글 발음: 모우세스

Mōusēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3475 원어 검색에서 보기 G3475
Lemma
Μωϋσῆς, Μωσῆς
Strong
G3475
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
모세
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '모세'.

원문 정의 보기

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dative - (as LXX: Exo.5:20, al.), and -εῖ, accusative -ῆν (ac LXX) and -έα (Luk.16:29 only) (Heb. מֹשֶׁה), Moses: Mat.8:4 17:3-4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22 24:44, Jhn.7:23, Act.13:39 15:5 28:23, 1Co.9:9, Heb.10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Luk.16:29 24:27, Act.15:21, 2Co.3:15 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δέδωκεν

한글 발음: 데도켄

dedōken

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1325 원어 검색에서 보기 G1325
Lemma
δίδωμι
Strong
G1325
형태소
V-RAI-3S
품사
동사
주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '주다, 베풀다, 내어주다'.

원문 정의 보기

δίδωμι, [in LXX chiefly for נָתַן (53 words in all) ;] to give—in various senses, accusative to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.4:9 5:31, Jhn.1:12, al. mult.; with dative of person(s), before ἐκ, Mat.25:8; id. with genitive part.. Rev.2:17; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.3:16, Rev.20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Gal.2:9; φίλημα, Luk.7:45; γνῶσιν, Luk.1:77; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Mrk.4:7, 8; ἐργασίαν (Deiss., LAE, 117f.), Luk.12:58; with inf. fin., Mat.27:34, Mrk.5:43, Luk.8:55, Jhn.6:52, al.; with dative of person(s) and inf., Luk.1:74, al.; with accusative and inf., Act.2:27, Rev.3:9; with dupl. accusative, Mat.20:28, Mrk.10:45, Eph.1:22 4:11, 2Th.3:9, 1Ti.2:6, al.; ἑαυτὸν δ. εἰς (Polyb., al.), Act.19:31; with dative of person(s), before κατά (MM, Exp., xi), Rev.2:28 (LXX); δ. ἵνα, Rev.3:9; δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην, Rev.3:8. SYN.: δωρέομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμῖν

한글 발음: 휘민

humin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2DP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περιτομήν,

한글 발음: 페리토멘

peritomēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4061 원어 검색에서 보기 G4061
Lemma
περιτομή
Strong
G4061
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
할례
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '할례'.

원문 정의 보기

περι-τομή, -ῆς, ἡ (περιτέμνω), [in LXX: Gen.17:13, Exo.4:25-26 (מוּל ni., מוּלָה), Jer.11:16 * ;] circumcision; __(a) of the rite itself : Jhn.7:22-23 Act.7:8, Rom.4:11, Gal.5:11, Php.3:5; __(b) of the state of circumcision: Rom.2:25-28 3:1, 1Co.7:19, Gal.5:6 6:15, Col.3:11; ἐν π. ὤν, Rom.4:10; __(with) by meton., π. = οἱ περιτμηθέντες, the circumcised: Rom.3:30 4:9, 12 15:8, Gal.2:7-9, Eph.2:11; οἱ ἐκ τῆς π., of Jews, Rom.4:12; of Jewish Christians, Act.11:2, Gal.2:12, Tit.1:10; οἱ ἐκ π. πιστοί, Act.10:45; οἱ ὄντες ἐκ π., Col.4:11 Metaphorical, Rom.2:29, Col.2:11, Php.3:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐχ

한글 발음: 우크

ouch

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Μωϋσέως

한글 발음: 모우세오스

Mōuseōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3475 원어 검색에서 보기 G3475
Lemma
Μωϋσῆς, Μωσῆς
Strong
G3475
형태소
N-GSM-P
품사
명사
모세
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '모세'.

원문 정의 보기

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dative - (as LXX: Exo.5:20, al.), and -εῖ, accusative -ῆν (ac LXX) and -έα (Luk.16:29 only) (Heb. מֹשֶׁה), Moses: Mat.8:4 17:3-4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22 24:44, Jhn.7:23, Act.13:39 15:5 28:23, 1Co.9:9, Heb.10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Luk.16:29 24:27, Act.15:21, 2Co.3:15 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστὶν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλ᾽

한글 발음: 알

all᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πατέρων,

한글 발음: 파테론

paterōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3962 원어 검색에서 보기 G3962
Lemma
πατήρ
Strong
G3962
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
아버지
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '아버지'. 하나님의 호칭으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

πατήρ, πατρός, -τρί, τέρα, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for אָב ;] a father; __1. prop., __(a) of the male parent: Mat.2:22, Luk.1:17, Jhn.4:53; anarth., Heb.12:7 (M, Pr., 82 f.); pl., of both parents (cl.), Heb.11:23; οἱ π. τ. σαρκός, Heb.12:9; __(b) of a forefather or ancestor (in cl. usually in pl.; Hom., al.): Mat.3:9, Luk.1:73, Jhn.8:39, al.; pl., Mat.23:30, 32 Luk.6:23, 26 Jhn.4:20, 1Co.10:1, al. __2. Metaphorical, __(a) of an author, originator, or archetype (= αἴτιος, ἀρχηγός, etc.; Pind., Plat., al.): Jhn.8:41-44, Rom.4:11, 12 16. __(b) as a title of respect or honour, used of seniors, teachers and others in a position of responsible authority (Jdg.17:10, 2Ki.2:12, Pro.1:8, al.): Mat.23:9 Act.7:2 22:1, 1Jn.2:13. __3. Of God (as in cl. of Zeus) as Father; __(a) of created things: τ. φώτων, Jas.1:17; __(b) of all sentient beings: Eph.3:14, 15 Heb.12:9; __(with) of men, esp. those in covenant relation with Him (freq in OT and later Jewish lit.; see Dalman, Words, 184ff.): Mat.6:4, Luk.6:36, Jhn.4:21, Jas.3:9, al.; ὁ π. ὁ ἐν (τ.) οὐρανοῖς, Mat.5:16, Mrk.11:25; ὁ π. ὁ οὐράνιος, Mat.6:14 15:13; esp. in the Epp., of Christians: Rom.8:15, 2Co.6:18, Gal.4:6, Eph.2:18 4:6, 1Jn.2:1; with genitive qual., τ. οἰκτιρμῶν, 2Co.1:3; τ. δοξῆς, Eph.1:17; __(d) of Christ (Dalman, Words, 190 ff.); __(α) by our Lord himself: ὁ π., Mat.11:25-27, Luk.10:2, 22 Jhn.5:20-23, al.; ὁ π. μου, Mat.11:27, al.; ὁ ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς, Mat.7:11, al.; ὁ οὐράνιος, Mat.15:13; vocat., Jhn.11:41 12:27, 28 17:1, 5, 11, 20, 25 (cf. Abbott, JG., 96 f.); __(β) by Apostles: Jhn.1:14 (anarth.; see M, Pr., l.with), Rom.15:6, 2Co.1:3 11:31, Eph.1:3, Col.1:3, Heb.1:5, 1Pe.1:3, Rev.1:6 (cf. Westc., Epp. Jo., 27-34). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σαββάτῳ

한글 발음: 삽바토

sabbatō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4521 원어 검색에서 보기 G4521
Lemma
σάββατον
Strong
G4521
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
안식일
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '안식일, 한 주'.

원문 정의 보기

σάββατον, -ου, τό (Aram. שַׁבָּתָא, transliterated σάββατα, and this being mistaken for a pl., the sing. σάββατον was formed from it), and σάββατα, -ων, τά [in LXX for שַׁבָּת, שַׁבָּתוֹן ;] __1. the seventh day of the week, the sabbath __(a) the sing. form -ον, τὸ σ.: Mat.12:8, Mrk.2:27, Luk.6:5, al.; ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ σ. (in LXX, Exo.20:8, al., usually τῶν σ., see infr.), Luk.13:16 14:5; ὁδὸς σαββάτου, Act.1:12 (cf. Mat.24:29); dative, of time (τῷ) σ., Luk.6:9 14:1; ἐν (τῷ) σ., Mat.12:2, Luk.6:7, Jhn.5:16, al.; accusative, of duration, τὸ σ., Luk.23:56; κατὰ πᾶν σ., Act.13:27 15:21 18:4; pl., σ. τρία, Act.17:2 R, txt. (but see infr.); __(b) as most frequently in LXX (see Swete, Mk., 17; Thackeray, Gr., 35) the pl. form, τὰ σ. (see supr. on the Aram. form. There is also an analogy in the names of other festivals, τ. ἐγκαίνια, ἄζυμα, etc.): Mat.28:1, Col.2:16; ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σ. (Exo.20:8, al.), Luk.4:16, Act.13:14 16:13; dative pl. (in LXX -τοις, but 1Ma.2:38 as in NT) by metaplasmus (El., § 9, 3), σάββασι, Mat.12:1, 5 12:10-12 Mrk.1:21 2:23 3:2, 4, Luk.4:31 6:2. __2. seven days, a week; __(a) the sing. form: πρώτη σαββάτσυ, Mrk.16:9; δὶς τοῦ σ. (Bl., § 35, 4; 36, 13), Luk.18:12; κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου, 1Co.16:2; pl., σ. τρία, Act.17:2 R, mg. (but see supr.); __(b) the pl. form: ἡ μία τῶν σ. (where the genitive = μετὰ τά; Soph., Lex., 43a), Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, Luk.24:1, Jhn.20:1, 19, Act.20:7 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περιτέμνετε

한글 발음: 페리템네테

peritemnete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4059 원어 검색에서 보기 G4059
Lemma
περιτέμνω
Strong
G4059
형태소
V-PAI-2P
품사
동사
할례를 행하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할례를 행하다, 베다'.

원문 정의 보기

περι-τέμνω [in LXX chiefly for מוּל ;] (Ion., Epic. and late writers), to cut around (Hdt.), hence, to circumcise (π. τὰ αἰδοῖα, Hdt.) : Luk.1:59 2:21, Jhn.7:22, Act.7:8 15:5 16:3 21:21. Pass. and mid., to be circumcised, receive circumcision: Act.15:1, 1Co.7:18, Gal.2:3 5:2-3 6:12-13 Metaphorical (cf. Deu.10:16, Jer.4:4, al.), Col.2:11 (see Deiss., BS, 151 f.; MM, xix).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωπον.

한글 발음: 안트로폰

anthrōpon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
If a man receiveth circumcision on the sabbath, that the law of Moses may not be broken; are ye wroth with me, because I made a man every whit whole on the sabbath?

원어

εἰ

한글 발음: 에이

ei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1487 원어 검색에서 보기 G1487
Lemma
εἰ
Strong
G1487
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일/~인지
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사 '만일 ~라면'. 간접의문 '~인지'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰ, conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions. __I. Conditional, if; __1. with indic, expressing a general assumption; __(a) pres.: before indic, pres., Mat.11:14, Rom.8:25, al.; before imperat., Mrk.4:23 9:22, Jhn.15:18, 1Co.7:9, al.; before fut. indic., Luk.16:31, Rom.8:11, al.; before pf. or aor., with negation in apodosis, Mat.12:26, Rom.4:14, al.; similarly, before impf., Luk.17:6, Jhn.8:39; before quæst., Mat.6:23, Jhn.5:47 7:23 8:46, 1Pe.2:20; __(b) fut.: Mat.26:33, 1Pe.2:20; __(with) pf.: Jhn.11:12, Rom.6:5, al.; __(d) aor.: Luk.16:11 19:8, Jhn.13:32, 18:23, Rev.20:15, al. __2. Where the assumption is certain = ἐπεί: Mat.12:28, Jhn.7:4, Rom.5:17, al. __3. Of an unfulfilled condition, with indic, impf., aor. or plpf., before ἄν, with imp. or aor. (see: ἄν, I, i). __4. C. indic., after verbs denoting wonder, etc., sometimes, but not always, coupled with an element of doubt: Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13, al. __5. C. indic., as in LXX (Num.14:3o, 1Ki.14:45, al. = Heb. אִם), in oaths, with the formula of imprecation understood in a suppressed apodosis (WM, 627; Burton, §272): Mrk.8:12, Heb.3:11" (LXX) 4:3 (LXX). __6. Rarely (cl.) with optative, to express a merely possible condition: Act.24:19 27:39, 1Co.14:10 15:37, I Pe3:14, 17. __II. Interrogative, if, whether. __1. As in cl., in indir. questions after verbs of seeing, asking, knowing, saying, etc.: with indic. pres., Mat.26:63, Mrk.15:36, Act.19:2, 2Co.13:5, al.; fut., Mrk.3:2, Act.8:22, al.; aor., Mrk.15:44, 1Co.1:16, al.; with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 194), Php.3:12. __2. As in LXX (= Heb. אִם and interrog. הֲ, Gen.17:17, al.; see WM, 639f.; Viteau, i, 22), in direct questions: Mrk.8:23 (Tr., WH, txt.), Luk.13:23, 22:49, Act.19:2, al. __III. With other particles. __1. εἰ ἄρα, εἴγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see: ἄρα, γε. __2. εἰ δὲ καί, but if also: Luk.11:18; but even if, 1Co.4:7, 2Co.4:3 11:16. __3. εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, but if otherwise: Mrk.2:21, 22 Jhn.14:2, Rev.2:5, al. __4. εἰ καί, if even, if also, although: Mrk.14:29, Luk.11:8, 1Co.7:21, 2Co.4:16, Php.2:17, al. __5. καὶ εἰ, even if, see: καί __6. εἰ μή, if not, unless, except, but only: Mat.24:22, Mrk.2:26 6:5, Jhn.9:33, 1Co.7:17 (only), Gal.1:19 (cf. ἐὰν μή, 2:16; see Hort., Ja., xvi); ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, pleonastic (Bl., §65, 6), 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. __7. εἰ μήν = cl. ἦ μήν (M, Pr., 46), in oaths, surely (Eze.33:27, al.): Heb.6:14. __8. εἴ πως, if haply: Act.27:12, Rom.1:10. __9. εἴτε . . . εἴτε, whether . . . or; Rom.12:6-8, 1Co.3:22 13:8, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περιτομὴν

한글 발음: 페리토멘

peritomēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4061 원어 검색에서 보기 G4061
Lemma
περιτομή
Strong
G4061
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
할례
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '할례'.

원문 정의 보기

περι-τομή, -ῆς, ἡ (περιτέμνω), [in LXX: Gen.17:13, Exo.4:25-26 (מוּל ni., מוּלָה), Jer.11:16 * ;] circumcision; __(a) of the rite itself : Jhn.7:22-23 Act.7:8, Rom.4:11, Gal.5:11, Php.3:5; __(b) of the state of circumcision: Rom.2:25-28 3:1, 1Co.7:19, Gal.5:6 6:15, Col.3:11; ἐν π. ὤν, Rom.4:10; __(with) by meton., π. = οἱ περιτμηθέντες, the circumcised: Rom.3:30 4:9, 12 15:8, Gal.2:7-9, Eph.2:11; οἱ ἐκ τῆς π., of Jews, Rom.4:12; of Jewish Christians, Act.11:2, Gal.2:12, Tit.1:10; οἱ ἐκ π. πιστοί, Act.10:45; οἱ ὄντες ἐκ π., Col.4:11 Metaphorical, Rom.2:29, Col.2:11, Php.3:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λαμβάνει

한글 발음: 람바네이

lambanei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2983 원어 검색에서 보기 G2983
Lemma
λαμβάνω
Strong
G2983
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
받다/취하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '받다, 취하다, 잡다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαμβάνω, [in LXX chiefly for לקח, also for אחז ,לכד ,נשׂא, etc. ;] __1. to take, lay hold of: absol., Mat.26:26, Mrk.14:22; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.5:40 26:52, al. mult.; with accusative of person(s), Mat.21:35, Mrk.12:3, al.; pleonastic λαβών (M, Pr., 230; Bl., §74, 2), Mat.13:31 14:19, al.; so also indic., Mrk.7:27, Jhn.19:1, 40 Rev.8:5, al.; metaphorically, with accusative of thing(s), ἀφορμήν, Rom.7:8, 11; ὑδόδειγμα, Jas.5:10; id. with accusative of person(s), φόβος, Luk.7:16; πνεῦμα, Luk.9:39; πειρασμός, 1Co.10:13; aoristic pf. (M, Pr., 145, 238; BL, §59, 4), Rev.5:7 8:5, al. __2. to receive: absol., opposite to αἰτεῖν, Mat.7:8, al.; διδόναι, Mat.10:8, Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.27:6, Mrk.10:3o, al. mult.; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.6:21 13:20 19:27, 2Jo.10; ῥαπίσμασιν (a vulgarism; Bl., §38, 3), Mrk.14:65; metaphorically, τ. λόγον, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16; τ. μαρτυρίαν, Jhn.3:11; τ. ῥήματα, Jhn.12:48; πρόσωπον (Heb. נָשָׂא פָּנִים, Dalman, Words, 30), Luk.20:21, Gal.2:6; ζωὴν αἰώνιον (Dalman, op. cit., 124f.), Mrk.10:30 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀντι-, συν-αντι- (-μαι), ἀπο-, ἐπι-, κατα-, μετα-, παρα-, συν-παρα-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, συν-περι-, ὑπο-λαμβάνω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωπος

한글 발음: 안트로포스

anthrōpos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σαββάτῳ

한글 발음: 삽바토

sabbatō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4521 원어 검색에서 보기 G4521
Lemma
σάββατον
Strong
G4521
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
안식일
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '안식일, 한 주'.

원문 정의 보기

σάββατον, -ου, τό (Aram. שַׁבָּתָא, transliterated σάββατα, and this being mistaken for a pl., the sing. σάββατον was formed from it), and σάββατα, -ων, τά [in LXX for שַׁבָּת, שַׁבָּתוֹן ;] __1. the seventh day of the week, the sabbath __(a) the sing. form -ον, τὸ σ.: Mat.12:8, Mrk.2:27, Luk.6:5, al.; ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ σ. (in LXX, Exo.20:8, al., usually τῶν σ., see infr.), Luk.13:16 14:5; ὁδὸς σαββάτου, Act.1:12 (cf. Mat.24:29); dative, of time (τῷ) σ., Luk.6:9 14:1; ἐν (τῷ) σ., Mat.12:2, Luk.6:7, Jhn.5:16, al.; accusative, of duration, τὸ σ., Luk.23:56; κατὰ πᾶν σ., Act.13:27 15:21 18:4; pl., σ. τρία, Act.17:2 R, txt. (but see infr.); __(b) as most frequently in LXX (see Swete, Mk., 17; Thackeray, Gr., 35) the pl. form, τὰ σ. (see supr. on the Aram. form. There is also an analogy in the names of other festivals, τ. ἐγκαίνια, ἄζυμα, etc.): Mat.28:1, Col.2:16; ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σ. (Exo.20:8, al.), Luk.4:16, Act.13:14 16:13; dative pl. (in LXX -τοις, but 1Ma.2:38 as in NT) by metaplasmus (El., § 9, 3), σάββασι, Mat.12:1, 5 12:10-12 Mrk.1:21 2:23 3:2, 4, Luk.4:31 6:2. __2. seven days, a week; __(a) the sing. form: πρώτη σαββάτσυ, Mrk.16:9; δὶς τοῦ σ. (Bl., § 35, 4; 36, 13), Luk.18:12; κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου, 1Co.16:2; pl., σ. τρία, Act.17:2 R, mg. (but see supr.); __(b) the pl. form: ἡ μία τῶν σ. (where the genitive = μετὰ τά; Soph., Lex., 43a), Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, Luk.24:1, Jhn.20:1, 19, Act.20:7 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

한글 발음: 히나

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λυθῇ

한글 발음: 뤼테

luthēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3089 원어 검색에서 보기 G3089
Lemma
λύω
Strong
G3089
형태소
V-APS-3S
품사
동사
풀다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '풀다, 끄르다, 폐하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λύω [in LXX for פָּתַח, נָתַר hi., etc. ;] __1. to loose, unbind, release: of things, Mrk.1:7, Luk.3:16, al.; of beasts, Mat.21:2, Luk.13:15, al.; of persons, Jhn.11:44, Act.22:30; of Satan, Rev.20:3, 7; metaphorically, of the marriage tie, 1Co.7:27; of one diseased, Luk.13:16; of release from sin, Rev.1:5, WH, R, txt. (see: λούω). __2. To resolve a whole into its parts, loosen, dissolve, break up, destroy: Jhn.2:19, Act.27:41, Rev.5:2; metaphorically, 2Pe.3:11; of an assembly, to dismiss: Act.13:43; τ. μεσότοιχον τ. φραγμοῦ, Eph.2:14; τ. στοιχεῖα, 2Pe.3:10; οὐρανοί, 2Pe.3:12; τ. ἔργα τ. διαβόλου, 1Jn.3:8; τ. ὠδῖνας τ. θανάτου, Act.2:24; of laws, etc., to break, annul, cancel (MM, xvi): ἐντολήν, Mat.5:19; τ. νόμον, Jhn.7:23; τ. σάββατον, Jhn.5:18; τ. γραφήν, Jhn.10:35. (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, δια-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, κατα-, παρα-λύω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νόμος

한글 발음: 노모스

nomos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3551 원어 검색에서 보기 G3551
Lemma
νόμος
Strong
G3551
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
율법/법
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '율법, 법, 규범'. 모세 율법.

원문 정의 보기

νόμος, -ου, ὁ (νέμω, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc. ;] that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.); __1. of law in general: Rom.3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, Heb.8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Jas.1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 267:3), Jas.2:8. __2. Of a force or influence impelling to action: Rom.7:21, 23a, 25 8:2. __3. Of the Mosaic law: Mat.5:18, Luk.2:27, Jhn.1:17, Act.6:13, Rom.2:15, 1Co.9:8, 1Ti.1:8, Heb.7:19; al.; Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22, Jhn.7:23, Act.15:5, al.; κυρίου, Luk.2:39; κατὰ τὸν ν., Act.22:12, Heb.7:5 9:22. __4. As printed, Abbott-Smith mistakenly numbers this as 3.Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Rom.2:12, 13), νόμος, __(a) of law in general: Rom.2:12, 14b 3:20, 21 4:15, al.; __(b) of the Mosaic law in its quality as law: Rom.2:14a 5:20 10:4, Gal.2:19, al.; οἱ ἐκ ν., Rom.4:14; ὑπὸ νόμον, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5; ν. πράσσειν (πληροῦν), Rom.2:25 13:8. __5. Of Christian teaching: ν. πίστεως, Rom.3:27; τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2. __6. By meton., of the books which contain the law; __(a) of the Pentateuch: Mat.12:5, Jhn.1:45, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ οἱ προφῆται, Mat.5:17, Luk.16:16, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ προφῆται κ. ψαλμοί, Luk.24:44. __(b) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. תּוֹרָה): Jhn.10:34 12:34 15:25, 1Co.14:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Μωϋσέως,

한글 발음: 모우세오스

Mōuseōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3475 원어 검색에서 보기 G3475
Lemma
Μωϋσῆς, Μωσῆς
Strong
G3475
형태소
N-GSM-P
품사
명사
모세
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '모세'.

원문 정의 보기

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dative - (as LXX: Exo.5:20, al.), and -εῖ, accusative -ῆν (ac LXX) and -έα (Luk.16:29 only) (Heb. מֹשֶׁה), Moses: Mat.8:4 17:3-4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22 24:44, Jhn.7:23, Act.13:39 15:5 28:23, 1Co.9:9, Heb.10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Luk.16:29 24:27, Act.15:21, 2Co.3:15 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμοὶ

한글 발음: 에모이

emoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1DS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χολᾶτε

한글 발음: 콜라테

cholate

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5520 원어 검색에서 보기 G5520
Lemma
χολάω
Strong
G5520
형태소
V-PAI-2P
품사
동사
노하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '노하다, 화내다, 격분하다'.

원문 정의 보기

χολάω, -ῶ (χολή), [in LXX: 3Ma.3:1 R * ;] __1. to be melancholy mad (Aristoph.). __2. = χολοῦμαι, to be angry: with dative of person(s), Jhn.7:23.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅλον

한글 발음: 홀론

holon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3650 원어 검색에서 보기 G3650
Lemma
ὅλος
Strong
G3650
형태소
A-ASM
품사
형용사
온/전체의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '온, 전체의, 모든'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅλος, -η, -ον, [in LXX chiefly for כֹּל ;] of persons and things, whole, entire, complete; __1. of indefinite ideas, with subst. anarth.: Luk.5:5, Act.11:26 28:30, Tit.1:11; ὅλον ἄνθρωπον (an entire man; see Field, Notes, 93), Jhn.7:23; ὅλη Ἰερουσαλήμ (= πᾶσα Ἰ, Mat.2:3; see Bl., §47, 9), Act.21:31. __2. Definite, with art.; __(a) preceding subst.: Mat.4:23, 24 Luk.8:39, 1Co.12:17, al.; __(b) following subst.: Mrk.1:33, Luk.9:25, Jhn.4:53, Act.21:30, al.; __(with) between art. and subst., where subst. is an abstract noun (Plat., al.). __3. Attached to adj. or verb: Mat.13:33, Luk.13:21, Jhn.9:34, al.; adverbially, δι ̓ ὅλου (MM, xviii), Jhn.19:23. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωπον

한글 발음: 안트로폰

anthrōpon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑγιῆ

한글 발음: 휘기에

hugiē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5199 원어 검색에서 보기 G5199
Lemma
ὑγιής
Strong
G5199
형태소
A-ASM
품사
형용사
건강한/온전한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '건강한, 성한, 온전한'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑγιής, -ές, accusative, ὑγιῆ (Attic usually -ιᾶ), [in LXX for חַי, etc. ;] sound, whole, healthy: Mat.12:13 15:31, Jhn.5:[4], 6, 9, 11, 14, 15 7:23, Act.4:10; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:34; of words, opinions, etc. (as in cl.), metaphorically, λόγος, Tit.2:8.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐποίησα

한글 발음: 에포이에사

epoiēsa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-AAI-1S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σαββάτῳ;

한글 발음: 삽바토

sabbatō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4521 원어 검색에서 보기 G4521
Lemma
σάββατον
Strong
G4521
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
안식일
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '안식일, 한 주'.

원문 정의 보기

σάββατον, -ου, τό (Aram. שַׁבָּתָא, transliterated σάββατα, and this being mistaken for a pl., the sing. σάββατον was formed from it), and σάββατα, -ων, τά [in LXX for שַׁבָּת, שַׁבָּתוֹן ;] __1. the seventh day of the week, the sabbath __(a) the sing. form -ον, τὸ σ.: Mat.12:8, Mrk.2:27, Luk.6:5, al.; ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ σ. (in LXX, Exo.20:8, al., usually τῶν σ., see infr.), Luk.13:16 14:5; ὁδὸς σαββάτου, Act.1:12 (cf. Mat.24:29); dative, of time (τῷ) σ., Luk.6:9 14:1; ἐν (τῷ) σ., Mat.12:2, Luk.6:7, Jhn.5:16, al.; accusative, of duration, τὸ σ., Luk.23:56; κατὰ πᾶν σ., Act.13:27 15:21 18:4; pl., σ. τρία, Act.17:2 R, txt. (but see infr.); __(b) as most frequently in LXX (see Swete, Mk., 17; Thackeray, Gr., 35) the pl. form, τὰ σ. (see supr. on the Aram. form. There is also an analogy in the names of other festivals, τ. ἐγκαίνια, ἄζυμα, etc.): Mat.28:1, Col.2:16; ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν σ. (Exo.20:8, al.), Luk.4:16, Act.13:14 16:13; dative pl. (in LXX -τοις, but 1Ma.2:38 as in NT) by metaplasmus (El., § 9, 3), σάββασι, Mat.12:1, 5 12:10-12 Mrk.1:21 2:23 3:2, 4, Luk.4:31 6:2. __2. seven days, a week; __(a) the sing. form: πρώτη σαββάτσυ, Mrk.16:9; δὶς τοῦ σ. (Bl., § 35, 4; 36, 13), Luk.18:12; κατὰ μίαν σαββάτου, 1Co.16:2; pl., σ. τρία, Act.17:2 R, mg. (but see supr.); __(b) the pl. form: ἡ μία τῶν σ. (where the genitive = μετὰ τά; Soph., Lex., 43a), Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, Luk.24:1, Jhn.20:1, 19, Act.20:7 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Judge not according to appearance, but judge righteous judgment.

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρίνετε

한글 발음: 크리네테

krinete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2919 원어 검색에서 보기 G2919
Lemma
κρίνω
Strong
G2919
형태소
V-PAM-2P
품사
동사
판단하다/심판하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '판단하다, 심판하다, 결정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κρίνω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁפט, also for ריב ,דּין, etc. ;] __1. to separate, select, choose (cl.; in LXX: 2Ma.13:15). __2. to approve, esteem: Rom.14:5. __3. to be of opinion, judge, think: Luk.7:43, 1Co.11:13; before τοῦτο ὅτι, 2Co.5:14; with accusative and inf., Act.16:15; with accusative and pred., Act.13:46 26:8. __4. to decide, determine, decree: with accusative, Act.16:4, Rom.14:13, 1Co.7:37, 2Co.2:1; with inf. (Field, Notes, 167), Act.20:16 25:25, 1Co.2:2 5:3, Tit.3:12 (cf. 1Ma.11:33, Wis.8:9, al.); with accusative and inf., Act.21:25 27:1. __5. to judge, adjudge, pronounce judgment: absol., Jhn.8:16, 26; before κατά, with accusative, Jhn.7:24 8:15; κρίσιν κ., Jhn.7:24; τ. δίκαιον, Luk.12:57 (Deiss., LAE, 118); in forensic sense, Jhn.18:31, Act.23:3, al.; pass., Rom.3:4 (LXX); of God's judgment, Jhn.5:30 8:50, Rom.2:16 3:6, 2Ti.4:1, 1Pe.4:5, al. __6. = κατακρίνω, to condemn (cl.): Act.13:27; of God's judgment, Jhn.3:18 5:22 12:47, 48, Act.7:7, Rom.2:12, 1Co.11:32, Heb.10:30" (LXX), Jas.5:9, Rev.19:2, al. __7. As in LXX (for שׁפט), to rule, govern ( 4Ki.15:5, Psa.2:10, al.): Mat.19:28, Luk.22:30, 1Co.6:3. __8. to bring to trial (cl.); mid., to go to law: with dative of person(s), Mat.5:40; before μετά, with genitive of person(s) (of the opponent), ἐπί, with genitive (of the judge), 1Co.6:1, 6 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, ἀντ-απο- (-μαι), δια-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-, συν-, ὑπο- (-μαι), συν-υπο- (-μαι)). SYN.: see: δικάστης. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κατ᾽

한글 발음: 카트

kat᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2596 원어 검색에서 보기 G2596
Lemma
κατά
Strong
G2596
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~따라/~대하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 대하여/~아래로', 대격 '~을 따라, ~마다'.

원문 정의 보기

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ᾽, καθ᾽; on the frequently neglect of elision, see Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a), prep. with genitive, accusative, down, downwards. __I. C. genitive (WM, §47, k; Bl., §42, 2). __1. C. genitive of thing(s), in local sense; __(a) down, down from: Mat.8:32, Mrk.5:13, Luk.8:33, 1Co.11:4; __(b) throughout (late usage; Bl, l.with): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Luk.4:14 23:5, Act.9:31 10:37; __(with) in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους, deep or extreme poverty, 2Co.8:2. __ __2. C. genitive of person(s), usually in hostile sense; __(a) against (in cl. only after verbs of speaking, witnessing, etc.): opposite to ὑπέρ, Mrk.9:40; μετά, Mat.12:30; after ἐπιθυμεῖν, Gal.5:17; λαλεῖν, Act.6:13; διδάσκειν, Act.21:28; ψεύδεσθαι, Jas.3:14; after verbs of accusing, etc., Mat.5:23, Luk.23:14, Rom.8:33, al.; verbs of fighting, prevailing, etc., Mat.10:35, Act.14:2, 1Co.4:6, al.; __(b) of swearing, by: όμνυμι κ. (BL, §34, 1), He 6:13,16, cf. Mat.26:63. __II. C. accusative (WM, §49d; BL, §42, 2). __1. Of motion or direction; __(a) through, throughout: Luk.8:39 9:6 10:4, Act.8:1, 36 al.; __(b) to, towards, over against: Luk.10:32 (Field, Notes, 62), Act.2:1o 16:7, Gal.2:11, Php.3:14, al.; __ __(with) in adverbial phrases, at, in, by, of: κατ᾽ οἶκον, at home, Act.2:46; κατ᾽ ἰδίαν (see: ἴδιος); καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Rom.14:22, Jas.2:17; with pron. of person(s), Act.17:28 18:15, Rom.1:15, Eph.1:15, al. __2. Of time, at, during, about: Act.8:26 12:1 19:23, Rom.9:9 Heb.1:10, al. __3. Distributive; __(a) of place: κ. τόποὐς, Mat.24:7, al.; κ. πόλιν, Luk.8:1, 4 al.; κ. ἐκκλησίαν, Act.14:23. __(b) of time: κ. ἔτος, Luk.2:41; ἑορτήν, Mat.27:15, al.; __(with) of numbers, etc.: καθ᾽ ἕνα πάντες, 1Co.14:31 (on καθ᾽ εἷς, see: εἷς); κ. ἑκατόν, Mrk.6:40; κ. μέρος, Heb.9:5; κ. ὄνομα, Jhn.10:3. __4. Of fitness, reference, conformity, etc.; __(a) in relation to, concerning: Rom.1:3, 4 7:22 9:3, 5, 1Co.12:6 10:18, Php.1:12; κ. πάντα, Act.17:22, Col.3:20, 22 Heb.2:17 4:15; __(b) according to, after, like: Mrk.7:5, Luk.2:27, 29 Jhn.7:24 Rom.8:4 14:15, Eph.2:2, Col.2:8, Jas.2:8, al. __III. In composition, κ. denotes, __1. down, down from (καταβαίνω), etc.), hence, metaphorically; __(a) victory or rule over (καταδουλόω, -κυριεύω, etc.); __(b) "perfective" action (M, Pr., 111ff.). __2. under (κατακαλύπτω), etc.). __3. in succession (καθεξῆς). __4. after, behind (καταλείπω). __5. Hostility, against (καταλαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄψιν,

한글 발음: 옵신

opsin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3799 원어 검색에서 보기 G3799
Lemma
ὄψις
Strong
G3799
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
얼굴/외모
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '얼굴, 모습, 외모'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄψις, -εως, ἡ [in LXX chiefly for מַרְאֶה ;] __1. the act of seeing, the sense of sight. __2. face, countenance: Jhn.11:44, Rev.1:16. __3. appear­ance: κατ᾽ ὄ. κρίνειν (see MM, xviii), Jhn.7:24.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλὰ

한글 발음: 알라

alla

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δικαίαν

한글 발음: 디카이안

dikaian

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1342 원어 검색에서 보기 G1342
Lemma
δίκαιος
Strong
G1342
형태소
A-ASF
품사
형용사
의로운
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '의로운, 올바른'.

원문 정의 보기

δίκαιος, -α, -ον (δίκη), [in LXX chiefly for צַדִּיק (for rendering of צַדִּיק in sense of correct, see Deiss., BS, 115 f.); sometimes for נָקִי as Pro.1:11, al. ;] in early Gk. writers __(a) of persons, observant of δίκη, custom, rule, right, righteous in performing duties to gods and men ; __(b) of things, righteous, in accordance with right. In NT __1. righteous, chiefly in the broad sense, as above, of the person or thing corresponding to the Divine standard of right __(a) of persons: of God, Rom.3:26, 1Jn.2:29 Jn 3:7; of Christ, Act.3:14 7:52 22:14, 1Pe.3:18, 1Jn.2:1; of men, Mat.1:19 (Abbott, Essays, 75 f.) Mat.10:41 13:17, 43 13:49, Luk.1:6, 17, Rom.5:7, 1Ti.1:9, Jas.5:6, 1Pe.3:12, 1Jn.3:7, Rev.22:11, al.; δ. καὶ εὐλαβής, Luk.2:25; ἅγιος, Mrk.6:20; ἀγαθός, Luk.23:50; φοβούμενος τ. θεόν, Act.10:22; opposite to ἀμαρτωλοὶ καὶ ἀσεβεῖς, 1Pe.4:18; ἄδικοι, Mat.5:45, Act.24:15; δ. ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.1:17, Gal.3:11, Heb.10:38" (LXX) ; δ. παρὰ τ. θεῷ, Rom.2:13 __(b) of things: ἔργα δ., opposite to πονηρὰ, 1Jn.3:12; ἐντολή, Rom.7:12; metaphorically, αἷμα, Mat.23:35; τὸ δ., Luk.12:57; δ. ἐστιν, Act.4:19, Eph.6:1, Php.1:7; ὅ, Mat.20:4; ὅσα, Php.4:8 __2. In narrower sense __(a) of persons, as in later cl. writers, just, rendering to each his due: Tit.1:8, 1Jn.1:9; δ. κριτής, 2Ti.4:8 __(b) of things: τὸ δ., Col.4:1; δ., sc. ἐστιν, 2Th.1:6; κρίσις δ., Jhn.5:30; ὁδοί, Rev.15:3 SYN.: ἀγαθός (which see), καλός, χρηστός (Cremer, 183, 690). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρίσιν

한글 발음: 크리신

krisin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2920 원어 검색에서 보기 G2920
Lemma
κρίσις
Strong
G2920
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
심판
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '심판, 판단, 정죄'.

원문 정의 보기

κρίσις, -εως, ἡ (κρίνω), [in LXX chiefly for מִשְׁפָּט, also for רִיב, etc. ;] __1. a seperating, selection (Arist., al.) __2. a decision, judgment (cl.): Jhn.8:16, 1Ti.5:24, 2Pe.2:11, Ju 9; κ. κρίνειν, Jhn.7:24; in forensic sense, Act.8:33 (LXX) (see Page, in l); esp. of the Divine judgment, Jhn.3:19 5:24, 27 5:29-30 12:31 16:8, 11, 2Th.1:5, Heb.10:27, Jas.2:13 5:12, 2Pe.2:4, Rev.18:10; pl., Rev.16:7 19:2; of the last judgment, Mat.10:15 11:22, 24 12:36, 41-42 Luk.10:14 11:31-32, Heb.9:27, 2Pe.2:9 3:7, 1Jn.4:17, Ju 6 15; τῆς γεέννης, Mat.23:33. __3. By meton. (as in LXX for מִשְׁפָּט, Isa.5:7, al.; דִּישׁוֹן, Dan.7:10), of the standard of judgment, right, justice: Mat.12:18, 20 (LXX, Isa 42:43) Isa 23:23, Luk.11:42; of the tribunal (a local court), Mat.5:21-22† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρίνετε.

한글 발음: 크리네테

krinete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2919 원어 검색에서 보기 G2919
Lemma
κρίνω
Strong
G2919
형태소
V-PAM-2P
품사
동사
판단하다/심판하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '판단하다, 심판하다, 결정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κρίνω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁפט, also for ריב ,דּין, etc. ;] __1. to separate, select, choose (cl.; in LXX: 2Ma.13:15). __2. to approve, esteem: Rom.14:5. __3. to be of opinion, judge, think: Luk.7:43, 1Co.11:13; before τοῦτο ὅτι, 2Co.5:14; with accusative and inf., Act.16:15; with accusative and pred., Act.13:46 26:8. __4. to decide, determine, decree: with accusative, Act.16:4, Rom.14:13, 1Co.7:37, 2Co.2:1; with inf. (Field, Notes, 167), Act.20:16 25:25, 1Co.2:2 5:3, Tit.3:12 (cf. 1Ma.11:33, Wis.8:9, al.); with accusative and inf., Act.21:25 27:1. __5. to judge, adjudge, pronounce judgment: absol., Jhn.8:16, 26; before κατά, with accusative, Jhn.7:24 8:15; κρίσιν κ., Jhn.7:24; τ. δίκαιον, Luk.12:57 (Deiss., LAE, 118); in forensic sense, Jhn.18:31, Act.23:3, al.; pass., Rom.3:4 (LXX); of God's judgment, Jhn.5:30 8:50, Rom.2:16 3:6, 2Ti.4:1, 1Pe.4:5, al. __6. = κατακρίνω, to condemn (cl.): Act.13:27; of God's judgment, Jhn.3:18 5:22 12:47, 48, Act.7:7, Rom.2:12, 1Co.11:32, Heb.10:30" (LXX), Jas.5:9, Rev.19:2, al. __7. As in LXX (for שׁפט), to rule, govern ( 4Ki.15:5, Psa.2:10, al.): Mat.19:28, Luk.22:30, 1Co.6:3. __8. to bring to trial (cl.); mid., to go to law: with dative of person(s), Mat.5:40; before μετά, with genitive of person(s) (of the opponent), ἐπί, with genitive (of the judge), 1Co.6:1, 6 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, ἀντ-απο- (-μαι), δια-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-, συν-, ὑπο- (-μαι), συν-υπο- (-μαι)). SYN.: see: δικάστης. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Some therefore of them of Jerusalem said, Is not this he whom they seek to kill?

원어

ἔλεγον

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τινες

한글 발음: 티네스

tines

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-NPM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἱεροσολυμιτῶν·

한글 발음: 히에로솔뤼미톤

Hi'erosolumitōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2415 원어 검색에서 보기 G2415
Lemma
Ἱεροσολυμίτης
Strong
G2415
형태소
N-GPM-L
품사
명사
예루살렘 사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '예루살렘 주민'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἱεροσολυμεῖτης (WH, Ἰερ-; Rec. -μίτης), -ου, ὁ, [in LXX: Sir.50:27 (28) 2Ma.4:22 2Mac 4:39 (V* -μήτης) 2Ma 18:5* ;] an inhabitant of Jerusalem: Mrk.1:5, Jhn.7:25.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐχ

한글 발음: 우크

ouch

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτός

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὃν

한글 발음: 혼

hon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-ASM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητοῦσιν

한글 발음: 제투신

zētousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀποκτεῖναι;

한글 발음: 아포크테이나이

apokteinai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G615 원어 검색에서 보기 G615
Lemma
ἀποκτείνω
Strong
G615
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
죽이다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '죽이다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-κτείνω (also in late forms -κτέννω, Mat.10:28, a1., LTTr., -κτεννύω, Mrk.12:5, WH), [in LXX for הָרַג, מוּת ;] to kill: Mat.14:5, al.; before instr. ἐν (which see), Eph.2:16, Rev.2:23, al. Metaphorical: Rom.7:11; τ. ἔχθραν, Eph.2:16; τὸ γράμμα ἀποκτείνει 2Co.3:6 (on the perfective force of this verb, see M, Pr., 114) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And lo, he speaketh openly, and they say nothing unto him. Can it be that the rulers indeed know that this is the Christ?

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἴδε

한글 발음: 이데

ide

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2396 원어 검색에서 보기 G2396
Lemma
ἴδε
Strong
G2396
형태소
INJ
품사
-
보라!
번역 정렬
-

정의

감탄사 '보라!'.

원문 정의 보기

ἴδε (Attic ἰδέ; the "later" accentuation is also found in Hom.; Veitch, 215) __1. prop., 2 aor. imperat. of ὁράω, which see __2. As interjection, apart from the construction of the sentence, and used where one or many are addressed, see! behold! lo!: Mat.25:20, 22 25:25, Mrk.2:24 3:34 11:21 13:1, 21 15:4, 35 16:6, Jhn.1:29, 36 1:48 3:26 5:14 7:26 11:3, 36 12:19 16:29 18:21 19:4, 14 19:26-27, Gal.5:2.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρρησίᾳ

한글 발음: 파르레시아

parrēsia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3954 원어 검색에서 보기 G3954
Lemma
παρρησία
Strong
G3954
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
담대함
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '담대함, 거리낌 없음, 확신'.

원문 정의 보기

παρρησία, -ας, ἡ (πᾶς + ῥῆσις, speech) [in LXX; Lev.26:13 (μετὰ π., קוֺמְמִיּוּת קוֹמְמִיּוּת), Pro.1:20 10:10, Wis.5:1, al. ;] __1. freedom of speech, plainness, openness, freedom in speaking (Eur., Plat., al.) : Act.4:13, 2Co.3:12; παρρησίᾳ, adverbially, freely, openly, plainly, Mrk.8:32, Jhn.7:13, 26 10:24 11:14 16:29 18:20; opposite to ἐν παροιμίαις, Jhn.16:25; ἐν π., Eph.6:19; μετὰ π., Act.2:29 4:29, 31 28:31 __2. In LXX (1Ma.4:18, Wis.5:1, al.), FlJ, and NT, also (from the absence of fear which accompanies freedom of speech), confidence, boldness: 2Co.7:4, Php.1:20, 1Ti.3:13; ἔχειν π., Eph.3:12, Phm 8, Heb.3:6 10:19, 35, 1Jn.2:28 Jn 3:21 Jn 4:17 Jn 5:14; μετὰ π., He 416; ἐν π., Col.2:15; id. (as בפרהסיא in Rabbinic lit.; see Westc., Jo., i, 262), in public, Jhn.7:4 and (without ἐν) Jhn.11:54.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λαλεῖ,

한글 발음: 랄레이

lalei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2980 원어 검색에서 보기 G2980
Lemma
λαλέω
Strong
G2980
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이야기하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαλέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for דּבר pi., also for אמר, etc. ;] __1. to utter: of inanimate things, Rev.4:1 10:4; metaphorically, Heb.11:4 12:24. __2. to talk, speak, say: absol., Mat.9:33 12:46, Mrk.5:35, Luk.8:49; before ὡς, 1Co.13:11, Rev.13:11; εἰς, 1Co.14:9; ἐκ, Mat.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.10:19, Mrk.11:32, Jhn.8:30, al.; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:46, Luk.24:6, Rom.7:1, al.; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.9:18, Jhn.10:6, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, Mrk.6:50, Luk.1:19 2:33, al.; ἐν, ἐξ, ἀπό, Mat.13:3, Jhn.12:49 14:10, al.; λ. τ. λόγον, Mrk.8:32, al.; before orat. dir. (not cl.), Mrk.14:31, Heb.5:5 11:18; Hebraistically (Dalman, Words, 25f.), ἐλάλησε λέγων, Mat.14:27, Jhn.8:12, Act.8:26, al. SYN.: see: λέγω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδὲν

한글 발음: 우덴

ouden

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3762 원어 검색에서 보기 G3762
Lemma
οὐδείς
Strong
G3762
형태소
A-ASN
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al.; absol., Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al.; neut., οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al.; id. with genitive partit., Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al.; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al.; with neg., strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al.; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ

한글 발음: 아우토

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λέγουσιν.

한글 발음: 레구신

legousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μήποτε

한글 발음: 메포테

mēpote

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N + G4218=PRT
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀληθῶς

한글 발음: 알레토스

alēthōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G230 원어 검색에서 보기 G230
Lemma
ἀληθῶς
Strong
G230
형태소
ADV
품사
-
참으로/진실로
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '참으로, 진실로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀληθῶς adv. (ἀληθής). [in LXX (Jer.28:6, Psa.58:1, al.) chiefly for אָמֵן and cogn. forms ;] truly, surely: Mat.14:33 26:73 Mrk.14:70 15:39, Luk.9:27 12:44 21:3, Jhn.1:48 4:42 6:14 7:26, 40 8:31 17:8 Act.12:11, 1Th.2:13, 1Jn.2:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔγνωσαν

한글 발음: 에그노산

egnōsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1097 원어 검색에서 보기 G1097
Lemma
γινώσκω
Strong
G1097
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '알다, 깨닫다, 인식하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γινώσκω (= γιγν-: see previous word. So also vulgar Attic, in Inscr., see Thumb, MGV, 207), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] to be taking in knowledge, come to know, recognize, perceive, understand; in past tenses to know, realize; pass., to become known: with accusative, Mat.22:18, Mrk.5:43, Col.4:8, 1Th.3:5, al. Pass., Mat.10:26, Php.4:5, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.21:45, Jhn.4:1, al.; τί, Mat.6:3; ἀπό, Mrk.15:45; ὅ, Rom.7:15; τ. λεγόμενα, Luk.18:34; τ. θέλημα, Luk.12:47; τ. καρδίας, Luk.16:15; with accusative of person(s), of recognition by God, 1Co.8:3, Gal.4:9; by Christ, neg., Mat.7:23; frequently of the knowledge of divine things, of God and Christ; τ. θεόν, Rom.1:21 Gal.4:9; τ. πατέρα, Jhn.8:55; τ. κύριον, Heb.8:1 (LXX); νοῦν κυρίου, Rom.11:34; Χριστόν, Jhn.17:3, 1Jn.3:6; τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος, 1Co.2:14; τ. πνεύμα, 1Jn.4:6; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.8:32; of Christ's knowledge of the Father (ἐπιγ.), Mat.11:27 (Dalman, Words, 282ff.). In Hellenistic writers [LXX for Heb. ידע, Gal.4:1, al.], of sexual intercourse, to know carnally: Mat.1:25, Luk.1:34 (Cremer, 153). SYN.: γ., to know by observation and experience is thus prop. disting. from οἶδα, to know by reflection (a mental process, based on intuition or information); cf. also ἐφίστημι, συνίημι. (Cf. ἀνα-, δια-, ἐπι-, κατα-, προ-γινώσκω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄρχοντες

한글 발음: 아르콘테스

archontes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G758 원어 검색에서 보기 G758
Lemma
ἄρχων
Strong
G758
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
관원/통치자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '통치자, 관원, 우두머리'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄρχων, -οντος, ὁ (present ptcp. of ἄρχω), [in LXX for נָשִׂיא., רֹאשׁ, שַׂר, etc. ;] a ruler, chief: Jesus, Rev.1:5; rulers of nations, Mat.20:25, Act.4:26 7:35; magistrates, Act.23:5, Rom.13:3; judges, Luk.12:58, Act.7:27, 35 16:19; members of the Sanhedrin, Luk.14:1 23:13, 35 24:20, Jhn.3:1 7:26, 48 12:42, Act.3:17 4:5, 8 13:27 14:5; rulers of synagogues, Mat.9:18, 23, Luk.8:41 18:18; οἱ ἄ. τ. αἰῶνος τούτου, 1Co.2:6-8; of the devil: ἄ. τῶν δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34 12:24, Mrk.3:22, Luk.11:15; ὁ ἄ. τοῦ κόσμου, Jhn.12:31 14:30 16:11; ἄ. τ. ἐξουσίας τ. ἀέρος, Eph.2:2 (MM, see word; DB, iii, 838; Ext., 99 f; DCG, ii, 419; DCG, see word Archon).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτός

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀληθῶς

한글 발음: 알레토스

alēthōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G230 원어 검색에서 보기 G230
Lemma
ἀληθῶς
Strong
G230
형태소
ADV
품사
-
참으로/진실로
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '참으로, 진실로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀληθῶς adv. (ἀληθής). [in LXX (Jer.28:6, Psa.58:1, al.) chiefly for אָמֵן and cogn. forms ;] truly, surely: Mat.14:33 26:73 Mrk.14:70 15:39, Luk.9:27 12:44 21:3, Jhn.1:48 4:42 6:14 7:26, 40 8:31 17:8 Act.12:11, 1Th.2:13, 1Jn.2:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χριστός;

한글 발음: 크리스토스

christos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5547 원어 검색에서 보기 G5547
Lemma
Χριστός
Strong
G5547
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
그리스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '그리스도, 기름부음 받은 자'. 히브리어 메시아의 헬라어역.

원문 정의 보기

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν (χρίω), [in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;] __1. 1. as adj., __(a) of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Lev.21:10); __(b) of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Lev.4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, 2Ma.1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (1Ki.2:10, Psa.2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Luk.2:11, 26 Jhn.1:41, Act.2:36 4:26, al. __2. As subst., ὁ Χριστός, the Messiah, the Christ: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:29, Luk.2:11, Jhn.1:20, Act.2:31, Rom.7:4, al.; Ἰησοῦς, Mrk.1:1, Jhn.1:17, Act.2:38, al.; Χ. Ἰησοῦς, Mat.1:18, WH, mg. Act.5:42, Rom.6:3, al.; Χ. κύριος, Luk.2:11; Ἰησοῦς Χ. ὁ κύριος, Act.15:26, Rom.1:7, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Howbeit we know this man whence he is: but when the Christ cometh, no one knoweth whence he is.

원어

ἀλλὰ

한글 발음: 알라

alla

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦτον

한글 발음: 투톤

touton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-ASM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἴδαμεν

한글 발음: 오이다멘

oidamen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6063 원어 검색에서 보기 G6063
Lemma
οἶδα
Strong
G6063
형태소
V-RAI-1P
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사(완료형) '알다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to know , εὖ οἶδα I know well; εὖ ἴσθι be assured : often with accusative rei, νοήματα οἶδε, μήδεα οἶδε he is versed in counsels, (Homer); with neut. Adjs., πεπνυμένα, φίλα, ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς (Homer); also with genitive, τόξων εὖ εἰδώς cunning in the use of the bow; οἰωνῶν σάφα εἰδώς (Odyssey by Homer): —; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a debt to another, thank him , (Iliad by Homer), etc.:—;the Imperat. in protestations, ἴστω Ζεὺς αὐτός be Zeus my witness , (Iliad by Homer); doric ἴττω Ζεύς, ἴττω (Aristophanes Comicus): —; εἰδώς absolute one who knows , εἰδυίηι πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω (Iliad by Homer); ἰδυίηισι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, (Iliad by Homer) 2. with infinitive to know how to do, (Iliad by Homer), attic 3. with the participle to know that so and so is the case, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, (Aeschulus Tragicus); τὸν Μῆδον ἴσμεν ἐλθόντα (Thucydides) 4. οὐκ οἶδα εἰ, I know not whether, expresses disbelief, like Lat. nescio an non, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι (Euripides) 5. οἶδα or ἴσθι are often parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ (Euripides); οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι (Sophocles Tragicus); so, εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (Demosthenes Orator): —;in [variant datesTragica Adespota also, οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσο; equivalent to δρᾶσον —; οἶσθ᾽ ; do —; know'st thou what? i. e. make haste and do; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς ποίησον, etc. (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πόθεν

한글 발음: 포텐

pothen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4159 원어 검색에서 보기 G4159
Lemma
πόθεν
Strong
G4159
형태소
ADV
품사
-
어디서/어찌
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문부사 '어디로부터, 어찌하여'.

원문 정의 보기

πόθεν adv., whence; __(a) of place: Mat.15:33, Luk.13:25, 27, Jhn.3:8 6:5 8:14 9:29-30 19:9, Rev.7:13; metaphorically, of condition, Rev.2:5; __(b) of origin: Mat.13:27, 54 13:56 21:25, Mrk.6:2, Luk.20:7, Jhn.2:9, Jas.4:1; of parentage, Jhn.7:27-28; __(with) of cause: Mrk.8:4 12:37, Luk.1:43, Jhn.1:49 4:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστίν·

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χριστὸς

한글 발음: 크리스토스

christos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5547 원어 검색에서 보기 G5547
Lemma
Χριστός
Strong
G5547
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
그리스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '그리스도, 기름부음 받은 자'. 히브리어 메시아의 헬라어역.

원문 정의 보기

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν (χρίω), [in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;] __1. 1. as adj., __(a) of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Lev.21:10); __(b) of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Lev.4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, 2Ma.1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (1Ki.2:10, Psa.2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Luk.2:11, 26 Jhn.1:41, Act.2:36 4:26, al. __2. As subst., ὁ Χριστός, the Messiah, the Christ: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:29, Luk.2:11, Jhn.1:20, Act.2:31, Rom.7:4, al.; Ἰησοῦς, Mrk.1:1, Jhn.1:17, Act.2:38, al.; Χ. Ἰησοῦς, Mat.1:18, WH, mg. Act.5:42, Rom.6:3, al.; Χ. κύριος, Luk.2:11; Ἰησοῦς Χ. ὁ κύριος, Act.15:26, Rom.1:7, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅταν

한글 발음: 호탄

hotan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3752 원어 검색에서 보기 G3752
Lemma
ὅταν
Strong
G3752
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~할 때마다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~할 때(마다), ~하면'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅταν (for ὅτ᾽ ἄν = ὅτε ἄν), temporal particle, with a conditional sense, usually of things expected to occur in an indefinite future; __1. prop., whenever; __(a) (a) with subjc. praes.: Mat.6:2, 5 Mrk.14:7, Luk.11:36, Jhn.7:27, Act.23:35, 1Co.3:4, al.; ἕως τ. ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅ., Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25; before τότε, 1Th.5:3; __(b) with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 185): Mat.5:11, Mrk.4:15, Luk.6:22, Jhn.2:10 8:28 (Field, Notes, 94), 10:4, al. __2. As in Hom. (LS, see word), but not in cl. prose, with indic., when (M, Pr., 167f.; Bl., §65, 9): with impf., Mrk.3:11(cf. Gen.38:9, al.); with praes., Mrk.11:25; with fut.. Rev.4:9 (Swete, in l.); with aor., Mrk.11:19, Rev.8:1 (Swete, in ll.; M, Pr., 168, 248; Field, Notes, 35). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔρχηται,

한글 발음: 에르케타이

erchētai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-PNS-3S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδεὶς

한글 발음: 우데이스

oudeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3762 원어 검색에서 보기 G3762
Lemma
οὐδείς
Strong
G3762
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al.; absol., Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al.; neut., οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al.; id. with genitive partit., Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al.; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al.; with neg., strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al.; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γινώσκει

한글 발음: 기노스케이

ginōskei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1097 원어 검색에서 보기 G1097
Lemma
γινώσκω
Strong
G1097
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '알다, 깨닫다, 인식하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γινώσκω (= γιγν-: see previous word. So also vulgar Attic, in Inscr., see Thumb, MGV, 207), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] to be taking in knowledge, come to know, recognize, perceive, understand; in past tenses to know, realize; pass., to become known: with accusative, Mat.22:18, Mrk.5:43, Col.4:8, 1Th.3:5, al. Pass., Mat.10:26, Php.4:5, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.21:45, Jhn.4:1, al.; τί, Mat.6:3; ἀπό, Mrk.15:45; ὅ, Rom.7:15; τ. λεγόμενα, Luk.18:34; τ. θέλημα, Luk.12:47; τ. καρδίας, Luk.16:15; with accusative of person(s), of recognition by God, 1Co.8:3, Gal.4:9; by Christ, neg., Mat.7:23; frequently of the knowledge of divine things, of God and Christ; τ. θεόν, Rom.1:21 Gal.4:9; τ. πατέρα, Jhn.8:55; τ. κύριον, Heb.8:1 (LXX); νοῦν κυρίου, Rom.11:34; Χριστόν, Jhn.17:3, 1Jn.3:6; τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος, 1Co.2:14; τ. πνεύμα, 1Jn.4:6; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.8:32; of Christ's knowledge of the Father (ἐπιγ.), Mat.11:27 (Dalman, Words, 282ff.). In Hellenistic writers [LXX for Heb. ידע, Gal.4:1, al.], of sexual intercourse, to know carnally: Mat.1:25, Luk.1:34 (Cremer, 153). SYN.: γ., to know by observation and experience is thus prop. disting. from οἶδα, to know by reflection (a mental process, based on intuition or information); cf. also ἐφίστημι, συνίημι. (Cf. ἀνα-, δια-, ἐπι-, κατα-, προ-γινώσκω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πόθεν

한글 발음: 포텐

pothen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4159 원어 검색에서 보기 G4159
Lemma
πόθεν
Strong
G4159
형태소
ADV
품사
-
어디서/어찌
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문부사 '어디로부터, 어찌하여'.

원문 정의 보기

πόθεν adv., whence; __(a) of place: Mat.15:33, Luk.13:25, 27, Jhn.3:8 6:5 8:14 9:29-30 19:9, Rev.7:13; metaphorically, of condition, Rev.2:5; __(b) of origin: Mat.13:27, 54 13:56 21:25, Mrk.6:2, Luk.20:7, Jhn.2:9, Jas.4:1; of parentage, Jhn.7:27-28; __(with) of cause: Mrk.8:4 12:37, Luk.1:43, Jhn.1:49 4:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστίν.¶

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Jesus therefore cried in the temple, teaching and saying,Ye both know me, and know whence I am; and I am not come of myself, but he that sent me is true, whom ye know not.

원어

Ἔκραξεν

한글 발음: 에크락센

Ekraxen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2896 원어 검색에서 보기 G2896
Lemma
κράζω
Strong
G2896
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
외치다/부르짖다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '외치다, 부르짖다'.

원문 정의 보기

κράζω [in LXX for זָעַק, צָעַק, קָרָא, etc. ;] in cl. chiefly poët., __1. prop. onomatop., of the raven, to croak, hence generally, of inartic. cries, to scream, cry out (Æsch., al.): Mrk.5:5 9:26 15:39 (Rec., R, mg.), Luk.9:39, al.; of crying for vengeance (cf. Gen.4:10), Jas.5:4. __2. to cry, call out with a loud voice: with accusative of thing(s), Act.19:32; before orat. dir., Mrk.10:48, Luk.18:39, al.; (ἐν) φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, Mrk.5:7, Rev.14:15, al.; λέγων, Mat.8:29, al.; of public teaching, Jhn.1:15, Rom.9:27, al.; of importunate prayer (cf. Job.35:12, Psa.3:5, al.), Rom.8:15, Gal.4:6; pf. with Pres. sense (vernac.; M, Pr., 147), Jhn.1:15 SYN.: see: βοάω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἱερῷ

한글 발음: 히에로

hi'erō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2411 원어 검색에서 보기 G2411
Lemma
ἱερόν
Strong
G2411
형태소
N-DSN
품사
명사
성전
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '성전' (성전 구역 전체).

원문 정의 보기

ἱερός, -ά, όν [in LXX: Eze.28:18 (מִקְדָּשׁ); τό ἱ, 1Ch.29:4 (בַּיִת), Eze.45:19 (עֲזָרָה); very frequently in I Est.1:1-58 -4 Mac ;] __1. in Hom., marvellous, mighty, divine. __2. (Also in Hom, and later cl.) consecrated to the deity, sacred: pl., ἱ. γράμματα, 2Ti.3:15. __3. As subst., __(a) (so in Hom.), τὰ ἱ., sacrifices, sacred rites, sacred things: 1Co.9:13; __(b) later, τὸ ἱ.,., a consecrated or sacred place, a temple: τ. Ἀρτέμιδος, Act.19:27; of the temple at Jerusalem, i.e. the entire precincts or some part thereof (as distinct from ὁ ναός, which see, the Sanctuary proper): 1Co.9:13, and frequently in Gosp. and esp. in Ac, Mat.12:6, Mrk.13:3, Act.4:1, al. (on the use of ἱ. in Imperial Iuser., see Deiss., LAE, 380 f.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διδάσκων

한글 발음: 디다스콘

didaskōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1321 원어 검색에서 보기 G1321
Lemma
διδάσκω
Strong
G1321
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
가르치다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가르치다'.

원문 정의 보기

διδάσκω [in LXX chiefly for למד pl., also for ידע hi., ירה hi., etc. ;] to teach (i.e. instruct) a person, teach a thing; __1. trans.: with accusative of person(s), Mat.5:2, Mrk.1:22, al.; before ὅτι, Mrk.8:31; περί, 1Jn.2:27; with inf., Luk.11:1; with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.6:30 12:14; with cogn. accusative, Mat.15:9 (LXX); with dupl. accusative, Mrk.4:2, Jhn.14:26; pass., Gal.1:12, 2Th.2:15; with dative of person(s) (like Heb., cf. Job.21:23, but prob. a vernac. usage, see Swete, in l.), Rev.2:14. __2. Absol., to teach, give instruction: Mat.4:23, Mrk.1:21, and often in Gosp., Rom.12:7, 1Co.4:17, 1Ti.2:12, al. SYN.: παιδεύω (cf. Westc., Heb., 402; Cremer, 180). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λέγων·

한글 발음: 레곤

legōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κἀμὲ

한글 발음: 카메

kame

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1AS + G2532=CONJ
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἴδατε

한글 발음: 오이다테

oidate

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6063 원어 검색에서 보기 G6063
Lemma
οἶδα
Strong
G6063
형태소
V-PAI-2P
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사(완료형) '알다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to know , εὖ οἶδα I know well; εὖ ἴσθι be assured : often with accusative rei, νοήματα οἶδε, μήδεα οἶδε he is versed in counsels, (Homer); with neut. Adjs., πεπνυμένα, φίλα, ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς (Homer); also with genitive, τόξων εὖ εἰδώς cunning in the use of the bow; οἰωνῶν σάφα εἰδώς (Odyssey by Homer): —; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a debt to another, thank him , (Iliad by Homer), etc.:—;the Imperat. in protestations, ἴστω Ζεὺς αὐτός be Zeus my witness , (Iliad by Homer); doric ἴττω Ζεύς, ἴττω (Aristophanes Comicus): —; εἰδώς absolute one who knows , εἰδυίηι πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω (Iliad by Homer); ἰδυίηισι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, (Iliad by Homer) 2. with infinitive to know how to do, (Iliad by Homer), attic 3. with the participle to know that so and so is the case, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, (Aeschulus Tragicus); τὸν Μῆδον ἴσμεν ἐλθόντα (Thucydides) 4. οὐκ οἶδα εἰ, I know not whether, expresses disbelief, like Lat. nescio an non, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι (Euripides) 5. οἶδα or ἴσθι are often parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ (Euripides); οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι (Sophocles Tragicus); so, εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (Demosthenes Orator): —;in [variant datesTragica Adespota also, οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσο; equivalent to δρᾶσον —; οἶσθ᾽ ; do —; know'st thou what? i. e. make haste and do; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς ποίησον, etc. (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἴδατε

한글 발음: 오이다테

oidate

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6063 원어 검색에서 보기 G6063
Lemma
οἶδα
Strong
G6063
형태소
V-PAI-2P
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사(완료형) '알다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to know , εὖ οἶδα I know well; εὖ ἴσθι be assured : often with accusative rei, νοήματα οἶδε, μήδεα οἶδε he is versed in counsels, (Homer); with neut. Adjs., πεπνυμένα, φίλα, ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς (Homer); also with genitive, τόξων εὖ εἰδώς cunning in the use of the bow; οἰωνῶν σάφα εἰδώς (Odyssey by Homer): —; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a debt to another, thank him , (Iliad by Homer), etc.:—;the Imperat. in protestations, ἴστω Ζεὺς αὐτός be Zeus my witness , (Iliad by Homer); doric ἴττω Ζεύς, ἴττω (Aristophanes Comicus): —; εἰδώς absolute one who knows , εἰδυίηι πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω (Iliad by Homer); ἰδυίηισι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, (Iliad by Homer) 2. with infinitive to know how to do, (Iliad by Homer), attic 3. with the participle to know that so and so is the case, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, (Aeschulus Tragicus); τὸν Μῆδον ἴσμεν ἐλθόντα (Thucydides) 4. οὐκ οἶδα εἰ, I know not whether, expresses disbelief, like Lat. nescio an non, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι (Euripides) 5. οἶδα or ἴσθι are often parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ (Euripides); οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι (Sophocles Tragicus); so, εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (Demosthenes Orator): —;in [variant datesTragica Adespota also, οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσο; equivalent to δρᾶσον —; οἶσθ᾽ ; do —; know'st thou what? i. e. make haste and do; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς ποίησον, etc. (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πόθεν

한글 발음: 포텐

pothen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4159 원어 검색에서 보기 G4159
Lemma
πόθεν
Strong
G4159
형태소
ADV
품사
-
어디서/어찌
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문부사 '어디로부터, 어찌하여'.

원문 정의 보기

πόθεν adv., whence; __(a) of place: Mat.15:33, Luk.13:25, 27, Jhn.3:8 6:5 8:14 9:29-30 19:9, Rev.7:13; metaphorically, of condition, Rev.2:5; __(b) of origin: Mat.13:27, 54 13:56 21:25, Mrk.6:2, Luk.20:7, Jhn.2:9, Jas.4:1; of parentage, Jhn.7:27-28; __(with) of cause: Mrk.8:4 12:37, Luk.1:43, Jhn.1:49 4:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰμί·

한글 발음: 에이미

eimi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπ᾽

한글 발음: 아프

ap᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G575 원어 검색에서 보기 G575
Lemma
ἀπό
Strong
G575
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 분리·기원 '~로부터, ~에서 떨어져'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ ,בְּ ,מִן ;] from (i.e. from the exterior). __1. Of separation and cessation; __(1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al.; __(2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl., §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.; __(3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ., Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; __(4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al.; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); __(5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc., Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al.; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc., Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al.; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al.; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; __(6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. __2. Of origin; __(1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, __(a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al.; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; __(b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al.; __(with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; __(d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc., Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); __(2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al.; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). __3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl., §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. __4. In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμαυτοῦ

한글 발음: 에마우투

emautou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
F-1GSM
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

한글 발음: 우크

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλήλυθα,

한글 발음: 엘렐뤼타

elēlutha

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-2RAI-1S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλ᾽

한글 발음: 알

all᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀληθινὸς

한글 발음: 알레티노스

alēthinos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G228 원어 검색에서 보기 G228
Lemma
ἀληθινός
Strong
G228
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
참된/진실한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '참된, 진실한'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀληθινός, -ή, -όν (ἀληθής), [in LXX for אֶמֶת ;] true, in the sense of real, ideal, genuine: Luk.16:11 Jhn.1:9 4:23, 37 6:32 7:28 8:16 15:1 17:3 19:35, 1Th.1:9, Heb.8:2 9:24 10:22, 1Jn.2:8 Jn 5:20, Rev.3:7, 14 6:10 15:3 16:7 19:2; = ἀληθής, Rev.19:9 21:5 22:6 (MM, VGT, see word).† SYN.: ἀληθής, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέμψας

한글 발음: 펨프사스

pempsas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3992 원어 검색에서 보기 G3992
Lemma
πέμπω
Strong
G3992
형태소
V-AAP-NSM
품사
동사
보내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보내다, 파견하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πέμπω [in LXX chiefly for שָׁלַח ;] to send; __(a) of persons: with accusative, absol., Mat.22:7, Luk.7:19, Jhn.1:22, 2Co.9:3, al.; ptcp. before verb., Mat.14:10, Act.19:31, al.; ptcp. before διά (= Heb. יָד;, 1Ki.16:20, al.), Mat.11:2 (cf. Rev.1:1); of teachers sent by God, Jhn.1:33 4:34, Rom.8:3, al.; with accusative and dative, 1Co.4:17, Php.2:19; before πρός, with accusative, Luk.4:26, Jhn.16:7, al.; before λέγων (cf. Heb. אָמַר שָׁלַח Gen.38:25, al.), Luk.7:6, 19; before εἰς, with accusative loc., Mat.2:8, Luk.15:15, al.; before εἰς (of purpose), Eph.6:22, Col.4:8, 1Pe.2:14; with inf., Jhn.1:33, 1Co.16:3, Rev.22:16; __(b) of things : Rev.11:10; before εἰς, Rev.1:11; id., of purpose, Act.11:29, Php.4:16; with dative of person(s), 2Th.2:11; π. τ. δρέπανον σου (cf. εξαποστείλατε δρέπανα = מַגָּל שָׁלַח, Jol.3:13), Rev.14:15, 18 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, μετα-, προ-, συν-πέμπω) SYN.: ἀποστέλλω, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὃν

한글 발음: 혼

hon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-ASM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμεῖς

한글 발음: 휘메이스

humeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2NP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

한글 발음: 우크

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἴδατε·

한글 발음: 오이다테

oidate

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6063 원어 검색에서 보기 G6063
Lemma
οἶδα
Strong
G6063
형태소
V-PAI-2P
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사(완료형) '알다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to know , εὖ οἶδα I know well; εὖ ἴσθι be assured : often with accusative rei, νοήματα οἶδε, μήδεα οἶδε he is versed in counsels, (Homer); with neut. Adjs., πεπνυμένα, φίλα, ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς (Homer); also with genitive, τόξων εὖ εἰδώς cunning in the use of the bow; οἰωνῶν σάφα εἰδώς (Odyssey by Homer): —; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a debt to another, thank him , (Iliad by Homer), etc.:—;the Imperat. in protestations, ἴστω Ζεὺς αὐτός be Zeus my witness , (Iliad by Homer); doric ἴττω Ζεύς, ἴττω (Aristophanes Comicus): —; εἰδώς absolute one who knows , εἰδυίηι πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω (Iliad by Homer); ἰδυίηισι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, (Iliad by Homer) 2. with infinitive to know how to do, (Iliad by Homer), attic 3. with the participle to know that so and so is the case, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, (Aeschulus Tragicus); τὸν Μῆδον ἴσμεν ἐλθόντα (Thucydides) 4. οὐκ οἶδα εἰ, I know not whether, expresses disbelief, like Lat. nescio an non, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι (Euripides) 5. οἶδα or ἴσθι are often parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ (Euripides); οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι (Sophocles Tragicus); so, εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (Demosthenes Orator): —;in [variant datesTragica Adespota also, οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσο; equivalent to δρᾶσον —; οἶσθ᾽ ; do —; know'st thou what? i. e. make haste and do; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς ποίησον, etc. (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
I know him; because I am from him, and he sent me.

원어

ἐγὼ

한글 발음: 에고

egō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1NS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἶδα

한글 발음: 오이다

oida

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6063 원어 검색에서 보기 G6063
Lemma
οἶδα
Strong
G6063
형태소
V-RAI-1S
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사(완료형) '알다, 깨닫다'.

원문 정의 보기

1. to know , εὖ οἶδα I know well; εὖ ἴσθι be assured : often with accusative rei, νοήματα οἶδε, μήδεα οἶδε he is versed in counsels, (Homer); with neut. Adjs., πεπνυμένα, φίλα, ἀθεμίστια εἰδώς (Homer); also with genitive, τόξων εὖ εἰδώς cunning in the use of the bow; οἰωνῶν σάφα εἰδώς (Odyssey by Homer): —; χάριν εἰδέναι τινί to acknowledge a debt to another, thank him , (Iliad by Homer), etc.:—;the Imperat. in protestations, ἴστω Ζεὺς αὐτός be Zeus my witness , (Iliad by Homer); doric ἴττω Ζεύς, ἴττω (Aristophanes Comicus): —; εἰδώς absolute one who knows , εἰδυίηι πάντ᾽ ἀγορεύω (Iliad by Homer); ἰδυίηισι πραπίδεσσι with knowing mind, (Iliad by Homer) 2. with infinitive to know how to do, (Iliad by Homer), attic 3. with the participle to know that so and so is the case, ἴσθι μοι δώσων know that thou wilt give, (Aeschulus Tragicus); τὸν Μῆδον ἴσμεν ἐλθόντα (Thucydides) 4. οὐκ οἶδα εἰ, I know not whether, expresses disbelief, like Lat. nescio an non, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι (Euripides) 5. οἶδα or ἴσθι are often parenthetic, οἶδ᾽ ἐγώ (Euripides); οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, οἶσθ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, πάρειμι (Sophocles Tragicus); so, εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (Demosthenes Orator): —;in [variant datesTragica Adespota also, οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσο; equivalent to δρᾶσον —; οἶσθ᾽ ; do —; know'st thou what? i. e. make haste and do; οἶσθ᾽ ὡς ποίησον, etc. (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν,

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρ᾽

한글 발음: 파르

par᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3844 원어 검색에서 보기 G3844
Lemma
παρά
Strong
G3844
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~곁에/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~로부터', 여격 '~곁에', 대격 '~옆을 따라'.

원문 정의 보기

παρά, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative, with radical sense, beside. __I. C. genitive of person(s), from the side of, from beside, from, indicating source or origin, [in LXX for מֵאֵצֶל ,מִיַד ,מִלִּפְנֵי ;] after verbs of motion, Mrk.14:43, Luk.8:49, Jhn.15:26, al.; after verbs of seeking, receiving, hearing, etc., Mrk.8:11 12:2, Jhn.4:9, 52 10:18, Php.4:18, 2Ti.1:18, Jas.1:7, al.; after passive verbs, of the agent (like ὑπό), Mat.21:42, Mrk.12:11, Luk.1:37; absol., οἱ παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, his family, his kinsfolk, Mrk.3:21 (cf. M, Pr., 106f.; Field, Notes, 25f.; Swete, in l.); τὰ παρ᾽ αὐτῆς (αὐτῶν, ὑμῶν, one's means, wealth, Mrk.5:26, Luk.10:7, Php.4:18. __II. C. dative of person(s) (exc. Jhn.19:25, π. τ. σταυρῷ), by the side of, beside, by, with, [in LXX for בְּעֵינֵי ,בְּיַד ,אֵצֶל ;] Luk.11:37 19:7, Jhn.1:40 4:40, Act.28:14, al.; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, at home, 1Co.16:2; with dative pl., among, Mat.22:25, Col.4:16, al.; metaphorically, Mat.19:26, Mrk.10:27, Luk.1:30, Rom.2:13, Jas.1:27, al. __III. C. accusative, of motion by or towards, [in LXX for בְּעֵבֶר ,עַל יַד ,אֵצֶל ;] __1. of place, by the side of, beside, by, along: Act.10:32, Heb.11:12; after verbs of motion, Mat.4:18, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, Act.4:35, al.; after verbs of rest, Mat.13:1, Mrk.5:21, Luk.8:35, al. __2. beside, beyond, metaphorically; __(a) beyond, against, contrary to: Act.18:13, Rom.1:26 4:18 11:24, al.; except, 2Co.11:24; __(b) beyond, above, in comparison with: Luk.3:13, Rom.12:3 14:5, Heb.1:4, 9 3:3, al.; __(with) on account of: 1Co.12:15, 16. __IV. In composition: beside, to (παραλαμβάνω, παράγω), at hand (πάρειμι), from (παραρρέω), amiss (παρακούω), past (παρέρχομαι), compared with (παρομοιάζω), above measure (παροργίζω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰμι,

한글 발음: 에이미

eimi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κἀκεῖνός

한글 발음: 카케이노스

kakeinos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ + G1565=D-NSM
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπέστειλεν.

한글 발음: 아페스테일렌

apesteilen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G649 원어 검색에서 보기 G649
Lemma
ἀποστέλλω
Strong
G649
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
보내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보내다, 파송하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-στέλλω, [in LXX very freq., almost always for שׁלח ;] prop., to send away, to dispatch on service; __1. to send with a commission, or on service; __(a) of persons: Christ, Mat.10:40; the apostles, 10:16; servants, Mrk.12:2; angels, 13:27; __(b) of things: ὄνος, Mat.21:3; τὸ δρέπανον, Mrk.4:29; τ. λόγον, Act.10:36; τ. ἐπαγγελίαν (i.e. the promised Holy Spirit), Luk.24:49, Rec.; before εἰς, Mat.20:2, Luk.11:49, Jhn.3:17; ὀπίσω, Luk.19:14; ἔμπροσθεν, Jhn.3:28; πρὸ προσώπου, Mat.11:10; πρός, Mat.21:34; with ref. to sender or place of departure: ἀπό, Luk.1:26 (Rec. ὑπό); παρά, Jhn.1:6; ἐκ, ib. 1:19; ὑπό, Act.10:17 (Rec. ἀπό); before inf., Mrk.3:14, al.; ἵνα, Mrk.12:2, al.; εἰς (of purpose), Heb.1:14; without direct obj.: before πρός, Jhn.5:33; λέγων, Jhn.11:3; ἀποστείλας, with indic., Mat.2:16, Act.7:14, Rev.1:1. __2. to send away, dismiss: Luk.4:18, Mrk.5:10 8:26 12:3 (cf. ἐξ-, συν-αποστέλλω). SYN.: πέμπω, the general term. ἀ. "suggests official or authoritative sending" (see Thayer, see word πέμπω; Westc., Jo., 298; Epp. Jo., 125; Cremer, 529; MM, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
They sought therefore to take him: and no man laid his hand on him, because his hour was not yet come.

원어

ἐζήτουν

한글 발음: 에제투운

ezētoun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πιάσαι,

한글 발음: 피아사이

piasai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4084 원어 검색에서 보기 G4084
Lemma
πιάζω
Strong
G4084
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
붙잡다/체포하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '붙잡다, 체포하다, (물고기를) 잡다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιάζω (cf. MGr. πιάνω; see Kennedy, Sources, 155), Doric and late Att.. for πιέζω in its later senses [in LXX: Sng.2:15 (אָחַז), Sir.23:21 * ;] __1. to lay hold of: Act.3:7 (Theocr.). __2. to take, capture, apprehend: Jhn.7:30, 32 7:44 8:20 10:39 11:57 21:3, 10 Act.12:4, 2Co.11:32, Rev.19:20 (see MM, xx).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδεὶς

한글 발음: 우데이스

oudeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3762 원어 검색에서 보기 G3762
Lemma
οὐδείς
Strong
G3762
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al.; absol., Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al.; neut., οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al.; id. with genitive partit., Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al.; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al.; with neg., strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al.; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπέβαλεν

한글 발음: 에페발렌

epebalen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1911 원어 검색에서 보기 G1911
Lemma
ἐπιβάλλω
Strong
G1911
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
(손을) 대다/얹다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '위에 던지다, 손을 대다, 얹다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπι-βάλλω [in LXX for שָׁלַח, שִׁית, etc. ;] __1. trans., to cast, lay or put upon: with accusative and dative, Mrk.11:7, 1Co.7:35; with accusative, before ἐπί with accusative, Rev.18:10, WH, mg.; τ. Χεῖρα (-ας) ἐπί (B1., § 37, 7), of seizing a prisoner, Mat.26:50, Luk.20:19 21:12, Jhn.7:30, Act.5:18 21:27; with dative (Polyb.), Mrk.14:46 Act.4:3; with inf., Act.12:1; τὴν χ. ἐπ᾽ ἄροτρον, Luk.9:62; ἐπίβλημα ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον, Luk.5:36; ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ, Mat.9:16. __2. Intrans., __(a) to throw oneself or rush upon: τ. κύματα εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.4:37; metaphorically, to put one's mind upon (but see Field, Notes, 41 ff.), ἐπιβαλὼν ἔκλαιεν, when he thought thereon (sc. τ. ῥήματι), he wept (EV, txt.; R, mg., he began to weep; cf. M, Pr., 131): Mrk.14:72 (see also Swete, in l); __(b) to fall to one's share: τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (sc. dative; Hdt., a1., a technical formula frequently in π.; Deiss., BS, 230, LAE, 152), Luk.15:12.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπ᾽

한글 발음: 에프

ep᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χεῖρα,

한글 발음: 케이라

cheira

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5495 원어 검색에서 보기 G5495
Lemma
χείρ
Strong
G5495
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '손'.

원문 정의 보기

χείρ, genitive, χειρος (accusative, χεῖραν, 1Pe.5:6 T), ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for יָד ;] the hand: Mat.3:12, Mrk.3:1, Luk.6:6, al. mult.; ἡ χ., acting subject, Luk.22:21; pl., Act.17:25 20:34, 1Jn.1:1; τ. ἔργα τῶν χ., Act.7:41, Rev.9:20; ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τ. ἐμῇ χ., 1Co.16:21, Col.4:18, 2Th.3:17; prepositional phrases, esp. those without art., similar to Heb. constructions (Bl., §32, 4; 40, 9; 46, 9), ἐν χ.; with genitive (Lft., in l.), Gal.3:19; σὺν χ. ἀγγέλου, Act.7:35; διὰ (τῶν) χειρῶν (διὰ χειρός), Mrk.6:2, Act.5:12 7:25, al.; ἐπὶ χειρῶν, Mat.4:6, Luk.4:11; ellipse of χ. (ἡ δεξία, ἀριστερα; Bl., §44, 1), Mat.6:3, al. By meton., for the power or activity of an individual, Mat.17:22, Mrk.9:31, Luk.9:31, Jhn.10:39, Act.12:11, al.; metaphorically, of the activity or power of God: Luk.1:66 23:46, Jhn.10:29, Act.11:21 13:11, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔπω

한글 발음: 우포

oupō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3768 원어 검색에서 보기 G3768
Lemma
οὔπω
Strong
G3768
형태소
ADV-N
품사
-
아직 ~아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '아직 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὔπω neg. adv. of time, not yet: Mat.24:6, Mrk.13:7, Jhn.2:4 3:24 6:17, al.; with neg., Mrk.11:2, Luk.23:53; interrog., Mat.16:9, Mrk.4:40 8:17, 21 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐληλύθει

한글 발음: 엘렐뤼테이

elēluthei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-2LAI-3S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 헤

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὥρα

한글 발음: 호라

hōra

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5610 원어 검색에서 보기 G5610
Lemma
ὥρα
Strong
G5610
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
때/시각
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '시간, 때, 시각'.

원문 정의 보기

ὥρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for עֵת and in Da for שָׁעָה ;] __1. any time or period fixed by nature, esp. a season (Hom., Hdt., Plat., al.). __2. A part of the day, and esp. a twelfth part of day or night, an hour: Mat.24:36, Mrk.13:32, Act.10:3, al.; accus. in ans. to "when"? (M, Pr., 63, 215; Bl., §34, 8), Jhn.4:52, Act.10:3, 30 1Co.15:30, Rev.3:3; accusative of duration, Mat.20:12 26, Mrk.14:37; inexactly, πρὸς ὥραν, for a season, for a time, Jhn.5:35, 2Co.7:8, Gal.2:5; πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας, for a short season (ICC, in l.), 1Th.2:17. __3. A definite point of time, time, hour: Mat.26:45; with genitive of thing(s), Luk.1:10 14:17, Rev.3:10, al.; with genitive of person(s), Luk.22:53, Jhn.2:4 7:30, al.; ἡ ἄρτι ὥρα, 1Co.4:11; ἐσχάτη ὥ., 1Jn.2:18; before ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23 5:25 16:25; ἵνα, Jhn.12:23, al.; with accusative and inf., Rom.13:11 (cf. DB, ext., 475b 476b). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ.¶

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But of the multitude many believed on him; and they said, When the Christ shall come, will he do more signs than those which this man hath done?

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλου

한글 발음: 오클루

ochlou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πολλοὶ

한글 발음: 폴로이

polloi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπίστευσαν

한글 발음: 에피스테우산

episteusan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4100 원어 검색에서 보기 G4100
Lemma
πιστεύω
Strong
G4100
형태소
V-AAI-3P
품사
동사
믿다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '믿다, 신뢰하다, 의탁하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιστεύω, [in LXX chiefly for אמן hi. ;] __1. intrans., to have faith (in), to believe; in cl., with accusative, dative, in NT also with prep, (on the significance of the various constructions, see M, Pr., 67f.; Vau. on Rom.4:5; Ellic. on 1Ti.1:16; Abbott, JV, 19-80): absol., Mat.24:23, 26 Mrk.13:21, 1Co.11:18; with accusative of thing(s), Act.13:41, 1Co.13:7; with dative of person(s) (to believe what one says), Mrk.16:[13, 14], 1Jn.4:1; τ. ψεύδει, 2Th.2:11; περί . . . ὅτι, Jhn.9:18; esp. and most frequently with reference to religious belief: absol., Mat.8:13, Mrk.5:36, Luk.8:50, Jhn.11:40, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:28, al.; with dative (see supr., and cf. DB, i, 829a), Jhn.3:12 5:24 6:30 8:31, Act.16:34, Gal.3:6" (LXX), 2Ti.1:12, 1Jn.5:10, al.; with prep., (expressing personal trust and reliance as distinct from mere credence or belief; see M, Pr., l.with; DB, i, 829b), to believe in or on: ἐν (Psa.77 (78):22, al.), Mrk.1:15 (see Swete, in l.); εἰς, Mat.18:6, Jhn.2:11 (see Westc., in l.), and freq., Act.10:43 19:4, Rom.10:14, Gal.2:16, Php.1:29, I Jhn.5:10, 1Pe.1:8; εἰς τ. ὄνομα, Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18, 1Jn.5:13; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.27:42, Act.9:42 11:17 16:31 22:19, Rom.4:5; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.9:33 (LXX) 10:11 (ib.), 1Ti.1:16, 1Pe.2:6" (LXX) ; ptcp. pres., οἱ π., as subst., Act.2:44, Rom.3:22, 1Co.1:21, al.; aor., Mrk.16:[16], Act.4:32; pf., Act.19:18 21:20 (on Johannine use of the tenses of π., see Westc, Epp. Jo., 120). __2. Trans., to entrust: with accusative and dative, Luk.16:11, Jhn.2:24; pass., to be entrusted with: with accusative, Rom.3:2, 1Co.9:17, Gal.2:7, 1Th.2:4 (see Lft., Notes, 21f.), 1Ti.1:11, Tit.1:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλεγον

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι·

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χριστὸς

한글 발음: 크리스토스

christos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5547 원어 검색에서 보기 G5547
Lemma
Χριστός
Strong
G5547
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
그리스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '그리스도, 기름부음 받은 자'. 히브리어 메시아의 헬라어역.

원문 정의 보기

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν (χρίω), [in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;] __1. 1. as adj., __(a) of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Lev.21:10); __(b) of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Lev.4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, 2Ma.1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (1Ki.2:10, Psa.2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Luk.2:11, 26 Jhn.1:41, Act.2:36 4:26, al. __2. As subst., ὁ Χριστός, the Messiah, the Christ: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:29, Luk.2:11, Jhn.1:20, Act.2:31, Rom.7:4, al.; Ἰησοῦς, Mrk.1:1, Jhn.1:17, Act.2:38, al.; Χ. Ἰησοῦς, Mat.1:18, WH, mg. Act.5:42, Rom.6:3, al.; Χ. κύριος, Luk.2:11; Ἰησοῦς Χ. ὁ κύριος, Act.15:26, Rom.1:7, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅταν

한글 발음: 호탄

hotan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3752 원어 검색에서 보기 G3752
Lemma
ὅταν
Strong
G3752
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~할 때마다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~할 때(마다), ~하면'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅταν (for ὅτ᾽ ἄν = ὅτε ἄν), temporal particle, with a conditional sense, usually of things expected to occur in an indefinite future; __1. prop., whenever; __(a) (a) with subjc. praes.: Mat.6:2, 5 Mrk.14:7, Luk.11:36, Jhn.7:27, Act.23:35, 1Co.3:4, al.; ἕως τ. ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, ὅ., Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25; before τότε, 1Th.5:3; __(b) with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 185): Mat.5:11, Mrk.4:15, Luk.6:22, Jhn.2:10 8:28 (Field, Notes, 94), 10:4, al. __2. As in Hom. (LS, see word), but not in cl. prose, with indic., when (M, Pr., 167f.; Bl., §65, 9): with impf., Mrk.3:11(cf. Gen.38:9, al.); with praes., Mrk.11:25; with fut.. Rev.4:9 (Swete, in l.); with aor., Mrk.11:19, Rev.8:1 (Swete, in ll.; M, Pr., 168, 248; Field, Notes, 35). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλθῃ,

한글 발음: 엘테

elthē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-2AAS-3S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πλείονα

한글 발음: 플레이오나

pleiona

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4119 원어 검색에서 보기 G4119
Lemma
πλείων, πλεῖον
Strong
G4119
형태소
A-APN-C
품사
형용사
더 많은/더 큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '더 많은, 더 큰' (πολύς의 비교급).

원문 정의 보기

πλέον, see: πολύς. πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σημεῖα

한글 발음: 세메이아

sēmeia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4592 원어 검색에서 보기 G4592
Lemma
σημεῖον
Strong
G4592
형태소
N-APN
품사
명사
표적/징조
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '표적, 징조, 기적'.

원문 정의 보기

σημεῖον, -ου, τό [in LXX chiefly for אוֹת ;] a sign, mark, token; __(a) of that which distinguishes a person or thing from others: Mat.26:48 Luk.2:12, 2Th.3:17 (cf. Deiss., LAE, 153.2); before genitive epexeg., Rom.4:11; with genitive obj., Mat.24:8, 30, 2Co.12:12; with genitive subj., Mat.16:3; __(b) a sign of warning or admonition: Mat.12:39 16:4, Luk.2:34 11:29-30, 1Co.14:22; __(with) a sign portending future events (Soph., Plat. al.): Mrk.13:4, Luk.21:7, 11 21:25, Act.2:19, Rev.12:1, 3 15:1; __(d) of miracles and wonders (MM, xxii), regarded as signs of a divine authority: Mat.12:38-39 16:1, 4 Mrk.8:11-12 Luk.11:16, 29 23:8, Jhn.2:11, 18 2:23 4:54 6:30 10:41 12:18, Act.4:16, 22; pl., Mrk.16:17, 20, Jhn.2:11, 23 3:2 6:2, 14 6:26 7:31 9:16 11:47 12:37 20:30, Act.8:6, 1Co.1:22 (Lft., Notes, 162); the same ascribed to false teachers and demons: Mat.24:24, Mrk.13:22, 2Th.2:9, Rev.13:13-14 16:14 19:20; σ. καὶ τέρατα (τ. καὶ σ.; cf. Tr., Syn., § xci), Mat.24:24, Mrk.13:22, Jhn.4:48, Act.2:19, 43 4:30 5:12 6:8 7:36 14:3 15:12, Rom.15:19, 2Th.2:9; id. before καὶ δυνάμεις, 2Co.12:12, Heb.2:4; σ. καὶ δυνάμεις, Act.8:13; δ. καὶ τ. καὶ σ., Act.2:22; σ. διδόναι, Mat.24:24, Mrk.13:22.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τούτων

한글 발음: 투톤

toutōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-GPN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιήσει

한글 발음: 포이에세이

poiēsei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-FAI-3S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὧν

한글 발음: 혼

hōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-GPN
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτος

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐποίησεν;

한글 발음: 에포이에센

epoiēsen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The Pharisees heard the multitude murmuring these things concerning him; and the chief priests and the Pharisees sent officers to take him.

원어

ἤκουσαν

한글 발음: 에쿠산

ēkousan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAI-3P
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φαρισαῖοι

한글 발음: 파리사이오이

Pharisaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5330 원어 검색에서 보기 G5330
Lemma
Φαρισαῖος
Strong
G5330
형태소
N-NPM-T
품사
명사
바리새인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '바리새인'.

원문 정의 보기

Φαρισαῖος, -ου, ὁ (Aram. פְּרִישָׁא; see Dalman, Gr., 157.n, Words, 2.n), a Pharisee: Mat.23:26, Php.3:5; usually in pl., Mat.9:11, Mrk.2:18, al.; Φ. κ. γραμματεῖς, Mat.5:20, Mrk.2:16, Luk.5:21, al.; Φ. κ. Σαδδυκαῖοι, Mat.16:1, Act.23:6, 7 al.; ἀρχιερεῖς, Mat.21:45, Jhn.7:32, al. (see DB, iii, 826b). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλου

한글 발음: 오클루

ochlou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γογγύζοντος

한글 발음: 공귀존토스

gonguzontos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1111 원어 검색에서 보기 G1111
Lemma
γογγύζω
Strong
G1111
형태소
V-PAP-GSM
품사
동사
원망하다/수군거리다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '원망하다, 불평하다, 수군거리다'.

원문 정의 보기

γογγύζω, [in LXX chiefly for לוּן ;] to mutter, murmur: 1Co.10:10; before κατά, Mat.20:11; πρός, Luk.5:30; περί, Jhn.6:41, 61; μετ᾽ ἀλλήλων, Jhn.6:43; with accusative, before περί, Jhn.7:32 (cf. δια-γογγύζω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ταῦτα,

한글 발음: 타우타

tauta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-APN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπέστειλαν

한글 발음: 아페스테일란

apesteilan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G649 원어 검색에서 보기 G649
Lemma
ἀποστέλλω
Strong
G649
형태소
V-AAI-3P
품사
동사
보내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보내다, 파송하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπο-στέλλω, [in LXX very freq., almost always for שׁלח ;] prop., to send away, to dispatch on service; __1. to send with a commission, or on service; __(a) of persons: Christ, Mat.10:40; the apostles, 10:16; servants, Mrk.12:2; angels, 13:27; __(b) of things: ὄνος, Mat.21:3; τὸ δρέπανον, Mrk.4:29; τ. λόγον, Act.10:36; τ. ἐπαγγελίαν (i.e. the promised Holy Spirit), Luk.24:49, Rec.; before εἰς, Mat.20:2, Luk.11:49, Jhn.3:17; ὀπίσω, Luk.19:14; ἔμπροσθεν, Jhn.3:28; πρὸ προσώπου, Mat.11:10; πρός, Mat.21:34; with ref. to sender or place of departure: ἀπό, Luk.1:26 (Rec. ὑπό); παρά, Jhn.1:6; ἐκ, ib. 1:19; ὑπό, Act.10:17 (Rec. ἀπό); before inf., Mrk.3:14, al.; ἵνα, Mrk.12:2, al.; εἰς (of purpose), Heb.1:14; without direct obj.: before πρός, Jhn.5:33; λέγων, Jhn.11:3; ἀποστείλας, with indic., Mat.2:16, Act.7:14, Rev.1:1. __2. to send away, dismiss: Luk.4:18, Mrk.5:10 8:26 12:3 (cf. ἐξ-, συν-αποστέλλω). SYN.: πέμπω, the general term. ἀ. "suggests official or authoritative sending" (see Thayer, see word πέμπω; Westc., Jo., 298; Epp. Jo., 125; Cremer, 529; MM, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀρχιερεῖς

한글 발음: 아르키에레이스

archiereis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G749 원어 검색에서 보기 G749
Lemma
ἀρχιερεύς
Strong
G749
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
대제사장
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '대제사장'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀρχιερεύς, -έως, ὁ, [in LXX for כּ'' הָרֹאשׁ,כּ'' הַגָּדוֹל ,כּהֵן ;] __1. high-priest: Mrk.2:26 14:47, al.; of Christ: Heb.2:17 3:1, al. __2. In pl., chief priests, including ex-high-priests and members of high-priestly families: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:31, al. (Cremer, 294; DCG, i, 297f.; MM, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φαρισαῖοι

한글 발음: 파리사이오이

Pharisaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5330 원어 검색에서 보기 G5330
Lemma
Φαρισαῖος
Strong
G5330
형태소
N-NPM-T
품사
명사
바리새인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '바리새인'.

원문 정의 보기

Φαρισαῖος, -ου, ὁ (Aram. פְּרִישָׁא; see Dalman, Gr., 157.n, Words, 2.n), a Pharisee: Mat.23:26, Php.3:5; usually in pl., Mat.9:11, Mrk.2:18, al.; Φ. κ. γραμματεῖς, Mat.5:20, Mrk.2:16, Luk.5:21, al.; Φ. κ. Σαδδυκαῖοι, Mat.16:1, Act.23:6, 7 al.; ἀρχιερεῖς, Mat.21:45, Jhn.7:32, al. (see DB, iii, 826b). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑπηρέτας

한글 발음: 휘페레타스

hupēretas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5257 원어 검색에서 보기 G5257
Lemma
ὑπηρέτης
Strong
G5257
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
수종드는 자/하속
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '수종드는 자, 하속, 봉사자'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑπηρέτης, -ου, ὁ (ὑπό + ἐρέτης, a rower) [in LXX: Pro.14:35 (עֶבֶד), Wis.6:4, al. ;] prop., an under rower; hence, generally, a servant, attendant, minister: of a magistrate's attendant, Mat.5:25; of officers of the Synagogue or Sanhedrin, Mat.26:58, Mrk.14:54, 65, Luk.4:20, Jhn.7:32, 45-46 18:3, 12 18:22 19:6, Act.5:22, 26; of the attendants of kings, οἱ ὑ. οἱ ἑμοί Jhn.18:36; of Christian ministers, Act.13:5 26:16; ὑπηρέται λόγου, Luk.1:2; Χριστοῦ, 1Co.4:1; δοῦλοι κ. ὑ., Jhn.18:18.† SYN.: see: διάκονος (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἵνα

한글 발음: 히나

ina

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2443 원어 검색에서 보기 G2443
Lemma
ἵνα
Strong
G2443
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하기 위하여
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 목적·결과 '~하기 위하여, ~하도록'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵνα, __I. adverb (poët., Hom., al.), __1. of place, where, whither. __2. of circumstance, when. __II. Conjunction, __1. prop., final, denoting purpose or end (cl.), that, in order that, usually the first word in the clause, but sometimes (cl. also) preceded by an emphatic word (Act.19:4, Rom.11:31 (?), Gal.2:10, al.); __(a) with optative (so in cl. after historic tenses): after a pres., Eph.1:17 (but WH, mg., subjc.; see Burton, §225, Rem., 2); __(b) with subjc.: after a pres., Mrk.4:21, Luk.6:34, Jhn.3:15, Act.2:25, Rom.1:11, al.; after a pf., Mat.1:22, Jhn.5:23 1Co.9:22, al.; after an imperat. (present or aor.), Mat.7:1, Mrk.11:25, Jhn.10:38, 1Co.7:5, al.; after a delib. subjc., Mrk.1:38, al.; after a fut., Luk.16:4, Jhn.14:3, 1Co.15:28, al.; after historic tenses (where optative in cl.; WM, 359f.; M, Pr., 196f.), Mrk.6:41 (impf.), Jhn.4:8 (plpf.), Mrk.3:14 (aor.), al.; __(with) in late writers (M, Pr., 35; Burton, §§198, 199), with indic., fut: Luk.20:10, 1Pe.3:1, al.; __(d) as often in eccl. writers (Thayer, see word), with indic. pres.: 1Co.4:6, Gal.4:17, al. (?; but V. Burton, §198, Rem.); __(e) εἰς (διὰ) τοῦτο, ἵνα: Jhn.18:37, 1Ti.1:16, al.; τούτου χάριν, Tit.1:5; __(f) elliptical constructions: omission of the principal verb, Jhn.1:8, 2Th.3:9, 1Jn.2:19, al.; of the final verb, Rom.4:16, 2Co.8:13, al. __2. In late writers, definitive, = inf. (WM, 420; Bl, §69, 1), that; __(a) after verbs of wishing, caring, striving, etc.: θέλω, Mat.7:12, al.; ζητῶ, 1Co.4:2 14:12; ζηλόω, 1Co.14:1, al.; __(b) after verbs of saying, asking, exhorting: εἰπεῖν, Mat.4:3, al.; ἐρωτῶ, Mrk.7:26, al.; παρακαλῶ, Mat.14:36, 1Co.1:10, al., etc.; __(with) after words expressing expediency, etc.: συμφέρει, Mat.18:6, Jhn.11:50, al.; ἱκανός, Mat.8:8, Luk.7:6; χρείαν ἔχω, Jhn.2:25, al, etc.; __(d) after substantives, adding further definition: ὥρα, Jhn.12:23 13:1; χρόνος, Rev.2:21; συνήθεια, Jhn.18:39; μισθός, 1Co.9:18. __3. In late writers, ecbatic, denoting the result, = ὥστε, that, so that (M, Pr., 206ff.; WM, 572; Bl., §69, 3; Burton, §223): Rom.11:11, 1Co.7:29, 1Th.5:4, al. (but see Thayer, see word); so with the formula referring to the fulfilment of prophecy, ἵνα πληρωθῇ, Mat.1:22 2:14, Jhn.13:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πιάσωσιν

한글 발음: 피아소신

piasōsin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4084 원어 검색에서 보기 G4084
Lemma
πιάζω
Strong
G4084
형태소
V-AAS-3P
품사
동사
붙잡다/체포하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '붙잡다, 체포하다, (물고기를) 잡다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιάζω (cf. MGr. πιάνω; see Kennedy, Sources, 155), Doric and late Att.. for πιέζω in its later senses [in LXX: Sng.2:15 (אָחַז), Sir.23:21 * ;] __1. to lay hold of: Act.3:7 (Theocr.). __2. to take, capture, apprehend: Jhn.7:30, 32 7:44 8:20 10:39 11:57 21:3, 10 Act.12:4, 2Co.11:32, Rev.19:20 (see MM, xx).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν.¶

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Jesus therefore said,Yet a little while am I with you, and I go unto him that sent me.

원어

Εἶπεν

한글 발음: 에이펜

Eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς

한글 발음: 아우토이스

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς·

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔτι

한글 발음: 에티

eti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2089 원어 검색에서 보기 G2089
Lemma
ἔτι
Strong
G2089
형태소
ADV
품사
-
아직/여전히
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '아직, 여전히, 더'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔτι adv., yet, as yet, still; __1. of time; __(a) of the present (adhuc): Mrk.5:35, 1Co.3:3 15:17, Gal.1:10, al.; __(b) of the past, mostly with impf.: Mat.12:46, Luk.8:49 15:20, Jhn.20:1, Act.9:1, Rom.5:6, 8, 2Th.2:5, Heb.7:10 9:8, al.; __(with) of the future: Luk.1:15, 2Co.1:10; __(d) with a neg.: Mat.5:13, Luk.16:2 20:36, Heb.10:2, Rev.3:12 20:3, al. __2. Of degree, even, yet, still, further: with compar., Php.1:9, Heb.7:15; of what remains, Mrk.12:6, Jhn.4:35 7:33, al.; of what is added, Mat.18:16 26:65, Heb.11:32 12:26-27; of con­tinuance apart from the idea of time, Rom.3:7 6:2 9:19, Gal.5:11; ἔτι δἐ, Act.2:26 (LXX), Heb.11:36; ἔτι τε καί, Luk.14:26, Act.21:28 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χρόνον

한글 발음: 크로논

chronon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5550 원어 검색에서 보기 G5550
Lemma
χρόνος
Strong
G5550
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
때/시간
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '시간, 기간, 때'.

원문 정의 보기

χρόνος, -ου, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for יוֹם, also for עֵת, etc. ;] time (a space of time, whether long or short; cf. Lft., Notes, 70): Mat.2:7, Mrk.9:21, Luk.1:57, Act.3:21 7:17, 23 13:18 17:30 27:9, Heb.11:32, 1Pe.1:17 4:3, Rev.10:6; στιγμὴ χρόνου, Luk.4:5; πλήρωμα τοῦ χ., Gal.4:4; ποιεῖν χ., Act.15:33 18:23; βιῶσαι, 1Pe.4:2; διδόναι, Rev.2:21; pl., χ. καὶ (ἢ) καιροί (Lft., l.with), Act.1:7, 1Th.5:1; ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτου τῶν χ. (χρόνου), 1Pe.1:20, Ju 18; with prep., ἄχρι, Act.3:21; διὰ τὸν χ., Heb.5:12; ἐν χ., Act.1:6, 21; ἐπὶ (πλείονα) χ., Luk.18:4, Act.18:20; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον χ., Rom.7:1, 1Co.7:39, Gal.4:1; κατὰ τὸν χ., Mat.2:16; μετὰ τολὺν (τοσοῦτον) χ., Mat.25:19, Heb.4:7; πρὸ χ. αἰωςίων, 2Ti.1:9, Tit.1:2, instr. dative of extension of time (see M, Pr., 75, 148; Deiss., LAE, 206), Luk.8:27, 29 Jhn.14:9, Act.8:11, Rom.16:25; accusative, of duration of time, Mrk.2:19, Luk.20:9, Jhn.5:6 7:33 12:35 14:9, Act.14:3, 28 19:22 20:18, 1Co.16:7, Rev.6:11.† SYN.: see: καιρός (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μικρὸν

한글 발음: 미크론

mikron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3398 원어 검색에서 보기 G3398
Lemma
μικρός
Strong
G3398
형태소
A-ASM
품사
형용사
작은
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '작은, 적은, 어린'.

원문 정의 보기

μικρός, -ά, -όν [in LXX chiefly for קָטָן, מָעַט ;] small, little; __1. of persons; __(a) lit., of stature: Mrk.15:40 (MM, iii, xvi; on the view that age is meant, see Deiss., BS, 144), Luk.19:3; οἱ μ., the little ones, Mat.18:6, 10 18:14, Mrk.9:42; __(b) hence metaphorically, of rank or influence (cf. Dalman, Words, 113 f.) : Mat.10:42, Luk.17:2, Act.8:10 26:22, Heb.8:11" (LXX), Rev.11:18 13:16 19:5, 18 20:12; compar., -ότερος, Mat.11:11, Luk.7:28 9:48. __2. Of things; __(a) of size : Mat.13:32 Mrk.4:31, Jas.3:5; __(b) of quantity: Luk.12:32, 1Co.5:6, Gal.5:9, Rev.3:8; __(with) of time : Jhn.7:33 12:35, Rev.6:11 20:3. __3. Neut., μικρόν, used adverbially; __(a) of distance: Mat.26:39, Mrk.14:35; __(b) of quantity: 2Co.11:1 11:16; __(with) of time : Jhn.13:33 14:19 16:16-19, Heb.10:37; μετὰ μ., Mat.26:73, Mrk.14:70.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεθ᾽

한글 발음: 메트

meth᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3326 원어 검색에서 보기 G3326
Lemma
μετά
Strong
G3326
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~와 함께/~후에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~와 함께', 대격 '~후에'.

원문 정의 보기

μετά (before vowel μετ᾽; on the neglect of elision in certain cases, V. WH, App., 146 b), prep. with genitive, accusative (in poet, also with dative), [in LXX for אַחַד ,עִם ,אֵת, etc.]. __I. C. genitive, __1. among, amid: Mrk.1:13, Luk.22:37 (LXX, ἐν) 24:5, Jhn.18:5, al.; διωγμῶν, Mrk.10:30. __2. Of association and companionship, with (in which sense it gradually superseded σύν, than which it is much more frequently in NT; cf. Bl., §42, 3): with genitive of person(s), Mat.8:11 20:20 Mrk.1:29 3:7 Luk.5:30, Jhn.3:22, Gal.2:1, al. mult.; εἶναι μετά, Mat.5:25, Mrk.3:14, al.; metaphorically, of divine help and guidance, Jhn.3:2, Act.7:9, Php.4:9, al.; opposite to εἶναι κατά, Mat.12:30, Luk.11:23; in Hellenistic usage (but see M, Pr., 106, 246f.), πολεμεῖν μετά = cl. π., with dative, to wage war against (so LXX for נִלְחַם עִם, 1Ki.17:33), Rev.2:16, al.; with genitive of thing(s), χαρᾶς, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16, al.; ὀργῆς, Mrk.3:5, al. __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, behind, after: Heb.9:3. __2. Of time, after: Mat.17:1, Mrk.14:1, Luk.1:24, Act.1:5, Gal.1:18, al.; μετὰ τοῦτο, Jhn.2:12, al.; ταῦτα, Mrk.16:[12], Luk.5:27, Jhn.3:22, al; with inf. artic. (BL, §71, 5; 72, 3), Mat.26:32, Mrk.1:14, al. __III. In composition, __1. of association or community: μεταδίδωμι, μετέχω, etc. __2. Exchange or transference: μεταλλάσσω, μετοικίζω, etc. __3. after: μεταμέλομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμῶν

한글 발음: 휘몬

humōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2GP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰμι

한글 발음: 에이미

eimi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑπάγω

한글 발음: 휘파고

hupagō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5217 원어 검색에서 보기 G5217
Lemma
ὑπάγω
Strong
G5217
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
가다/물러가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가다, 물러가다'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑπ-άγω [in LXX: Exo.14:21 (הָלַךְ hi.), elsewhere only as seel., Tob.8:21, al. ;] a word of the vulgar language, in Pres. and imperfect only (Bl., § 53, 1). __I. Trans. __1. to lead or bring under, subdue (Hom., Hdt., al.; Ex, l.with). __2. to lead on slowly (Hdt., Xen., al.). __II. Intrans., to go slowly away, withdraw oneself, depart (so less frequently in cl.; Thuc., Eur., al.): absol., Mat.8:32 13:44, Mrk.6:33, Luk.8:42 17:14, Jhn.6:67 8:2 11:44 14:5, 28 18:8; οἱ ἐρχόμενοι κ. οἱ ὑπάγοντες, Mrk.6:31; ὑπῆγον κ. ἐπίστευον, Jhn.12:11; ἵνα ὑπαγῆτε κ. καρπὸν ψέρητε, Jhn.15:16; opposite to ἔρχεσθαι, Jhn.3:8 8:14; imperat., ὕπαγε, Mat.4:10 8:13 20:14, Mrk.2:9 T, Mrk.7:29 10:52; εἰς εἰρήνην (ἐν εἰ.), Mrk.5:34, Jas.2:16; id. prefixed to another imperat. (Bl., § 79, 4), Mat.5:34 8:4 18:15 19:21 21:28 27:65 28:10, Mrk.1:44 10:21 16:7, Jhn.4:16 9:7, Rev.10:8; with καί inserted, Rev.16:1; euphemistically, of death, Mat.26:24, Mrk.14:21; with adv.: ποῦ (which see), Jhn.12:35 14:5 16:5, 1Jn.2:11; ὅπου (which see), Jhn.8:21-22 13:33, 36 14:4 Rev.14:4; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.11:8; with prep.: πρός, Jhn.7:33 13:3 16:5, 10 16:17; εἰς, Mat.9:6 20:4, 7, Mrk.2:11 11:2 14:13, Luk.19:30, Jhn.6:21 7:3 9:11 11:31, Rev.13:10 17:8, 11; εἰς . . . πρός, Mat.26:18, Mrk.5:19; ἐπί, Luk.12:58; μετά, Mat.5:41; ὀπίσω, Mat.16:23, Mrk.8:33; with inf., Jhn.21:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πέμψαντά

한글 발음: 펨프산타

pempsanta

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3992 원어 검색에서 보기 G3992
Lemma
πέμπω
Strong
G3992
형태소
V-AAP-ASM
품사
동사
보내다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보내다, 파견하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πέμπω [in LXX chiefly for שָׁלַח ;] to send; __(a) of persons: with accusative, absol., Mat.22:7, Luk.7:19, Jhn.1:22, 2Co.9:3, al.; ptcp. before verb., Mat.14:10, Act.19:31, al.; ptcp. before διά (= Heb. יָד;, 1Ki.16:20, al.), Mat.11:2 (cf. Rev.1:1); of teachers sent by God, Jhn.1:33 4:34, Rom.8:3, al.; with accusative and dative, 1Co.4:17, Php.2:19; before πρός, with accusative, Luk.4:26, Jhn.16:7, al.; before λέγων (cf. Heb. אָמַר שָׁלַח Gen.38:25, al.), Luk.7:6, 19; before εἰς, with accusative loc., Mat.2:8, Luk.15:15, al.; before εἰς (of purpose), Eph.6:22, Col.4:8, 1Pe.2:14; with inf., Jhn.1:33, 1Co.16:3, Rev.22:16; __(b) of things : Rev.11:10; before εἰς, Rev.1:11; id., of purpose, Act.11:29, Php.4:16; with dative of person(s), 2Th.2:11; π. τ. δρέπανον σου (cf. εξαποστείλατε δρέπανα = מַגָּל שָׁלַח, Jol.3:13), Rev.14:15, 18 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, μετα-, προ-, συν-πέμπω) SYN.: ἀποστέλλω, q.v (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με.

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Ye shall seek me, and shall not find me: and where I am, ye cannot come.

원어

ζητήσετέ

한글 발음: 제테세테

zētēsete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-FAI-2P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐχ

한글 발음: 우크

ouch

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὑρήσετέ

한글 발음: 헤우레세테

heurēsete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-FAI-2P
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με,

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅπου

한글 발음: 호푸

hopou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3699 원어 검색에서 보기 G3699
Lemma
ὅπου
Strong
G3699
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하는 곳
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '~하는 곳에, ~한 데서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅπου adv. of place, correlat. of ποῦ (which see), where. __I. Prop., of place, __1. where; __(a) in relative sentences, with indic: Mat.25:24, 26, Mrk.2:4 4:5, 15 5:40 13:14, Jhn.3:8 6:62 7:34, 36 11:32 14:3 17:24 20:19, Rom.15:20, Rev.2:13; after nouns of place, for relat. prepositional phrase (ἐν ᾧ., etc.), Mat.6:19-20 13:5 26:57 28:6, Mrk.6:55 9:48 Luk.12:33, Jhn.1:28 4:20, 46 6:23 7:42 10:40 11:30 12:1 18:1, 20 19:18, 20 19:41 20:12, Act.17:1, Rev.2:13 11:8 20:10; before ἐκεῖ., Mat.6:21, Luk.12:34 17:37 Jhn.12:26; id. pleonast. (= Heb. שָׁם . . . אֲשֶׁר; Aram. תַּמָּן . . דּ; of. Gen.13:3), ὅ. . . . ἐκεῖ, Rev.12:6, 14; ὅ. . . . ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Rev.17:9; ὅ. ἄν, wherever (M, Pr., 168), with imperfect indic., Mrk.6:56; with Pres. subjc., Mat.24:28; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.26:13, Mrk.6:10 9:18 14:9, 14 a; __(b) in quaest. indir., with aor. subjc.: Mrk.14:14 b, Luk.22:11. __2. In late writers (sometimes also in cl.; Bl., § 25, 2), with verbs of motion, = ὅποι, whither: with indic., Jhn.8:21-22 13:33, 36 14:4 21:18, Heb.6:20, Jas.3:4; ὅ. ἄν, whithersoever, with present ind., Rev.14:4; subjc., Luk.9:57; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.8:19. __II. Without strict local sense, __1. of time or condition: Col.3:11, Heb.9:16 10:18, Jas.3:16, 2Pe.2:11. __2. Of cause or reason (AV, whereas): 1Co.3:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰμὶ

한글 발음: 에이미

eimi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγὼ

한글 발음: 에고

egō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1NS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμεῖς

한글 발음: 휘메이스

humeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2NP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δύνασθε

한글 발음: 뒤나스테

dunasthe

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1410 원어 검색에서 보기 G1410
Lemma
δύναμαι
Strong
G1410
형태소
V-PNI-2P
품사
동사
할 수 있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할 수 있다, 능력이 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

δύναμαι, depon., [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres., Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al.; with inf. aor., Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al.; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλθεῖν.¶

한글 발음: 엘테인

elthein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-2AAN
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The Jews therefore said among themselves, Whither will this man go that we shall not find him? will he go unto the Dispersion among the Greeks, and teach the Greeks?

원어

εἶπον

한글 발음: 에이폰

eipon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰουδαῖοι

한글 발음: 이우다이오이

Ioudaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2453 원어 검색에서 보기 G2453
Lemma
Ἰουδαῖος
Strong
G2453
형태소
N-NPM-PG
품사
명사
유대인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사·형용사 '유대인의, 유대 사람'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰουδαῖος, -αία, -αῖον (Ἰούδας), Jewish: ἀνήρ, Act.10:28 22:3; ἄνθρωπος, Act.21:39; ψευδοπροφήτης, 13:6; ἀσχιερεύς, 19:14; γυνή, 16:1 24:24; γῆ, Jhn.3:22; χώρα, Mrk.1:5. Substantively, __(a) Ἰουδαῖος, ὁ, a Jew: Jhn.4:9, Act.18:24, Rom.2:28; pl., Rev.2:9 3:9; οἱ Ἰ., Mat.2:2, Mrk.7:3, Jhn.2:6, al.; Ἰ. τε καὶ Ἕλληνες, Act.14:1, al.; κ. προσήλυτοι, Act.2:10; ἔθνη τε κ. Ἰ., Act.14:5; οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη, Act.21:21; of Jewish Christians, Gal.2:13; of the ruling class who opposed Jesus, Jhn.1:19 2:18 5:10 11:8 13:33, al.; __(b) Ἰουδαία, -ας, ἡ (sc. γῆ, χώρα, cf. Jhn.3:22, Mrk.1:5), (Heb. יְהוּדָה), Judæa: Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Jhn.4:3, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑαυτούς·

한글 발음: 헤아우투스

he'autous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1438 원어 검색에서 보기 G1438
Lemma
ἑαυτοῦ
Strong
G1438
형태소
F-3APM
품사
-
자기 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

재귀대명사 '자기 자신의/을'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ, dative -ῷ, etc., accusative -όν, etc., pi. -ῶν, etc. (Att. contr. αὑτοῦ, etc); reflex pron.; __1. prop, of 3rd person (Lat. sui, sibi, se), of himself, herself, itself, etc.: Mat.27:42, Mrk.15:31, Luk.23:35, al.; added to a middle verb, διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς, Jhn.19:24; to an active verb, Act.14:14 (M, Pr., 157); ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Luk.12:57 21:30, Jhn.5:19, al. (see: ἀπό); δι᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, Rom.14:14; ἐν ἑ., Mat.3:9, Mrk.5:30, al.; εἰς ἑ., Luk.15:17; καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, Act.28:16, Jas.2:17; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, at his own house, 1Co.16:2; πρὸς ἑ., with, to himself, Luk.18:11; as poss. pron. (with emphasis weakened; see M, Pr., 87f.), τ. ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς, Luk.9:60. __2. As reflexive 1st and 2nd of person(s) (so also frequently in cl., chiefly poetry), Mat.23:31, Mrk.9:50, Rom.8:23, 1Th.2:8, al. __3. In pl., for reciprocal pron., ἀλλήλων, -οις, -ους, of one another, etc.: Mat.21:38, Mrk.16:3, Eph.5:19, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποῦ

한글 발음: 푸

pou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4226 원어 검색에서 보기 G4226
Lemma
ποῦ
Strong
G4226
형태소
ADV-I
품사
-
어디
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문부사 '어디에, 어디로'.

원문 정의 보기

ποῦ interrog. adv., [in LXX for אַי, אַיֵּה, אָן ;] __1. prop., where?: Mat.2:2 26:17, Mrk.14:12, 14, Luk.17:17, 37 22:9, 11, Jhn.1:39 7:11 8:10, 19 9:12 11:34; ποῦ (ἐστιν), indicating that the subject in question is not to be found, Luk.8:25, Rom.3:27, 1Co.1:20 12:17 12:19 15:55, Gal.4:15, 2Pe.3:4; ποῦ φανεῖται, 1Pe.4:18. __2. = ὅπου (WM, 640; B1., § 50, 5): with indic., Mat.2:4, Mrk.15:47, Jhn.1:40 11:57 20:2, 13 20:15 Rev.2:13; with subjc., Mat.8:20, Luk.9:58 12:17. __3. In colloq. (as in Eng.) = ποῖ, whither: in direct questions, Jhn.7:35 9:12 13:36 16:5; in indir. quest., Jhn.3:8 8:14 12:35 14:5, Heb.11:8, 1Jn.2:11.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτος

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μέλλει

한글 발음: 멜레이

mellei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3195 원어 검색에서 보기 G3195
Lemma
μέλλω
Strong
G3195
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~하려 하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '막 ~하려 하다, 장차 ~할 것이다'.

원문 정의 보기

μέλλω, [in LXX: Job.3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and frequently in Wi, II, 4Mac ;] to be about to be or do; __1. with inf. (Bl., §62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114); __(a) of intending or being about to do of one's own free will: with inf. praes., Mat.2:13, Luk.10:1, Act.3:3 5:35, Heb.8:5, 2Pe.1:12 (Field, Notes, 240), al.; with inf. aor. (Bl., §58, 3), Act.12:6, Rev.3:16; __(b) of compulsion, necessity or certainty: with inf. praes., Mat.16:27, Luk.9:31, Jhn.6:71, Rom.4:24, al.; with inf. aor., Rom.8:18, Gal.3:23, Rev.3:2 12:4. __2. Ptcp., ὁ μέλλων: absol., Rom.8:38, 1Co.3:22; τὰ μ., Col.2:17; εἰς τὸ μ. (Field, Notes, 65); with subst., Mat.3:7 12:32 (ὁ αἰὼν ὁ μ.; LXX for עַד), Act.24:25, 1Ti.4:8, Heb.2:5, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πορεύεσθαι

한글 발음: 포레우에스타이

poreuesthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4198 원어 검색에서 보기 G4198
Lemma
πορεύω
Strong
G4198
형태소
V-PNN
품사
동사
가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가다, 여행하다, 행하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πορεύω, (πόρος, a ford, a passage), [in LXX chiefly for הלךְ ;] in cl. (the act. becomes obsolete in late Gk.; see M, Pr., 162), to cause to go over, carry, convey. Mid. (always in LXX and NT), ־ομαι, to go, proceed, go on one's way: with accusative, ὁδόν, Act.8:39; before ἐκεῖθεν, Mat.19:15; ἐντεῦθεν, Luk.13:31; ἀπό, Mat.25:41, Luk.4:42; εἰς, Mat.2:20, Mrk.16:12, Luk.1:39, Jhn.7:35, al; εἰς εἰρήνην (cf. 1Ki.1:17). Luk.7:50; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Act.16:36; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.22:9, Act.25:12, al; ἕως, Act.23:23; οὗ, Luk.24:28, 1Co.16:6; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Mat.25:9, Luk.11:5, al.; κατὰ τ. ὁδόν, Act.8:36; διά, with genitive, Mat.12:1, Mrk.9:30; with inf., Luk.2:3, Jhn.14:2; σύν, Luk.7:6, al.; ἵνα, Jhn.11:11; absol., Mat.2:9, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:50, Act.5:20, al.; ptcp., πορευθείς (on the pass. form of the aor., see M, Pr., 161f.), redundant (as in Heb. and Aram.; V. M, Pr., 231; Dalman, Words, 21), Mat.2:8, Luk.7:22, al. Metaphorical (cf. Soph., O.T., 884; Xen., Cyr., 2, 2, 24, al), __(a) like οἴχομαι in cl., as euphemism for θνήσκω (so הלךְ in Gen.15:2); Luk.22:22 and perh. also 13:33 (see Field, Notes, 66); __(b) in ethical sense (Deu.19:9, Psa.14:2, al; cf. M, Pr., 11.2; Kennedy, Sources, 107): before ἐν, Luk.1:6, 1Pe.4:3, 2Pe.2:19; κατά, with accusative, 2Pe.3:3, Ju 16, 18; with dative (Bl, §38, 3), Act.9:31 14:16, Ju 11; __(with) of disciples or partisans ( Jdg.2:12, 3Ki.11:10, Sir.46:10): before ὀπίσω, with genitive of person(s), Luk.21:8 (cf. δια-, εἰς-, (-μαι), ἐκ- (-μαι), ἐν- (-μαι), ἐπι- (-μαι), παρα- (-μαι), προ-, προσ- (-μαι), συν- (-μαι)). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμεῖς

한글 발음: 헤메이스

hēmeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1NP
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐχ

한글 발음: 우크

ouch

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὑρήσομεν

한글 발음: 헤우레소멘

heurēsomen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-FAI-1P
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν;

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὴν

한글 발음: 텐

tēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διασπορὰν

한글 발음: 디아스포란

diasporan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1290 원어 검색에서 보기 G1290
Lemma
διασπορά
Strong
G1290
형태소
N-ASF
품사
명사
흩어진 자/디아스포라
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '흩어짐, 흩어진 자들'.

원문 정의 보기

δια-σπορά, -ᾶς, ἡ (διασπείρω), [in LXX of Israelites dispersed and exiled in foreign lands, as Deu.28:25 (זַעֲוָה) Deu.30:4 (נָדַח ni.), Isa.49:6 (נער); by meton., of the exiles themselves (as Psa.147:2, 2Ma.1:27) ;] a dispersion: δ. τῶν Ἑλλήνων, Jhn.7:35; metaphorically, of Christians (DB, iii, 782 f.), Jas.1:1, 1Pe.1:1 (see Hort, in ll).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἑλλήνων

한글 발음: 헬레논

Hellēnōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1672 원어 검색에서 보기 G1672
Lemma
Ἕλλην=Ἕλλην
Strong
G1672
형태소
N-GPM-LG
품사
명사
헬라인/이방인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '헬라인, 그리스 사람, (넓게) 이방인'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἕλλην, -ηνος, ὁ [in LXX: Jol.3:6, Zec.9:13 (יָוָן), etc.; 1Ma.1:19, al. * ;] a Greek; opposite to βάρβαρος, Rom.1:14; usually in ΝΤ of Greek Gentiles, opposite to Ἰουδαῖοι: Jhn.7:35, Act.11:29 14:1 16:1, 3 18:4 19:19, 17 20:21 21:28 Rom.1:16 2:9-10 3:9 10:12, 1Co.1:22 1:24 10:32 12:13, Gal.2:3 3:28, Col.3:11; of proselytes, Jhn.12:29, Act.17:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μέλλει

한글 발음: 멜레이

mellei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3195 원어 검색에서 보기 G3195
Lemma
μέλλω
Strong
G3195
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~하려 하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '막 ~하려 하다, 장차 ~할 것이다'.

원문 정의 보기

μέλλω, [in LXX: Job.3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and frequently in Wi, II, 4Mac ;] to be about to be or do; __1. with inf. (Bl., §62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114); __(a) of intending or being about to do of one's own free will: with inf. praes., Mat.2:13, Luk.10:1, Act.3:3 5:35, Heb.8:5, 2Pe.1:12 (Field, Notes, 240), al.; with inf. aor. (Bl., §58, 3), Act.12:6, Rev.3:16; __(b) of compulsion, necessity or certainty: with inf. praes., Mat.16:27, Luk.9:31, Jhn.6:71, Rom.4:24, al.; with inf. aor., Rom.8:18, Gal.3:23, Rev.3:2 12:4. __2. Ptcp., ὁ μέλλων: absol., Rom.8:38, 1Co.3:22; τὰ μ., Col.2:17; εἰς τὸ μ. (Field, Notes, 65); with subst., Mat.3:7 12:32 (ὁ αἰὼν ὁ μ.; LXX for עַד), Act.24:25, 1Ti.4:8, Heb.2:5, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πορεύεσθαι

한글 발음: 포레우에스타이

poreuesthai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4198 원어 검색에서 보기 G4198
Lemma
πορεύω
Strong
G4198
형태소
V-PNN
품사
동사
가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가다, 여행하다, 행하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πορεύω, (πόρος, a ford, a passage), [in LXX chiefly for הלךְ ;] in cl. (the act. becomes obsolete in late Gk.; see M, Pr., 162), to cause to go over, carry, convey. Mid. (always in LXX and NT), ־ομαι, to go, proceed, go on one's way: with accusative, ὁδόν, Act.8:39; before ἐκεῖθεν, Mat.19:15; ἐντεῦθεν, Luk.13:31; ἀπό, Mat.25:41, Luk.4:42; εἰς, Mat.2:20, Mrk.16:12, Luk.1:39, Jhn.7:35, al; εἰς εἰρήνην (cf. 1Ki.1:17). Luk.7:50; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Act.16:36; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.22:9, Act.25:12, al; ἕως, Act.23:23; οὗ, Luk.24:28, 1Co.16:6; πρός, with accusative of person(s), Mat.25:9, Luk.11:5, al.; κατὰ τ. ὁδόν, Act.8:36; διά, with genitive, Mat.12:1, Mrk.9:30; with inf., Luk.2:3, Jhn.14:2; σύν, Luk.7:6, al.; ἵνα, Jhn.11:11; absol., Mat.2:9, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:50, Act.5:20, al.; ptcp., πορευθείς (on the pass. form of the aor., see M, Pr., 161f.), redundant (as in Heb. and Aram.; V. M, Pr., 231; Dalman, Words, 21), Mat.2:8, Luk.7:22, al. Metaphorical (cf. Soph., O.T., 884; Xen., Cyr., 2, 2, 24, al), __(a) like οἴχομαι in cl., as euphemism for θνήσκω (so הלךְ in Gen.15:2); Luk.22:22 and perh. also 13:33 (see Field, Notes, 66); __(b) in ethical sense (Deu.19:9, Psa.14:2, al; cf. M, Pr., 11.2; Kennedy, Sources, 107): before ἐν, Luk.1:6, 1Pe.4:3, 2Pe.2:19; κατά, with accusative, 2Pe.3:3, Ju 16, 18; with dative (Bl, §38, 3), Act.9:31 14:16, Ju 11; __(with) of disciples or partisans ( Jdg.2:12, 3Ki.11:10, Sir.46:10): before ὀπίσω, with genitive of person(s), Luk.21:8 (cf. δια-, εἰς-, (-μαι), ἐκ- (-μαι), ἐν- (-μαι), ἐπι- (-μαι), παρα- (-μαι), προ-, προσ- (-μαι), συν- (-μαι)). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διδάσκειν

한글 발음: 디다스케인

didaskein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1321 원어 검색에서 보기 G1321
Lemma
διδάσκω
Strong
G1321
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
가르치다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '가르치다'.

원문 정의 보기

διδάσκω [in LXX chiefly for למד pl., also for ידע hi., ירה hi., etc. ;] to teach (i.e. instruct) a person, teach a thing; __1. trans.: with accusative of person(s), Mat.5:2, Mrk.1:22, al.; before ὅτι, Mrk.8:31; περί, 1Jn.2:27; with inf., Luk.11:1; with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.6:30 12:14; with cogn. accusative, Mat.15:9 (LXX); with dupl. accusative, Mrk.4:2, Jhn.14:26; pass., Gal.1:12, 2Th.2:15; with dative of person(s) (like Heb., cf. Job.21:23, but prob. a vernac. usage, see Swete, in l.), Rev.2:14. __2. Absol., to teach, give instruction: Mat.4:23, Mrk.1:21, and often in Gosp., Rom.12:7, 1Co.4:17, 1Ti.2:12, al. SYN.: παιδεύω (cf. Westc., Heb., 402; Cremer, 180). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

한글 발음: 투스

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἕλληνας;

한글 발음: 헬레나스

Hellēnas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1672 원어 검색에서 보기 G1672
Lemma
Ἕλλην=Ἕλλην
Strong
G1672
형태소
N-APM-LG
품사
명사
헬라인/이방인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '헬라인, 그리스 사람, (넓게) 이방인'.

원문 정의 보기

Ἕλλην, -ηνος, ὁ [in LXX: Jol.3:6, Zec.9:13 (יָוָן), etc.; 1Ma.1:19, al. * ;] a Greek; opposite to βάρβαρος, Rom.1:14; usually in ΝΤ of Greek Gentiles, opposite to Ἰουδαῖοι: Jhn.7:35, Act.11:29 14:1 16:1, 3 18:4 19:19, 17 20:21 21:28 Rom.1:16 2:9-10 3:9 10:12, 1Co.1:22 1:24 10:32 12:13, Gal.2:3 3:28, Col.3:11; of proselytes, Jhn.12:29, Act.17:4.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
What is this word that he said,Ye shall seek me, and shall not find me; and where I am, ye cannot come?

원어

τίς

한글 발음: 티스

tis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5101 원어 검색에서 보기 G5101
Lemma
τίς
Strong
G5101
형태소
I-NSM
품사
-
누구/무엇 (의문)
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문대명사 '누구, 무엇, 어느'.

원문 정의 보기

τίς, neut., τί, genitive, τίνος, interrog. pron., [in LXX for מָה ,מִי ;] in masc. and fem., who, which, what?; in neut., which, what?, used both in direct and in indirect questions. __I. I. As subst., __1. 1. masc., fem.: τίς; who, what?, Mat.3:7 26:68; Mrk.11:28, Luk.9:9, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Act.7:52, Heb.1:5, al; before ἐκ (= genitive partit.), Mat.6:27, Luk.14:28, Jhn.8:46; = ποῖος, Mrk.4:41 6:2, Luk.19:3, Act.17:19, al.; = πότερος (M, Pr., 77), Mat.21:31 27:17, Luk.22:27, al.; = ὅς or ὅστις (rare in cl.; cf. Bl., §50, 5; M, Pr., 93), Act.13:25. __2. Neut.: τί; what?, Mat.5:47 11:7, Mrk.10:3, al.; χάριν τίνος, 1Jn.3:12; διὰ τί, Mat.9:11, al.; εἰς τί, Mat.14:31, al.; elliptically, ἵνα τί (sc. γένηται), why, Mat.9:5, al.; τί οὖν, Rom.3:9 6:1, 15 1Co.14:15, al.; τί γάρ, Rom.3:3, Phi 1:18; τί ἐμοὶ (ὑμῖν) καὶ σοί, see: ἔγω. __II. As adj.: who? what? which?, Mat.5:46, Luk.14:31, Jhn.2:18, al. __III. As adv.: = διὰ τι (τί ὅτι), why, Mat.6:28, Mrk.4:40, Luk.6:46, Jhn.18:23, al.; in rhet. questions, = a negation, Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, 23 1Co.5:12 7:16, al. in exclamations (like Heb. מָה), how (2Ki.6:20, Psa.3:2, al.), Luk.12:49. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λόγος

한글 발음: 로고스

logos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3056 원어 검색에서 보기 G3056
Lemma
λόγος
Strong
G3056
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
말씀/말
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '말, 말씀, 도(道), 이치'. 요한복음의 로고스.

원문 정의 보기

λόγος, -ου, ὁ (λέγω) [in LXX chiefly for דָּבָר, also for מִלָּה ,אֵמֶר, etc. ;] __I. Of that by which the inward thought is expressed, Lat. oratio, sermo, vox, verbum. __1. a word, not in the grammatical sense of a mere name (ἔπος, ὄνομα, ῥῆμα), but a word as embodying a conception or idea: Mat.8:8, Luk.7:7, 1Co.14:9, 19 Heb.12:19, al. __2. a saying, statement, declaration: Mat.19:22 (T om.), Mrk.5:36 7:29, Luk.1:29, Jhn.2:22 6:60, Act.7:29, al.; with genitive attrib., Act.13:15, Rom.9:9, Heb.7:28, al.; of the sayings, commands, promises, etc., of teachers, Mat.7:24 10:14, Mrk.8:38, Luk.9:4, Jhn.14:24, al.; λ. κενοί, Eph.5:6; ἀληθινοί, Rev.19:9; πιστοί, Rev.22:6; esp. of the precepts, decrees and promises of God, ὁ λ. τ. θεοῦ, the word of God: Mrk.7:13, Jhn.10:35, Rom.13:9, 1Co.14:36, Php.1:14, al.; absol., ὁ λ., Mat.13:21, 22 Mrk.16:[20], Luk.1:2, Act.6:4, Heb.4:12, al. __3. speech, discourse: Act.14:12, 2Co.10:10, Jas.3:2; opposite to ἐπιστολή, 2Th.2:15; disting, from σοφία, 1Co.2:1; ἀναστροφή, 1Ti.4:12; δύναμις, 1Co.4:19, 1Th.1:5; ἔργον, Rom.15:18; οὐδενὸς λ. τίμιον (not worthy of mention), Act.20:24; of the faculty of speech, Luk.24:19, 2Co.11:6; of the style of speech, Mat.5:37, 1Co.1:5; of instruction, Col.4:3, 1Pe.3:1; with genitive of person(s), Jhn.5:24 8:52, Act.2:41, al.; ὁ λ. ὁ ἐμός, Jhn.8:31; with genitive obj. (τ.) ἀληθείας, 2Co.6:7, Col.1:5, Jas.1:18; τ. καταλλαγῆς, 2Co.5:19; τ. σταυροῦ, 1Co.1:18; of mere talk, 1Co.4:19, 2o, Col.2:23, 1Jn.3:18; of the talk which one occasions, hence, repute: Col.2:23. __4. subject-matter, hence, teaching, doctrine: Act.18:15, 2Ti.2:17, al.; esp. of Christian doctrine: Mat.13:20-23, Mrk.4:14-20 8:32, Luk.1:2, Act.8:4, Gal.6:6, 1Th.1:6, al.; with genitive of person(s), τ. θεοῦ, Luk.5:1, Jhn.17:6, Act.4:29, 1Co.14:36, I Jhn.1:10, Rev.6:9, al.; τ. Κυρίου, Act.8:25, 1Th.1:8, al.; τ. Χριστοῦ, Col.3:16, Rev.3:8; with genitive appos., Act.15:7; with genitive attrib., Heb.5:13. __5. a story, tale, narrative: Mat.28:15, Jhn.21:23, Act.1:1 11:22; before περί, Luk.5:15. __6. That which is spoken of (Plat., al.; V. Kennedy, Sources, 124), matter, affair, thing: Mat.21:24, Mrk.1:45 11:29, Luk.20:3, Act.8:21; of a matter in dispute, as a case or suit at law, Act.19:38; pl. (1Ma.7:33, al.), Luk.1:4. __II. Of the inward thought itself, Lat. ratio. __1. reason, __(a) of the mental faculty (Hdt., Plat., al.): κατὰ λόγον, Act.18:14; __(b) a reason, cause: τίνι λόγῳ, Act.10:29; παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας, Mat.5:32 19:9, WH, mg., R, mg. __2. account, __(a) regard: Act.20:24, Rec.; __(b) reckoning: Php.4:15, 17; συναίρειν (which see) λ., Mat.18:23 25:19; in forensic sense, Rom.14:12, Heb.13:17, 1Pe.4:5; with genitive of thing(s), Luk.16:2; before περί, Mat.12:36, Act.19:40, 1Pe.3:15. __3. proportion, analogy: Php.2:16 (Field, Notes, 193 f.). __III. ὁ λ., the Divine Word or Logos: Jhn.1:1, 14; τ. ζωῆς, 1Jn.1:1; τ. θεοῦ, Rev.19:13 (see Westc, Swete, CGT, in ll.; reff. in Artt., Logos, DB, DCG). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτος

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὃν

한글 발음: 혼

hon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-ASM
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπεν·

한글 발음: 에이펜

eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζητήσετέ

한글 발음: 제테세테

zētēsete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2212 원어 검색에서 보기 G2212
Lemma
ζητέω
Strong
G2212
형태소
V-FAI-2P
품사
동사
찾다/구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 구하다, 추구하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζητέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for בּקשׁ pi., also for דּרשׁ, etc. ;] __1. to seek, seek for: Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative of person(s), Mrk.1:37, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:24, al.; id. before ἐν, Act.9:11; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.13:45, Luk.19:10; before ἐν, Luk.13:6, 7; ψυχήν, of plotting against one's life ( Exo.4:19, al.), Mat.2:20, Rom.11:3" (LXX) . Metaphorical, to seek by thinking, search after, inquire into: Mrk.11:18, Luk.12:28, Jhn.16:19; τ. θεόν, Act.17:27. __2. to seek or strive after, desire: Mat.12:46, Mrk.12:12, Luk.9:9, Jhn.5:18, Rom.10:3, al.; τ. θάνατον, Rev.9:6; τ. βασιλείαν τ. θεοῦ, Mat.6:33 (Dalman, Words, 121f.); τὰ ἄνω, Col.3:1; εἰρήνην, 1Pe.3:11 (LXX). __3. to require, demand: with accusative of thing(s), Mrk.8:12, Luk.11:29, 1Co.1:22, 2Co.13:3; before παρά, Mrk.8:11, al.; ἵνα, 1Co.4:2 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐπι-, συν-ζητέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐχ

한글 발음: 우크

ouch

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εὑρήσετέ

한글 발음: 헤우레세테

heurēsete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2147 원어 검색에서 보기 G2147
Lemma
εὑρίσκω
Strong
G2147
형태소
V-FAI-2P
품사
동사
찾다/발견하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '찾다, 발견하다, 만나다'.

원문 정의 보기

εὑρίσκω, [in LXX chiefly for מצא, also for נשׂג hi., etc. ;] to find, with or without previous search: absol., opposite to ζητέω, Mat.7:7, 8 Luk.11:9, 10; with accusative, Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:37, Act.13:22, 2Ti.1:17, al.; pass., οὐχ εὑ., of disappearance, Heb.11:5, Rev.16:20, al.; γῆ κ. τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται (for conjectures as to the meaning of this reading, see Mayor, ICC, in l.), 2Pe.3:10, WH, R, mg. Metaphorical, to find, find out by inquiry, learn, discover: Luk.19:48, Act.4:21; αἰτίαν, Jhn.18:38, Act.13:28, al.; pass., Mat.1:18, Luk.17:18, Rom.7:10, 1Co.4:2, Gal.2:17, 1Pe.1:7, Rev.5:4, al.; of attaining to the knowledge of God, εὑ. θεόν, Act.17:27; pass., Rom.10:20 (LXX). Mid., to find for oneself, gain, procure, obtain: with accusative of thing(s), λύτρωσιν, Heb.9:12; act. in same sense (so cl. poets, but not in Attic prose), Mat.10:39 11:29, Luk.1:30, Act.7:46, 2Ti.1:18, al. (cf. ἀν-ευρίσκω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με,

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅπου

한글 발음: 호푸

hopou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3699 원어 검색에서 보기 G3699
Lemma
ὅπου
Strong
G3699
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~하는 곳
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '~하는 곳에, ~한 데서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅπου adv. of place, correlat. of ποῦ (which see), where. __I. Prop., of place, __1. where; __(a) in relative sentences, with indic: Mat.25:24, 26, Mrk.2:4 4:5, 15 5:40 13:14, Jhn.3:8 6:62 7:34, 36 11:32 14:3 17:24 20:19, Rom.15:20, Rev.2:13; after nouns of place, for relat. prepositional phrase (ἐν ᾧ., etc.), Mat.6:19-20 13:5 26:57 28:6, Mrk.6:55 9:48 Luk.12:33, Jhn.1:28 4:20, 46 6:23 7:42 10:40 11:30 12:1 18:1, 20 19:18, 20 19:41 20:12, Act.17:1, Rev.2:13 11:8 20:10; before ἐκεῖ., Mat.6:21, Luk.12:34 17:37 Jhn.12:26; id. pleonast. (= Heb. שָׁם . . . אֲשֶׁר; Aram. תַּמָּן . . דּ; of. Gen.13:3), ὅ. . . . ἐκεῖ, Rev.12:6, 14; ὅ. . . . ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Rev.17:9; ὅ. ἄν, wherever (M, Pr., 168), with imperfect indic., Mrk.6:56; with Pres. subjc., Mat.24:28; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.26:13, Mrk.6:10 9:18 14:9, 14 a; __(b) in quaest. indir., with aor. subjc.: Mrk.14:14 b, Luk.22:11. __2. In late writers (sometimes also in cl.; Bl., § 25, 2), with verbs of motion, = ὅποι, whither: with indic., Jhn.8:21-22 13:33, 36 14:4 21:18, Heb.6:20, Jas.3:4; ὅ. ἄν, whithersoever, with present ind., Rev.14:4; subjc., Luk.9:57; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.8:19. __II. Without strict local sense, __1. of time or condition: Col.3:11, Heb.9:16 10:18, Jas.3:16, 2Pe.2:11. __2. Of cause or reason (AV, whereas): 1Co.3:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰμὶ

한글 발음: 에이미

eimi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-1S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγὼ

한글 발음: 에고

egō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1NS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμεῖς

한글 발음: 휘메이스

humeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2NP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐ

한글 발음: 우

ou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δύνασθε

한글 발음: 뒤나스테

dunasthe

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1410 원어 검색에서 보기 G1410
Lemma
δύναμαι
Strong
G1410
형태소
V-PNI-2P
품사
동사
할 수 있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '할 수 있다, 능력이 있다'.

원문 정의 보기

δύναμαι, depon., [in LXX chiefly for יָכֹל ;] to be able, have power, whether by personal ability, permission, or opportunity: with inf. (M, Pr., 205; WM, §44, 3) pres., Mat.6:24, Mrk.2:7, Jhn.3:2, 1Co.10:21, al.; with inf. aor., Mat.3:9, Mrk.1:45, Jhn.3:3, 4 Rom.8:39, al.; with accusative, to be able to do something: Mrk.9:22, Luk.12:26; 2Co.13:8; absol., to be able, capable, powerful: 1Co.3:2 10:13. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλθεῖν;¶

한글 발음: 엘테인

elthein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-2AAN
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Now on the last day, the great [day] of the feast, Jesus stood and cried, saying,If any man thirst, let him come unto me and drink.

원어

Ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

En

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐσχάτῃ

한글 발음: 에스카테

eschatē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2078 원어 검색에서 보기 G2078
Lemma
ἔσχατος
Strong
G2078
형태소
A-DSF
품사
형용사
마지막의/끝의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '마지막의, 끝의, 가장 작은'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔσχατος, -η, -ον [in LXX chiefly for אַחֲרִית אַחֲרוֹן ;] last, utmost, extreme; __(a) of place: of the lowest or least honoured place, Luk.14:9-10; τ. ἔσχατον, with genitive part., Act.1:8 13:47; __(b) of time: Mat.20:12, 14, Mrk.12:6, 22, opposite to πρῶτος, Mat.20:8, 1Co.15:45, Rev.2:19, al.; τὰ ἔ. καὶ T. πρῶτα, Mat.12:45, Luk.11:26, 2Pe.2:20; of the Eternal, ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔ., Rev.1:17 2:8 22:13; in phrases relating to the Messianic age and the consummation of the Kingdom of God: ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτου (-ων) τ. ἡμερῶν, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; τ. χρόνων, 1Pe.1:20; ἔ. ὥρα, 1Jn.2:18; ἐπ᾽ ἐ. χόνου, Ju 18; ἐν ἐ. ἡμέραις, Act.2:17, Jas.5:3, 2Ti.3:1; neut., ἔσχατον, as adv., Mrk.12:22, 1Co.15:8; __(with) of rank: Mrk.9:35, 1Co.4:9 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμέρᾳ

한글 발음: 헤메라

hēmera

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2250 원어 검색에서 보기 G2250
Lemma
ἡμέρα
Strong
G2250
형태소
N-DSF
품사
명사
날/하루
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '날, 하루, 낮'.

원문 정의 보기

ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם ;] day; __1. as distinct from night: genitive ἡμέρας, by day (WM, §30, 11), Rev.21:25; ἡ. κ. νυκτός (ν. κ. ̔ἡ.), Act.9:24, 1Th.2:9, 2Th.3:8, Rev.4:8 (BL, §36, 13); ἡμέρας μέσης, at mid-day, Act.26:13; accusative durat., τ. ἡμέρας, Luk.21:37; ὅλην τὴν ἡ., Rom.8:36; ἐν ἡμέρα, Jhn.11:9, Rom.13:13; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day's journey, Luk.2:44; ἡ. γίνεται, Lk 4:42 22:66; κλίνει, Luk.9:12, al.; metaphorically, Jhn.9:4, Rom.13:12, 1Th.5:4, 5 8, 2Pe.1:19. __2. Of a civil day of 24 hours, incl. night: Mat.6:34, Mrk.6:21, Luk.13:14, al.; τρίτῃ ἡ., Mat.16:21; ἡμέρᾳ κ. ἡ. (cf. יוֹם בְּיוֹם, Est.3:4), 2Co.4:16; ὅλην τ. ἡ., Rom.8:36 10:21; pl., Jhn.2:12, Act.9:19, al.; ἡ. τῶν ἀζύμων, Act.12:3; τ. σαββάτου, Luk.13:14, 16; ἡ κυριάκη ἡ., Rev.1:10. __3. In Messianic sense, of the last day: ἡ ἡ. (ἐκείνη, τ. κυρίου, etc.), Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, Rom.13:12, 1Co.1:8, 1Th.5:2, 2Th.2:2, 2Pe.3:10, al; by meton., as compared with the divine judgment on that day, ἡ. ἀνθρωπίνη, of a human tribunal, 1Co.4:3 (EV, man's judgment). __4. As in Heb. (also in Gk. writers; Bl, §46, 9; M, Pr., 81), of time in general: Jhn.8:56 14:20, 2Co.6:2, Eph.6:13, 2Pe.3:18; pl. Act.15:7, Eph.5:16, Heb.10:32; πᾶσας τὰς ἡ. (cf. כָּל הַיָּמִים, Deu.4:40, al.; MM, Exp., xv), Mat.28:20; ἐλεύσονται ἡ. ὅταν (ὅτε), Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, Luk.5:35 17:22; αἱ ἡ., with genitive of person(s) (Gen.26:1, al.), Mat.2:1, Luk.1:5, Act.7:45, 1Pe.3:20; ἀρχ̀ ἡμερῶν, Heb.7:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῇ

한글 발음: 테

tēa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μεγάλῃ

한글 발음: 메갈레

megalē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3173 원어 검색에서 보기 G3173
Lemma
μέγας
Strong
G3173
형태소
A-DSF
품사
형용사
큰/위대한
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '큰, 위대한'.

원문 정의 보기

μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα, [in LXX chiefly for גָּדוֹל, also for מַרְבֶּה ,רַב (incl. μείζων), רֹב (μέγιστος) ;] great; __1. of external form, bodily size, measure, extent: λίθος, Mat.2:60; δράκων, Rev.12:3; ἰχθῦς, Jhn.21:11; πόλις, Rev.11:8; μάχαιρα, Rev.6:4, al. __2. Of intensity and degree: δύναμις, Act.4:33; φόβος, Mrk.4:41; ἀγάπη, Jhn.15:13; ἄνεμος, 'ib. 6:18; κραυγή, Act.23:9; φῶς, Mat.4:16; πυρετός, Luk.4:38; θλίψις, Mat.24:21. __3. Of rank; __(a) of persons: θεός (MM, xvi), Tit.2:13; Ἄρτεμις, Act.19:27; compar. (see infr.), Mat.18:1 (cf. Dalman, Words, 113f.); neut. for masc. (Bl., §32, 1), Mat.12:6; __(b) of things: ἁμαρτία, Jhn.19:11; μυστήριον, Eph.5:32; = μεγίστη (see infr., and cf. Field, Notes, 16f.), Mat.22:36; compar. for superl. (M, Pr., 78), 1Co.13:13. __4. __(a) Compar., μείζων: Mat.11:11 23:17, al.; neut. pl., μείζονα, contr. μείζω, Jhn.1:51; double compar., μειζότερος (M, Pr., 236; Bl., §11, 4), III Jo 4; __(b) superl, μέγιστος (Deiss., BS, 365), 2Pe.1:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἑορτῆς

한글 발음: 헤오르테스

he'ortēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1859 원어 검색에서 보기 G1859
Lemma
ἑορτή
Strong
G1859
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
명절/절기
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '명절, 절기, 축제'.

원문 정의 보기

ἑορτή, -ῆς, ἡ [in LXX for חַג (chiefly), מוֹעֵד ;] a feast, festival: Luk.2:42, Jhn.5:1, Jhn.6:4 Jhn.7:37, Col.2:10; ἡ ἑ. τοῦ πάσχα, Luk.2:41, Jhn.13:1; τ. ἀζύμων, Luk.22:1; ἡ σκηνοπηγία, Jhn.7:2 (Deiss., LAE, 116); ἐν τ. ἑ., Mat.26:5, Mrk.14:2, Jhn.4:45 7:11 12:20 (εἶναι ἐν ἑ.), Jhn.2:23; εἰς τ. ἑ. (for the feast), Jhn.13:29; ἀναβαίνειν, ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τ. ἑ., Jhn.4:45 7:8-10 11:56 12:12; τῆς ἐ μεσούσης, Jhn.7:14; κατὰ ἑ. (at each feast), Mat.27:15, Mrk.15:6, Luk.23:17, R, mg.; τ. ἑ. ποιεῖν, Act.18:21; κατὰ τὸ ἔθος τῆς ἑ., Luk.2:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἱστήκει

한글 발음: 헤이스테케이

heistēkei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2476 원어 검색에서 보기 G2476
Lemma
ἵστημι
Strong
G2476
형태소
V-LAI-3S
품사
동사
서다/세우다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '서다, 세우다, 굳게 서다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἵστημι, and in late writers, also ἱστάνω (Veitch, see word; Bl., §23, 2; M, Pr., 55), [in LXX chiefly for עמד, קוּם, also for נצב ni., hi., יצב hith., etc.]. __I. Trans, in pres., impf., fut. and 1 aor. act. and in the tenses of the pass. __1. to make to stand, to place, set, set up, establish, appoint: with accusative of person(s), Mrk.7:9, Act.1:23 6:13 17:31, Heb.10:9; id. before ἐπί, with accusative loc, Mat.4:5, Luk.4:9; ἐν μέσῳ, Mat.18:2, Mrk.9:36, Jhn.8:[3]; ἐνώπιον, Act.6:6; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, Luk.9:47; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Mat.25:33; mid., to place oneself, to stand: Rev.18:15; so also pass., to be made to stand, to stand: Mat.2:9, Luk.11:18 19:8, 2Co.13:1, al. __2. to set in a balance, to weigh (cl.; LXX for שׁקל, Isa.46:6, al.): Mat.26:15, __II. Intrans., in pf., plpf. (with sense of present and impf.; M, Pr., 147f.) and 2 aor. act., to stand, stand by, stand still: Mat.20:32 26:73, Mrk.10:49, Luk.8:44, Jhn.1:35 3:29, Act.16:9, al.; before ἐν, Mat.6:5, al.; ἐνώπιον, Act.10:30, al.; πρός, with dative loc., Jhn.18:16; ἐπί, with genitive loc., Luk.6:17, Act.5:23 25:10, al.; ἔμπροσθεν, Mat.27:11; κύκλῳ, Rev.7:11; ἐκ δεξιῶν, Luk.1:11; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.13:2, Rev.3:20; παρά, Luk.5:2; ἐκεῖ, Mrk.11:5; ὧδε, Mrk.9:1; ὅπου, Mrk.13:14; ἔξω, Mat.12:46; μακρόθεν, Luk.18:13; πόρρωθεν, Luk.17:12. Metaphorical, to stand ready, stand firm, be steadfast: 1Co.7:37 10:12, Eph.6:11, 13 14, Col.4:12; τ. πίστει, Rom.11:20; ἐν τ. ἀληθείᾳ, Jhn.8:44; εν τ. χάριτι, Rom.5:2; ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ, 1Co.15:1 (cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-ἀν-, ἐξ-ἀν, ἀνθ-, ἀφ-, δι-, ἐν-, ἐξ-, ἐπ- (-μαι), ἐφ-, κατ-ἐφ-, συν-ἐφ-, καθ-, ἀντι-καθ-, ἀπο-καθ-, μεθ-, παρ-, περι-, προ-, συν-ίστημι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔκραξεν

한글 발음: 에크락센

ekraxen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2896 원어 검색에서 보기 G2896
Lemma
κράζω
Strong
G2896
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
외치다/부르짖다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '외치다, 부르짖다'.

원문 정의 보기

κράζω [in LXX for זָעַק, צָעַק, קָרָא, etc. ;] in cl. chiefly poët., __1. prop. onomatop., of the raven, to croak, hence generally, of inartic. cries, to scream, cry out (Æsch., al.): Mrk.5:5 9:26 15:39 (Rec., R, mg.), Luk.9:39, al.; of crying for vengeance (cf. Gen.4:10), Jas.5:4. __2. to cry, call out with a loud voice: with accusative of thing(s), Act.19:32; before orat. dir., Mrk.10:48, Luk.18:39, al.; (ἐν) φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, Mrk.5:7, Rev.14:15, al.; λέγων, Mat.8:29, al.; of public teaching, Jhn.1:15, Rom.9:27, al.; of importunate prayer (cf. Job.35:12, Psa.3:5, al.), Rom.8:15, Gal.4:6; pf. with Pres. sense (vernac.; M, Pr., 147), Jhn.1:15 SYN.: see: βοάω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λέγων·

한글 발음: 레곤

legōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐάν

한글 발음: 에안

ean

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1437 원어 검색에서 보기 G1437
Lemma
ἐάν
Strong
G1437
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일 ~라면
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사(가정) '만일 ~라면'. 가정법과 함께.

원문 정의 보기

ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τις

한글 발음: 티스

tis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-NSM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διψᾷ,

한글 발음: 딥사

dipsa

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1372 원어 검색에서 보기 G1372
Lemma
διψάω
Strong
G1372
형태소
V-PAS-3S
품사
동사
목마르다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '목마르다, 갈망하다'.

원문 정의 보기

διψάω,-ῶ (δίψα, thirst), [in LXX chiefly for צָמֵא ;] to thirst: absol., Mat.25:35, 37 25:42, 44, Jhn.4:13, 15 19:28, Rom.12:20" (LXX), 1Co.4:11; figuratively, Jhn.4:14 6:35 7:37, Rev.7:16 21:6 22:17; with accusative (= cl. with genitive), τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.5:6.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐρχέσθω

한글 발음: 에르케스토

erchesthō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-PNM-3S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρός

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

με

한글 발음: 메

me

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πινέτω.

한글 발음: 피네토

pinetō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4095 원어 검색에서 보기 G4095
Lemma
πίνω
Strong
G4095
형태소
V-PAM-3S
품사
동사
마시다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '마시다'.

원문 정의 보기

πίνω [in LXX chiefly for שָׁתָה ;] to drink: absol., Luk.2:19, Jhn.4:7, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.6:26, 31 Mrk.14:25, al.; of habitual use, Luk.1:15, Rom.14:21, al.; by meton., τὸ ποτήριον, 1Co.10:21, al.; of the earth absorbing rain (Hdt., al.), Heb.6:7; spiritually, of the blood of Christ, Jhn.6:53-54, 56; before ἐκ (of the vessel), Mat.26:27, al.; id. (of the drink; Bl., § 36, 1), Mat.26:29, Jhn.4:13-14 Rev.14:10, al.; ἀπό, Luk.22:18 (cf. ἀπο-, συν-πίνω; on the form πίεσαι, Luk.17:8, see Bl., § 21, 8, and on the contr. aor. πεῖν, M, Pr., 44 f., Thackeray, Gr., 63 f.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
He that believeth on me, as the scripture hath said, from within him shall flow rivers of living water.

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πιστεύων

한글 발음: 피스테우온

pisteuōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4100 원어 검색에서 보기 G4100
Lemma
πιστεύω
Strong
G4100
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
믿다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '믿다, 신뢰하다, 의탁하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιστεύω, [in LXX chiefly for אמן hi. ;] __1. intrans., to have faith (in), to believe; in cl., with accusative, dative, in NT also with prep, (on the significance of the various constructions, see M, Pr., 67f.; Vau. on Rom.4:5; Ellic. on 1Ti.1:16; Abbott, JV, 19-80): absol., Mat.24:23, 26 Mrk.13:21, 1Co.11:18; with accusative of thing(s), Act.13:41, 1Co.13:7; with dative of person(s) (to believe what one says), Mrk.16:[13, 14], 1Jn.4:1; τ. ψεύδει, 2Th.2:11; περί . . . ὅτι, Jhn.9:18; esp. and most frequently with reference to religious belief: absol., Mat.8:13, Mrk.5:36, Luk.8:50, Jhn.11:40, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:28, al.; with dative (see supr., and cf. DB, i, 829a), Jhn.3:12 5:24 6:30 8:31, Act.16:34, Gal.3:6" (LXX), 2Ti.1:12, 1Jn.5:10, al.; with prep., (expressing personal trust and reliance as distinct from mere credence or belief; see M, Pr., l.with; DB, i, 829b), to believe in or on: ἐν (Psa.77 (78):22, al.), Mrk.1:15 (see Swete, in l.); εἰς, Mat.18:6, Jhn.2:11 (see Westc., in l.), and freq., Act.10:43 19:4, Rom.10:14, Gal.2:16, Php.1:29, I Jhn.5:10, 1Pe.1:8; εἰς τ. ὄνομα, Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18, 1Jn.5:13; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.27:42, Act.9:42 11:17 16:31 22:19, Rom.4:5; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.9:33 (LXX) 10:11 (ib.), 1Ti.1:16, 1Pe.2:6" (LXX) ; ptcp. pres., οἱ π., as subst., Act.2:44, Rom.3:22, 1Co.1:21, al.; aor., Mrk.16:[16], Act.4:32; pf., Act.19:18 21:20 (on Johannine use of the tenses of π., see Westc, Epp. Jo., 120). __2. Trans., to entrust: with accusative and dative, Luk.16:11, Jhn.2:24; pass., to be entrusted with: with accusative, Rom.3:2, 1Co.9:17, Gal.2:7, 1Th.2:4 (see Lft., Notes, 21f.), 1Ti.1:11, Tit.1:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐμέ,

한글 발음: 에메

eme

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1473 원어 검색에서 보기 G1473
Lemma
ἐγώ
Strong
G1473
형태소
P-1AS
품사
-
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 대명사 '나'. 강조·대조 시 사용.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγώ, genitive, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς, of person(s) pron. I. __(a) The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Luk.3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mat.10:16, Jhn.10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. 1Ki.3:8), Act.9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jhn.1:23 (LXX), Act.7:32 (LXX). __(b) The enclitic forms (see supr.) are used with nouns, adjectives, verbs, adverbs, where there is no emphasis: ἐν τ. πατρί μου, Jhn.14:20; μου τ. λόγους, Mat.7:24; ὀπίσω μου, Mat.3:11; ἰσχυρότερός μου, ib.; λέγει μοι, Rev.5:5; also with the prep. πρός, as Mrk.9:19, al. The full forms (ἐμοῦ, etc.) are used with the other prepositions, as δι᾽ ἐμοῦ, ἐν ἐμοί, εἰς ἐμέ, etc., also for emphasis, as Luk.10:16, Jhn.7:23, Mrk.14:7, al. __(with) The genitive μου and ἡμῶν are often used for the poss. pronouns ἐμός, ἡμέτερος: τ. λαόν μου, Mat.2:6; μου τῂ ἀπιστιᾳ, Mrk.9:24. __(d) τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ( = Heb. מַה־לִי וָלָךְ, Jdg.11:12, al.), i.e. what have we in common: Mat.8:29, Mrk.1:24, 5:7, Luk.8:28, Jhn.2:4; τί γάρ μοι, 1Co.5:2. __(e) The interchange of ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, common in π., appears in Pauline Epp. (see M, Pr., 86f., M, Th., 131f.). __(f) κἀγώ (= καὶ ἐγώ), and I, even I, I also: Mat.2:8, Luk.2:48, Jhn.6:56, Rom.3:7, 1Co.7:40, al.; κἀγώ . . . καί, both . . . and, Jhn.7:28. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καθὼς

한글 발음: 카토스

kathōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2531 원어 검색에서 보기 G2531
Lemma
καθώς
Strong
G2531
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~와 같이
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '~와 같이, ~한 대로'.

원문 정의 보기

καθώς, (i.e. καθ᾽ ὡς), Hellenistic for καθά, which see, καθάπερ, καθό, καθότι (Mayser, 485; Eutherford, NPhr., 495; Bl., §78, 1), according as, even as, just as, as: Luk.1:2 (see: καθά), 24:39, Jhn.5:23, Act.7:48, 1Co.8:2, Gal.3:6, al.; before οὕτως, Luk.11:30, Jhn.3:14, 2Co.1:5, Col.3:13, 1Jn.2:6, al.; before καί, Jhn.15:9, 1Co.15:49, 1Jn.2:18, al.; οὕτως . . . κ., Luk.24:24; id. with ellipsis of οὕτως, Mat.21:6, Mrk.16:7, Rom.1:13, al.; with other elliptical constructions, Jhn.6:58 17:21, 22 Act.15:8, 1Th.2:13, 1Ti.1:3, 1Jn.3:2, 3 12; καθὼς γέγραπται (Deiss., BS, 249), Mat.26:24, Mrk.9:13, Rom.1:17, al.; introducing subst. clause as object of verb (as in Heb.), Mat.21:6, Mrk.11:6, Luk.5:14, al.; after verbs of speaking, Act.15:14; of proportion and degree, Mrk.4:33, 1Co.12:11, 18 al.; of time (Neh.5:6, 2Ma.1:31), Act.7:17. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπεν

한글 발음: 에이펜

eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 헤

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γραφή,

한글 발음: 그라페

graphē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1124 원어 검색에서 보기 G1124
Lemma
γραφή
Strong
G1124
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
성경/기록
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '기록, 성경'.

원문 정의 보기

γραφή, -ῆς, ἡ (γράφω), [in LXX chiefly for כְּתָב ;] __1. a drawing, painting. __2. __(a) writing; __(b) that which is written, a writing: πᾶσα γ., 2Ti.3:16; γ. ἅγιαι, Rom.1:2; προφητικαί, Rom.16:26; al αἱ γ. τ. προφητῶν, Mat.26:56; ἡ γ., αἱ γ., the sacred writings, the Scriptures (i.e. the OT; see Milligan, NTD, 205); in pl., when the sacred writings as a whole are meant, e.g. Mat.21:42 26:54, Jhn.5:39, Rom.15:4; in sing., when a particular passage is referred to, as in Luk.4:21, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:3 9:17 10:11 11:2, Jas.2:23 (Cremer, 165; DCG, ii, 584). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποταμοὶ

한글 발음: 포타모이

potamoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4215 원어 검색에서 보기 G4215
Lemma
ποταμός
Strong
G4215
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '강, 시내'.

원문 정의 보기

ποταμός, -οῦ, ὁ [in LXX chiefly for נָהָר, יְאֹר ;] a river, stream, torrent: Mat.3:5 7:25, 27, Mrk.1:1-45 :, Luk.6:48-49, Act.16:13, 2Co.11:26, Rev.8:10 9:14 12:15-16 16:4, 12 21:1-2. Fig., pl., π. ὕδατος ζῶντος, Jhn.7:38.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κοιλίας

한글 발음: 코일리아스

koilias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2836 원어 검색에서 보기 G2836
Lemma
κοιλία
Strong
G2836
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
배/태
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '배, 복부, 태(胎)'.

원문 정의 보기

κοιλία, -ας, ἡ (κοῖλος, hollow), [in LXX chiefly for בֶּטֶן, מֵעֶה, קֶרֶב, Deu.7:13, 2Ki.7:12, Gen.41:21, al.; also (Job.3:11 10:18 31:15 38:8) for רֶחֶם ;] __1. the belly (stomach or intestines or both): Mat.12:40 15:17, Mrk.7:19, Luk.15:16, Rom.16:18, 1Co.6:13, Php.3:19, Rev.10:9-10. __2. (As often in LXX) the womb: Luk.1:41-42, 44 2:21 11:27 23:29, Jhn.3:4; ἐκ κ. μητρός (cf. Psa.22:11, Job.1:21, al.), Mat.19:12, Luk.1:15, Act.3:2 14:8, Gal.1:15. __3. Metaphorical (as Heb. בֶּטֶן, cf. Job.15:35, Pro.20:27, Sir.19:12), of the heart: Jhn.7:38.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ῥεύσουσιν

한글 발음: 르흐세우수신

rheusousin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4482 원어 검색에서 보기 G4482
Lemma
ῥέω
Strong
G4482
형태소
V-FAI-3P
품사
동사
흐르다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '흐르다, 흘러나오다'.

원문 정의 보기

ῥέω [in LXX chiefly for זוּב ;] to flow: Jhn.7:38 (cf. παραρρέω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὕδατος

한글 발음: 휘다토스

hudatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5204 원어 검색에서 보기 G5204
Lemma
ὕδωρ
Strong
G5204
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '물'.

원문 정의 보기

ὕδωρ genitive, ὕδατος, τό, [in LXX chiefly for מַיִם ;] water: Mat.3:16, Mrk.1:10, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:7, Jas.3:12, Rev.8:10, al.; pl., Mat.14:28-29, Jhn.3:23, Rev.1:15, al.; βαπτίζειν (ἐν) ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, Mrk.1:8, Jhn.1:26, al.; τ. λυυτρὸν τοῦ ὕ., Eph.5:26; opposite to οἴνος, Jhn.2:9 4:46; αἷμα, Jhn.19:34, Heb.9:19, 1Jn.5:6 Jn 5:8 Mat.17:15 Mrk.9:22; πνεῦμα, Jhn.1:26, 31 1:33; πνεῦμα καὶ πῦρ, Mat.3:11, Luk.3:16;ἐξ ὕ. κ. πνεύματος γεννηθῆναι, Jhn.3:5; metaphorically, of divine truth and grace (τ.) ὕ. (τ.) ζῶν, Jhn.4:10-11 (cf. Jhn.4:13-15); τ. ὕ. τ. ζωῆς, of spiritual refresh­ment, Rev.21:6 22:1, 17 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ζῶντος.

한글 발음: 존토스

zōntos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2198 원어 검색에서 보기 G2198
Lemma
ζάω
Strong
G2198
형태소
V-PAP-GSN
품사
동사
살다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '살다, 생명을 가지다'.

원문 정의 보기

ζάω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for חיה (most frequently ptcp., ζῶν, inf., ζῆν, for חַי ;] __1. prop., to live, be alive (see Syn., see word βίος; in cl. usually of animal life, but sometimes of plants, as Arist., Eth. N, i, 7, 12): Act.20:12, Rom.7:1-3, 1Co.7:39, Rev.19:20, al.; ἐν αὐτῷ ζῶμεν, Act.17:28; ἐμοὶ τὸ ζῆν Χριστός, Php.1:21; διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν (M, Pr., 215, 249), Heb.2:15; ὃ δὲ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί, Gal.2:20; ζῇ ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός, Gal.2:20; (ὁ) ζῶν, of God (אֵל חַי and cognate phrases, Jos.3:10, Hos.2:1 (1:10), Isa.37:4, al.; see DCG, ii, 39a), Mat.16:16, Jhn.6:57, Rom.9:26, 1Th.1:9, Heb.3:12, Rev.7:2, al.; in juristic phrase, ζῶ ἐγώ (חַי־אָנִי, Num.14:21, al.), as I live, Rom.14:11; ζῆν ἐπ᾽ ἄρτῳ, Mat.4:4, al.; ἐκ, 1Co.9:14; of coming to life, Mrk.16:[11], Rom.6:10 14:9, 2Co.13:4; opposite to νεκρός, Rev.1:18 2:8; metaphorically, Luk.15:32; ζῆν ἐκ νεκρῶν, Rom.6:13; of the spiritual life of Christians, Luk.10:28, Jhn.5:25, Rom.1:17 8:13; εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Jhn.6:51, 58; σὺν Χριστῷ, 1Th.5:10; ὄνομα ἔχεις ὅτι ζῇς, Rev.3:1. __2. As sometimes in cl., = βιόω, to live, pass one's life: Luk.2:36, Act.26:5, Rom.7:9, Col.2:20; ἐν πίστει, Gal.2:20; ἐν τ. ἁμαρτίᾳ, Rom.6:2; εὐσεβῶς, 2Ti.3:12; ἀσώτως, Luk.15:13; with dative (cl.), ἑαυτῳ (Field, Notes, 164), Rom.14:7, 2Co.5:15; τ. δικαιοσύνῃ, Luk.20:38, Rom.6:10, 11 Gal.2:19; τ. Χριστῷ, 2Co.5:15; τ. θεῷ, 1Pe.2:24; πνεύματι, Gal.5:25; κατὰ σάρκα, Rom.8:12, 13; __3. Of inanimate things, metaphorically: ὕδωρ ζῶν (i.e. springing water, as opposite to still water), in a spiritual sense, Jhn.4:10, 11 7:38 (DCG, ii, 39f.): ἐλπὶς ζῶσα, 1Pe.1:3; ὁδὸς ζῶσα, Heb.10:20 (cf. ἀνα-, συν-ζάω; Cremer, 270, 721). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But this spake he of the Spirit, which they that believed on him were to receive: for the Spirit was not yet [given]; because Jesus was not yet glorified.

원어

τοῦτο

한글 발음: 투토

touto

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-ASN
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπεν

한글 발음: 에이펜

eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

περὶ

한글 발음: 페리

peri

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4012 원어 검색에서 보기 G4012
Lemma
περί
Strong
G4012
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에 관하여/둘레에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~에 관하여', 대격 '~주위에'.

원문 정의 보기

περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, about (poët.). __2. Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al.; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). __II. C. accusative, __1. of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al.; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc., Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. __2. Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. __III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πνεύματος

한글 발음: 프뉴마토스

pneumatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4151 원어 검색에서 보기 G4151
Lemma
πνεῦμα
Strong
G4151
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
영/바람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '영(靈), 성령, 바람, 숨'.

원문 정의 보기

πνεῦμα, -τος, τό, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for רוּחַ ;] __1. of air in motion; __(a) wind: Jhn.3:8; pl., Heb.1:7 (LXX); __(b) breath: π. ζωῆς, Rev.11:11; π. τοῦ στόματος, figuratively, 2Th.2:8 (cf. Ps 32 (33)6). __2. Of the vital principle, the spirit (Arist., Polyb., al.): Luk.8:55, Jhn.19:30, Act.7:59, al.; opposite to σάρξ, Mat.26:41, Mrk.14:38, 1Co.5:5, al.; to σῶμα, Rom.8:10, 1Co.6:17 7:34, 1Pe.4:6; to ψυχή, Php.1:27, Heb.4:12; τὸ π. καὶ ἡ ψ. καὶ τ. σῶμα, 1Th.5:23 (M, Th., in l.); dative, τῷ π., in spirit, Mrk.2:8 8:12, Jhn.11:33 13:21, Act.18:25, Rom.12:11, 1Co.7:34, 1Pe.3:18, al.; of the human spirit of Christ, Rom.1:4, 1Ti.3:16. __3. spirit, i.e. frame of mind, disposition, influence: Luk.1:17, Rom.8:15, 1Co.4:21, Gal 6:1, Eph.2:2, 2Ti.1:7, 1Jn.4:6, al. __4. An incorporeal being, a spirit: Luk.24:37, 39 Act.23:8; π. ὁ θεός, God is spirit, Jhn.4:24; πατὴρ τῶν π., Heb.12:9; of disembodied human beings, Heb.12:23, 1Pe.3:19 (ICC, in l.; DB, iii, 795); of angels. Heb.1:14; of demons or evil spirits, Mat.8:16, Mrk.9:20, Luk.9:39, al.; π. πύθυωνα, Act.16:16; πνεύματα δαιμονίων, Rev.16:14; π. δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου, Luk.4:33; π. ἀσθενείας (Bl., §35, 5), Luk.13:11; π. ἀκάθαρτον, Mat.10:1, Mrk.1:23, Luk.4:36, Act.5:16; π. ἄλαλον (καὶ κωφόν), Mrk.9:17, 25; πονηρόν, Luk.7:21, Act.19:12, al. __5. Of the Holy Spirit, π. ἅγιον, τὸ ἅ. π., τὸ π. τὸ ἅ. τὸ π., π. (the article as a rule being used when the Spirit is regarded as a Person or a Divine Power, and omitted when the reference is to an operation, influence or gift of the Spirit; see WM, 151:5; Bl., §46, 7): anarth., Mat.1:18 3:11, 16 4:1, Mrk.1:8 (Swete, in l.), ib.10, Luk.1:15, Jhn.7:39, Act.19:2, Rom.5:5, 1Co.2:4, al.; with art., Mat.4:1 12:31, 32 Mrk.1:10 3:29, Luk.2:26, Jhn.7:36 14:26, Act.4:31 5:3, Rom.8:16, al.; (τὸ) π. (τοῦ) θεοῦ, Mat.3:16, Rom.8:9, Eph.3:16, 1Jn.4:2, al.; τὸ π. τ. πατρός, Mat.10:20; π. θεοῦ ζῶντος, 2Co.3:3; (τὸ) π. τοῦ κυρίου, Luk.4:18, Act.5:9 8:39; τὸ π. Ἰησοῦ, Act.16:7; Χριστοῦ, Rom.8:9; Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Php.1:19; τὸ π. τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.15:26 16:13, 1Jn.4:6; λείγει (μαρτυρεῖ) τὸ π. (τὸ ἅγιον), Act.21:11 28:25, 1Ti.4:1, Heb.3:7 10:15, Rev.14:13; before τ. ἐκκλησίαις, Rev.2:7, 11 17, 29, 3:6, 12, 22; ἐν τ. π., Luk.2:27; κατὰ πνεῦμα, Rom.8:4, 5; ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ π., Jhn.3:5, διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου, Heb.9:14; ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος, 2Th.2:13, 1Pe.1:2; ἓν π., 1Co.12:13, Eph.2:18 4:4; ὁ δὲ κύριος τὸ π. ἐστιν, 2Co.3:17; of that which is effected or governed by the Spirit, opposite to γράμμα, Rom.2:29 7:6, 2Co.3:6. SYN.: νοῦς, which in NT is contrasted with π. as "the action of the understanding in man with that of the spiritual or ecstatic impulse" (DB, iv, 612); ψυχή — the usual term in cl. psychology—in NT, "expresses man as apart from God, a separate individual, π. expresses man as drawing his life from God" (DB, 1-vol., 872). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3739 원어 검색에서 보기 G3739
Lemma
ὅς
Strong
G3739
형태소
R-ASN
품사
-
~하는 (관계대명사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

관계대명사 '~하는 (그/그것)'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν). __I. As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, frequently in Plat.), Mrk.15:23, Jhn.5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mat.21:35, 22:5, 25:15, Luk.23:33, Act.27:14, Rom.14:5, 1Co.11:21, 2Co.2:18, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mat.13:8, 23, Rom.9:21; ὃς (ὃ) μὲν . . . (ἄλλος (ἄλλο)) . . . ἕτερος, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, 1Co.12:8-10; οὓς μέν, absol., 1Co.12:28; ὃς μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, Rom.14:2. __II. As relat. pron., who, which, what, that; __1. agreeing in gender with its antecedent, but differently governed as to case: Mat.2:9, Luk.9:9, Act.20:18, Rom.2:29, al. mult. __2. In variation from the common construction; __(a) in gender, agreeing with a noun in apposition to the antecedent: Mrk.15:16, Gal.3:16, Eph.6:17, al.; constr. ad sensum: Jhn.6:9, Col.2:19, 1Ti.3:16, Rev.13:14, al.; __(b) in number, constr. ad sensum: Act.15:36, 2Pe.3:1; __(with) in case, by attraction to the case of the antecedent (Bl., §50, 2): Jhn.4:18, Act.3:21, Rom.15:18, 1Co.6:19, Eph.1:8, al. __3. The neut. ὅ with nouns of other gender and with phrases, which thing, which term: Mrk.3:17 12:42, Jhn.1:39, Col.3:14, al.; with a sentence, Act.2:32, Gal.2:10, 1Jn.2:8, al. __4. With ellipse of a demonstrative (οὗτος or ἐκεῖνος), before or after: before, Mat.20:23, Luk.7:43, Rom.10:14, al.; after, Mat.10:38, Mrk.9:40, Jhn.19:22, Rom.2:1 al. __5. Expressing purpose, end or cause: Mat.11:10 (who = that he may), Mrk.1:2, Heb.12:6 al. __6. C. prep, as periphrasis for conjc.: ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ( = ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν), because, Luk.1:20, al.; wherefore, Luk.12:3; ἐξ οὗ, since, for that, Rom.5:12; ἀφ᾽ οὗ, since (temporal), Luk.13:25; ἐξ οὗ, whence, Php.3:20; etc. __7. With particles: ὃς ἄν (ἐάν), see: ἄν, ἐάν; ὃς καί, Mrk.3:19, Jhn.21:20, Rom.5:2, al.; ὃς καὶ αὐτός, Mat.27:57. __8. Gen., οὗ, absol., as adv. (see: οὗ). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔμελλον

한글 발음: 에멜론

emellon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3195 원어 검색에서 보기 G3195
Lemma
μέλλω
Strong
G3195
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
~하려 하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '막 ~하려 하다, 장차 ~할 것이다'.

원문 정의 보기

μέλλω, [in LXX: Job.3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and frequently in Wi, II, 4Mac ;] to be about to be or do; __1. with inf. (Bl., §62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114); __(a) of intending or being about to do of one's own free will: with inf. praes., Mat.2:13, Luk.10:1, Act.3:3 5:35, Heb.8:5, 2Pe.1:12 (Field, Notes, 240), al.; with inf. aor. (Bl., §58, 3), Act.12:6, Rev.3:16; __(b) of compulsion, necessity or certainty: with inf. praes., Mat.16:27, Luk.9:31, Jhn.6:71, Rom.4:24, al.; with inf. aor., Rom.8:18, Gal.3:23, Rev.3:2 12:4. __2. Ptcp., ὁ μέλλων: absol., Rom.8:38, 1Co.3:22; τὰ μ., Col.2:17; εἰς τὸ μ. (Field, Notes, 65); with subst., Mat.3:7 12:32 (ὁ αἰὼν ὁ μ.; LXX for עַד), Act.24:25, 1Ti.4:8, Heb.2:5, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λαμβάνειν

한글 발음: 람바네인

lambanein

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2983 원어 검색에서 보기 G2983
Lemma
λαμβάνω
Strong
G2983
형태소
V-PAN
품사
동사
받다/취하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '받다, 취하다, 잡다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαμβάνω, [in LXX chiefly for לקח, also for אחז ,לכד ,נשׂא, etc. ;] __1. to take, lay hold of: absol., Mat.26:26, Mrk.14:22; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.5:40 26:52, al. mult.; with accusative of person(s), Mat.21:35, Mrk.12:3, al.; pleonastic λαβών (M, Pr., 230; Bl., §74, 2), Mat.13:31 14:19, al.; so also indic., Mrk.7:27, Jhn.19:1, 40 Rev.8:5, al.; metaphorically, with accusative of thing(s), ἀφορμήν, Rom.7:8, 11; ὑδόδειγμα, Jas.5:10; id. with accusative of person(s), φόβος, Luk.7:16; πνεῦμα, Luk.9:39; πειρασμός, 1Co.10:13; aoristic pf. (M, Pr., 145, 238; BL, §59, 4), Rev.5:7 8:5, al. __2. to receive: absol., opposite to αἰτεῖν, Mat.7:8, al.; διδόναι, Mat.10:8, Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.27:6, Mrk.10:3o, al. mult.; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.6:21 13:20 19:27, 2Jo.10; ῥαπίσμασιν (a vulgarism; Bl., §38, 3), Mrk.14:65; metaphorically, τ. λόγον, Mat.13:20, Mrk.4:16; τ. μαρτυρίαν, Jhn.3:11; τ. ῥήματα, Jhn.12:48; πρόσωπον (Heb. נָשָׂא פָּנִים, Dalman, Words, 30), Luk.20:21, Gal.2:6; ζωὴν αἰώνιον (Dalman, op. cit., 124f.), Mrk.10:30 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀντι-, συν-αντι- (-μαι), ἀπο-, ἐπι-, κατα-, μετα-, παρα-, συν-παρα-, προ-, προσ-, συν-, συν-περι-, ὑπο-λαμβάνω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πιστεύσαντες

한글 발음: 피스테우산테스

pisteusantes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4100 원어 검색에서 보기 G4100
Lemma
πιστεύω
Strong
G4100
형태소
V-AAP-NPM
품사
동사
믿다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '믿다, 신뢰하다, 의탁하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιστεύω, [in LXX chiefly for אמן hi. ;] __1. intrans., to have faith (in), to believe; in cl., with accusative, dative, in NT also with prep, (on the significance of the various constructions, see M, Pr., 67f.; Vau. on Rom.4:5; Ellic. on 1Ti.1:16; Abbott, JV, 19-80): absol., Mat.24:23, 26 Mrk.13:21, 1Co.11:18; with accusative of thing(s), Act.13:41, 1Co.13:7; with dative of person(s) (to believe what one says), Mrk.16:[13, 14], 1Jn.4:1; τ. ψεύδει, 2Th.2:11; περί . . . ὅτι, Jhn.9:18; esp. and most frequently with reference to religious belief: absol., Mat.8:13, Mrk.5:36, Luk.8:50, Jhn.11:40, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:28, al.; with dative (see supr., and cf. DB, i, 829a), Jhn.3:12 5:24 6:30 8:31, Act.16:34, Gal.3:6" (LXX), 2Ti.1:12, 1Jn.5:10, al.; with prep., (expressing personal trust and reliance as distinct from mere credence or belief; see M, Pr., l.with; DB, i, 829b), to believe in or on: ἐν (Psa.77 (78):22, al.), Mrk.1:15 (see Swete, in l.); εἰς, Mat.18:6, Jhn.2:11 (see Westc., in l.), and freq., Act.10:43 19:4, Rom.10:14, Gal.2:16, Php.1:29, I Jhn.5:10, 1Pe.1:8; εἰς τ. ὄνομα, Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18, 1Jn.5:13; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.27:42, Act.9:42 11:17 16:31 22:19, Rom.4:5; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.9:33 (LXX) 10:11 (ib.), 1Ti.1:16, 1Pe.2:6" (LXX) ; ptcp. pres., οἱ π., as subst., Act.2:44, Rom.3:22, 1Co.1:21, al.; aor., Mrk.16:[16], Act.4:32; pf., Act.19:18 21:20 (on Johannine use of the tenses of π., see Westc, Epp. Jo., 120). __2. Trans., to entrust: with accusative and dative, Luk.16:11, Jhn.2:24; pass., to be entrusted with: with accusative, Rom.3:2, 1Co.9:17, Gal.2:7, 1Th.2:4 (see Lft., Notes, 21f.), 1Ti.1:11, Tit.1:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν·

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὔπω

한글 발음: 우포

oupō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3768 원어 검색에서 보기 G3768
Lemma
οὔπω
Strong
G3768
형태소
ADV-N
품사
-
아직 ~아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '아직 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὔπω neg. adv. of time, not yet: Mat.24:6, Mrk.13:7, Jhn.2:4 3:24 6:17, al.; with neg., Mrk.11:2, Luk.23:53; interrog., Mat.16:9, Mrk.4:40 8:17, 21 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γὰρ

한글 발음: 가르

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἦν

한글 발음: 엔

ēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πνεῦμα

한글 발음: 프뉴마

pneuma

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4151 원어 검색에서 보기 G4151
Lemma
πνεῦμα
Strong
G4151
형태소
N-NSN
품사
명사
영/바람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '영(靈), 성령, 바람, 숨'.

원문 정의 보기

πνεῦμα, -τος, τό, [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for רוּחַ ;] __1. of air in motion; __(a) wind: Jhn.3:8; pl., Heb.1:7 (LXX); __(b) breath: π. ζωῆς, Rev.11:11; π. τοῦ στόματος, figuratively, 2Th.2:8 (cf. Ps 32 (33)6). __2. Of the vital principle, the spirit (Arist., Polyb., al.): Luk.8:55, Jhn.19:30, Act.7:59, al.; opposite to σάρξ, Mat.26:41, Mrk.14:38, 1Co.5:5, al.; to σῶμα, Rom.8:10, 1Co.6:17 7:34, 1Pe.4:6; to ψυχή, Php.1:27, Heb.4:12; τὸ π. καὶ ἡ ψ. καὶ τ. σῶμα, 1Th.5:23 (M, Th., in l.); dative, τῷ π., in spirit, Mrk.2:8 8:12, Jhn.11:33 13:21, Act.18:25, Rom.12:11, 1Co.7:34, 1Pe.3:18, al.; of the human spirit of Christ, Rom.1:4, 1Ti.3:16. __3. spirit, i.e. frame of mind, disposition, influence: Luk.1:17, Rom.8:15, 1Co.4:21, Gal 6:1, Eph.2:2, 2Ti.1:7, 1Jn.4:6, al. __4. An incorporeal being, a spirit: Luk.24:37, 39 Act.23:8; π. ὁ θεός, God is spirit, Jhn.4:24; πατὴρ τῶν π., Heb.12:9; of disembodied human beings, Heb.12:23, 1Pe.3:19 (ICC, in l.; DB, iii, 795); of angels. Heb.1:14; of demons or evil spirits, Mat.8:16, Mrk.9:20, Luk.9:39, al.; π. πύθυωνα, Act.16:16; πνεύματα δαιμονίων, Rev.16:14; π. δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου, Luk.4:33; π. ἀσθενείας (Bl., §35, 5), Luk.13:11; π. ἀκάθαρτον, Mat.10:1, Mrk.1:23, Luk.4:36, Act.5:16; π. ἄλαλον (καὶ κωφόν), Mrk.9:17, 25; πονηρόν, Luk.7:21, Act.19:12, al. __5. Of the Holy Spirit, π. ἅγιον, τὸ ἅ. π., τὸ π. τὸ ἅ. τὸ π., π. (the article as a rule being used when the Spirit is regarded as a Person or a Divine Power, and omitted when the reference is to an operation, influence or gift of the Spirit; see WM, 151:5; Bl., §46, 7): anarth., Mat.1:18 3:11, 16 4:1, Mrk.1:8 (Swete, in l.), ib.10, Luk.1:15, Jhn.7:39, Act.19:2, Rom.5:5, 1Co.2:4, al.; with art., Mat.4:1 12:31, 32 Mrk.1:10 3:29, Luk.2:26, Jhn.7:36 14:26, Act.4:31 5:3, Rom.8:16, al.; (τὸ) π. (τοῦ) θεοῦ, Mat.3:16, Rom.8:9, Eph.3:16, 1Jn.4:2, al.; τὸ π. τ. πατρός, Mat.10:20; π. θεοῦ ζῶντος, 2Co.3:3; (τὸ) π. τοῦ κυρίου, Luk.4:18, Act.5:9 8:39; τὸ π. Ἰησοῦ, Act.16:7; Χριστοῦ, Rom.8:9; Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Php.1:19; τὸ π. τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.15:26 16:13, 1Jn.4:6; λείγει (μαρτυρεῖ) τὸ π. (τὸ ἅγιον), Act.21:11 28:25, 1Ti.4:1, Heb.3:7 10:15, Rev.14:13; before τ. ἐκκλησίαις, Rev.2:7, 11 17, 29, 3:6, 12, 22; ἐν τ. π., Luk.2:27; κατὰ πνεῦμα, Rom.8:4, 5; ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ π., Jhn.3:5, διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου, Heb.9:14; ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος, 2Th.2:13, 1Pe.1:2; ἓν π., 1Co.12:13, Eph.2:18 4:4; ὁ δὲ κύριος τὸ π. ἐστιν, 2Co.3:17; of that which is effected or governed by the Spirit, opposite to γράμμα, Rom.2:29 7:6, 2Co.3:6. SYN.: νοῦς, which in NT is contrasted with π. as "the action of the understanding in man with that of the spiritual or ecstatic impulse" (DB, iv, 612); ψυχή — the usual term in cl. psychology—in NT, "expresses man as apart from God, a separate individual, π. expresses man as drawing his life from God" (DB, 1-vol., 872). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἅγιον

한글 발음: 하기온

hagion

원어 사전 정의 보기 G40 원어 검색에서 보기 G40
Lemma
ἅγιος
Strong
G40
형태소
A-NSN
품사
형용사
거룩한/성도
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '거룩한'; 명사로 '성도'.

원문 정의 보기

ἅγιος, -α, ον (τό ἅγός, religious awe; ἅζω, to venerate), [in LXX chiefly for קֹ֫דֶשׁ ;] primarily, dedicated to the gods, sacred (Hdt.; rare in Att., never in Hom., Hes. and Trag., who use ἁγνός), hence, holy, characteristic of God, separated to God, worthy of veneration. __1. Its highest application is to God himself, in his purity, majesty, and glory: Luk.1:49, Jhn.17:11, Rev.4:8. Hence __(a) of things and places which have a claim to reverence as sacred to God, e.g. the Temple: Mat.24:15, Heb.9:1; __(b) of persons employed by him, as angels: 1Th.3:13; prophets, Luk.1:70; apostles, Eph.3:5. __2. Applied to persons as separated to God's service: __(a) of Christ, Mrk.1:24, Jhn.6:69, Act.4:30; __(b) of Christians, Act.9:13, Rom.1:7, Heb.6:10, Rev.5:8. __3. In the moral sense of sharing God's purity: Mrk.6:20, Jhn.17:11, Act.3:14, Rev.3:7. __4. Of pure, clean sacrifices and offerings: 1Co.7:14, Eph.1:4. SYN.: ἁγνός, pure, both in ceremonial and spiritual sense; ἱερός (sacer), sacred, that which is inviolable because of its (external) relation to God; ὅσιος (sanctus as opposite to nefas), that which is based on everlasting ordinances of right. (Cf. Tr., Syn., §lxxxviii; DB, ii, 399 f.; Cremer, 34, 594-601; MM, VGT, see word) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δεδομένον,

한글 발음: 데도메논

dedomenon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1325 원어 검색에서 보기 G1325
Lemma
δίδωμι
Strong
G1325
형태소
V-RPP-NSN
품사
동사
주다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '주다, 베풀다, 내어주다'.

원문 정의 보기

δίδωμι, [in LXX chiefly for נָתַן (53 words in all) ;] to give—in various senses, accusative to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Act.20:35; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.4:9 5:31, Jhn.1:12, al. mult.; with dative of person(s), before ἐκ, Mat.25:8; id. with genitive part.. Rev.2:17; with accusative of person(s), Jhn.3:16, Rev.20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Gal.2:9; φίλημα, Luk.7:45; γνῶσιν, Luk.1:77; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Mrk.4:7, 8; ἐργασίαν (Deiss., LAE, 117f.), Luk.12:58; with inf. fin., Mat.27:34, Mrk.5:43, Luk.8:55, Jhn.6:52, al.; with dative of person(s) and inf., Luk.1:74, al.; with accusative and inf., Act.2:27, Rev.3:9; with dupl. accusative, Mat.20:28, Mrk.10:45, Eph.1:22 4:11, 2Th.3:9, 1Ti.2:6, al.; ἑαυτὸν δ. εἰς (Polyb., al.), Act.19:31; with dative of person(s), before κατά (MM, Exp., xi), Rev.2:28 (LXX); δ. ἵνα, Rev.3:9; δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἀνεῳγμένην, Rev.3:8. SYN.: δωρέομαι. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Ἰησοῦς

한글 발음: 이에수스

Iēsous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2424 원어 검색에서 보기 G2424
Lemma
Ἰησοῦς
Strong
G2424
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
예수
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '예수'. 히브리어 여호수아(예슈아)의 헬라어형.

원문 정의 보기

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dative, voc. -οῦ, accusative, -οῦν (Heb. יֵשׁוּעַ ,יְהֹשֻׁעַ ,יְהוֹשׁוּעַ), __1. JESUS: Mat.1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, ib. 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, ib. 1:1, Mrk.1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Rom.2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Act.28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mrk.1:24, al. __2. Joshua: Act.7:45, Heb.4:8. __3. Jesus, son of Eliezer: Luk.3:28. __4. Jesus, surnamed Justus: Col.4:11. __5. see: βαραββᾶς. (AS) Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ, Joses; __1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see: Ἰωσήφ). __2. Son of Mary: Mat.27:56 (-σήφ), WH, txt), Mrk.15:40, 47 __3. see: Βαρνάβας.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδέπω

한글 발음: 우데포

oudepō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3764 원어 검색에서 보기 G3764
Lemma
οὐδέπω
Strong
G3764
형태소
ADV-N
품사
-
아직 ~아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '아직 ~아니다, 한 번도 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέπω adv., [in LXX: Exo.9:30 (טֶרֶם)* ;] not yet: Luk.23:53, Jhn.7:39 19:41 20:9, Act.8:16.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐδοξάσθη.¶

한글 발음: 에독사스테

edoxasthē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1392 원어 검색에서 보기 G1392
Lemma
δοξάζω
Strong
G1392
형태소
V-API-3S
품사
동사
영광을 돌리다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '영광을 돌리다, 찬양하다'.

원문 정의 보기

δοξάζω (δόξα), [in LXX chiefly for כָּבַד ni., pi., also for פָּאַר, etc. ;] __1. to think, suppose, hold an opinion (Æsch., Plat., al.). __2. To bestow δόξα (which see) on, to magnify, extol, praise (Thuc., iii, 45; Plut., al.): with accusative, Mat.5:16, Mrk.2:12, Jhn.8:54, Rom.15:6, 1Pe.2:12, al.; id. before ἐπί Luk.2:20; ἐν, Gal.1:24, 1Pe.4:16. __3. In LXX and NT (see: δόξα, 3), to clothe with splendour, glorify (Exo.34:29-30, Psa.37:20, Isa.44:23, Est.3:1, al): Rom.8:30, 2Co.3:10, 2Th.3:1, 1Pe.1:8, al.; of Christ, Jhn.7:39 8:54, al. (on the Johannine use, see Cremer, 211; Westc., Jo., Intr.); of the Father, Jhn.13:31-32, 1Pe.4:11, al. (cf. ἐν-, συν-δοξάζω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
[Some] of the multitude therefore, when they heard these words, said, This is of a truth the prophet.

원어

Πολλοὶ

한글 발음: 폴로이

Polloi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4183 원어 검색에서 보기 G4183
Lemma
πολύς
Strong
G4183
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
많은/큰
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '많은, 큰, 다수의'.

원문 정의 보기

πολύς, πολλή, πολύ, [in LXX chiefly for רַב and cognate forms ;] __1. as adj., much, many, great, of number, space, degree, value, time, etc.: ἀριθμός, Act.11:21; ὄχλος, Mrk.5:24; θερισμός, Mat.9:37; χόρτος, Jhn.6:10; χρόνος, Mat.25:19; γογγυσμός, Jhn.7:12; πόνος, Col.4:13; δόξα, Mat.24:30; σιγή, Act.21:40; pl., προφῆται, Mat.13:17; ὄχλοι, Mat.4:25; δαιμόνια, Mrk.1:34; δυνάμεις, Mat.7:22, __2. As subst., pl. masc, πολλοί, many (persons): Mat.7:22, Mrk.2:2, al.; with genitive partit., Mat.3:7, Luk.1:16, al.; before ἐκ, Jhn.7:31, Act.17:12; with art., οἱ π., the many, Mat.24:12, Rom.12:5, 1Co.10:17, 33 2Co.2:17; opposite to ὁ εἶς (Lft., Notes, 291), Rom.5:15, 19; neut. pl., πολλά: Mat.13:3, Mrk.5:26, al.; accusative with adverbial force, Mrk.1:45, Rom.16:6 (Deiss., LAE, 317), 1Co.16:12, Jas.3:2, al.; neut. sing., πολύ: Luk.12:48; adverbially, Mrk.12:27, al.; πολλοῦ (genitive pret.), Mat.26:9; with compar. (Bl., §44, 5), π. σπουδαιότερον, 2Co.8:22; πολλῷ πλείους, Jhn.4:41. Compar., πλείων , neut., πλεῖον and πλέον (see WH, App., 151), pl., πλείονες, -ας, -α, contr., πλείους, -ω (cf. Mayser, 69), more, greater; __1. as adj.: Jhn.15:2, Act.18:2o, Heb.3:3; before παρά, Heb.11:4 (cf. Westc, in l. Was ΠΛΙΟΝΑ here a primitive error for ΗΔΙΟΝΑ ?); pi., Act.13:31, al.; with genitive compar., Mat.21:36; with num. (ἤ of comp. omitted), Act.4:22 24:11, al. __2. As subst., οἱ π., the greater number: Act.10:32 27:12, 1Co.10:5 15:6; also (Bl., §44, 3) others, more, the more: 2Co.2:6 4:15, Php.1:14; πλείονα, Luk.11:53; πλειον, πλέον, Mat.20:10, 2Ti.3:9; with genitive comp., Mk 12:43, Luk.21:3; π. Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε, Mat.12:41; adverbially, Act.4:17 20:9 24:4. __3. As adv., πλεῖον: before ἤ, Luk.9:13; with genitive comp., Mat.5:20; πλείω: with num., Mat.26:53. Superl., πλεῖστος, -η, -ον , __(a) prop., most: Mat.11:20 21:8; adverbially, τὸ π., 1Co.14:27; __(b) elative (M, Pr., 79), very great: ὄχλος π., Mrk.4:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλου

한글 발음: 오클루

ochlou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-GSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀκούσαντες

한글 발음: 아쿠산테스

akousantes

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAP-NPM
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

λόγων

한글 발음: 로곤

logōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3056 원어 검색에서 보기 G3056
Lemma
λόγος
Strong
G3056
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
말씀/말
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '말, 말씀, 도(道), 이치'. 요한복음의 로고스.

원문 정의 보기

λόγος, -ου, ὁ (λέγω) [in LXX chiefly for דָּבָר, also for מִלָּה ,אֵמֶר, etc. ;] __I. Of that by which the inward thought is expressed, Lat. oratio, sermo, vox, verbum. __1. a word, not in the grammatical sense of a mere name (ἔπος, ὄνομα, ῥῆμα), but a word as embodying a conception or idea: Mat.8:8, Luk.7:7, 1Co.14:9, 19 Heb.12:19, al. __2. a saying, statement, declaration: Mat.19:22 (T om.), Mrk.5:36 7:29, Luk.1:29, Jhn.2:22 6:60, Act.7:29, al.; with genitive attrib., Act.13:15, Rom.9:9, Heb.7:28, al.; of the sayings, commands, promises, etc., of teachers, Mat.7:24 10:14, Mrk.8:38, Luk.9:4, Jhn.14:24, al.; λ. κενοί, Eph.5:6; ἀληθινοί, Rev.19:9; πιστοί, Rev.22:6; esp. of the precepts, decrees and promises of God, ὁ λ. τ. θεοῦ, the word of God: Mrk.7:13, Jhn.10:35, Rom.13:9, 1Co.14:36, Php.1:14, al.; absol., ὁ λ., Mat.13:21, 22 Mrk.16:[20], Luk.1:2, Act.6:4, Heb.4:12, al. __3. speech, discourse: Act.14:12, 2Co.10:10, Jas.3:2; opposite to ἐπιστολή, 2Th.2:15; disting, from σοφία, 1Co.2:1; ἀναστροφή, 1Ti.4:12; δύναμις, 1Co.4:19, 1Th.1:5; ἔργον, Rom.15:18; οὐδενὸς λ. τίμιον (not worthy of mention), Act.20:24; of the faculty of speech, Luk.24:19, 2Co.11:6; of the style of speech, Mat.5:37, 1Co.1:5; of instruction, Col.4:3, 1Pe.3:1; with genitive of person(s), Jhn.5:24 8:52, Act.2:41, al.; ὁ λ. ὁ ἐμός, Jhn.8:31; with genitive obj. (τ.) ἀληθείας, 2Co.6:7, Col.1:5, Jas.1:18; τ. καταλλαγῆς, 2Co.5:19; τ. σταυροῦ, 1Co.1:18; of mere talk, 1Co.4:19, 2o, Col.2:23, 1Jn.3:18; of the talk which one occasions, hence, repute: Col.2:23. __4. subject-matter, hence, teaching, doctrine: Act.18:15, 2Ti.2:17, al.; esp. of Christian doctrine: Mat.13:20-23, Mrk.4:14-20 8:32, Luk.1:2, Act.8:4, Gal.6:6, 1Th.1:6, al.; with genitive of person(s), τ. θεοῦ, Luk.5:1, Jhn.17:6, Act.4:29, 1Co.14:36, I Jhn.1:10, Rev.6:9, al.; τ. Κυρίου, Act.8:25, 1Th.1:8, al.; τ. Χριστοῦ, Col.3:16, Rev.3:8; with genitive appos., Act.15:7; with genitive attrib., Heb.5:13. __5. a story, tale, narrative: Mat.28:15, Jhn.21:23, Act.1:1 11:22; before περί, Luk.5:15. __6. That which is spoken of (Plat., al.; V. Kennedy, Sources, 124), matter, affair, thing: Mat.21:24, Mrk.1:45 11:29, Luk.20:3, Act.8:21; of a matter in dispute, as a case or suit at law, Act.19:38; pl. (1Ma.7:33, al.), Luk.1:4. __II. Of the inward thought itself, Lat. ratio. __1. reason, __(a) of the mental faculty (Hdt., Plat., al.): κατὰ λόγον, Act.18:14; __(b) a reason, cause: τίνι λόγῳ, Act.10:29; παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας, Mat.5:32 19:9, WH, mg., R, mg. __2. account, __(a) regard: Act.20:24, Rec.; __(b) reckoning: Php.4:15, 17; συναίρειν (which see) λ., Mat.18:23 25:19; in forensic sense, Rom.14:12, Heb.13:17, 1Pe.4:5; with genitive of thing(s), Luk.16:2; before περί, Mat.12:36, Act.19:40, 1Pe.3:15. __3. proportion, analogy: Php.2:16 (Field, Notes, 193 f.). __III. ὁ λ., the Divine Word or Logos: Jhn.1:1, 14; τ. ζωῆς, 1Jn.1:1; τ. θεοῦ, Rev.19:13 (see Westc, Swete, CGT, in ll.; reff. in Artt., Logos, DB, DCG). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τούτων

한글 발음: 투톤

toutōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-GPM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλεγον

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι·

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτός

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀληθῶς

한글 발음: 알레토스

alēthōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G230 원어 검색에서 보기 G230
Lemma
ἀληθῶς
Strong
G230
형태소
ADV
품사
-
참으로/진실로
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '참으로, 진실로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀληθῶς adv. (ἀληθής). [in LXX (Jer.28:6, Psa.58:1, al.) chiefly for אָמֵן and cogn. forms ;] truly, surely: Mat.14:33 26:73 Mrk.14:70 15:39, Luk.9:27 12:44 21:3, Jhn.1:48 4:42 6:14 7:26, 40 8:31 17:8 Act.12:11, 1Th.2:13, 1Jn.2:5.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προφήτης.

한글 발음: 프로페테스

prophētēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4396 원어 검색에서 보기 G4396
Lemma
προφήτης
Strong
G4396
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
선지자/예언자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '선지자, 예언자'.

원문 정의 보기

προφήτης, -ου, ὁ [πρόφημι, to speak forth), [in LXX chiefly for נָבִיא ;] one who acts as an interpreter or forth-teller of the Divine will (see Lft., Notes, 83f.; Tr., Syn., §vi), a prophet; __1. in cl. (Æsch., Hdt., Plat., al.), of the interpreters of oracles. __2. In NT, __(a) of the OT prophets: Mat.5:12, Mrk.6:15, Luk.4:27, Jhn.8:52, Rom.11:3, al.; __(b) of prophets in general: Mat.10:41 13:57 21:46, Mrk.6:4, Luk.13:33, al.; __(with) of John the Baptist: Mat.21:26, Mrk.6:15, Luk.1:76; __(d) of Christ: Mat.21:11, Jhn.6:14, Act.3:22, 23 7:37" (LXX) ; __(e) of Christian prophets in the apostolic age: Act.15:32, 1Co.12:28, Eph.2:20, al.; __(f) by meton., of the writings of prophets: Luk.24:27, Act.8:28, al.; __(g) of a poet: Tit.1:12 (on the use of the term in π. and Inscr., see Deiss., BS, 235f.; MM, xxii). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Others said, This is the Christ. But some said, What, doth the Christ come out of Galilee?

원어

ἄλλοι

한글 발음: 알로이

alloi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G243 원어 검색에서 보기 G243
Lemma
ἄλλος
Strong
G243
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
다른
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '다른 (또 하나의)'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄλλος, -η, -ο, (cf. Lat. alius, Eng. else), [in LXX for אַחֵר ,אֶחָד, etc. ;] other, another: absol., Mat.20:3, al.; ἄ. δέ, 1Co.3:10 12:8; pl., Mrk.6:15; attached to a noun, Mat.2:12 4:21, al.; with art., ὁ ἄ., the other, Mat.5:39, Jhn.19:32 (Bl., §47, 8); οἱ ἄ., the others, the rest, Jhn.20:25, 1Co.14:29; ἄ. πρὸς ἄλλον = πρὸς ἀλλήλους (BL, §48, 10), Act.2:12; ἄλλ᾽ (i.e. ἄλλο) ἤ (Bl., §77, 13), Luk.12:51; before πλήν, Mrk.12:32; εἰ μή, Jhn.6:22; παρά with accusative, 1Co.3:11. SYN.: ἕτερος, which see ἄ. denotes numerical, ἕ. qualitative difference (Cremer, 89). ἄ. generally "denotes simply distinction of individuals, ἕ. involves the secondary idea of difference in kind" (see Lft., Meyer, Ramsay, on Gal.1:6, 7; Tr., Syn., §xcv; BL, §51, 6; M, Pr., 79f., 246; MM, VGT, s.vv.). As to whether the distinction can be maintained in 1Co.12:8, 10 see ICC, in l., and on Heb.11:35f., see Westc, in l. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλεγον·

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτός

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐστιν

한글 발음: 에스틴

estin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χριστός·

한글 발음: 크리스토스

christos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5547 원어 검색에서 보기 G5547
Lemma
Χριστός
Strong
G5547
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
그리스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '그리스도, 기름부음 받은 자'. 히브리어 메시아의 헬라어역.

원문 정의 보기

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν (χρίω), [in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;] __1. 1. as adj., __(a) of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Lev.21:10); __(b) of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Lev.4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, 2Ma.1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (1Ki.2:10, Psa.2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Luk.2:11, 26 Jhn.1:41, Act.2:36 4:26, al. __2. As subst., ὁ Χριστός, the Messiah, the Christ: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:29, Luk.2:11, Jhn.1:20, Act.2:31, Rom.7:4, al.; Ἰησοῦς, Mrk.1:1, Jhn.1:17, Act.2:38, al.; Χ. Ἰησοῦς, Mat.1:18, WH, mg. Act.5:42, Rom.6:3, al.; Χ. κύριος, Luk.2:11; Ἰησοῦς Χ. ὁ κύριος, Act.15:26, Rom.1:7, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔλεγον·

한글 발음: 엘레곤

elegon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γὰρ

한글 발음: 가르

gar

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1063 원어 검색에서 보기 G1063
Lemma
γάρ
Strong
G1063
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
왜냐하면/이는
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 이유·설명 '왜냐하면, 이는 ~때문이다'.

원문 정의 보기

γάρ, co-ordinating particle, contr. of γε ἄρα, verily then, hence, in truth, indeed, yea, then, why, and when giving a reason or explanation, for, the usage in NT being in general accord with that of cl.; __1. explicative and epexegetic: Mat.4:18 19:12, Mrk.1:16 5:42 16:4, Luk.11:3o, Rom.7:1, 1Co.16:5, al. __2. Conclusive, in questions, answers and exclamations: Mat.9:5 27:23, Luk.9:25 22:27, Jhn.9:30, Act.8:31 16:37 19:35, Rom.15:26, 1Co.9:10, Php.1:18 (Ellic., in l.), 1Th.2:20, al. __3. Causal: Mat.1:21 2:2, 5, 6, 3:23, Mrk.1:22, 9:6, Luk.1:15, 18, Jhn.2:25, Act.2:25, Rom.1:9, 11, 1Co.11:5, Rev.1:3, al.; giving the reason for a command or prohibition, Mat.2:20 3:9, Rom.13:11, Col.3:3, 1Th.4:3, al.; where the cause is contained in an interrog. statement, Luk.22:27, Rom.3:3 4:3, 1Co.10:29; καὶ γάρ, for also, Mrk.10:45, Luk.6:32, 1Co.5:7, al. id. as in cl. = etenim, where the καί loses its connective force (Bl., §78, 6; Kühner 3, ii, 854f.), Mrk.14:70, Luk.1:66 22:37, 2Co.13:4. The proper place of γάρ is after the first word in a clause, but in poets it often comes third or fourth, and so in late prose: 2Co.1:19. Yet "not the number but the nature of the word after which it stands is the point to be noticed" (see Thayer, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Γαλιλαίας

한글 발음: 갈릴라이아스

Galilaias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1056 원어 검색에서 보기 G1056
Lemma
Γαλιλαία
Strong
G1056
형태소
N-GSF-L
품사
명사
갈릴리
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '갈릴리'.

원문 정의 보기

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district), Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mat.4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mat.15:29 (cf. Jhn.6:1). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χριστὸς

한글 발음: 크리스토스

christos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5547 원어 검색에서 보기 G5547
Lemma
Χριστός
Strong
G5547
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
그리스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '그리스도, 기름부음 받은 자'. 히브리어 메시아의 헬라어역.

원문 정의 보기

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν (χρίω), [in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;] __1. 1. as adj., __(a) of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Lev.21:10); __(b) of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Lev.4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, 2Ma.1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (1Ki.2:10, Psa.2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Luk.2:11, 26 Jhn.1:41, Act.2:36 4:26, al. __2. As subst., ὁ Χριστός, the Messiah, the Christ: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:29, Luk.2:11, Jhn.1:20, Act.2:31, Rom.7:4, al.; Ἰησοῦς, Mrk.1:1, Jhn.1:17, Act.2:38, al.; Χ. Ἰησοῦς, Mat.1:18, WH, mg. Act.5:42, Rom.6:3, al.; Χ. κύριος, Luk.2:11; Ἰησοῦς Χ. ὁ κύριος, Act.15:26, Rom.1:7, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔρχεται;

한글 발음: 에르케타이

erchetai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-PNI-3S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Hath not the scripture said that the Christ cometh of the seed of David, and from Bethlehem, the village where David was?

원어

οὐχ

한글 발음: 우크

ouch

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 헤

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γραφὴ

한글 발음: 그라페

graphē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1124 원어 검색에서 보기 G1124
Lemma
γραφή
Strong
G1124
형태소
N-NSF
품사
명사
성경/기록
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '기록, 성경'.

원문 정의 보기

γραφή, -ῆς, ἡ (γράφω), [in LXX chiefly for כְּתָב ;] __1. a drawing, painting. __2. __(a) writing; __(b) that which is written, a writing: πᾶσα γ., 2Ti.3:16; γ. ἅγιαι, Rom.1:2; προφητικαί, Rom.16:26; al αἱ γ. τ. προφητῶν, Mat.26:56; ἡ γ., αἱ γ., the sacred writings, the Scriptures (i.e. the OT; see Milligan, NTD, 205); in pl., when the sacred writings as a whole are meant, e.g. Mat.21:42 26:54, Jhn.5:39, Rom.15:4; in sing., when a particular passage is referred to, as in Luk.4:21, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:3 9:17 10:11 11:2, Jas.2:23 (Cremer, 165; DCG, ii, 584). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπεν

한글 발음: 에이펜

eipen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοῦ

한글 발음: 투

tou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σπέρματος

한글 발음: 스페르마토스

spermatos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4690 원어 검색에서 보기 G4690
Lemma
σπέρμα
Strong
G4690
형태소
N-GSN
품사
명사
씨/후손
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '씨, 종자, 후손'.

원문 정의 보기

σπέρμα, -τος, τό (σπείρω) [in LXX chiefly for זֶרַע ;] seed; __(a) of plants: Mat.13:24, 27 13:37-38, 2Co.9:10; pl., Mat.13:32, Mrk.4:31, 1Co.15:33; metaphorically, of an escaping remnant (שָׂרִיד, Isa.1:9; cf. Wis.14:6; Plat., Tim., 23c; FlJ, Ant., xi, 5, 3), Rom.9:29; __(b) of men (as γονή; Lat. semen genitale; so in cl.; cf. in LXX, Lev.15:16, al.): Heb.11:11; metaphorically, of the divine influence, 1Jn.3:9; by meton. (as frequently in poets), seed, offspring, posterity: Mat.22:24-25, Mrk.12:19-22, Luk.1:55 20:28" (LXX) Jhn.7:42 8:33, 37 Act.3:25 7:5-6 13:23, Rom.1:3 4:13, 18 9:7-8 11:1, 2Co.11:22, Gal.3:16, 19, 2Ti.2:8, Heb.2:16 11:18; pl. (FlJ, Ant., viii, 7, 6; Flat., Leg., ix, 853 with; 4Ma.18:1; in Ga, l.with, contrasted with sing., see Lft., in l; Milligan, NTD, 105 f.), Gal.3:16; of spiritual offspring, Rom.4:16, 18 9:8, Gal.3:29, Rev.12:17.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Δαυὶδ

한글 발음: 다윗

Dauid

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1138 원어 검색에서 보기 G1138
Lemma
Δαυείδ, Δαυίδ, Δαβίδ
Strong
G1138
형태소
N-GSM-P
품사
명사
다윗
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '다윗'.

원문 정의 보기

Δαυείδ (Rec. Δαβίδ), ὁ, indecl. (Heb. דָּוִד), David, King of Israel: Mat.1:6; 12:3, and al.; σκηνὴ Δ., Act.15:16; κλεὶς Δ., Rev.3:7; θρόνος Δ., Luk.1:32; ῥίζα Δ., Rev.5:5; βασιλεία Δ., Mrk.11:10; υἱὸς Δ., the Messiah (Ps. Sol., 17:23; for other reff. in Jewish lit., see Dalman, Words, 317), Mat.1:1 9:27, and al.; ἐν Δ., i.e. the Psalter, Heb.4:7 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀπὸ

한글 발음: 아포

apo

원어 사전 정의 보기 G575 원어 검색에서 보기 G575
Lemma
ἀπό
Strong
G575
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 분리·기원 '~로부터, ~에서 떨어져'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀπό (on the frequently neglect of elision bef. vowels, see Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146), prep. with genitive (WM, 462ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, ib. 456f.), [in LXX for לְ ,בְּ ,מִן ;] from (i.e. from the exterior). __1. Of separation and cessation; __(1) of motion from a place: Mat.5:29, 30 7:23, Luk.5:2 22:41, al.; __(2) in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, see word; Bl., §40, 2), Mat.9:16 27:21, Jhn.21:10, Act.5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.; __(3) of alienation (cl. genitive of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Rom.9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ., Col.2:20; σαλευθῆναι, 2Th.2:2, καθαρός, -ίζειν, ἀ. (Deiss., BS, 196, 216), Act.20:26, 2Co.7:1, Heb.9:14; __(4) of position, Mat.23:34 24:31, al.; after μακράν, Mat.8:30; transposed before measures of distance, Jhn.10:18 21:8, Rev.14:20 (Abbott, JG, 227); __(5) of time, ἀπὸ τ. ὥρας, ἡμέρας, etc., Mat.9:22, Jhn.19:27, Act.20:18, Php.1:5, al.; ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος, Luk.1:70, al.; ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς, etc., Mat.19:4, Rom.1:20; ἀπὸ βρέφους, 2Ti.3:15; ἀφ᾽ ἧς, since, Luk.7:45, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νῦν, Luk.1:48, al.; ἀπὸ τότε, Mat.4:17, al.; ἀπὸ πέρυσι, a year ago, 2Co.8:10 9:2; ἀπὸ πρωΐ, Act.28:23; __(6) of order or rank, ἀπὸ διετοῦς, Mat.2:16; ἀπὸ Ἀβραάμ, Mat.1:17; ἐβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδάμ, Ju 14; ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου, Act.8:10, Heb.8:11; ἄρχεσθαι ἀπό, Mat.20:8, Jhn.8:9, Act.8:35, al. __2. Of origin; __(1) of birth, extraction, and hence, in late writers, __(a) of local extraction (cl. ἐξ; Abbott, JG, 227ff.), Mat.21:11, Mrk.15:43, Jhn.1:45, Act.10:38, al.; οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας (WM, §66, 6; M, Pr., 237; Westc, Rendall, in l.), Heb.13:24; __(b) of membership in a community or society (BL, §40, 2), Act.12:1, al.; __(with) of material (= cl. genitive; Bl. l.with; M, Pr., 102), Mat.3:4 27:21; __(d) after verbs of asking, seeking, etc., Luk.11:50, 51 1Th.2:6 (Milligan, in l.); __(2) of the cause, instrument, means or occasion (frequently = ὑπό, παρά, and after verbs of learning, hearing, knowing, etc.; Bl., §40, 3), Mat.7:16 11:29, Luk.22:45, Act.2:22 4:36 9:13 12:14, 1Co.11:23, Gal.3:2, al.; ἀπὸ τ. ὄχλου, Luk.19:3 (cf. Jhn.21:6, Act.22:11); ἀπὸ τ. φόβου, Mat.14:26, al. (cf. Mat.10:26 13:44). __3. Noteworthy Hellenistic phrases: φοβεῖσθαι ἀπό (M, Pr., 102, 107); προσέχειν ἀπό (M, Pr., 11. with; Milligan, NTD, 50); ἀπὸ νότου (Heb. מִגֶּנֶב), Rev.21:13; ἀπὸ προσώπου (מִפְּנֵי), 2Th.1:9 (Bl., §40, 9); ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν (בְּלֵב), Mat.18:35; ἀπὸ ὁ ὤν (WM, §10, 2; M, Pr., 9), Rev.1:4. __4. In composition, ἀπό denotes separation, departure, origin, etc. (ἀπολύω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀπογράφω); it also has a perfective force (M, Pr., 112, 247), as in ἀφικνεῖσθαι, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Βηθλέεμ

한글 발음: 베틀레엠

Bēthleem

원어 사전 정의 보기 G965 원어 검색에서 보기 G965
Lemma
Βηθλεέμ
Strong
G965
형태소
N-GSF-L
품사
명사
베들레헴
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '베들레헴'.

원문 정의 보기

Βηθλέεμ, ἡ, indecl. (Heb. בֵּית לֶחֶם, house of bread), Bethlehem, a town 6 m. S. of Jerusalem: Mat.2:1, 5 6, 8, 16, Luk.2:4, 15 Jhn.7:42.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κώμης

한글 발음: 코메스

kōmēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2968 원어 검색에서 보기 G2968
Lemma
κώμη
Strong
G2968
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
마을/촌
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '마을, 촌'.

원문 정의 보기

κώμη, -ης, ἡ [in LXX for בַּת, חָצֵר, עִיר, etc. ;] a village or country town, prop, as opposite to a walled city: Mat.14:15, Mrk.6:6, al.; πόλεις καὶ κ., Mat.9:35, al.; with the name added, Βηθλεέμ, Jhn.7:42; Βηθανΐα, Jhn.11:1; with the name of the district, τὰς κ. Καισαρίας, Mrk.8:27; Σαμαρειτῶν, Luk.9:52, Act.8:25 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅπου

한글 발음: 호푸

hopou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3699 원어 검색에서 보기 G3699
Lemma
ὅπου
Strong
G3699
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~하는 곳
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '~하는 곳에, ~한 데서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὅπου adv. of place, correlat. of ποῦ (which see), where. __I. Prop., of place, __1. where; __(a) in relative sentences, with indic: Mat.25:24, 26, Mrk.2:4 4:5, 15 5:40 13:14, Jhn.3:8 6:62 7:34, 36 11:32 14:3 17:24 20:19, Rom.15:20, Rev.2:13; after nouns of place, for relat. prepositional phrase (ἐν ᾧ., etc.), Mat.6:19-20 13:5 26:57 28:6, Mrk.6:55 9:48 Luk.12:33, Jhn.1:28 4:20, 46 6:23 7:42 10:40 11:30 12:1 18:1, 20 19:18, 20 19:41 20:12, Act.17:1, Rev.2:13 11:8 20:10; before ἐκεῖ., Mat.6:21, Luk.12:34 17:37 Jhn.12:26; id. pleonast. (= Heb. שָׁם . . . אֲשֶׁר; Aram. תַּמָּן . . דּ; of. Gen.13:3), ὅ. . . . ἐκεῖ, Rev.12:6, 14; ὅ. . . . ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Rev.17:9; ὅ. ἄν, wherever (M, Pr., 168), with imperfect indic., Mrk.6:56; with Pres. subjc., Mat.24:28; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.26:13, Mrk.6:10 9:18 14:9, 14 a; __(b) in quaest. indir., with aor. subjc.: Mrk.14:14 b, Luk.22:11. __2. In late writers (sometimes also in cl.; Bl., § 25, 2), with verbs of motion, = ὅποι, whither: with indic., Jhn.8:21-22 13:33, 36 14:4 21:18, Heb.6:20, Jas.3:4; ὅ. ἄν, whithersoever, with present ind., Rev.14:4; subjc., Luk.9:57; ὅ. ἐάν, Mat.8:19. __II. Without strict local sense, __1. of time or condition: Col.3:11, Heb.9:16 10:18, Jas.3:16, 2Pe.2:11. __2. Of cause or reason (AV, whereas): 1Co.3:3.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἦν

한글 발음: 엔

ēn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-IAI-3S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Δαυὶδ

한글 발음: 다윗

Dauid

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1138 원어 검색에서 보기 G1138
Lemma
Δαυείδ, Δαυίδ, Δαβίδ
Strong
G1138
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
다윗
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '다윗'.

원문 정의 보기

Δαυείδ (Rec. Δαβίδ), ὁ, indecl. (Heb. דָּוִד), David, King of Israel: Mat.1:6; 12:3, and al.; σκηνὴ Δ., Act.15:16; κλεὶς Δ., Rev.3:7; θρόνος Δ., Luk.1:32; ῥίζα Δ., Rev.5:5; βασιλεία Δ., Mrk.11:10; υἱὸς Δ., the Messiah (Ps. Sol., 17:23; for other reff. in Jewish lit., see Dalman, Words, 317), Mat.1:1 9:27, and al.; ἐν Δ., i.e. the Psalter, Heb.4:7 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἔρχεται

한글 발음: 에르케타이

erchetai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-PNI-3S
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χριστός;¶

한글 발음: 크리스토스

christos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5547 원어 검색에서 보기 G5547
Lemma
Χριστός
Strong
G5547
형태소
N-NSM-T
품사
명사
그리스도
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '그리스도, 기름부음 받은 자'. 히브리어 메시아의 헬라어역.

원문 정의 보기

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν (χρίω), [in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;] __1. 1. as adj., __(a) of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Lev.21:10); __(b) of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Lev.4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, 2Ma.1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (1Ki.2:10, Psa.2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Luk.2:11, 26 Jhn.1:41, Act.2:36 4:26, al. __2. As subst., ὁ Χριστός, the Messiah, the Christ: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:29, Luk.2:11, Jhn.1:20, Act.2:31, Rom.7:4, al.; Ἰησοῦς, Mrk.1:1, Jhn.1:17, Act.2:38, al.; Χ. Ἰησοῦς, Mat.1:18, WH, mg. Act.5:42, Rom.6:3, al.; Χ. κύριος, Luk.2:11; Ἰησοῦς Χ. ὁ κύριος, Act.15:26, Rom.1:7, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
So there arose a division in the multitude because of him.

원어

Σχίσμα

한글 발음: 스키스마

Schisma

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4978 원어 검색에서 보기 G4978
Lemma
σχίσμα
Strong
G4978
형태소
N-NSN
품사
명사
분열/찢어짐
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '분열, 분파; 찢어진 곳'.

원문 정의 보기

σχίσμα, -τος, τό (σχίζω), a rent (Arist., al.): Mat.9:16, Mrk.2:21. Metaphorical, a dissension, division: Jhn.7:43 9:16 10:19, 1Co.1:10 11:18 12:25.† SYN.: see: αἵρεσις (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγένετο

한글 발음: 에게네토

egeneto

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1096 원어 검색에서 보기 G1096
Lemma
γίνομαι
Strong
G1096
형태소
V-2ADI-3S
품사
동사
되다/일어나다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '되다, 생기다, 일어나다, 발생하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γίνομαι, Ion. and κοινή for Att. γίγν- (M. Pr., 47; Bl., §6, 8 Mayser, 166 f.), [in LXX chiefly for היה ;] __1. of persons, things occurrences, to come into being, be born, arise, come on: Jhn.1:15 8:58, 1Co.15:37; a first appearance in public, Mrk.1:4, Jhn.1:6, al.; before ἐκ (of birth), Rom.1:3, Gal.4:4; διά, Jhn.1:3; βροντή, Jhn.12:29; σεισμός, Rev.6:12; γογγυσμός, Act.6:1; χαρά, Act.8:8, many other similar exx.; ἡμέρα, Luk.22:66, al.; ὀψέ, Mrk.11:19; πρωΐα, Mat.27:1; νύξ, Act.27:27. __2. Of events, to come to pass, take place, happen: Mat.5:18, Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:20 2:15, Act.4:21, 2Ti.2:18, al.; μὴ γένοιτο [LXX for חָלִילָה, Jhn.22:29, al.], far be it, God forbid: Rom.3:4 (ICC, in l.), 1Co.6:15 and frequently in Pl.; καὶ ἐγένετο, ἐγένετο δέ ([in LXX for וַיְהִי ;] see Burton, 142 f.; M, Pr., 16f.; Dalman, Words, 32 f.; Robertson, Gr., 1042 f.), with indic, Mat.7:28, Luk.1:8, al.; before καί and indic., Luk.8:1, Act.5:7, al.; with accusative and inf., Mrk.2:23, Luk.3:21, al.; ὡς δὲ ἐγένετο, before τοῦ with inf., Act.10:25; with dative of person(s), to befall one: with inf., Act.20:16; with accusative and inf., Act.22:6; with adv., εὖ, Eph.6:3; τ́ ἐγένετο αὐτῷ (Field, Notes, 115), Act.7:40 (LXX); before εἰς, Act.28:6. __3. to be made, done, performed, observed, enacted, ordained, etc.: Mat.6:10 19:8, Mrk.2:27 11:23, Act.19:26, al.; before διά with genitive, Mrk.6:2, Act.2:43; ὑπό, Luk.13:17; ἐκ, Luk.4:23; ἐν, 1Co.9:15; ἀπογραφή, Luk.2:2; ἀνάκρισις Act.25:26; ἄφεσις, Heb.9:22; ὁ νόμος, Gal.3:17; τὸ πάσχα, Mat.26:2. __4. to become, be made, come to be: with pred., Mat.4:3, Luk.4:3, Jhn.2:9, 1Co.13:11, al.; before ὡς, ὡσεί, Mat.10:25, Mrk.9:26; εἰς (M, Pr., 71f.), Mrk.12:1o, al.; with genitive Rev.11:15; id., of age, Luk.2:42; with dative, γ. ἀνδρί ([LXX for הָיָה לְאִישׁ, Rut.1:12, al. ;] see Field, Notes, 156), Rom.7:3, 4; before ἐν, Act.22:17, Rev.1:10, al.; ἐπάνω, Luk.19:19; μετά, with genitive, Mrk.16:[10], Act.9:19; before εἰς, ἐπί (Field, Notes, 135), κατά (ib., 62), with accusative of place, Act.20:16 21:35 27:7, al.; before ἐκ, Mrk.9:7, Luk.3:22, 2Th.2:7, al. Aoristic pf. γέγονα (M, Pr., 52, 145f.; Field, Notes, 1f.), Mat.25:6, Luk.10:36, al. Aor. ἐγενήθη (for ἐγένετο, M, Pr., 139f.; Mayser, 379), Mat.11:23, al. (Cf. απο-, δια-, επι-, παρα-, συμ-, παρα-, προ-.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐν

한글 발음: 엔

en

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1722 원어 검색에서 보기 G1722
Lemma
ἐν
Strong
G1722
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안에/~에
번역 정렬
-

정의

여격 지배 전치사. 장소·시간·상태·수단 '~안에, ~에, ~으로'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐν, prep, (the most frequently of all in NT), with dative (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, with abl.). __I. Of place, with dative of thing(s), of person(s), in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Luk.7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mat.7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mat.12:40; τ. ὄρει, 2Pe.1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Rev.3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Rom.8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν Abbott-Smith has ὑμῖν., Luk.1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Gal.3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mat.12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103), Luk.2:49; trop., of the region of thought or feeling, ἐν τ. καρδίᾳ (-αις), Mat.5:28, 2Co.4:6, al.; τ. συνειδήσεσιν, 2Co.5:11; after verbs of motion, instead of εἰς (constructio praegnans, a usage extended in late Gk. beyond the limits observed in cl.; cf. Bl., §41, 1; M, Th., 12), ἀποστέλλω . . . ἐν, Mat.10:16. δέδωκεν ἐν τ. χειρί (cf. τιθέναι ἐν χερσί, Hom., Il., i, 441, al.), Jhn.3:35; id. after verbs of coming and going (not in cl.), εἰσῆλθε, Luk.9:46; ἐξῆλθεν, Luk.7:17. __II. Of state, condition, form, occupation, etc.: ἐν ζωῇ, Rom.5:10; ἐν τ. θανάτῳ, 1Jn.3:14; ἐν πειρασμοῖς, 1Pe.1:6; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, Mrk.5:25; ἐν δόξῃ, Php.4:19; ἐν πραΰτητι, Jas.3:13; ἐν μυστηρίῳ, 1Co.2:7; ἐν τ. διδαχῇ, Mrk.4:2; of a part as contained in a whole, ἐν τ. ἀμπέλῳ, Jhn.15:4; ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι, Rom.12:4; of accompanying objects or persons (simple dative in cl.), with, ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:25; ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν, Luk.14:31 (cf. Ju 14, Act.7:14); similarly (cl.), of clothing, armour, arms, ἐν στολαῖς, Mrk.12:38; ἐν ἐσθῆτι λαμπρᾷ, Jas.2:2; ἐν μαξαίρῃ, Luk.22:49; ἐν ῥάβδῳ, 1Co.4:21 (cf. ἐν τόξοις, Xen., Mem., 3, 9, 2); of manner (cl.), ἐν τάχει (= ταχέως), Luk.18:8 (cf. Bl., §41, 1); of spiritual influence, ἐν πνεύματι, Rom.8:9; ἐν π. ἀκαθάρτῳ, Mrk.1:23; of the mystical relation of the Christian life and the believer himself, to God and Christ (cf. ICC, Ro., 160f.; Mayor on Ju 1; M, Pr., 103): ἐν Χριστῷ, Rom.3:24, 6:11, 1Co.3:1, 4:10, 2Co.12:2, Gal.2:17, Eph.6:21, Col.4:7, 1Th.4:16, al. __III. Of the agent, instrument or means (an extension of cl. ἐν of instr.—see LS, see word Ill—corresponding to similar use of Heb. בְּ), by, with: ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος (= cl. παρά, C. dative), 1Co.6:2; ἐν τ. ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34; ἐν αἵματι, Heb.9:22; ἐν ὕδατι, Mat.3:11, al.; ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀποκτενεῖ (cf. the absol. ἐν μ., ἐν ῥάβδῳ, supr., II, which some would classify here), Rev.13:10 (cf. 6:8). Allied to this usage and distinctly Semitic are the following: ἠγόρασας . . . ἐν τ. αἵματι σου (cf. BDB, see word בְּ, III, 3), Rev.5:9; ὁμολογεῖν ἐν (= Aram. אודי בּ; cf. McNeile on Mt, I.with; M, Pr., 104), Mat.10:32, Luk.12:8; ὀμνύναι ἐν (= cl. accusative, so Jas.5:12), Mat.5:34, al.; also at the rate of, amounting to, Mrk.4:8 (WH; vv. ll., εἰς, ἒν), Act.7:14 (LXX). __IV. Of time, __(a) in or during a period: ἐν τ. ἡμέρᾳ (νυκτί), Jhn.11:9, al.; ἐν σαββάτῳ, Mat.12:2, al.; ἐν τῷ μεταξύ, meanwhile, Jhn.4:31; __(b) at the time of an event: ἐν τ. παρουσίᾳ, 1Co.15:23; ἐν τ. ἀναστάσει, Mat.22:28; __(with) with art. inf., __(α) present (so sometimes in cl., but not as in NT = ἕως; V. M, Pr., 215), while: Mat.13:4, Mrk.6:48, Gal.4:18, al.; __(β) aor., when, after: Luk.9:36, al.; __(d) within (cl.): Mat.27:40, __V. In composition: (1) meaning: (a) with adjectives, it signifies usually the possession of a quality, as ἐνάλιος, ἐν́δοξος; (b) with verbs, continuance in (before ἐν) or motion into (before εἰς), as ἐμμένω, ἐμβαίνω. (ii) Assimilation: ἐν becomes ἐμ- before β, μ, π, φ, ψ; ἐγ- before γ, κ, ξ, χ; ἐλ- before λ. But in the older MSS of NT, followed by modern editions, assimilation is sometimes neglected, as in ἐνγράφω, ἐγκαινίζω, etc. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῷ

한글 발음: 토

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-DSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλῳ

한글 발음: 오클로

ochlō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-DSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δι᾽

한글 발음: 디

di᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν.

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
And some of them would have taken him; but no man laid hands on him.

원어

τινὲς

한글 발음: 티네스

tines

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-NPM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

δὲ

한글 발음: 데

de

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1161 원어 검색에서 보기 G1161
Lemma
δέ
Strong
G1161
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/그런데
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사. 약한 대조 '그러나', 연결·전환 '그런데/그리고'. μέν과 짝을 이루기도 함.

원문 정의 보기

δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; __1. copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2ff., 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al.; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al.; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ . . . δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al.; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. __2. Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop., answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl., §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al.; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al.; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al.; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἤθελον

한글 발음: 에텔론

ēthelon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2309 원어 검색에서 보기 G2309
Lemma
θέλω
Strong
G2309
형태소
V-IAI-3P
품사
동사
원하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '원하다, 바라다, ~하려 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). θέλω (the strengthened form ἐθέλω is found in Hom., and is the more frequently in Attic; see Rutherford, NPhr., 415f.), [in LXX for חפץ ,אבה; with neg., מאן pi., etc. ;] to will, be willing, wish, desire (more frequently than βούλομαι, which see, in vernac. and late Gk., also in MGr.; for various views as to its relation to β., see Thayer, 286; but see also BL, §24, see word): absol., Rom.9:16, 1Co.4:19 12:18, Jas.4:15; τ. θεοῦ θέλοντος, Act.18:21; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.20:21, Mrk.14:36, Jhn.15:7, Rom.7:15, 16 1Co.4:21 7:36, Gal.5:17; with inf., Mat.5:40, Mrk.10:43, Jhn.6:21, 67 Rom.7:21, Gal.4:9; with accusative and inf., Mrk.7:24, Luk.1:62, Jhn.21:22, 23 Rom.16:19, 1Co.14:5, Gal.6:13; οὐ θέλω, Mat.18:30, al.; id. with inf., Mat.2:18, Mrk.6:26, Jhn.5:40, 1Co.16:7; before ἵνα, Mat.7:12, Mrk.6:25, Jhn.17:24; opposite to ποιέω, πράσσω, ἐνεργέω, Rom.7:15, 19 2Co.8:10, 11 Php.2:13; before ἤ (ICG, in l.; Deiss., LAE, 179:24), 1Co.14:19; θέλων ἐν ταπεινοφροσυνῄ (of his own mere will, by humility, R, mg), Col.2:18; in OT quotations, for Heb. חפץ, with accusative of person(s), Mat.27:43; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.9:13 12:7, Heb.10:5, 8; with inf., 1Pe.3:10; for אמר, with inf., Act.7:28 (see Cremer, 726ff.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξ

한글 발음: 엑스

ex

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν

한글 발음: 아우톤

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πιάσαι

한글 발음: 피아사이

piasai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4084 원어 검색에서 보기 G4084
Lemma
πιάζω
Strong
G4084
형태소
V-AAN
품사
동사
붙잡다/체포하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '붙잡다, 체포하다, (물고기를) 잡다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιάζω (cf. MGr. πιάνω; see Kennedy, Sources, 155), Doric and late Att.. for πιέζω in its later senses [in LXX: Sng.2:15 (אָחַז), Sir.23:21 * ;] __1. to lay hold of: Act.3:7 (Theocr.). __2. to take, capture, apprehend: Jhn.7:30, 32 7:44 8:20 10:39 11:57 21:3, 10 Act.12:4, 2Co.11:32, Rev.19:20 (see MM, xx).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν,

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀλλ᾽

한글 발음: 알

all᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδεὶς

한글 발음: 우데이스

oudeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3762 원어 검색에서 보기 G3762
Lemma
οὐδείς
Strong
G3762
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
아무도 ~않다
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사 '아무도/아무것도 ~아니다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (also in WH, txt., the Hellenistic forms -θείς, -θέν, Luk.22:35 23:14, Act.15:9 19:27 26:26, 1Co.13:2, 2Co.11:8; cf. BL, §6, 7; M, Pr., 56n, Thackeray, Gr., 58), related to μηδείς as οὐ to μή, no, no one, none: with nouns, Luk.4:24, Jhn.10:41, Rom.8:1, al.; absol., Mat.6:24, Mrk.3:27, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:18, Act.18:10, Rom.14:7, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Luk.4:26, Jhn.13:28, al.; neut., οὐδέν, Mat.10:26, al.; id. with genitive partit., Luk.9:36, Act.18:17, al.; οὐδὲν εἰ μή, Mat.5:13, Mrk.9:29, al.; with neg., strengthening the negation, Mrk.15:4, 5 Luk.4:2, Jhn.3:27, al.; adverbially, Act.25:10, Gal.4:12, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπέβαλεν

한글 발음: 에페발렌

epebalen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1911 원어 검색에서 보기 G1911
Lemma
ἐπιβάλλω
Strong
G1911
형태소
V-2AAI-3S
품사
동사
(손을) 대다/얹다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '위에 던지다, 손을 대다, 얹다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπι-βάλλω [in LXX for שָׁלַח, שִׁית, etc. ;] __1. trans., to cast, lay or put upon: with accusative and dative, Mrk.11:7, 1Co.7:35; with accusative, before ἐπί with accusative, Rev.18:10, WH, mg.; τ. Χεῖρα (-ας) ἐπί (B1., § 37, 7), of seizing a prisoner, Mat.26:50, Luk.20:19 21:12, Jhn.7:30, Act.5:18 21:27; with dative (Polyb.), Mrk.14:46 Act.4:3; with inf., Act.12:1; τὴν χ. ἐπ᾽ ἄροτρον, Luk.9:62; ἐπίβλημα ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον, Luk.5:36; ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ, Mat.9:16. __2. Intrans., __(a) to throw oneself or rush upon: τ. κύματα εἰς τ. πλοῖον, Mrk.4:37; metaphorically, to put one's mind upon (but see Field, Notes, 41 ff.), ἐπιβαλὼν ἔκλαιεν, when he thought thereon (sc. τ. ῥήματι), he wept (EV, txt.; R, mg., he began to weep; cf. M, Pr., 131): Mrk.14:72 (see also Swete, in l); __(b) to fall to one's share: τὸ ἐπιβάλλον (sc. dative; Hdt., a1., a technical formula frequently in π.; Deiss., BS, 230, LAE, 152), Luk.15:12.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπ᾽

한글 발음: 에프

ep᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1909 원어 검색에서 보기 G1909
Lemma
ἐπί
Strong
G1909
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~위에/~에게
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사(속·여·대격) '~위에, ~에게, ~를 향하여, ~에 대하여'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ᾽, before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽), prep. with genitive, dative, accusative (accusative most frequently in NT), with primary sense of superposition, on, upon. __I. C. genitive, __1. of place, answering the question, where? __(a) of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mat.6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, 1Co.11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mat.24:3o, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mrk.4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, Heb.6:7, al.; figuratively, ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας (MM, see word ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Gal.3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων, Rom.9:5: τ. γάζης, Act.8:27; ἐξουσία, Rev.2:26 20:6; __(b) of vicinity, at, by: τ. θαλάσσης, Jhn.6:9; τ. ὁδοῦ, Mat.21:19; τοῦ βάτου, Mrk.12:26 (see Swete, in l.); with genitive of person(s), in the presence of, before, Mat.28:14, Act.23:30, 1Co.6:1, al. __2. Of time, __(a) with genitive of person(s), in the time of: ἐπὶ Ἐλισαίου, Luk.4:27; ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου, Act.11:28; ἐπὶ Ἀβιάθαρ ἀρχιερέως, when A. was high priest, Mrk.2:26; __(b) with genitive of thing(s), at, at the time of: Mat.1:11, Heb.1:2, 2Pe.3:3; ἐπὶ τ. προσευχῶν, Rom.1:10, Eph.1:16, 1Th.1:2, Phm 4. __II. C. dative, of place, answering the question, where? __(a) lit., on, upon: Mat.9:16, 14:8, al.; after verbs of motion (see supr., I, 1, (a)), Mat.9:16 Act.8:16; above, Luk.23:38; at, by, Mrk.13:29, Jhn.5:2, Act.5:9, al.; __(b) metaphorically, upon, on the ground of, Luk.4:4 (LXX); in the matter of, Mrk.6:52 (see Swete, in l.); upon, of, concerning, Act.5:35, 40; of the ground, reason or motive (Bl., §38, 2; 43, 3), Mat.18:3 19:9, Rom.12:12, al.; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, for the reason that, because, Rom.5:12 2Co.5:4; after verbs of motion, over, Mat.18:13, Rom.16:19, al.; of a condition (cl.), Rom.8:20, 1Co.9:10; ἐπὶ δυσὶ μάρτυσιν (see Westc. on Heb.9:10), Heb.10:28; of purpose or aim, Eph.2:10, Php.4:10; of authority, over, Mat.24:47 Luk.12:44; of hostility, with dative of person(s) (cl.), against, Luk.12:52; in addition to (cl.), 2Co.7:13; of an adjunct, in, at, on, Php.1:3 2:17. __III. C. accusative, __1. of place of motion upon or over, answering the question, whither? __(a) lit., upon, over: Mat.14:28, 29, Luk.5:19, al. mult.; in NT also, answering the question, where? (as with genitive, dative), Mrk.4:38 11:2, Luk.2:25, Jhn.1:32; ἐπὶ τ. αὐτό, Act.1:15 2:1, al.; of motion to a vicinity, to, Mrk.16:2, Act.8:36, al.; __(b) metaphorically (in wh. "the accusative is more widely prevalent than it strictly should be," Bl., §43, 1); of blessings, evils, etc., coming upon one, with accusative of person(s), Mat.10:13 12:28, Act.2:17, Jhn.18:4, Eph.5:6, al.; of addition (dative in cl.), λύπη ἐπὶ λύπην, Php.2:27; ἐπικαλεῖν ὄνομα ἐπί (see: ἐπικαλέω), Act.15:17, Jas.2:7; καλεῖν ἐπί, to call after, Luk.1:59; of number or degree: ἐπὶ τρίς (cl. εἰς τ.), thrice, Act.10:16 11:10; ἐπὶ πλεῖον, the more, further, Act.4:17 2Ti.2:16 3:9 (see also infr., 2, (a)); ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (see infr., ib.), forasmuch as, Mat.25:40, 45, Rom.11:13; of power, authority, control, Luk.1:33, Act.7:10 Rom.5:14, Heb.3:6, al.; of the direction of thoughts and feelings, unto, towards, Luk.1:17 23:28, Act.9:35, 42, Rom.11:22, Gal.4:9, Eph.2:7, 1Ti.5:5, al.; of purpose, for, Mat.3:7, Luk.23:48; ἐφ᾽ ὅ πάρει (Rec. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, Mat.26:50; of hostility, against, Mat.24:7, Mrk.3:24-26 10:11 13:8, Luk.9:5, Jhn.13:18, Act.7:54, 1Co.7:36, 2Co.1:23; Of reference, concerning, for (cl. usually dative), Mrk.9:12 15:24, Jhn.19:24, Rom.4:9. __2. Of time, __(a) during, for: Luk.4:25 (WH, txt., omits ἐπί), Act.13:31 16:18, Heb.11:30, al.; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον (χρόνον), as long as, for so long time as, Mrk.9:15 Rom.7:1, al. (for ἐφ᾽ ὅ in another sense, see supr., 1, (b)); ἐφ᾽ ἱκανόν (see: ἱ), Act.20:11; ἐπὶ πλεῖον (see supr., 1, (b)), yet longer, further, Act.20:9 24:4; __(b) on, about, towards (cl. εἰς): Luk.10:35 Act.3:1 4:5. __IV. In composition, ἐπί signifies: up, ἐπαίρω; upon, ἐπίγειος, ἐπιδημέω, ὠπικαθίζω; towards, επιβλέπω, ὠπεκτείνω; over (of superintendence), ἐπιστάτης; again, in addition, ἐπαιτέω; against, ἐπιορκέω, ἐπιβουλή. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὰς

한글 발음: 타스

tas

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

χεῖρας.¶

한글 발음: 케이라스

cheiras

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5495 원어 검색에서 보기 G5495
Lemma
χείρ
Strong
G5495
형태소
N-APF
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '손'.

원문 정의 보기

χείρ, genitive, χειρος (accusative, χεῖραν, 1Pe.5:6 T), ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for יָד ;] the hand: Mat.3:12, Mrk.3:1, Luk.6:6, al. mult.; ἡ χ., acting subject, Luk.22:21; pl., Act.17:25 20:34, 1Jn.1:1; τ. ἔργα τῶν χ., Act.7:41, Rev.9:20; ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τ. ἐμῇ χ., 1Co.16:21, Col.4:18, 2Th.3:17; prepositional phrases, esp. those without art., similar to Heb. constructions (Bl., §32, 4; 40, 9; 46, 9), ἐν χ.; with genitive (Lft., in l.), Gal.3:19; σὺν χ. ἀγγέλου, Act.7:35; διὰ (τῶν) χειρῶν (διὰ χειρός), Mrk.6:2, Act.5:12 7:25, al.; ἐπὶ χειρῶν, Mat.4:6, Luk.4:11; ellipse of χ. (ἡ δεξία, ἀριστερα; Bl., §44, 1), Mat.6:3, al. By meton., for the power or activity of an individual, Mat.17:22, Mrk.9:31, Luk.9:31, Jhn.10:39, Act.12:11, al.; metaphorically, of the activity or power of God: Luk.1:66 23:46, Jhn.10:29, Act.11:21 13:11, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The officers therefore came to the chief priests and Pharisees; and they said unto them, Why did ye not bring him?

원어

Ἦλθον

한글 발음: 엘톤

Ēlthon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑπηρέται

한글 발음: 휘페레타이

hupēretai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5257 원어 검색에서 보기 G5257
Lemma
ὑπηρέτης
Strong
G5257
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
수종드는 자/하속
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '수종드는 자, 하속, 봉사자'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑπηρέτης, -ου, ὁ (ὑπό + ἐρέτης, a rower) [in LXX: Pro.14:35 (עֶבֶד), Wis.6:4, al. ;] prop., an under rower; hence, generally, a servant, attendant, minister: of a magistrate's attendant, Mat.5:25; of officers of the Synagogue or Sanhedrin, Mat.26:58, Mrk.14:54, 65, Luk.4:20, Jhn.7:32, 45-46 18:3, 12 18:22 19:6, Act.5:22, 26; of the attendants of kings, οἱ ὑ. οἱ ἑμοί Jhn.18:36; of Christian ministers, Act.13:5 26:16; ὑπηρέται λόγου, Luk.1:2; Χριστοῦ, 1Co.4:1; δοῦλοι κ. ὑ., Jhn.18:18.† SYN.: see: διάκονος (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τοὺς

한글 발음: 투스

tous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-APM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀρχιερεῖς

한글 발음: 아르키에레이스

archiereis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G749 원어 검색에서 보기 G749
Lemma
ἀρχιερεύς
Strong
G749
형태소
N-APM
품사
명사
대제사장
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '대제사장'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀρχιερεύς, -έως, ὁ, [in LXX for כּ'' הָרֹאשׁ,כּ'' הַגָּדוֹל ,כּהֵן ;] __1. high-priest: Mrk.2:26 14:47, al.; of Christ: Heb.2:17 3:1, al. __2. In pl., chief priests, including ex-high-priests and members of high-priestly families: Mat.2:4, Mrk.8:31, al. (Cremer, 294; DCG, i, 297f.; MM, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φαρισαίους,

한글 발음: 파리사이우스

Pharisaious

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5330 원어 검색에서 보기 G5330
Lemma
Φαρισαῖος
Strong
G5330
형태소
N-APM-T
품사
명사
바리새인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '바리새인'.

원문 정의 보기

Φαρισαῖος, -ου, ὁ (Aram. פְּרִישָׁא; see Dalman, Gr., 157.n, Words, 2.n), a Pharisee: Mat.23:26, Php.3:5; usually in pl., Mat.9:11, Mrk.2:18, al.; Φ. κ. γραμματεῖς, Mat.5:20, Mrk.2:16, Luk.5:21, al.; Φ. κ. Σαδδυκαῖοι, Mat.16:1, Act.23:6, 7 al.; ἀρχιερεῖς, Mat.21:45, Jhn.7:32, al. (see DB, iii, 826b). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπον

한글 발음: 에이폰

eipon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς

한글 발음: 아우토이스

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκεῖνοι·

한글 발음: 에케이노이

ekeinoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1565 원어 검색에서 보기 G1565
Lemma
ἐκεῖνος
Strong
G1565
형태소
D-NPM
품사
-
저/그것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '저, 그 사람, 그것'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκεῖνος, -η, -ο (ἐκεῖ), [in LXX chiefly for הַהוּא ,הוּא, and cogn. forms ;] demonstr. pron., that person or thing (ille), implying remoteness as compared with οὗτος (hic); __1. absol., emphatic he, she, it: opposite to οὗτος, Luk.18:14, Jas.4:15; ἡμεῖς, Heb.12:25; ὑμεῖς, Mrk.4:11; ἄλλοι, Jhn.9:9; ἐγώ, Jhn.3:30; to persons named, Mk 16:[10, 13, 20], Jhn.2:21; of one (absent) who is not named, contemptuously (Abbott, JG, §§2385, 2732), Jhn.7:11 9:28; with respect, of Christ, 1Jo.2:6 3:3, al.; referring to a preceding noun, Mrk.16:[10], Jhn.7:45; resumption of a participial subject, Jhn.1:33 9:37 10:1, Rom.14:14, al. (on its reference in Jhn.19:35, see Westc, in l.; Moffatt, Intr., 568; Sanday, Fourth Gospel, 77ff.). __2. As adj., joined, like οὗτος, to a noun with the article: Mat.7:25, Mrk.3:24, Jhn.18:15, al.; esp. of time, past or future: ἐν τ. ἡμέραις ἐ., Mat.3:1, Mrk.1:9, Act.2:18" (LXX), al.; ἐν ἐ. τ. ἡμέρᾳ, esp of the Parousia, Mat.7:22, Luk.6:23, 2Th.1:10, 2Ti.1:12; adverbially, ἐκεινής (sc. ὁδοῦ) = cl. ἐκεινῇ (Bl., §36, 13), that way, Luk.19:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

διὰ

한글 발음: 디아

dia

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1223 원어 검색에서 보기 G1223
Lemma
διά
Strong
G1223
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~통하여/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~통하여', 대격 '~때문에'.

원문 정의 보기

διά (before a vowel δ᾽, exc. Rom.8:10, 2Co.5:7, and in (Proper name)s; Tdf., Pr., 94), prep. with genitive, accusative, as in cl.; __1. with genitive, through; __(i) of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mat.2:12 12:43, Mrk.2:23, Luk.4:30, Jhn.4:4, 2Co.11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, 1Co.3:15, 1Pe.3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, 1Co.13:12; metaphorically, of a state or condition: Rom.14:20, 2Co.2:4 5:7, 10; δ. γράμματος, ἀκροβυστίας (Lft., Notes, 263, 279), Rom.2:27 4:11; δι ̓ὑπομενῆς, Rom.8:25. __(ii) Of Time; __(a) during which: Mat.26:61, Mrk.14:58, Luk.5:5; δ. παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, Heb.2:15; δ. παντός (διαπαντός in Mrk.5:5, Luk.24:53), always, continually, Mat.18:10, Act.2:25" (LXX) 10:2 24:16, Rom.11:10" (LXX), 2Th.3:16, Heb.9:6 13:15. __(b) within which: Act.1:3; δ. νυκτός, Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; __(with) after which (Field, Notes, 20; Abbott, JG, 255f.): Mrk.2:1, Act.24:17, Gal.2:1. __(iii) Of the Means or Instrument; __(1) of the efficient cause (regarded also as the instrument): of God, Rom.11:36, 1Co.1:9, Gal.4:7, Heb.2:10 7:21; of Christ, Rom.1:8 5:1, 17, 1Co.15:21, 1Pe.4:11, al.; δ. τ. ὑμῶν δεήσεως, Rom.1:12, 2Co.1:4, Gal.4:23, al.; __(2) of the agent, instrument or means; __(a) with genitive of person(s), Mat.11:2, Luk.1:70, Jhn.1:17, Act.1:16, Rom.2:16, 1Co.1:21, Eph.1:5, Heb.2:14, Rev.1:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. κυρίου δ. τ. προφήτου (δ. τ. κυρίου, 1Th.4:2 (M, Th., in l.); Lft., Rev., 121f.), Mat.1:22 2:15, Rom.1:2; δ. ἐπιστολῆς ὡς δ. ἡμῶν (Field, Notes, 202), 2Th.2:2; δ. Σ. (NTD, 22), 1Pe.5:12; __(b) with genitive of thing(s) (where often the simple dative is used in cl.; Jannaris, Gr., 375), Jhn.11:4, Act.5:12; δ. τ. πίστεως, Rom.3:30; δ. λόγου θεοῦ, 1Pe.1:23; δ. παραβολῆς, Luk.8:4; δουλεύειν δ. τ. ἀγάπης, Gal.5:13; δ. ἐπαγγελίας, Gal.3:18, __2. C. accusative; __(i) rarely, as with genitive, through (Hom), δ. μέσον Σαμαρίας (ICC, in l.; Bl., §42, 1; Robertson, Gr., 581), Luk.17:11. __(ii) by reason of, because of, for the sake of; __(a) with accusative of person(s) (M, Pr., 105), Mrk.2:27, Jhn.6:57 11:42, Rom.8:20; __(b) with accusative of thing(s), δ. φθόνον, Mat.27:18, Mrk.15:10; δ. φόβον, Jhn.7:13 20:19; δ. ἀγάπην, Eph.2:4; δ. τοῦτο, freq., for this cause, therefore, Mat.6:25, Mrk.6:14, Luk.11:49, Jhn.6:65, al.; id. before ὅτι, Jhn.5:16 10:17, al.; δ. τί, why, Mat.9:11, 14 Mrk.2:18, Jhn.7:45, al.; δ. τό, with inf., Mrk.5:4, Luk.9:7, Jas.4:2. __3. In composition, __(1) through, as in διαβαίνω; __(2) of separation, asunder, as in διασπάω; __(3) of distribution, abroad, as in διαγγέλλω; __(4) of transition, as διαλλάσσω; __(5) of "perfective" action (M, Pr., 112f., 115f.), as διαφύγω, διακαθαρίζω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τί

한글 발음: 티

ti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5101 원어 검색에서 보기 G5101
Lemma
τίς
Strong
G5101
형태소
I-ASN
품사
-
누구/무엇 (의문)
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문대명사 '누구, 무엇, 어느'.

원문 정의 보기

τίς, neut., τί, genitive, τίνος, interrog. pron., [in LXX for מָה ,מִי ;] in masc. and fem., who, which, what?; in neut., which, what?, used both in direct and in indirect questions. __I. I. As subst., __1. 1. masc., fem.: τίς; who, what?, Mat.3:7 26:68; Mrk.11:28, Luk.9:9, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Act.7:52, Heb.1:5, al; before ἐκ (= genitive partit.), Mat.6:27, Luk.14:28, Jhn.8:46; = ποῖος, Mrk.4:41 6:2, Luk.19:3, Act.17:19, al.; = πότερος (M, Pr., 77), Mat.21:31 27:17, Luk.22:27, al.; = ὅς or ὅστις (rare in cl.; cf. Bl., §50, 5; M, Pr., 93), Act.13:25. __2. Neut.: τί; what?, Mat.5:47 11:7, Mrk.10:3, al.; χάριν τίνος, 1Jn.3:12; διὰ τί, Mat.9:11, al.; εἰς τί, Mat.14:31, al.; elliptically, ἵνα τί (sc. γένηται), why, Mat.9:5, al.; τί οὖν, Rom.3:9 6:1, 15 1Co.14:15, al.; τί γάρ, Rom.3:3, Phi 1:18; τί ἐμοὶ (ὑμῖν) καὶ σοί, see: ἔγω. __II. As adj.: who? what? which?, Mat.5:46, Luk.14:31, Jhn.2:18, al. __III. As adv.: = διὰ τι (τί ὅτι), why, Mat.6:28, Mrk.4:40, Luk.6:46, Jhn.18:23, al.; in rhet. questions, = a negation, Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, 23 1Co.5:12 7:16, al. in exclamations (like Heb. מָה), how (2Ki.6:20, Psa.3:2, al.), Luk.12:49. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

한글 발음: 우크

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἠγάγετε

한글 발음: 에가게테

ēgagete

원어 사전 정의 보기 G71 원어 검색에서 보기 G71
Lemma
ἄγω
Strong
G71
형태소
V-2AAI-2P
품사
동사
이끌다/데려가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '이끌다, 데려가다, 인도하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄγω, [in LXX for בּוא hi., לקח, נהג, etc. ;] __1. to lead, bring, carry: with ace, before ἐπί, εἰς, ἕως, πρός and simple dative; metaphorically, to lead, guide, impel: Jhn.10:16 Rom.2:4, Heb.2:10, 2Ti.3:6, al. __2. to spend or keep a day: Luk.24:21, Act.19:38 __3. Intrans., to go: subjunc., ἄγωμεν, Mat.2:46, al. (Cramer, 61; MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτόν;

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The officers answered, Never man so spake.

원어

ἀπεκρίθησαν

한글 발음: 아페크리테산

apekrithēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3P
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑπηρέται·

한글 발음: 휘페레타이

hupēretai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5257 원어 검색에서 보기 G5257
Lemma
ὑπηρέτης
Strong
G5257
형태소
N-NPM
품사
명사
수종드는 자/하속
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '수종드는 자, 하속, 봉사자'.

원문 정의 보기

ὑπηρέτης, -ου, ὁ (ὑπό + ἐρέτης, a rower) [in LXX: Pro.14:35 (עֶבֶד), Wis.6:4, al. ;] prop., an under rower; hence, generally, a servant, attendant, minister: of a magistrate's attendant, Mat.5:25; of officers of the Synagogue or Sanhedrin, Mat.26:58, Mrk.14:54, 65, Luk.4:20, Jhn.7:32, 45-46 18:3, 12 18:22 19:6, Act.5:22, 26; of the attendants of kings, οἱ ὑ. οἱ ἑμοί Jhn.18:36; of Christian ministers, Act.13:5 26:16; ὑπηρέται λόγου, Luk.1:2; Χριστοῦ, 1Co.4:1; δοῦλοι κ. ὑ., Jhn.18:18.† SYN.: see: διάκονος (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐδέποτε

한글 발음: 우데포테

oudepote

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3763 원어 검색에서 보기 G3763
Lemma
οὐδέποτε
Strong
G3763
형태소
ADV-N
품사
-
결코 ~아니
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '결코 ~아니다, 한 번도 ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐδέ-ποτε, adv. [in LXX: Exo.10:6 (לֹא), etc. ;] never: Mat.7:23 9:33 26:33, Mrk.2:12, Luk.15:29, Jhn.7:46, Act.10:14 11:8 14:8, 1Co.13:8, Heb.10:1, 11. Interrog., Mat.21:16, 42, Mrk.2:25 † (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλάλησεν

한글 발음: 엘랄레센

elalēsen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2980 원어 검색에서 보기 G2980
Lemma
λαλέω
Strong
G2980
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이야기하다'.

원문 정의 보기

λαλέω, -ῶ, [in LXX chiefly for דּבר pi., also for אמר, etc. ;] __1. to utter: of inanimate things, Rev.4:1 10:4; metaphorically, Heb.11:4 12:24. __2. to talk, speak, say: absol., Mat.9:33 12:46, Mrk.5:35, Luk.8:49; before ὡς, 1Co.13:11, Rev.13:11; εἰς, 1Co.14:9; ἐκ, Mat.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.10:19, Mrk.11:32, Jhn.8:30, al.; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:46, Luk.24:6, Rom.7:1, al.; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Mat.9:18, Jhn.10:6, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, Mrk.6:50, Luk.1:19 2:33, al.; ἐν, ἐξ, ἀπό, Mat.13:3, Jhn.12:49 14:10, al.; λ. τ. λόγον, Mrk.8:32, al.; before orat. dir. (not cl.), Mrk.14:31, Heb.5:5 11:18; Hebraistically (Dalman, Words, 25f.), ἐλάλησε λέγων, Mat.14:27, Jhn.8:12, Act.8:26, al. SYN.: see: λέγω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὕτως

한글 발음: 후토스

houtōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3779 원어 검색에서 보기 G3779
Lemma
οὕτως
Strong
G3779
형태소
ADV
품사
-
이와 같이
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사 '이와 같이, 그렇게'.

원문 정의 보기

οὕτως, rarely (Bl., §5, 4; WH, App., 146f.) οὕτω, adv. (οὗτος), [in LXX chiefly for כֵּן ;] in this way, so, thus; __1. referring to what precedes: Mat.5:16 6:30, Mrk.10:43 14:59, Luk.1:25 2:48 15:7, Jhn.3:8, Rom.1:15, 1Co.8:12, al.; οὕτως καί, Mat.17:12, Mrk.13:29, al.; pleonastically, resuming a ptcp. (cl.; see Bl., §74, 6), Act.20:11 27:17. __2. Referring to what follows: Mat.1:18 6:9, Luk.19:31, Jhn.21:1, 1Pe.2:15; bef. quotations from OT, Mat.2:5, Act.7:6, 1Co.15:45, Heb.4:4. __3. C. adj. (marking intensity): Heb.12:21, Rev.16:18; similarly with adv., Gal.1:6 (cl.). __4. As a predicate (Bl., §76, 1): Mat.1:18 9:33, Mrk.2:1, 2 4:26, Rom.4:18 9:20, I Pe 2:15; οὕ ἔχειν (Lat. sic or ita se habere), Act.7:1, al.; ἐκαθέζετο (as he was, without delay or preparation), Jhn.4:6. __5. In comparison, with correlative adv.: καθάπερ . . . οὕ., Rom.12:4, 5 al.; καθὼς . . . οὕ., Luk.11:30, al.; οὕ. . . . καθώς, Luk.24:24, al.; ὡς . . . οὕ., Rom.5:15, al.; οὕ . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, al; ὥσπερ . . . οὕ., Mat.12:40, al.; οὕ. . . . οὕ., 1Co.7:7. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωπος

한글 발음: 안트로포스

anthrōpos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὡς

한글 발음: 호스

hōs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5613 원어 검색에서 보기 G5613
Lemma
ὡς
Strong
G5613
형태소
PRT
품사
-
~같이/~할 때
번역 정렬
-

정의

부사·접속사 '~같이, ~처럼, ~할 때, ~로서'.

원문 정의 보기

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. __I. As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as; __1. with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mrk.4:26, 1Co.3:15, Eph.5:28, Jas.2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Act.8:32, 1Co.7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), with nom., Mat.6:29, al.; with accusative, Mat.19:19, Mrk.12:31, al.; with prep., Mat.26:55, Mrk.14:48, Luk.22:52, Jhn.7:10, al.; with verb., Jhn.15:6, 2Co.3:1, Eph.2:3, 1Th.5:6, al.; with ptcp. (the ptcp. however not having the special force wh. it has in cl.; see Bl., §73, 5; 74, 6), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Heb.13:17, al.; freq implying opinion or belief, Rom.9:32; so esp, with genitive absol., 1Co.4:18, 2Co.5:20, 1Pe.4:12, 2Pe.1:3. __2. Before numerals, about, nearly: Mrk.5:13, Jhn.1:40, Act.5:7, al. __3. Before adjectives and adverbs, how: Rom.10:15 11:33, 1Th.2:10; with superl., ὡς τάχιστα, as quickly as possible, Act.17:15. __II. As conjunction; __1. temporal, __(a) as, when, since: Mrk.9:21 14:72, Luk.1:23, Jhn.2:9, al.; __(b) while, when, as long as: Luk.12:58, Jhn.12:36, Gal.6:10 (Field, Notes, 191); ὡς ἄν (M, Pr., 167, and see: ἄν), Rom.15:24, 1Co.11:34, Php.2:23. __2. Final, in order that; with inf., in order to (M, Pr., 204n), Luk.9:52, Act.20:24, Heb.7:9. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτος

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωπος.

한글 발음: 안트로포스

anthrōpos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
The Pharisees therefore answered them, Are ye also led astray?

원어

ἀπεκρίθησαν

한글 발음: 아페크리테산

apekrithēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3P
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὖν

한글 발음: 운

oun

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3767 원어 검색에서 보기 G3767
Lemma
οὖν
Strong
G3767
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러므로
번역 정렬
-

정의

후치 접속사 '그러므로, 그래서, 그런즉'.

원문 정의 보기

οὖν, particle expressing consequence or simple sequence (never standing first in a sentence), wherefore, therefore, then: Mat.3:10, Luk.3:9, Jhn.8:38, Act.1:21, Rom.5:9, al.; in exhortations, Mat.3:8, Luk.11:35, Act.3:19, Rom.6:12, al.; in questions, Mat.13:28, Mrk.15:12, Jhn.8:[5], Rom.6:1, al.; continuing a narrative or resuming it after a digression, Mat.1:17, Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:22 2:18 (and very frequently in this Gospel), Act.26:22, al.; ἄρα οὖν (see: ἄρα); ἐπεὶ οὖν, Heb.2:14; οὖν with ptcp. (= ἐπεὶ οὖν), Act.2:30, Rom.5:1, al.; ἐὰν οὖν (where οὖν rather in sense belongs to the apodosis), Mat.5:23, Luk.4:7, Jhn.6:62, Rom.2:26, al.; ὡς οὖν, Jhn.4:1, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῖς

한글 발음: 아우토이스

autois

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οἱ

한글 발음: 호이

hoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φαρισαῖοι·

한글 발음: 파리사이오이

Pharisaioi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5330 원어 검색에서 보기 G5330
Lemma
Φαρισαῖος
Strong
G5330
형태소
N-NPM-T
품사
명사
바리새인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '바리새인'.

원문 정의 보기

Φαρισαῖος, -ου, ὁ (Aram. פְּרִישָׁא; see Dalman, Gr., 157.n, Words, 2.n), a Pharisee: Mat.23:26, Php.3:5; usually in pl., Mat.9:11, Mrk.2:18, al.; Φ. κ. γραμματεῖς, Mat.5:20, Mrk.2:16, Luk.5:21, al.; Φ. κ. Σαδδυκαῖοι, Mat.16:1, Act.23:6, 7 al.; ἀρχιερεῖς, Mat.21:45, Jhn.7:32, al. (see DB, iii, 826b). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὑμεῖς

한글 발음: 휘메이스

humeis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2NP
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πεπλάνησθε;

한글 발음: 페플라네스테

peplanēsthe

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4105 원어 검색에서 보기 G4105
Lemma
πλανάω
Strong
G4105
형태소
V-RPI-2P
품사
동사
미혹하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '미혹하다, 속이다, 길을 잃게 하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πλανάω, -ῶ (πλάνη), [in LXX chiefly for תָּעָה ;] to cause to wander, lead astray. Pass., to go astray, wander: Mat.18:12-13 Heb.11:38, 1Pe.2:25 (cf. Isa.53:6). Metaphorical, to lead astray, deceive: with accusative of person(s), Mat.24:4-5, 11 24:24, Mrk.13:5-6, Jhn.7:12, 2Ti.3:13; 1Jn.1:8 Jn 2:26 Jn 3:7, Rev.2:20 12:9 13:14 19:20 20:3, 8 20:10; pass., to be led astray, to err: Mat.22:29, Mrk.12:24, 27, Luk.21:8, Jhn.7:47, 2Ti.3:13, Tit.3:3, Heb.5:2, 2Pe.2:15, Rev.18:23; τ. καρδίᾳ, Heb.3:10; ἀπὸ τ. ἀληθείας, Jas.5:19;μὴ πλανᾶσθε, 1Co.6:9 15:33, Gal.6:7. Jas.1:16 (cf. ἀπο-πλανάω).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Hath any of the rulers believed on him, or of the Pharisees?

원어

μή

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τις

한글 발음: 티스

tis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5100 원어 검색에서 보기 G5100
Lemma
τις
Strong
G5100
형태소
X-NSM
품사
-
어떤/누군가
번역 정렬
-

정의

부정대명사 '어떤 사람, 어떤 것, 누군가'.

원문 정의 보기

τις, neut., τι, genitive, τινός, enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε. __I. As subst., __1. one, a certain one: Luk.9:49, Jhn.11:1, Act.5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Luk.13:1, Act.15:1, Rom.3:8, al. __2. someone, anyone, something, anything: Mat.12:29, Mrk.9:30, Luk.8:46, Jhn.2:25, Act.17:25, Rom.5:7, al.; = indef., one (French on), Mrk.8:4, Jhn.2:25, Rom.8:24, al.; pl., τινες, some, Mrk.14:4, al. __II. II. As adj., __1. a certain: Mat.18:12, Luk.1:5 8:27, Act.3:2, al.; with proper names, Mrk.15:21, Luk.23:26, al.; with genitive partit., Luk.7:19, al. __2. some: Mrk.16:[8], Jhn.5:14, Act.17:21 24:24, Heb.11:40, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀρχόντων

한글 발음: 아르콘톤

archontōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G758 원어 검색에서 보기 G758
Lemma
ἄρχων
Strong
G758
형태소
N-GPM
품사
명사
관원/통치자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '통치자, 관원, 우두머리'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄρχων, -οντος, ὁ (present ptcp. of ἄρχω), [in LXX for נָשִׂיא., רֹאשׁ, שַׂר, etc. ;] a ruler, chief: Jesus, Rev.1:5; rulers of nations, Mat.20:25, Act.4:26 7:35; magistrates, Act.23:5, Rom.13:3; judges, Luk.12:58, Act.7:27, 35 16:19; members of the Sanhedrin, Luk.14:1 23:13, 35 24:20, Jhn.3:1 7:26, 48 12:42, Act.3:17 4:5, 8 13:27 14:5; rulers of synagogues, Mat.9:18, 23, Luk.8:41 18:18; οἱ ἄ. τ. αἰῶνος τούτου, 1Co.2:6-8; of the devil: ἄ. τῶν δαιμονίων, Mat.9:34 12:24, Mrk.3:22, Luk.11:15; ὁ ἄ. τοῦ κόσμου, Jhn.12:31 14:30 16:11; ἄ. τ. ἐξουσίας τ. ἀέρος, Eph.2:2 (MM, see word; DB, iii, 838; Ext., 99 f; DCG, ii, 419; DCG, see word Archon).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπίστευσεν

한글 발음: 에피스튜센

episteusen

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4100 원어 검색에서 보기 G4100
Lemma
πιστεύω
Strong
G4100
형태소
V-AAI-3S
품사
동사
믿다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '믿다, 신뢰하다, 의탁하다'.

원문 정의 보기

πιστεύω, [in LXX chiefly for אמן hi. ;] __1. intrans., to have faith (in), to believe; in cl., with accusative, dative, in NT also with prep, (on the significance of the various constructions, see M, Pr., 67f.; Vau. on Rom.4:5; Ellic. on 1Ti.1:16; Abbott, JV, 19-80): absol., Mat.24:23, 26 Mrk.13:21, 1Co.11:18; with accusative of thing(s), Act.13:41, 1Co.13:7; with dative of person(s) (to believe what one says), Mrk.16:[13, 14], 1Jn.4:1; τ. ψεύδει, 2Th.2:11; περί . . . ὅτι, Jhn.9:18; esp. and most frequently with reference to religious belief: absol., Mat.8:13, Mrk.5:36, Luk.8:50, Jhn.11:40, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:28, al.; with dative (see supr., and cf. DB, i, 829a), Jhn.3:12 5:24 6:30 8:31, Act.16:34, Gal.3:6" (LXX), 2Ti.1:12, 1Jn.5:10, al.; with prep., (expressing personal trust and reliance as distinct from mere credence or belief; see M, Pr., l.with; DB, i, 829b), to believe in or on: ἐν (Psa.77 (78):22, al.), Mrk.1:15 (see Swete, in l.); εἰς, Mat.18:6, Jhn.2:11 (see Westc., in l.), and freq., Act.10:43 19:4, Rom.10:14, Gal.2:16, Php.1:29, I Jhn.5:10, 1Pe.1:8; εἰς τ. ὄνομα, Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18, 1Jn.5:13; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.27:42, Act.9:42 11:17 16:31 22:19, Rom.4:5; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.9:33 (LXX) 10:11 (ib.), 1Ti.1:16, 1Pe.2:6" (LXX) ; ptcp. pres., οἱ π., as subst., Act.2:44, Rom.3:22, 1Co.1:21, al.; aor., Mrk.16:[16], Act.4:32; pf., Act.19:18 21:20 (on Johannine use of the tenses of π., see Westc, Epp. Jo., 120). __2. Trans., to entrust: with accusative and dative, Luk.16:11, Jhn.2:24; pass., to be entrusted with: with accusative, Rom.3:2, 1Co.9:17, Gal.2:7, 1Th.2:4 (see Lft., Notes, 21f.), 1Ti.1:11, Tit.1:3. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰς

한글 발음: 에이스

eis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1519 원어 검색에서 보기 G1519
Lemma
εἰς
Strong
G1519
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~안으로/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·목적 '~안으로, ~를 향하여, ~위하여'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰς, prep. with accusative, expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, with accusative). __I. Of place. __1. After verbs of motion; __(a) of entrance into: Mat.8:23, 9:7, Mrk.1:45, Luk.2:15, 8:31, al.; __(b) of approach, to or towards: Mrk.11:1, Luk.6:8, 19:28, Jhn.11:31, 21:6, al.; __(with) before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mrk.4:7, 8:19, 20, Luk.11:49, Jhn.21:23, al.; __(d) Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mat.8:18, 21:1, Mrk.11:1, 13:16, Luk.14:10, Jhn.6:3, 11:32, al.; with accusative of person(s) (as in Ep. and Ion.), Act.23:15, Rom.5:12, 16:19, 2Co.10:14; __(e) elliptical: ἐπιστολαὶ εἰς Δαμασκόν, Act.9:2; ἡ διακονία μου ἡ εἰς Ἱ., Rom.15:31; metaphorically, of entrance into a certain state or condition, or of approach or direction towards some end (Thayer, B, i, 1; ii, 1), εἰς τ. ὄνομα, M, Pr., 200. __2. Of direction; __(a) after verbs of seeing: Mat.6:26, Mrk.6:41, Luk.9:16, 62, Jhn.13:22, al.; metaphorically, of the mind, Heb.11:26, 12:2, al.; __(b) after verbs of speaking: Mat.13:10, 14:9, 1Th.2:9, al. __3. After verbs of rest; __(a) in "pregnant" construction, implying previous motion (cl.; see WM, 516; Bl., §39, 3; M, Pr., 234f.): Mat.2:23, 4:13, 2Th.2:4, 2Ti.1:11, Heb.11:9, al.; __(b) by an assimilation general in late Gk (see Bl., M, Pr., ll. with) = ἐν: Luk.1:44, 4:23, Act.20:16, 21:17, Jhn.1:18 (but see Westc, in l.), al. __II. Of time, for, unto; __1. accentuating the duration expressed by the accusative: εἰς τ. αἰῶνα, Mat.21:19; εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γ., Luk.1:50; εἰς τ. διηνεκές, Heb.7:3, al. __2. Of a point or limit of time, unto, up to, until: Mat.6:34, Act.4:3, 25:21, Php.1:10, 2:16, 1Th.4:15, 2Ti.1:12; of entrance into a future period, σεις τὸ μέλλον (see: μέλλω), next (year), Luk.13:9 (but with ICC, in l.); εἰς τ. μεταξὺ σάββατον, on the next Sabbath, Act.13:42; εἰς τὸ πάλιν (see: πάλιν, 2Co.13:2. __III. Of result, after verbs of changing, joining, dividing, etc.: στρέφειν εἰς, Rev.11:6; μετας-, Act.2:20, Jas.4:9; μεταλλάσσειν, Rom.1:26; σχίζειν εἰς δύο, Mat.27:51, al.; predicatively with εἴναι, Act.8:23. __IV. Of relation, to, towards, for, in regard to (so in cl., but more frequently in late Gk., εἰς encroaching on the simple dative, which it has wholly displaced in MGr.; Jannaris, Gr., §1541; Robertson, Gr., 594; Deiss., BS, 117f.): Luk.7:30, Rom.4:20, 15:2, 26, 1Co.16:1, Eph.3:16, al.; ἀγάπη εἰς, Rom.5:8, al.; χρηστός, Eph.4:32; φρονεῖν εἰς, Rom.12:16; θαρρεῖν, 2Co.10:1. __V. Of the end or object: εὔθετος εἰς, Luk.14:34; σόφος, Rom.16:19; ἰσχύειν, Mat.5:13; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, al.; ἀφορίζειν εἰς, Rom.1:1; indicating purpose, εἰς φόβον, Rom.8:15; εἰς ἔνδειξιν, Rom.3:25; εἰς τό, with inf. (= ἵνα or ὥστε; Bl., §71, 5; M, Pr., 218ff.): Mat.20:19, Rom.1:11, 1Co.9:18, al. __VI. Adverbial phrases: εἰς τέλος, εἰς τὸ πάλιν, etc (see: τέλος, πάλιν, etc.). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 에

ē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2228 원어 검색에서 보기 G2228
Lemma
Strong
G2228
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
또는/~보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '또는'. 비교에서 '~보다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἤ, disjunctive and comparative particle (Bl., §36, 12; 77, 11); __1. disjunctive, or; __(a) between single words: Mat.5:17 Mrk.6:56, Luk.2:24, Jhn.6:19, Rom.1:21, al.; __(b) before a sentence expressing a variation, denial or refutation of a previous statement, frequently in interrog. form: Mat.7:4, 9 Mrk.12:14, Luk.13:4, Rom.3:29 6:3 9:21, 1Co.6:9, 16 9:6, 2Co.11:7; ἤ . . . ἤ, either . . . or, Mat.6:24, Luk.16:13, 1Co.14:6; __(with) in a disjunctive question (as Lat. an after utrum): Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:9, Luk.7:19, al.; after πότερον, Jhn.7:17; μή, 1Co.9:8; μήτι, 2Co.1:17; ἤ . . . ἤ . . . ἤ, Mrk.13:35. __2. Comparative, than: after comparatives, Mat.10:15, Luk.9:13, Jhn.3:19, Rom.13:11, al.; after ἕτερον, Act.17:21; θέλω (Khüner 3, iv, 303), 1Co.14:19; πρὶν ἤ, before, before accusative and inf., Mat.1:18 Mrk.14:30; after a positive adj. (Gen.49:12; cf. Robertson, Gr., 661), Mat.18:8, 9 Mrk.9:43, 45 47. __3. with other particles: ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, see: ἀλλά; ἤ γάρ, see: γάρ; ἢ καί, or even, or also, Mat.7:10, Luk.11:11, 12 Rom.2:15 4:9, al; ἤτοι . . . ἤ, Rom.6:16 (cf. Wis.11:19). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῶν

한글 발음: 톤

tōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GPM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Φαρισαίων;

한글 발음: 파리사이온

Pharisaiōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5330 원어 검색에서 보기 G5330
Lemma
Φαρισαῖος
Strong
G5330
형태소
N-GPM-T
품사
명사
바리새인
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '바리새인'.

원문 정의 보기

Φαρισαῖος, -ου, ὁ (Aram. פְּרִישָׁא; see Dalman, Gr., 157.n, Words, 2.n), a Pharisee: Mat.23:26, Php.3:5; usually in pl., Mat.9:11, Mrk.2:18, al.; Φ. κ. γραμματεῖς, Mat.5:20, Mrk.2:16, Luk.5:21, al.; Φ. κ. Σαδδυκαῖοι, Mat.16:1, Act.23:6, 7 al.; ἀρχιερεῖς, Mat.21:45, Jhn.7:32, al. (see DB, iii, 826b). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
But this multitude that knoweth not the law are accursed.

원어

ἀλλ᾽

한글 발음: 알

all᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G235 원어 검색에서 보기 G235
Lemma
ἀλλά
Strong
G235
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그러나/도리어
번역 정렬
-

정의

강한 대조 접속사 '그러나, 도리어'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146), adversative particle, stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Rom.3:31); __1. opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mat.5:15, 17 Mrk.5:39, Jhn.7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mrk.9:37, Mat.10:20, Jhn.12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mat.11:7-9, Act.19:2, 1Co.3:6 6:11 7:7, 2Co.7:1, Gal.2:3, al.; in opposition to a foregoing pos. sentence, ἀ. οὐ, Mat.24:6, 1Co.10:23; οὐ μόνον . . . ἀ. καί, Jhn.5:18, Rom.1:32, al.; elliptically, after a negation, ἀ. ἵνα, Mrk.14:49, Jhn.1:8 9:3, al.; = εἰ μή (Bl., §77, 13; M, Pr., 241; but cf. WM, §iii, 10), Mat.20:23, Mrk.4:22. __2. Without previous negation, to express opposition, interruption, transition, etc., but: Jhn.16:20 12:27, Gal.2:14; before commands or requests, Act.10:20 26:16, Mat.9:18, Mrk.9:22, al.; to introduce an accessory idea, 2Co.7:11; in the apodosis after a condition or concession with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴπερ, yet, still, at least, Mrk.14:29, 1Co.9:2, 2Co.4:16, Col.2:5, al.; after μέν, Act.4:17, Rom.14:20, 1Co.14:17; giving emphasis to the following clause, ἀλλ᾽ ἔρχεται ὥρα, yea, etc., Jhn.16:2; so with neg., ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, nay, nor yet, Luk.23:15. __3. Joined with other particles (a practice which increases in late writers; Simcox, LNT, 166), ἀ. γε, yet at least, Luk.24:21, 1Co.9:2; ἄ ἤ., save only, except, Luk.12:51, 2Co.1:13; ἀ. μὲν οὖν, Php.3:8 (on this usage, see MM, VGT, see word). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὄχλος

한글 발음: 오클로스

ochlos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3793 원어 검색에서 보기 G3793
Lemma
ὄχλος
Strong
G3793
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
무리/군중
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '무리, 군중'.

원문 정의 보기

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), קָהָל ,חַיִל, etc. ;] __1. a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mat.9:23, Mrk.2:4, Luk.5:1, Jhn.5:13, al.; pl., Mat.5:1, Mrk.10:1, Luk.3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mrk.10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mat.15:33; οὐ μετ᾽ ὄχλου, Act.24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Luk.22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Mat.13:2, Mrk.2:13, al.; ὄ. πολύς, Mat.20:29, Mrk.5:21, al.; ὁ πολὺς ὄ. (ὄ. π.), the populace, the common people, Mrk.12:37 (Swete, in l.; Field, Notes, 37), Jhn.12:9 (Westc, in l.). __2. (As also cl., opposite to δῆμος, which see, and cf. Tr., Syn., §xcviii), the populace, the common people (cf. ὁ πολὺς ὄ., supr.), Mat.14:5 21:26, Mrk.12:12, Jhn.7:12b; so with contempt (cl.), Jhn.7:49. In a more general sense, a multitude: with genitive, ὀνομάτων (see: ὀ.), Act.1:15; μαθητῶν, Luk.6:17, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὗτος

한글 발음: 후토스

houtos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3778 원어 검색에서 보기 G3778
Lemma
οὗτος
Strong
G3778
형태소
D-NSM
품사
-
이/이것
번역 정렬
-

정의

지시대명사 '이, 이 사람, 이것'.

원문 정의 보기

οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, genitive, τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, [in LXX chiefly for זֹאת ,זֶה ;] demonstr. pron. (related to ἐκεῖνος as hic to ille), this; __1. as subst., this one, he; __(a) absol.: Mat.3:17, Mrk.9:7, Luk.7:44, 45, Jhn.1:15, Act.2:15, al.; expressing contempt (cl.), Mat.13:55, 56, Mrk.6:2, 3, Jhn.6:42, al.; εἰς τοῦτο, Mrk.1:38, Rom.14:9; μετὰ τοῦτο (ταῦτα; V. Westc. on Jhn.5:1), Jhn.2:12 11:7, al.; __(b) epanaleptic (referring to what precedes): Mat.5:19, Mrk.3:35, Luk.9:48, Jhn.6:46, Rom.7:10, al.; __(with) proleptic (referring to what follows): before ἵνα (Bl., §69, 6), Luk.1:43, Jhn.3:19 (and freq.) 15:8, Rom.14:9, al.; before ὅτι, Luk.10:11, Jhn.9:3o, Act.24:14, Rom.2:3, al.; ὅπως, Rom.9:17; ἐάν, Jhn.13:35; __(d) special idioms: τοῦτο μὲν . . . τ. δέ (cl), partly . . . partly. Heb.10:33; καὶ τοῦτο (τοῦτον, ταῦτα), and that (him) too, Rom.13:11, 1Co.2:2, Heb.11:12; τοῦτ᾽ ἐστιν, Mat.27:46. __2. As adj., with subst.; __(a) with art. __(α) before the art.: Mat.12:32, Mrk.9:29, Luk.7:44, Jhn.4:15, Rom.11:24, Rev.19:9, al.; __(β) after the noun: Mat.3:9, Mrk.12:16, Luk.11:31, Jhn.4:13, Act.6:13, Rom.15:28, 1Co.1:20, Rev.2:24, al.; __(b) with subst. anarth. (with predicative force; Bl., §49, 4): Luk.1:36 2:2 24:21, Jhn.2:11 4:54 21:14, 2Co.13:1. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γινώσκων

한글 발음: 기노스콘

ginōskōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1097 원어 검색에서 보기 G1097
Lemma
γινώσκω
Strong
G1097
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '알다, 깨닫다, 인식하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γινώσκω (= γιγν-: see previous word. So also vulgar Attic, in Inscr., see Thumb, MGV, 207), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] to be taking in knowledge, come to know, recognize, perceive, understand; in past tenses to know, realize; pass., to become known: with accusative, Mat.22:18, Mrk.5:43, Col.4:8, 1Th.3:5, al. Pass., Mat.10:26, Php.4:5, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.21:45, Jhn.4:1, al.; τί, Mat.6:3; ἀπό, Mrk.15:45; ὅ, Rom.7:15; τ. λεγόμενα, Luk.18:34; τ. θέλημα, Luk.12:47; τ. καρδίας, Luk.16:15; with accusative of person(s), of recognition by God, 1Co.8:3, Gal.4:9; by Christ, neg., Mat.7:23; frequently of the knowledge of divine things, of God and Christ; τ. θεόν, Rom.1:21 Gal.4:9; τ. πατέρα, Jhn.8:55; τ. κύριον, Heb.8:1 (LXX); νοῦν κυρίου, Rom.11:34; Χριστόν, Jhn.17:3, 1Jn.3:6; τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος, 1Co.2:14; τ. πνεύμα, 1Jn.4:6; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.8:32; of Christ's knowledge of the Father (ἐπιγ.), Mat.11:27 (Dalman, Words, 282ff.). In Hellenistic writers [LXX for Heb. ידע, Gal.4:1, al.], of sexual intercourse, to know carnally: Mat.1:25, Luk.1:34 (Cremer, 153). SYN.: γ., to know by observation and experience is thus prop. disting. from οἶδα, to know by reflection (a mental process, based on intuition or information); cf. also ἐφίστημι, συνίημι. (Cf. ἀνα-, δια-, ἐπι-, κατα-, προ-γινώσκω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νόμον

한글 발음: 노몬

nomon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3551 원어 검색에서 보기 G3551
Lemma
νόμος
Strong
G3551
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
율법/법
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '율법, 법, 규범'. 모세 율법.

원문 정의 보기

νόμος, -ου, ὁ (νέμω, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc. ;] that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.); __1. of law in general: Rom.3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, Heb.8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Jas.1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 267:3), Jas.2:8. __2. Of a force or influence impelling to action: Rom.7:21, 23a, 25 8:2. __3. Of the Mosaic law: Mat.5:18, Luk.2:27, Jhn.1:17, Act.6:13, Rom.2:15, 1Co.9:8, 1Ti.1:8, Heb.7:19; al.; Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22, Jhn.7:23, Act.15:5, al.; κυρίου, Luk.2:39; κατὰ τὸν ν., Act.22:12, Heb.7:5 9:22. __4. As printed, Abbott-Smith mistakenly numbers this as 3.Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Rom.2:12, 13), νόμος, __(a) of law in general: Rom.2:12, 14b 3:20, 21 4:15, al.; __(b) of the Mosaic law in its quality as law: Rom.2:14a 5:20 10:4, Gal.2:19, al.; οἱ ἐκ ν., Rom.4:14; ὑπὸ νόμον, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5; ν. πράσσειν (πληροῦν), Rom.2:25 13:8. __5. Of Christian teaching: ν. πίστεως, Rom.3:27; τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2. __6. By meton., of the books which contain the law; __(a) of the Pentateuch: Mat.12:5, Jhn.1:45, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ οἱ προφῆται, Mat.5:17, Luk.16:16, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ προφῆται κ. ψαλμοί, Luk.24:44. __(b) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. תּוֹרָה): Jhn.10:34 12:34 15:25, 1Co.14:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐπάρατοί

한글 발음: 에파라토이

eparatoi

원어 사전 정의 보기 G6035 원어 검색에서 보기 G6035
Lemma
ἐπάρατος
Strong
G6035
형태소
A-NPM
품사
형용사
저주받은
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '저주받은, 가증한, 저주스러운'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐπ-άρατος, -ον (ἐπαράομαι, to imprecate), accursed: Jhn.7:49 (for exx. from π., see MM, Exp., xiv; cf. Cremer, 108).† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἰσιν.

한글 발음: 에이신

eisin

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-3P
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Nicodemus saith unto them (he that came to him before, being one of them),

원어

λέγει

한글 발음: 레게이

legei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3004 원어 검색에서 보기 G3004
Lemma
λέγω
Strong
G3004
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
말하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '말하다, 이르다, 일컫다'.

원문 정의 보기

λέγω, [in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Gen.22:16, al. ;] __1. in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount. __2. In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Act.13:15, 24:10; before orat. dir., Mat.9:34, Mrk.3:11, Jhn.1:29, al.; before ὅτι recit., Mrk.3:21, Luk.1:24, Jhn.6:14, al.; accusative and inf., Luk.11:18, Jhn.12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mat.11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman, Words, 24 ff.), Mat.25:9, Mrk.3:33, 7:28, Luk.24:6, 7, al.; of unspoken thought, λ. ἐν ἑαυτῷ, Mat.3:9, Luk.3:8, al.; of writing, 2Co.8:8, Php.4:11, al.; λέγει ἡ γραφή, Rom.4:3, Jas.2:23, al.; with accusative of thing(s), Luk.8:8, 9:33, Jhn.5:34, al.; σὺ λέγεις (a non-committal phrase; Swete, Mk., 359, 369f.), Mat.27:11, Mrk.15:2, Luk.23:3, Jhn.18:37; with dative of person(s), before orat. dir., Mat.8:20, Mrk.2:17, al. mult.; id. before ὅτι, Mat.3:9, al.; with prep., πρός, μετά, περί, etc., Mrk.4:41, Jhn.11:56, Heb.9:5, al.; to mean (cl.), Mrk.14:71, Jhn.6:71, 1Co.10:29, al.; to call, name, Mrk.10:18; pass., Mat.9:9, Mrk.15:7, al (cf. ἀντι-, δια- (-μαι), προ-, συλ-λέγω). SYN.: λαλέω, which refers to the utterance, as λέγω to the meaning of what is said, its correspondence with thought (Tr., Syn., Ixxvi; Thayer, see word λαλέω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Νικόδημος

한글 발음: 니코데모스

Nikodēmos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3530 원어 검색에서 보기 G3530
Lemma
Νικόδημος
Strong
G3530
형태소
N-NSM-P
품사
명사
니고데모
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '니고데모'.

원문 정의 보기

Νικόδημος, -ου, ὁ Nicodemus: Jhn.3:1, 4 3:9 7:50 19:39.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτούς,

한글 발음: 아우투스

autous

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-APM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐλθὼν

한글 발음: 엘톤

elthōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2064 원어 검색에서 보기 G2064
Lemma
ἔρχομαι
Strong
G2064
형태소
V-2AAP-NSM
품사
동사
오다/가다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '오다, 가다, 이르다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἔρχομαι, [in LXX very frequently for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;] __1. to come; __(a) of persons, either as arriving or returning from elsewhere: Mat.8:9, Mrk.6:31, Luk.7:8, Jhn.4:27, Rom.9:9, al.; before ἀπό, Mrk.5:35 7:1, Jhn.3:2, al.; ἐκ, Luk.5:17, Jhn.3:31, al.; εἰς, Mrk.1:29, al.; διά before εἰς, Mrk.7:31; ἐν (Cremer, 263f., but see: ἐν), Rom.15:29, 1Co.4:21; ἐπί, with accusative, Mrk.6:53 11:13, Jhn.19:33, al.; κατά, with accusative, Luk.10:33 Act.16:7; παρά, with genitive, Luk.8:49; with accusative, Mat.15:29, Mrk.9:14, al.; with dative comm., incomm. (M, Pr., 75, 245), Mat.21:5, Rev.2:5, 16; with adverbs: πόθεν, Jhn.3:8, al.; ἄνωθεν, Jhn.3:31; ὄπισθεν, Mrk.5:27; ὧδε, Mat.8:29; ἐκεῖ, Jhn.18:3; ποῦ, Heb.11:8; before ἕως, Luk.4:42; ἄχρι, Act.11:5; with purpose expressed by inf., Mrk.5:14, Luk.1:59, al.; by fut. ptcp., Mat.27:49; ἵνα, Jhn.12:9; εἰς τοῦτο, ἵνα, Act.9:21; διά, with accusative, Jhn.12:9; before verbs of action, ἔρχεται καί, ἦλθε καί, etc.: Mrk.2:18, Jhn.6:15, al.; ἔρχου καὶ ἴδε, Jhn.1:47 11:34; ἐλθών (redundant; Dalman, Words, 20 f.), Mat.2:8 8:7, Mrk.7:25, Act.16:39, al.; similarly ἐρχόμενος, Luk.15:25, al.; of coming into public view: esp. of the Messiah (ὁ ἐρχόμενος, Mat.11:3, al.; see Cremer, 264), Luk.3:16, Jhn.4:25; hence, of Jesus, Mat.11:19, Luk.7:34, Jhn.5:43, al.; of the second coming, Mat.10:23, Act.1:11, 1Co.4:5, 1Th.5:2, al.; __(b) of time: ἔρξονται ἡμέραι (present for fut.: Bl., §56, 8), Luk.23:29, Heb.8:8" (LXX) ; fut., Mat.9:15, Mrk.2:20, al.; ἔρξεται ὥρα, ὅτε, Jhn.4:21, 23. al.; ἦλθεν, ἐλήλυθε ἡ ὥρα, Jhn.13:1 16:32 17:1; ἡ ἡμέρα τ. κυρίου, 1Th.5:2; καιροί, Act.3:19; __(with) of things and events: κατακλυσμός, Luk.17:27; λιμός, Act.7:11; ἡ ὀργή, 1Th.1:10; ὁ λύχνος, Mrk.4:21 (see Swete, in l.). Metaphorical, τ. ἀγαθά, Rom.3:8; τ. τέλειον, 1Co.13:10; ἡ πίστις, Gal.3:23, 25; ἡ ἐντολή, Rom.7:9; with prepositions: ἐκ τ. θλίψεως, Rev.7:14; ἐις τ. χεῖρον, Mrk.5:26; εἰς πειρασμόν, ib. 14:38, al. __2. to go: ὀπίσω, with genitive (Heb. הָלַךְ אַחֲרֵי), Mat.16:24, Mrk.8:34, Luk.9:23; σύν, Jhn.21:3; ὁδόν, Luk.2:44. (Cf. ἀν-, ἐπ-αν-, ἀπ-, δι-, εἰς, ἐπ-εἰσ-, συν-εἰσ-, ἐξ-, δι-εξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, ἀντι-παρ-, περι-, προ-, προσ-, συν-έρχομαι.) SYN.: πορεύομαι, χωρέω (v, Thayer, see word ἔρξομαι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νυκτὸς

한글 발음: 뉘크토스

nuktos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3571 원어 검색에서 보기 G3571
Lemma
νύξ
Strong
G3571
형태소
N-GSF
품사
명사
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '밤'.

원문 정의 보기

νύξ genitive νυκτός, ἡ, [in LXX chiefly for לַיִל ;] night: Mat.12:40, Mrk.6:48, Jhn.13:30, al.; genitive temp. (of the time within which something happens; M, Pr., 73; B1., § 36, 13), νυκτός, by night, Mat.2:14, Jhn.3:2, 1Th.5:7, al.; ν. κ. ἡμέρας, Mrk.5:5, 1Th.2:9, al.; ἡμέρας κ. ν., Luk.18:7, Rev.4:8, al.; μέσης ν., Mat.25:6; dative, νυκτί, in ans. to the question, "when?" (rare in cl.; Hdt., Soph.), ταύτῃ τ. ν., Luk.12:20, al.; ἐκείνῃ Act.12:6; ἐπιούσῃ, Act.23:11; accusative durat. (Bl., § 34, 8; Kühner3, III, 314b), ν. κ. ἠμέραν, Luk.2:37 Act.20:31; τ. νύκτας, Luk.21:37; διὰ νυκτός (= cl. νυκτός; Bl., § 42, 1; 46, 7), Act.5:19 16:9 17:10 23:31; δι᾽ ὅλης ν., Luk.5:5; κατὰ μέσον τῆς ν. (Bl., § 47, 6), Act.27:27. Metaphorical: Jhn.9:4, Rom.13:12, 1Th.5:5 (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρὸς

한글 발음: 프로스

pros

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4314 원어 검색에서 보기 G4314
Lemma
πρός
Strong
G4314
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에게/~로
번역 정렬
-

정의

대격 지배 전치사. 방향·관계 '~에게, ~를 향하여, ~와 함께'.

원문 정의 보기

πρός, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative __I. I. C. genitive, of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaphorically, in the interests of, Act.27:34 (cf. Page, in l.). __II. II. C. dative, of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mrk.5:11, Luk.19:37, Jhn.18:16 20:11, 12 Rev.1:13. __III. C. accusative, of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards. __1. Of place, __(a) after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mat.3:14, Mrk.6:51, Luk.11:5, Jhn.2:3, Act.9:2, al. mult.; metaphorically, of mental direction, hostile or otherwise, Luk.23:12, Jhn.6:52, 2Co.7:4, Eph.6:12, Col.3:13, al.; of the issue or end, Luk.14:32, Jhn.11:4, al.; of purpose, Mat.26:12, Rom.3:26, 1Co.6:5, al.; πρὸς τό, with inf., denoting purpose (cf. M, Pr., 218, 220; Lft., Notes, 131), Mat.5:28, Mrk.13:22, Eph.6:11, 1Th.2:9, al.; __(b) of close proximity, at, by, with: Mat.3:10, Mrk.11:4, Luk.4:11, Act.3:2, al.; after εἶναι, Mat.13:56, Mrk.6:3, Jhn.1:1, al. __2. 2. Of time, __(a) towards (Plat., Xen., LXX: Gen.8:11, al.): Luk.24:29; __(b) for: πρὸς καιρόν, Luk.8:13, 1Co.7:5; πρὸς ὥραν, Jhn.5:35, al.; πρὸς ὀλίγον, Jas.4:14. __3. Of relation __(a) toward, with: Rom.5:1, 2Co.1:12, Col.4:5, 1Th.4:12, al.; __(b) with regard to: Mat.19:8, Mrk.12:12, Rom.8:31, al.; __(with) pertaining to, to: Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, Rom.15:17, Heb.2:17 5:1; __(d) according to: Luk.12:47, 2Co.5:10, Gal.2:14, Eph.3:4 4:14; __(e) in comparison with: Rom.8:18. __IV. In composition: towards (προσέρχομαι), to (προσάγω), against (προσκόπτω), besides (προσδαπανάω) . (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτὸν

한글 발음: 아우톤

auton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-ASM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸ

한글 발음: 토

to

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASN
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρότερον,

한글 발음: 프로테론

proteron

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4387 원어 검색에서 보기 G4387
Lemma
πρότερος
Strong
G4387
형태소
A-ASN-C
품사
형용사
이전의/먼저의
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '이전의, 먼저의'.

원문 정의 보기

A. Compar., πρότερος, -α, -ον, [in LXX for רִאשׁוֹן ,לִפָנִים, etc. ;] before, of time, place, rank, etc.; in NT always of Time, before, former: Eph.4:22. Adverbially, πρότερον, before, aforetime, formerly: Jhn.7:50, 2Co.1:15, Heb.4:6; opposite to ἔπειτα, Heb.7:27; τὸ π., Jhn.6:62 9:8, Gal.4:13, 1Ti.1:13; αἱ π. ἡμέραι, Heb.10:32; αἱ π. ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.1:14.† (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἷς

한글 발음: 헤이스

heis

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1520 원어 검색에서 보기 G1520
Lemma
εἷς
Strong
G1520
형태소
A-NSM
품사
형용사
하나/한
번역 정렬
-

정의

수사 '하나, 한 (사람/것)'.

원문 정의 보기

εἷς ιά, ἕν, genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, cardinal numeral, one; __1. one, as opposite to many: Mat.25:15, Rom.5:12, 1Co.10:8, al.; as subst., Rom.5:15, Eph.2:14; id. with genitive partit., Mat.5:19, al.; before ἐκ (ἐξ), Mrk.14:18, Jhn.6:8, al.; metaphorically, of union and concord, Jhn.10:30 17:11, Rom.12:4-5, Php.1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Luk.14:18; with neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one, none (cl.), Mat.5:18 10:29, Luk.11:46 12:6. __2. Emphatically, to the exclusion of others; __(a) a single (one): Mat.21:24, Mrk.8:14; absol., 1Co.9:24, al.; οὐδὲ εἷς, Mat.27:14, Jhn.1:3, Rom.3:10, al.; __(b) one, alone: Mrk.2:7 10:18, Luk.18:19; __(with) one and the same: Rom.3:30, 1Co.3:8 11:5 12:11, 1Jn.5:8. __3. In late Gk., with weakened force, = τις or indef. art. (of. Heb. אֶחָד, Gen.22:13, al.; see B1., § 45, 2; M, Pr., 96 f.): Mat.8:19 19:6, Rev.8:13, al.; εἷς τις (Bl., l.with), Luk.22:50, Jhn.11:49 __4. Distributively: εἷς καστος (cl.), Luk.4:40, Act.2:6, al.; εἷς . . . καὶ εἷς (cl., εἷς μὲν . . . εἷς δέ), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.20:12, al. (cf. LXX and use of Heb. אֶחָד, Exo.17:12, al); ὁ εἷς . . . ὁ ἕτερος (ἄλλος) = cl. ὁ μὲν (ἕτερος) . . . ὁ δέ (ἕτερος), Mat.6:24, Luk.7:41, Rev.17:10; καθ᾽ εἷς, εἷς κ. είς (in which καθ᾽ is adverbial, or the expression formed from the analogy of ἕν καθ᾽ ἔν; M, Pr., 105), one by one, severally: Mrk.14:19, Rom.12:5, al.; εἷς τὸν ἕνα = ἀλλήλους (B1., 45, 2; M, Pr., 246), 1Th.5:11. __5. As ordinal = πρῶτος (like Heb. אֶחָד; Bl., § 45, 1; M, Pr., 95 f.), first: Mat.28:1, Mrk.16:2, al (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὢν

한글 발음: 온

ōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAP-NSM
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐξ

한글 발음: 엑스

ex

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῶν·

한글 발음: 아우톤

autōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GPM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
Doth our law judge a man, except it first hear from himself and know what he doeth?

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

한글 발음: 호

ho

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-NSM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

νόμος

한글 발음: 노모스

nomos

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3551 원어 검색에서 보기 G3551
Lemma
νόμος
Strong
G3551
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
율법/법
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '율법, 법, 규범'. 모세 율법.

원문 정의 보기

νόμος, -ου, ὁ (νέμω, to deal out, distribute), [in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc. ;] that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.); __1. of law in general: Rom.3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, Heb.8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Jas.1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 267:3), Jas.2:8. __2. Of a force or influence impelling to action: Rom.7:21, 23a, 25 8:2. __3. Of the Mosaic law: Mat.5:18, Luk.2:27, Jhn.1:17, Act.6:13, Rom.2:15, 1Co.9:8, 1Ti.1:8, Heb.7:19; al.; Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22, Jhn.7:23, Act.15:5, al.; κυρίου, Luk.2:39; κατὰ τὸν ν., Act.22:12, Heb.7:5 9:22. __4. As printed, Abbott-Smith mistakenly numbers this as 3.Anarthrous (Bl, §46, 8; ICC on Rom.2:12, 13), νόμος, __(a) of law in general: Rom.2:12, 14b 3:20, 21 4:15, al.; __(b) of the Mosaic law in its quality as law: Rom.2:14a 5:20 10:4, Gal.2:19, al.; οἱ ἐκ ν., Rom.4:14; ὑπὸ νόμον, 1Co.9:20, Gal.4:5; ν. πράσσειν (πληροῦν), Rom.2:25 13:8. __5. Of Christian teaching: ν. πίστεως, Rom.3:27; τ. Χριστοῦ, Gal.6:2. __6. By meton., of the books which contain the law; __(a) of the Pentateuch: Mat.12:5, Jhn.1:45, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ οἱ προφῆται, Mat.5:17, Luk.16:16, al.; ὁ ν. καὶ προφῆται κ. ψαλμοί, Luk.24:44. __(b) of the OT Scriptures in general (as Heb. תּוֹרָה): Jhn.10:34 12:34 15:25, 1Co.14:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἡμῶν

한글 발음: 헤몬

hēmōn

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3165 원어 검색에서 보기 G3165
Lemma
μέ
Strong
G3165
형태소
P-1GP
품사
-
나를
번역 정렬
-

정의

1인칭 단수 대명사 ἐγώ의 목적격 '나를/나에게'.

원문 정의 보기

1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

κρίνει

한글 발음: 크리네이

krinei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2919 원어 검색에서 보기 G2919
Lemma
κρίνω
Strong
G2919
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
판단하다/심판하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '판단하다, 심판하다, 결정하다'.

원문 정의 보기

κρίνω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁפט, also for ריב ,דּין, etc. ;] __1. to separate, select, choose (cl.; in LXX: 2Ma.13:15). __2. to approve, esteem: Rom.14:5. __3. to be of opinion, judge, think: Luk.7:43, 1Co.11:13; before τοῦτο ὅτι, 2Co.5:14; with accusative and inf., Act.16:15; with accusative and pred., Act.13:46 26:8. __4. to decide, determine, decree: with accusative, Act.16:4, Rom.14:13, 1Co.7:37, 2Co.2:1; with inf. (Field, Notes, 167), Act.20:16 25:25, 1Co.2:2 5:3, Tit.3:12 (cf. 1Ma.11:33, Wis.8:9, al.); with accusative and inf., Act.21:25 27:1. __5. to judge, adjudge, pronounce judgment: absol., Jhn.8:16, 26; before κατά, with accusative, Jhn.7:24 8:15; κρίσιν κ., Jhn.7:24; τ. δίκαιον, Luk.12:57 (Deiss., LAE, 118); in forensic sense, Jhn.18:31, Act.23:3, al.; pass., Rom.3:4 (LXX); of God's judgment, Jhn.5:30 8:50, Rom.2:16 3:6, 2Ti.4:1, 1Pe.4:5, al. __6. = κατακρίνω, to condemn (cl.): Act.13:27; of God's judgment, Jhn.3:18 5:22 12:47, 48, Act.7:7, Rom.2:12, 1Co.11:32, Heb.10:30" (LXX), Jas.5:9, Rev.19:2, al. __7. As in LXX (for שׁפט), to rule, govern ( 4Ki.15:5, Psa.2:10, al.): Mat.19:28, Luk.22:30, 1Co.6:3. __8. to bring to trial (cl.); mid., to go to law: with dative of person(s), Mat.5:40; before μετά, with genitive of person(s) (of the opponent), ἐπί, with genitive (of the judge), 1Co.6:1, 6 (cf. ἀνα-, ἀπο-, ἀντ-απο- (-μαι), δια-, ἐν-, ἐπι-, κατα-, συν-, ὑπο- (-μαι), συν-υπο- (-μαι)). SYN.: see: δικάστης. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τὸν

한글 발음: 톤

ton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-ASM
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἄνθρωπον

한글 발음: 안트로폰

anthrōpon

원어 사전 정의 보기 G444 원어 검색에서 보기 G444
Lemma
ἄνθρωπος
Strong
G444
형태소
N-ASM
품사
명사
사람
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '사람, 인간'.

원문 정의 보기

ἄνθρωπος, -ου, ὁ, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ ,אָדָם, also for אֱנוֹשׁ, etc. ;] man: __1. generically, a human being, male or female (Lat. homo): Jhn.16:21; with art., Mat.4:4 12:35, Mrk.2:27, Jhn.2:25, Rom.7:1, al; disting. from God, Mat.19:6, Jhn.10:33, Col.3:23, al.; from animals, etc., Mat.4:19, Luk.5:10, Rev.9:4, al.; implying human frailty and imperfection, 1Co.3:4; σοφία ἀνθρώπων, 1Co.2:5; ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαι, 1Pe.4:2; κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖν, 1Co.3:3; κατὰ ἄ. λέγειν (λαλεῖν), Rom.3:5, 1Co.9:8; κατὰ ἄ- λέγειν, Gal.3:15 (cf. 1Co.15:32, Gal.1:11); by meton., of man's nature or condition, ὁ ἔσω (ἔξω) ἄ., Rom.7:22, Eph.3:16, 2Co.4:16 (cf. 1Pe.3:4); ὁ παλαιὸς, καινὸς, νέος ἄ., Rom.6:6, Eph.2:15 4:22, 24 Col.3:9, 10; joined with another subst., ἄ. ἔμπορος, a merchant, Mat.13:45 (WH, txt. om. ἄ.); οἰκοδεσπότης, Mat.13:52; βασιλεύς, 18:23; φάγος, 11:19; with name of nation, Κυρηναῖος, Mat.27:32; Ἰουδαῖος, Act.21:39; Ῥωμαῖος, Act.16:37; pl. οἱ ἄ., men, people: Mat.5:13, 16 Mrk.8:24, Jhn.4:28; οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων, Mrk.11:2, 1Ti.6:16. __2. Indef., ἄ. = τις, some one, a man: Mat.17:14, Mrk.12:1, al.; τις ἄ., Mat.18:12, Jhn.5:5, al.; indef. one (Fr. on), Rom.3:28, Gal.2:16, al.; opposite to women, servants, etc., Mat.10:36 19:10, Jhn.7:22, 23. __3. Definitely, with art., of some particular person; Mat.12:13, Mrk.3:5, al.; οὗτος ὁ ἄ., Luk.14:30; ὁ ἄ οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, Mrk.14:71, Mat.12:45; ὁ ἄ. τ. ἀνομίας, 2Th.2:3; ἄ τ. θεοῦ (of Heb. אִישׁ אֱלֹהִים), 1Ti.6:11, 2Ti.3:17, 2Pe.1:21; ὁ υἰὸς τοῦ ἀ., see: υἱός. SYN.: ἀνήρ, which see (and cf. MM, VGT, 44; Cremer, 103, 635). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐὰν

한글 발음: 에안

ean

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1437 원어 검색에서 보기 G1437
Lemma
ἐάν
Strong
G1437
형태소
COND
품사
-
만일 ~라면
번역 정렬
-

정의

조건 접속사(가정) '만일 ~라면'. 가정법과 함께.

원문 정의 보기

ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἀκούσῃ

한글 발음: 아쿠세

akousē

원어 사전 정의 보기 G191 원어 검색에서 보기 G191
Lemma
ἀκούω
Strong
G191
형태소
V-AAS-3S
품사
동사
듣다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '듣다, 들어 알다, 청종하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀκούω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁמע ] to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing. __1. Intrans.: Mrk.4:3 7:37, Jas.2:5, Rev.2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mat.13:15 (LXX); with cogn. dative, ακοῇ ἀ. (see: ἀκοή), Mat.13:14, Act.28:26" (LXX) ; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mat.11:15, Mrk.4:23, Rev.2:7, al. __2. Trans., prop. with accusative of thing(s), of thing heard, genitive of person(s), from whom heard (LS, see word): Act.1:4; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.12:19, Jhn.3:8 (Abbott, JG, 76), Act.22:9, al.; with dupl. accusative, Jhn.12:18, 1Co.11:18; with genitive of thing(s), Jhn.7:40 (Abbott, JV, 116); τ. φωνῆς (cf. Heb. שָׁמַע בְּקוֹל, Exo.18:19), Jhn.5:25, 28 Act.9:7 (on the distinction bet. this and ἀ. φωνήν, ib. 4, see M, Pr., 66; Field, Notes, 117; Abbott, Essays, 93f.); of God answering prayer, Jhn.9:31, 1Jn.5:14, 15; with accusative of thing(s), before παρά, Jhn.8:26, 40 Act.10:22, 2Ti.2:2; id. before ἀπό, 1Jn.1:5; with genitive pars. before ptcp., Mrk.14:58, Luk.18:36, al. (On NT usage generally, see Bl., §36, 5; Cremer, 82.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

πρῶτον

한글 발음: 프로톤

prōton

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4413 원어 검색에서 보기 G4413
Lemma
πρῶτος
Strong
G4413
형태소
A-ASN
품사
형용사
첫째/먼저
번역 정렬
-

정의

형용사 '첫째의, 처음의, 으뜸의'.

원문 정의 보기

B. Superl., πρῶτος, -η, -ον, [in LXX chiefly for רִאשׁוֹן, also for אֶחַד, etc. ;] first, __1. of Time or Place; __(a) absol., as subst., ὁ π.., Luk.14:18, Jhn.19:32, 1Co.14:30; ὁ π. καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος, Rev.1:17 2:8 22:13; neut., τὸ π., opposite to τ. δεύτερον, Heb.10:9; τὰ π., opposite to τ. ἔσχατα, Mat.12:45, Luk.11:26, 2Pe.2:20; anarth., Mat.10:2; pl., Mat.19:30, Mrk.10:31, Luk.13:30; ἐν πρώτοις (EV, first of all), 1Co.15:3; __(b) as adj.: πρώτῃ; (sc. ἡμέρᾳ) σαββάτου, Mk 16:[9]; φυλακή, opposite to δευτέρα, Act.12:10; equiv. to adv. in English, Jhn.8:[7] 20:4, 8 Act.27:43, Rom.10:19, 1Ti.1:16, 1Jn.4:19; = πρότερος (see infr.; cf. M, Pr., 79; Bl, §11, 5; Thackeray, Gr., 183f.): with genitive, π. μου ἦν (my chief: Abbott, Jg., 509ff.; but cf. M, Pr., 245), Jhn.1:15, 30; with art., Mrk.14:12, Act.1:1, al.; before ὁ δεύτερος, etc., Mat.22:25, Mrk.12:20, al. __2. Of Rank or Dignity, chief, principal: Mat.20:27 22:38, Mrk.9:35, Eph.6:2, al.; with genitive, Mrk.12:28, 29 al.; πόλις (Field, Notes, 124), Act.16:12; with art., Luk.15:22 19:47, Act.13:50, al. __3. Neut., πρῶτον, as adv., first, at the first; __(a) of Time: Mat.8:21, Mrk.4:28, al.; τὸ π., Jhn.10:40, al.; __(b) of Order: Rom.3:2, 1Co.11:18, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

παρ᾽

한글 발음: 파르

par᾽

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3844 원어 검색에서 보기 G3844
Lemma
παρά
Strong
G3844
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~곁에/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

전치사. 속격 '~로부터', 여격 '~곁에', 대격 '~옆을 따라'.

원문 정의 보기

παρά, prep. with genitive, dative, accusative, with radical sense, beside. __I. C. genitive of person(s), from the side of, from beside, from, indicating source or origin, [in LXX for מֵאֵצֶל ,מִיַד ,מִלִּפְנֵי ;] after verbs of motion, Mrk.14:43, Luk.8:49, Jhn.15:26, al.; after verbs of seeking, receiving, hearing, etc., Mrk.8:11 12:2, Jhn.4:9, 52 10:18, Php.4:18, 2Ti.1:18, Jas.1:7, al.; after passive verbs, of the agent (like ὑπό), Mat.21:42, Mrk.12:11, Luk.1:37; absol., οἱ παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, his family, his kinsfolk, Mrk.3:21 (cf. M, Pr., 106f.; Field, Notes, 25f.; Swete, in l.); τὰ παρ᾽ αὐτῆς (αὐτῶν, ὑμῶν, one's means, wealth, Mrk.5:26, Luk.10:7, Php.4:18. __II. C. dative of person(s) (exc. Jhn.19:25, π. τ. σταυρῷ), by the side of, beside, by, with, [in LXX for בְּעֵינֵי ,בְּיַד ,אֵצֶל ;] Luk.11:37 19:7, Jhn.1:40 4:40, Act.28:14, al.; παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, at home, 1Co.16:2; with dative pl., among, Mat.22:25, Col.4:16, al.; metaphorically, Mat.19:26, Mrk.10:27, Luk.1:30, Rom.2:13, Jas.1:27, al. __III. C. accusative, of motion by or towards, [in LXX for בְּעֵבֶר ,עַל יַד ,אֵצֶל ;] __1. of place, by the side of, beside, by, along: Act.10:32, Heb.11:12; after verbs of motion, Mat.4:18, Mrk.4:4, Luk.8:5, Act.4:35, al.; after verbs of rest, Mat.13:1, Mrk.5:21, Luk.8:35, al. __2. beside, beyond, metaphorically; __(a) beyond, against, contrary to: Act.18:13, Rom.1:26 4:18 11:24, al.; except, 2Co.11:24; __(b) beyond, above, in comparison with: Luk.3:13, Rom.12:3 14:5, Heb.1:4, 9 3:3, al.; __(with) on account of: 1Co.12:15, 16. __IV. In composition: beside, to (παραλαμβάνω, παράγω), at hand (πάρειμι), from (παραρρέω), amiss (παρακούω), past (παρέρχομαι), compared with (παρομοιάζω), above measure (παροργίζω). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτοῦ

한글 발음: 아우투

autou

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-GSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

γνῷ

한글 발음: 그노

gnō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1097 원어 검색에서 보기 G1097
Lemma
γινώσκω
Strong
G1097
형태소
V-2AAS-3S
품사
동사
알다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '알다, 깨닫다, 인식하다'.

원문 정의 보기

γινώσκω (= γιγν-: see previous word. So also vulgar Attic, in Inscr., see Thumb, MGV, 207), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] to be taking in knowledge, come to know, recognize, perceive, understand; in past tenses to know, realize; pass., to become known: with accusative, Mat.22:18, Mrk.5:43, Col.4:8, 1Th.3:5, al. Pass., Mat.10:26, Php.4:5, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.21:45, Jhn.4:1, al.; τί, Mat.6:3; ἀπό, Mrk.15:45; ὅ, Rom.7:15; τ. λεγόμενα, Luk.18:34; τ. θέλημα, Luk.12:47; τ. καρδίας, Luk.16:15; with accusative of person(s), of recognition by God, 1Co.8:3, Gal.4:9; by Christ, neg., Mat.7:23; frequently of the knowledge of divine things, of God and Christ; τ. θεόν, Rom.1:21 Gal.4:9; τ. πατέρα, Jhn.8:55; τ. κύριον, Heb.8:1 (LXX); νοῦν κυρίου, Rom.11:34; Χριστόν, Jhn.17:3, 1Jn.3:6; τὰ τοῦ πνεύματος, 1Co.2:14; τ. πνεύμα, 1Jn.4:6; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.8:32; of Christ's knowledge of the Father (ἐπιγ.), Mat.11:27 (Dalman, Words, 282ff.). In Hellenistic writers [LXX for Heb. ידע, Gal.4:1, al.], of sexual intercourse, to know carnally: Mat.1:25, Luk.1:34 (Cremer, 153). SYN.: γ., to know by observation and experience is thus prop. disting. from οἶδα, to know by reflection (a mental process, based on intuition or information); cf. also ἐφίστημι, συνίημι. (Cf. ἀνα-, δια-, ἐπι-, κατα-, προ-γινώσκω.) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τί

한글 발음: 티

ti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G5101 원어 검색에서 보기 G5101
Lemma
τίς
Strong
G5101
형태소
I-ASN
품사
-
누구/무엇 (의문)
번역 정렬
-

정의

의문대명사 '누구, 무엇, 어느'.

원문 정의 보기

τίς, neut., τί, genitive, τίνος, interrog. pron., [in LXX for מָה ,מִי ;] in masc. and fem., who, which, what?; in neut., which, what?, used both in direct and in indirect questions. __I. I. As subst., __1. 1. masc., fem.: τίς; who, what?, Mat.3:7 26:68; Mrk.11:28, Luk.9:9, al. mult.; with genitive partit., Act.7:52, Heb.1:5, al; before ἐκ (= genitive partit.), Mat.6:27, Luk.14:28, Jhn.8:46; = ποῖος, Mrk.4:41 6:2, Luk.19:3, Act.17:19, al.; = πότερος (M, Pr., 77), Mat.21:31 27:17, Luk.22:27, al.; = ὅς or ὅστις (rare in cl.; cf. Bl., §50, 5; M, Pr., 93), Act.13:25. __2. Neut.: τί; what?, Mat.5:47 11:7, Mrk.10:3, al.; χάριν τίνος, 1Jn.3:12; διὰ τί, Mat.9:11, al.; εἰς τί, Mat.14:31, al.; elliptically, ἵνα τί (sc. γένηται), why, Mat.9:5, al.; τί οὖν, Rom.3:9 6:1, 15 1Co.14:15, al.; τί γάρ, Rom.3:3, Phi 1:18; τί ἐμοὶ (ὑμῖν) καὶ σοί, see: ἔγω. __II. As adj.: who? what? which?, Mat.5:46, Luk.14:31, Jhn.2:18, al. __III. As adv.: = διὰ τι (τί ὅτι), why, Mat.6:28, Mrk.4:40, Luk.6:46, Jhn.18:23, al.; in rhet. questions, = a negation, Mat.27:4, Jhn.21:22, 23 1Co.5:12 7:16, al. in exclamations (like Heb. מָה), how (2Ki.6:20, Psa.3:2, al.), Luk.12:49. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ποιεῖ;¶

한글 발음: 포이에이

poiei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4160 원어 검색에서 보기 G4160
Lemma
ποιέω
Strong
G4160
형태소
V-PAI-3S
품사
동사
하다/만들다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '하다, 행하다, 만들다, 이루다'.

원문 정의 보기

ποιέω, -ῶ, [in LXX for a great variety of words, but chiefly for עשׂה ;] __1. to make, produce, create, cause: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.17:4, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.9:11, Act.9:39, Rom.9:20, al.; of God as Creator (with accusative of person(s) also), Mat.19:4, Mrk.10:6, Luk.11:40, Act.4:24, Heb.1:2, al.; like Heb. עשׂה, absol. = ἐργάζομαι, to work, Mat.20:12 (cf. Rut.2:19; so AV, but see infr.), Rev.13:5, R, mg. (but see infr.); σκάνδαλα, Rom.16:17; εἰρεήνην, Eph.2:15, Jas.3:18; ἐπίστασιν, Act.24:12; συστροφήν, Act.23:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s), Luk.1:68, Act.15:3; with nouns expressing action or its accomplishment, forming a periphr. for the cogn. verb: ὁδόν π. (cl. ὁ ποιεῖσθαι), to go on, advance, Mrk.2:23; πόλεμον, Rev.11:7, al.; ἐκδίκησιν, Luk.18:7, 8; ἐνέδραν, Act.25:3; κρίσιν, Jhn.5:27, Ju 15; ἔργα, Jhn.5:36, al.; (σημεῖα), Jhn.2:23 and freq., Act.2:22, al.; so also mid. ποιεῖσθαι: μονήν, Jhn.14:23; πορείαν, Luk.13:22; κοινωνίαν, Rom.15:26; of food, to make ready, prepare: δεῖπνον, Mrk.6:21, al.; δοχήν, Luk.5:29 14:13; γάμους, Mat.22:2; of time, to spend (cl.): ὥραν, Mat.20:12, RV (but see supr. and cf. McN, in l.); μῆνας, Rev.13:5, R, txt. (cf. Swete, in l.; but see supr.); ἐνιαυτόν, Jas.4:13; with accusative before ἐκ, Jhn.2:15, al.; with accusative and accusative pred., Mat.3:3 12:16, Mrk.1:3 3:12, Jhn.5:11, al.; with adv., καλῶς, Mrk.7:37; ἑορτὴν π. (Dem., Exo.23:16, al.), Act.18:21, Rec.; πάσχα, Mat.26:18; to make or offer a sacrifice (Plat., Xen., al.; Job.42:8, 3Ki.11:33; so some understand τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, Luk.22:19, but see Abbott, Essays, 110ff.); before ἵνα (WM, 422f.; M, Pr., 228), Jhn.11:37, Col.4:16, Rev.3:9. __2. to do, perform, carry out, execute: absol., with adv., καλῶς π., Mat.12:12, 1Co.7:37, 38 Jas.2:19; id. before ptcp. (cl.; see M, Pr., 228), Act.10:33, Php.4:14, 2Pe.1:19, 3Jo.6; οὕτως, Mat.24:46, Luk.9:15, al.; ὡς (καθώς), Mat.1:24 2:16, al.; ὁμοίως, Luk.3:11; ὡσαύτως, Mat.20:5; with ptcp., ἀγνοῶν ἐποίησα, 1Ti.1:13; with accusative of thing(s): τί interrog., Mat.12:3, Mrk.2:25, Luk.6:2, al.; τοῦτο, Mat.13:28, Mrk.5:32, Luk.22:19 (WH om.; see supr., ref. to Abbott, Essays), Rom.7:20, al.; with nouns expressing command or regulation: τ. νόμον (not as in cl., to make a law), Jhn.7:19, Gal.5:3 (cf. in LXX, Jos.22:5, 1Ch.22:12, al.); τ. ἐντολάς, Mat.5:19; similarly with other nouns expressing conduct: τ. δικαιοσύνην, Mat.6:1, al.; τ. ἀλήθειαν, Jhn.3:21, al., etc.; with dupl. accusative, Mat.27:22, Mrk.15:12; with accusative of thing(s) and dative of person(s) (commod., incomm.; rare in cl.), Mat.7:12, Mrk.5:19, 20 Luk.1:49, Jhn.9:26, al. SYN.: πράσσω, which see The general distinction between the two words is that between particular action and its habitual performance (cf. Tr., Syn., §xcvi; Westc. on Jhn.3:21; ICC on Rom.1:32). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
They answered and said unto him, Art thou also of Galilee? Search, and see that out of Galilee ariseth no prophet.

원어

ἀπεκρίθησαν

한글 발음: 아페크리테산

apekrithēsan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G611 원어 검색에서 보기 G611
Lemma
ἀποκρίνω
Strong
G611
형태소
V-ADI-3P
품사
동사
대답하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '대답하다, 응답하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἀποκρίνω, ἀποκρίνομαι, [in LXX chiefly for ענה ;] in cl., __1. to separate, distinguish. __2. to choose. Mid., to answer: Mat.27:12, Mrk.14:61, Luk.3:16 23:9, Jhn.5:17, 19 Act.3:12. In late Gk. the pass, also is used in this sense, and pass. forms are the more frequently in NT (M, Pr., 39, 161; MM, see word); __(a) in general sense: absol., Mrk.12:34; with accusative of thing(s), Mat.22:46; with dative of person(s), Mat.12:38; before πρός, Act.25:16; __(b) Hebraistically __(i) like ענה, to begin to speak, take up the conversation (Kennedy, Sources, 124f.): Mat.11:25, al., __(ii) redundant, as in the Heb. phrase וַיַּעַן וַיּאֹמֶר (Dalman, Words, 24f., 38; M, Pr., 14; Bl., §58, 4; 74, 2; Cremer, 374): ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπε, Mat.4:4; ἔφη, 8:8; λέγει, Mrk.3:33; in Jo most frequently (ἀπεκ. κ. εἶπε, 1:49. ) (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶπαν

한글 발음: 에이판

eipan

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2036 원어 검색에서 보기 G2036
Lemma
εἶπον
Strong
G2036
형태소
V-2AAI-3P
품사
동사
말했다
번역 정렬
-

정의

λέγω의 제2부정과거 '말했다, 이르되'.

원문 정의 보기

εἶπον, 2 aorist of obsolete present ἔπω (cf. Veitch), used as aorist of λέγω, which see (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

αὐτῷ·

한글 발음: 아우토

autō

원어 사전 정의 보기 G846 원어 검색에서 보기 G846
Lemma
αὐτός
Strong
G846
형태소
P-DSM
품사
-
그/그 자신
번역 정렬
-

정의

대명사. 강조 시 '자신(ipse)', 3인칭 '그/그녀/그것', 관사와 함께 '같은(the same)'.

원문 정의 보기

αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). __1. Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., see infr., iii); __(1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); __(2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl., §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al.; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al.; αὐ., καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. __2. In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al.; with ptcp. in genitive absol., Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl., §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff.; Bl., §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al.; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al.; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. __3. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ., the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ., ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al.; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al.; τὰ αὐ., Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al.; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al.; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ., together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al.; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ., 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

μὴ

한글 발음: 메

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3361 원어 검색에서 보기 G3361
Lemma
μή
Strong
G3361
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니/말라 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

비직설법 부정 '아니, ~말라'. 주관적·금지·조건 부정.

원문 정의 보기

μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,אַל ] __I. As a neg. adv., not; __1. with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. __2. In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. __3. In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. __4. C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f., 239, 255), __(a) after verbs of saying, etc.: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al.; __(b) with artic. inf.: after a prep., Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al.; without a prep., Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; __(with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. __5. C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f., 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al.; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al.; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. __6. μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, __(a) with subjc. praes., 1 of person(s) pl.: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; __(b) with imperat. praes., usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al.; __(with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor., 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al.; with subjc. aor., 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al.; __(d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl., §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al.; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. __II. As a conj., __1. after verbs of fearing, caution, etc., that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes., Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al.; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. __2. in order that not: with subjc. aor., Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. __III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al.; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al.; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans.; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. __IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff.; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut., Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al.; with subjc. aor., Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

σὺ

한글 발음: 수

su

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4771 원어 검색에서 보기 G4771
Lemma
σύ
Strong
G4771
형태소
P-2NS
품사
-
너/당신
번역 정렬
-

정의

2인칭 단수 대명사 '너'. 강조·대조할 때 사용.

원문 정의 보기

σύ, pron. of 2nd of person(s), thou, you, genitive, σοῦ, dative, σοί, accusative, σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mat.25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jhn.1:30, 4:10, 5:33, 39, 44, Act.4:7, Eph.5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mat.26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mat.2:6, Luk.1:76, Jhn.17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also in cl., but esp. as rendering of Heb. phrase, e.g. υἱός μου εἶ σύ (בְּנִי־אַתָּה, Psa.2:7), Act.13:33. The genitive (σοῦ, ὑμῶν) is sometimes placed bef. the noun: Luk.7:48, 12:30, al.; so also the enclitic σοῦ, Mat.9:6; on τί ἐμοὶ κ. σοί, see: ἐγώ. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Γαλιλαίας

한글 발음: 갈릴라이아스

Galilaias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1056 원어 검색에서 보기 G1056
Lemma
Γαλιλαία
Strong
G1056
형태소
N-GSF-L
품사
명사
갈릴리
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '갈릴리'.

원문 정의 보기

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district), Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mat.4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mat.15:29 (cf. Jhn.6:1). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

εἶ;

한글 발음: 에이

ei

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1510 원어 검색에서 보기 G1510
Lemma
εἰμί
Strong
G1510
형태소
V-PAI-2S
품사
동사
~이다/있다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 'be'. 존재 '있다'와 계사 '~이다'.

원문 정의 보기

εἰμί, with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be. __I. As substantive verb. __1. Of persons and things, to be, exist: Act.17:28, Jhn.1:1, 8:58, 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Rev.1:4, 8, 4:8, 11:17, 16:5 (see Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Rom.4:17, 1Co.1:28. __2. Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mat.24:3, Mrk.14:2, 15:42, Luk.21:23, Jhn.4:6, 23, 5:10, al. __3. to be present, be in a place, have come: Mat.2:13, 15, Mrk.1:45, 5:21, 15:40, Luk.1:80, 5:29, Jhn.7:30, al.; before εἰς, Mrk.2:1; before ἐκ, (ἐξ), Mat.1:20, 21:25, Mrk.11:30, Jhn.3:31, al. __4. Impers., ἔστι, ἦν, etc.; __(a) there is (Fr. il y a), was, etc.: Mat.16:28, Luk.16:19, Jhn.3:1, 5:2, Rom.3:10, al.; with dative (of the possessor; Bl., §37, 3), Mat.16:22, Luk.1:7, Jhn.18.10, Rom.9:2, al.; ἔστιν ὅς, ὅστις (chiefly in pl), Mat.16:28, 19:2, Mrk.9:1, al.; __(b) with inf., = ἔξεστιν (which see), it is possible: Heb.9:5, 1Co.11:20, RV (but see ICC, in l.). __II. As copula uniting subject and predicate. __1. Expressing simply identity or equivalence: Mat.5:13, 14:15, Luk.1:18, 19, Jhn.1:1, 4:19, Rev.3:9, al. mult. __2. Explicative, as in parable, figure, type, etc.: Mat.13:19, 1Co.9:2, 10:4, 11:25, Gal.4:24, Rev.17:15, al.; ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν, Mat.27:46, Mrk.7:2, Rom.7:18 al.; ὅ ἐστιν, Mrk.3:17, Col.1:24, Heb.7:2, al.; akin to this is the sacramental usage: Mat.26:26-28, Mrk.14:22, 24, Luk.22:19, 1Co.11:24 (see ICC on Mk, I Co, ll. with; DB, iii, 148 f.). __3. C. genitive: qual., etc., Mrk.5:42, Luk.3:23, 1Co.14:33, Heb.12:11, al.; part., 1Ti.1:20, 2Ti.1:15; poss., Mat.5:3, 10, Mrk.12:7, Luk.4:7; of service or partisanship, Rom.8:9, 1Co.1:12, 2Co.10:7, 2Ti.2:19. __4. C. dative (BL, §37, 3): Act.1:8, 9:15, Rom.4:12, 1Co.1:18, 2:14, Rev.21:7, al. __5. C. ptcp., as a periphrasis for the simple verb (Bl., §62, 1, 2; M, Pr., 225 ff.); __(a) with ptcp. pf. (cl.): Mat.10:30, Luk.9:32, Jhn.3:24, Act.21:35, 1Co.15:19, al; __(b) with ptcp. pr. (esp. in impf., as in Heb. and Aram.; Dalman, Words, 35 f.), Mat.7:29, Mrk.1:22, Luk.4:31, 14:1, Act.1:10, al. mult., id. for imper. (M, Pr., 180f., 182f.), with ellipsis of εἰμί, Rom.12:9, 10, Heb.13:5, al.; __(with) with ptcp. aor. (cl), Luk.23:9. __6. Seq. εἰς (cf. Heb. הָיָה לְ), a vernac. usage (M, Pr., 71): Mat.19:5, Mrk.10:8, Heb.8:10, al. __7. C. adv.: Mat.19:20, Mrk.4:26, Luk.18:11, al. __8. Ellipses; __(a) of the copula (Bl., §30, 3): Mat.8:29, 24:32, Jhn.21:22, 23, Heb.6:4, al.; __(b) of the predicate: ἐγώ εἰμί, Mat.14:27, Mrk.6:50, al.; absol. (cf. Deu.32:39; אֲנִי הוּא), Mrk.13:6, Jhn.4:26, al. (cf. ἄπ-, ἔν-, πάρ-, συμ-πάρ-, σύν-ειμι). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐραύνησον

한글 발음: 에라우네손

eraunēson

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2045 원어 검색에서 보기 G2045
Lemma
ἐρευνάω
Strong
G2045
형태소
V-AAM-2S
품사
동사
살피다/탐구하다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '살피다, 탐구하다, 조사하다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐραυνάω, -ῶ late form of ἐρευνάω (Rec., ll. with; cf. Bl., § 6, 1; M, Pr., 46), [in LXX, ἐρευν- (exc. 1Ch.19:3 A), for חָפַשׂ pi., חָקַר, etc. ;] to search, examine: Jhn.7:52; with accusative of thing(s), Jhn.5:39, Rom.8:27, 1Co.2:10, Rev.2:23; before orat. obliq., 1Pe.1:11.† SYN.: see: ἐξετάζω (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

καὶ

한글 발음: 카이

kai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G2532 원어 검색에서 보기 G2532
Lemma
καί
Strong
G2532
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
그리고/또한
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사 '그리고, ~와/과'. 부가적으로 '또한, 심지어'의 뜻으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

καί, conj., and __I. Copulative. __1. Connecting single words; __(a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. __(b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; __(with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. __2. Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult.; esp. __(a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss., LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al.; __(b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; __(with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al.; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al.; __(d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al.; __(e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. __3. Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. __4. In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al.; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). __5. καὶ . . . καί, both . . . and (for τε . . . καί, see: τε); __(a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al.; __(b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. __II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult.; esp. with pron., adv., etc., Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ., Act.11:17; καθὼς κ., Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ., Rom.6:11; διὸ κ., Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss., BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ.. (Bl., §77, 7; Deiss., BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ., 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ., Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al.; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl., §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; __1. with subjc. (cl.); __(a) pres.: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al.; { __(b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al.; = cl. εἰ, with opt., Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7" (LXX) . __2. C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss., BS, 201f., LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl., §65, 4); __(a) fut.: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; __(b) pres.: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). __3. With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl., §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl., l.with), with subjc. pres., Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor., Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft., Ellic., in ll.); ἐ. τε . . . ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם . . . אִם, Est.19:13, al.,] Rom.14:8. __4. = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf., Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f.; Bl., §26, 4; Mayser, 152f.; Deiss., BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ., Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al.; ὅπου ἐ., Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ., Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ., 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ., 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ., Gal.5:10. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἴδε

한글 발음: 이데

ide

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1492 원어 검색에서 보기 G1492
Lemma
εἴδω
Strong
G1492
형태소
V-2AAM-2S
품사
동사
알다/보다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '보다, 알다, 깨닫다' (완료형 οἶδα '알다').

원문 정의 보기

οἶδα, (from same root as εἶδον, which see), [in LXX chiefly for ידע ;] pf. with present meaning (plpf. as impf.; on irregular tense-forms, see App.), to have seen or perceived, hence, to know, have knowledge of: with accusative of thing(s), Mat.25:13, Mrk.10:19, Jhn.10:4, Rom.7:7, al.; with accusative of person(s), Mat.26:72, Jhn.1:31, Act.3:16, al.; τ. θεόν, 1Th.4:5, Tit.1:16, al.; with accusative and inf., Luk.4:41, al.; before ὅτι, Mat.9:6, Luk.20:21, Jhn.3:2, Rom.2:2 11:2, al.; before quaest. indir., Mat.26:70, Jhn.9:21, Eph.1:18, al.; with inf., to know how (cl.), Mat.7:11, Luk.11:13, Php.4:12, 1Th.4:4, al.; in unique sense of respect, appreciate: 1Th.5:12 (but see also ICC on 1Th.4:4). SYN.: see: γινώσκω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ὅτι

한글 발음: 호티

hoti

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3754 원어 검색에서 보기 G3754
Lemma
ὅτι
Strong
G3754
형태소
CONJ
품사
-
~라는 것/~때문에
번역 정렬
-

정의

접속사. 내용 '~라는 것', 이유 '~때문에', 직접인용 도입.

원문 정의 보기

ὅτι, conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις). __I. As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that; __1. after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mat.3:9 6:32 11:25, Mrk.3:28, Luk.2:49, Jhn.2:22, Act.4:13, Rom.1:13 8:38 10:9, Php.4:15, Jas.2:24, al.; elliptically, Jhn.6:46, Php.3:12, al. __2. After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or of person(s) pron., Jhn.3:19 16:19, Rom.9:6, 1Jn.3:16 al.; with pron. interrog., Mat.8:27, Mrk.4:41, Luk.4:36, Jhn.4:22 al.; id. elliptically, Luk.2:49, Act.5:4, 9, al.; __3. Untranslatable, before direct discourse (ὅτι recitantis): Mat.7:23, Mrk.2:16, Luk.1:61, Jhn.1:20, Act.15:1, Heb.11:18, al. (on the pleonastic ὡς ὅτι, see: ὡς). __II. As causal particle, for that, because: Mat.5:4-12, Luk.6:20, 21, J0 1:30 5:27, Act.1:5, 1Jn.4:18, Rev.3:10, al. mult.; διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, Jhn.8:47 10:17, al.; answering a question (διὰ τί), Rom.9:32, al.; οὐκ ὅτι . . . ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι, Jhn.6:26 12:6. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐκ

한글 발음: 에크

ek

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1537 원어 검색에서 보기 G1537
Lemma
ἐκ
Strong
G1537
형태소
PREP
품사
-
~에서/~로부터
번역 정렬
-

정의

속격 지배 전치사. 기원·출처 '~에서(밖으로), ~로부터'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐκ (ἐξ), prep. with genitive, from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492). This entry is included here, but in the print version the entry is found on p. 492. ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, prep. with genitive, of motion outwards, separation from (opposite to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from. __I. Of Place, __1. of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jhn.6:31, Act.9:3, Gal.1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mat.8:28 17:9, Mrk.1:25 7:28, Jhn.1:33 20:1, Act.12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας) ἐκ, Ju 5, Act.28:4. Metaphorical, Mat.7:4, 5, 1Pe.2:9; ἐκ τ. χειρός (-ῶν), before genitive of person(s), Luk.1:74, Jhn.10:28, 29, 39, Act.12:4 24:7, Rev.19:2; πίνειν (which see) ἐκ; of the place from which an action proceeds, Luk.5:3 (cf. 12:36, Jhn.13:4, 2Co.2:4). __2. Of change from one place or condition to another: Jhn.8:42, Rom.6:13 13:11, Rev.7:14, al.; with ellips. of verb of motion, 2Ti.2:26, 2Pe.2:21, Rev.2:21, al. __3. Of separation or distinction from a number, before collective or pl. nouns: Mat.13:47, 49, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, 1Pe.1:3, al.; after εἷς, Mat.10:29 Luk.17:15, al.; οὐδείς, Jhn.7:19, al.; πολλοί, Jhn.11:19, al.; τις, Luk.11:15, al.; τίς, Mat.6:27, al.; in partitive phrase as subject of sentence, Jhn.16:17; Hebraistically, ἐκ μέσου before genitive, = ἐκ (Heb. מִתּוֹךְ), Mat.13:49, al. __4. Of position or direction (so in cl. = ἔξω): ἐκ δεξιῶν (see: δεξιός); ἐξ ἐναντίας, Mrk.15:39 (metaphorically, Tit.2:8); ἐκ ῥιζῶν (i.e., utterly), Mat.11:20. __II. Of Time, __1. of the point of time from which, from, since: ἐκ γενετῆς, Jhn.9:1, cf. Mrk.10:20, Luk.23:8, Act.24:10, al. __2. Of succession in time: ἐκ δευτέρου, a second time, Mrk.14:72, al., cf. Mat.26:44; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, 2Pe.2:8. __III. Of Origin, __1. of nativity, lineage, race: κοίτην (ἐν γαστρί) ἔχειν, Rom.9:10, Mat.1:18; γεννᾶν ἐκ, Mat.1:3ff.; γεννᾶσθαι (γίνεσθαι) ἐκ, Jhn.3:6 8:41, Gal.4:4; ἐκ πνεύματος (θεοῦ), Jhn.1:13 3:5ff., al. ἔρχεσθαι, εἶναι, etc., ἐκ τ. πολέως, Jhn.1:44; φυλῆς, Luk.2:36, al.; τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου, Luk.23:7; ὁ ὢν ἐκ τ. γῆς, Jhn.3:31. __2. Of the author, occasion or source: Mat.5:37, Jhn.2:16, Rom.2:29, 1Co.8:6, Gal.5:8, al.; ἐκ (τ. θεοῦ, 1Co.7:7, 2Co.5:1, 1Jn.4:7; ἐκ τ. πατρός, Jhn.6:65, al.; ἐκ τ. γῆς ἐστιν, λαλεῖ, Jhn.3:31; εκ καρδίας, Rom.6:17, cf. Mrk.12:30, 1Ti.1:5; ἐκ ψυχῆς, Eph.6:6, Col.3:23; ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.14:23; κρίνειν ἐκ, Luk.19:22, Rev.20:12. __3. Of the agent, after passive verbs: Mat.15:5, Mrk.7:11, 2Co.2:2, al.; frequently in Re after αδικεῖσθαι (2:11), etc. __4. Of cause, dependence, source of supply: τ. πόνου (των), Rev.16:10, 11; τ. φωνῶν, Rev.8:13; ἐκ τούτου, Jhn.6:66 19:12 (but see Meyer, in ll.); ἐκ θεοῦ λαλεῖν, 2Co.2:17; ἐκ τ. ἀληθείας, Jhn.18:37, 1Jn.3:19; ὁ ἐκ πίστεως, Rom.3:26 4:16; οἱ (ὄντες) ἐκ περιτομῆς, Act.11:2, Rom.4:12, Gal.2:12, Col.4:11; πίνειν ἐκ, Mat.26:29, Mrk.14:25, Jhn.4:13, al.; θερίζειν, Gal.6:8; μετέχειν ἐκ (= partit. genitive), 1Co.10:13; with inf., ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν, 2Co.8:11. __5. Of material: Mat.27:29, Jhn.2:15 19:2, Rom.9:21, 1Co.11:12, Rev.18:12, al.; allied to which is its use of price (= cl. genitive): Mat.27:7, cf. ib. 20:2, Act.1:18. __IV. By attraction = ἐν (cl.): τὰ ἐκ τ. οἰκιας, Mat.24:17; τ. ἐξ αὐτοῦ δύναμιν, Mrk.5:30 (see Field, in l.); ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Luk.11:13. __V. Adverbial phrases: ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 2Co.9:7, Heb.7:12; ἐξ ἰσότητος, 2Co.8:13; ἐκ μέρους, 1Co.12:27 13:9-12; ἐκ μέτρου, Jhn.3:34; ἐκ συμφώνου, 1Co.7:5. __VI. in composition, ἐκ signifies, __1. procession, removal: ἐκβαίνω, ἐκβάλλω. __2. Opening out, unfolding: ἐκτείνω; metaphorically, ἐξαγγάλλω. __3. Origin: ἔκγονος. __4. Completeness: ἐξαπορέω (see M, Pr., 237), ἐκπληρόω, ἐκτελέω. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

τῆς

한글 발음: 테스

tēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3588 원어 검색에서 보기 G3588
Lemma
Strong
G3588
형태소
T-GSF
품사
-
그/이 (정관사)
번역 정렬
-

정의

정관사. 영어 the에 해당하며 명사·형용사·분사·부정사 등을 한정. 때로 지시·대명사적으로도 쓰임.

원문 정의 보기

ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. __I. As demonstr. pron. __1. As frequently in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). __2. Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl., Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. __3. In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. __II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, __1. to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc.; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc., to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al.; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al.; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. __2. To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc.; with poss. pron., ἐμός, σός, etc.; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj., both with art., ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. __3. To Other parts of speech used as substantives; __(a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc.; __(b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc.; __(with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp., every one who, etc.; __(d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; __(e) infinitives: nom., τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al.; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf., see Bl., §71). __4. In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. __5. To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol., in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. __6. To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc.: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al.; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff.; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

Γαλιλαίας

한글 발음: 갈릴라이아스

Galilaias

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1056 원어 검색에서 보기 G1056
Lemma
Γαλιλαία
Strong
G1056
형태소
N-GSF-L
품사
명사
갈릴리
번역 정렬
-

정의

고유명사 '갈릴리'.

원문 정의 보기

Γαλιλαία, -ας, ἡ (Heb. הַגָּלִיל, the circle, district), Galilee, the name of the northern region of Palestine in NT times: Γ. τῶν ἐθνῶν, Mat.4:15 (LXX); θάλασσα τῆς Γ., Mat.15:29 (cf. Jhn.6:1). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

προφήτης

한글 발음: 프로페테스

prophētēs

원어 사전 정의 보기 G4396 원어 검색에서 보기 G4396
Lemma
προφήτης
Strong
G4396
형태소
N-NSM
품사
명사
선지자/예언자
번역 정렬
-

정의

명사 '선지자, 예언자'.

원문 정의 보기

προφήτης, -ου, ὁ [πρόφημι, to speak forth), [in LXX chiefly for נָבִיא ;] one who acts as an interpreter or forth-teller of the Divine will (see Lft., Notes, 83f.; Tr., Syn., §vi), a prophet; __1. in cl. (Æsch., Hdt., Plat., al.), of the interpreters of oracles. __2. In NT, __(a) of the OT prophets: Mat.5:12, Mrk.6:15, Luk.4:27, Jhn.8:52, Rom.11:3, al.; __(b) of prophets in general: Mat.10:41 13:57 21:46, Mrk.6:4, Luk.13:33, al.; __(with) of John the Baptist: Mat.21:26, Mrk.6:15, Luk.1:76; __(d) of Christ: Mat.21:11, Jhn.6:14, Act.3:22, 23 7:37" (LXX) ; __(e) of Christian prophets in the apostolic age: Act.15:32, 1Co.12:28, Eph.2:20, al.; __(f) by meton., of the writings of prophets: Luk.24:27, Act.8:28, al.; __(g) of a poet: Tit.1:12 (on the use of the term in π. and Inscr., see Deiss., BS, 235f.; MM, xxii). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

οὐκ

한글 발음: 우크

ouk

원어 사전 정의 보기 G3756 원어 검색에서 보기 G3756
Lemma
οὐ
Strong
G3756
형태소
PRT-N
품사
-
아니 (부정)
번역 정렬
-

정의

직설법 객관적 부정 부사 '아니, ~않다'.

원문 정의 보기

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Act.2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., §409; M, Pr., 44, 244), [in LXX for אֵין ,אַיִן ,לֹא ;] neg. particle, not, no, used generally with indic, and for a denial of fact (cf . μή); __1. absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mat.13:29 Jhn.1:21 21:5; οὒ οὕ, Mat.5:37 Jas.5:12. __2. Most frequently negativing a verb or other word, Mat.1:25 10:26, 38, Mrk.3:25 9:37, Jhn.8:29, Act.7:5, Rom.1:16, Php.3:3, al.; in litotes, οὐκ ὀλίγοι (i.e. very many), Act.17:4, al.; οὐκ ἄσημος, Act.21:39; πᾶς . . . οὐ, with verb, (like Heb. כֹּל . . . לֹא), no, none, Mat.24:22, Mrk.13:20, Luk.1:37, Eph.5:5, al.; in disjunctive statements, οὐκ . . . ἀλλά, Luk.8:52 Jhn.1:33 Rom.8:2o, al.; with 2 of person(s) fut. (like Heb. לֹא, with impf.), as emphatic prohibition, Mat.4:7, Luk.4:12, Rom.7:7, al. __3. With another negative, __(a) strengthening the negation: Mrk.5:37, Jhn.8:15 12:19, Act.8:39, al.; __(b) making an affirmative: Act.4:20, 1Co.12:15. __4. With other particles: οὐ μή (see: μή); οὐ μηκέτι, Mat.21:19; with μή interrog., Rom.10:18, 1Co.9:4, 5 11:22. __5. Interrogative, expecting an affirmative answer (Lat. nonne): Mat.6:26, Mrk.4:21, Luk.11:40, Jhn.4:35, Rom.9:21, al. (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기

원어

ἐγείρεται.¶

한글 발음: 에게이레타이

egeiretai

원어 사전 정의 보기 G1453 원어 검색에서 보기 G1453
Lemma
ἐγείρω
Strong
G1453
형태소
V-PPI-3S
품사
동사
일으키다/일어나다
번역 정렬
-

정의

동사 '일으키다, 깨우다, (죽은 자를) 살리다'.

원문 정의 보기

ἐγείρω, [in LXX for קוּם, etc. ;] trans. (imperat. ἔγειρε used intransitively, Mat.9:5, Mrk.2:11, al.); __1. to awaken, arouse from sleep: Mrk.4:38, Act.12:7; metaphorically, of spiritual awakening, Rom.13:11 (pass.), Eph.5:14; pass., to be aroused, wake up: Mat.25:7, Mrk.4:27; ἀπὸ τ. ὕπνου, Mat.1:24. __2. Freq. in NT, to raise from the dead: νεκρούς, Jhn.5:21, Act.26:8, 2Co.1:9; ἐκ νεκρῶν, Jhn.12:1, Act.3:15, Rom.8:11, al.; pass., rise from death: Mat.11:5, Luk.7:22, Jhn.2:22, Rom.6:9, al.; ἀπὸ τ. νεκρῶν, Mat.14:2, al. __3. In late Gk., __(a) to raise, from sitting, lying, sickness; mid. and pass., to rise: Mat.9:5, 7 Mrk.1:31 9:27 10:49, al.; redundant, like Heb. קוּם, Mat.2:15 9:19, Rev.11:1 (see Dalman, 23f.); __(b) to raise up, cause to appear: Act.13:22 (cf. Jdg.2:18); τέκνα, Mat.3:9; pass., to appear: Mat.11:11, Mrk.13:22, al. __4. to rouse, stir up; pass., to rise against: Mat.24:7, Mrk.13:8. __5. Of buildings, to raise: τ. ναόν, Jhn.2:19, 20 (cf . Deu.16:22, Sir.49:13); (cf. δι-, ἐξ-, συν-εγείρω, and V. Cremer, 224). (AS)

출처: Abbott-Smith · STEP Bible (CC BY 4.0)

데이터 출처

STEP Bible Data · CC BY 4.0

Original language data from STEP Bible Data.

출처/라이선스 보기
[And they went every man unto his own house:

이 장의 주석

해설, 라벨, 범위 설명, 음성 강의처럼 본문 흐름에 붙은 주석을 모아 봅니다.

공개 주석

선택한 주석 세트에 이 장의 구조 주석이 없습니다.

질문과 답변

이 장을 읽으며 남긴 질문, 코멘트, 작성자 답변입니다.

기본 주석

로그인 후 질문이나 코멘트를 남길 수 있습니다.

아직 등록된 질문이나 코멘트가 없습니다.